WWI Army Individual Pay Record Book Owned by Fred Scott

rhe follo
WQRLDWARII
RULE BOOK
(Army)
Fred Scott
'MENT,
'Til 14, 1917.
Ofiicers Hod ~
States is ap-"
111 find govern-
nnpanies (dis-
~ : : ~ : : : ~ : loaned by
~ ~ : e ~ ; a ~ . Winifred Kelsh
nnection with
fantry insr,l'uctioll and training Vl'eScrinecl by the War De-
rtment.
By ORDER OL' 'rHE SECHBL\RY OF 'VAR-:
OFlfICIAL:
H. P. McCAIN,
H. L. SCOTT,
Major General, Chief at Staff.
Tho ;lrljt,tant Geneml.
1..
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
CHAPTER 1. MILITARY mSCIPLINE COURTESy
Section 1. O::Lth of enlistmellL. ______ ._. ___ . _. _. __ . __ .. .
Section 2. Ob0dience _ . _. _ . _ .. _ ........... __ . _ ... _ .. .
:-::::
Section 5. courtesy _ ..... 0 _
Section U. Saluting ... __ . __ . ____ . _ ... _ .. ___ ..... _ ..
Section 7. Rules g:n crnlng salutillg ... _ .. _ ... _ .... _. _._
Section 8. Courtesies in conversatwn .. _ ................ _
II. ARMS, UNIFORMS, AND EQUIPMENT _ ___ _
Section 1. The rille ................................
Section 2. Care of the rifte ............................
Seetion 3. Cleaning the rifle .. .. ........ 0 _0"" _
Section 4. Uniforms _____ . ____ . 0" _ 0
Section 5. rrhe service kit.. _ .... _. __ . _'" __ . _ ... _"'"
Section 6. The surplus kiL ........................ : ..
Section 7. Assembling iUlu,ntry equipment .. 00
CRA.l'TER III. RATIONS AND YGRAGE ..... 0 _."
Section 1. The ratioIl .... _.' _. __ .............. _ ..... __ .
Section 2. Individual cooking ............ ' ........... .
SectioIl 3. The forage ration ... _ ................ __ .0 ,
CHAPTER IV. AND OARE OF THE FEET. __
CHAPTER V. EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY Dml,L REGULATlONS,
1911. ........... " .................................. .
Section 1. Definitions .... ' ......... __ ..... __ ...... 0
Section 2, lntroduction. _ ..... _ ..... _ ... ____ ... _ ..... .
Section 3. Orden';J eommands, and signals .... _ ........ _
Section 4. School of the solclier. ...................... .
Section 5. Sdwol OT the squad ............ _ ........ _ ... .
Section 6. School oi the company ...................... .
Section 7. Company inspection. ____ ._ ........... _., ... .
5
Page.
9
9
\I
10 ."
11 ..
12
13
15
18
19
19
20
21
26
28
29
30
35
35
36
40
42
48
48
50
56
63
74
88
III

. 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
CHAPTER V. EXTRACTS FROM INl"ANTRY Dnn;r.;REGULATIONS,
Page.
Section 8. Manual of tent 114
Section 9. of the bayonet ........ .-.............. 123
CHAPTER VI. FIELD SERVICE ........ ....................... 148
Section 1. Principles of Infantry training ............... 148
Section 2. Combat.................................... 149
Section 3. Patrolling................................... 156
Section 4. Advance guards. ........................... 166
Section 5. Rear guards................................ 168
Section 6. Flank guards................................ 169
Section 7. Outposts.. ................... .......... .... 169
Section 8. R;fle trenches............................... 175
CHAPTER VII. 1\-fARCHING AN f) CAMPING ] 79
Section 1. Breaking camp and preparation for a march.. 179
Section 2. Marching.................................. 181
Section 3. Making camp............................... 183
Section 4. Camp senice and duties....... .... ......... 184
CHAPTER VIII. TARGET PRACTICE.................. ........ 189
Section 1. Preliminary training in marksmanship. ...... 189
Scction 2. Sight adjnstment............. . .............. 189
Section 3. Table of sight corrections. . ................ 191
Section 4. Aiming.................................... 191
Section 5. Battle sight. ............................... 192
6. squeeze............................. 193
Section 7. F mng pOSltions...... .. . .. .. ... .. . ... .. . . 194
Section 8. Calling the shot. .............. ............. 196
Section 9. Coordination. ................... ........... 196
Section 10. Advice to riflemen.......................... lQ7
Section 11. The course in sman-arms firing ....... __ . _. ] 99
Section 12. Targets .................. -. . .. ............. 199
Section 13. Pistol and revolver practice ... _........... 202
CHAPTER IX. EXTRACTS FROM MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUARD
DUTY, 1914 ... _ .. _ . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. .. . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. 210
Section 1. Introduction .......... _.................... 210
Section 2. Classification of interior guards. ............ 211
Section 3. Details and rosters............ ............... 211
Section 4. Commanqer of the guard........ .. .. .. .. .. .. . 214
Section 5. Sergeant of the guard. . ................ ..... 219
Section 6. Corporal of the guard. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. 222
TAlILE OF CONTENTS.
HAPTER IX. EXTRACTS FROM MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUARD
DUTY, 1914-- Continued.
Section 7. of the guar(L _________ . _._. __ ..... __ ..
Section 8. Orderlies and color sentinels ... _ _ ...... ___ """_
Section 9. Privates of the guard ........
Section 10. Ordors for sentinels ................... __ ........ ..
Section 11. Countersigns and paroles ........... ___ ...... _ ...... ..
Section 12. Guard patrols ............................ .
Section ]3. \Vatdullcn . ___ ... ___ ........................ .
Section 14. Compliments from guards .................. .
Section 15. Prisoners .. _ .. _,0 _ ... 0.0 _._ _ ______ _
Sedion 16. Guarding prisoners. _0 ____ _____ _ ...... _ ... ..
Section 17. Flags ................................... ..
Section] 8. Reveille and retreat gun .. _ .... __ ... _ ... __ .... _
Section 1fJ. Guard mounting. _____________ . _____ ._ .... _.
Section 20. Formal guard mounting for Infantry .. _ ...
Section 21. Informal guard mounting for Infantry ...
Section 22. R.elieving the old guard .......... _ ............ .
)HAPTER X. iJAP READING AND SKETCIIING ...................... .
Section 1. Military map reading ....................... .
Section 2. Sketching ..... _ .. _ ................................. .
jnAP'l'ER XI. MESSAGE ............. _._ ................ _ ..... .
)H.I\..P'l'ER XII. SIGNALS AKD CODES _ ....................... _ .... .
JHAPTER XIII. Frm:!T-AID RULES _ ........... .... .
JHAPTER XIV. LAWS AND RECULATIONS _
Sectioll J. General pro-,,:islonfL ....... _ _._ .. __ . _.
Section 2. 'rhe Army of the United States ............. .
Section 3. Rank and precedence of officers and !lOn
commissioned offi(;er.-; ................................. .
Section 4. Insignia of officers and noncommissioned
officers. _ .......... _ ............. _ .. _ . __ . _ ... _ ...... .
Section 5. Extracts from tho Articles of War ........... .
JHAY1'RH. XV. ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCAllUI,ARY . _" ... _ ........ .
'\.PPENDIX. FORM FOR LAS!;, ,\YlLL AND TESTAMENT ............... ..
Page.
227
227
228
229
237
239
239
239
241
244
248
249
250
250
255
255
258
258
271
274
275
286
297
297
298
298
299
300
317
335
MANUAL
Ji'OR
[ONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS AND PRIVATES OF INFANTRY
011' TR'Ii
ARMY OF THE UNITED STATES.
CHAPTER I.
MILITARY DISCI:PLINE AND COURTESY.
lection 1. Oath of enlistment.
Every soldIer on enlisting in the Army takes upon himself
,he followIng obligation:
"I, ---, do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will hear
rUe faith and allegiance to the United States of America; that
will serve them honestly and faithfully against all their ene-
nies whomsoever; /lnd that I will obey the orders of the
of the United States, and the orders of the officers
IPPointed over me according to the Rules and Articles of War."
[l09th Article of War.)
lIection 2. Obedience.
The very first paragraph In the Army Regulations reads:
"All persons in the military service are required to obey
,trlotly and to execute promptly the lawful orders of their
mperiors."
Obedience is the first and last duty of a soldier. It is the
Eoundation upon which all military efficiency is built. WithQut
it an army becomes a mob, while with it a mob ceases to be a
!llob and becomes possessed of much of the power of an organ-
ized force. It is a quality that is demanded of every person in
9
10 MILITARY DISCIPLINE AND COURTESY.
the Army, from the highest to the lowest. Each enlisted ma
binds himself, hy his enlistment oath, to obedience. EJac
officer. in accepting his commission, must take upon himself til
same solemn
Obey strictly and execute promptly the lawfnl orders of you
superiors. It is enough to know that the person giving UJ
order, \vhel her he be an officer, n nO'ncommissioned officer,
prirate acting as such, is your' la\-vful superior. You may ne
like him, you may not him, but :rou must respect hi
position and authority, and reflect honor and credit upon yoUl
self and your profession by yielding to all superiors that COIl
plete anil unhesitating obedience which is the pleasure as we
as the duty of every trne soillier.
Orders must be strictly carried out. It is not sufficient t
comply with only that part which suits you or which involve
no ,york or danger or hardship, :Nor is it proper or permlssiblf
when you nrc ordered to flo a thing in IT ceria in way or t
accomplish a work in a definitely prescribed manner, for yo'
to obtain the same results by other methods.
Obedience must be prompt and unquestioning. When an:
soldier (and this word includes officers as well as enllsted men
receives an order, it is not for him to consider whether th
order is 11 good one or not, whether it ,vQulli have been better hat
such an order never been given, or whether the duty might b
better performecl by some one else, or at some other time, a
in some other lnanner. IIis duty is, first, to understao(l jus
,,,hat the order requires, and, second, to proceed at once to carr:
out the order to the best of his ability.
,j Officers and men of all ranks and grades are given a certai1
independence in the execution of the tasks to which they ar.
assigned and are expected to show initiative in meeting t11.
different sitnations as they arise. Every lndlvicluaI, from tllj
highest commander to the lowest private, must always remem
bel' that inaction and neglect of opportunities will warrant mol"
seVere censure than an error in the choice of the menns/
(Preface, Field Service Regulations.)
Section 3. Loyalty.
But even with implicit obedience you may yet fail to meaSUrf
up to thnt high standard of duty which is at once the pride nni
DISCIPLINE. 11
glory of every true soldier. Not until you carry out the desires
aud wishes of your superiors in a hearty, williug, and cheerful
manner are you meeting an the requirements of your profession.
For an order is but the '''ill of :your superior, however it may
be expressed. Loyalty means that you arc for your organization
and its officers and noncommissioned officers-not against them;
that you always extend your most earnest and hearty support
to those in authority. No soldier is a loyal soldier who is a
knocker or a grumbler or a shirker. Just one man of this class
in -a company. breeds discontent and diseatisfaction among many
otllers. You should, tllerefore, not only guard against doing
such things yourself but should discourage such actions among
any of your comrades.
Section 4. Discipline.
"1. All persons in the military service are required to obey
strictly and to execute promptly the lawful orders of their
superiors.
"2. Military authority will be exercised with firmness, kind-
ness, and justice. Punishments must conform to law and fol-
low offenses as promptly as circumstances will permit.
"3. Superiors are for hidden to injure those under their
thority by tyrannical or capricious conduct or by abusive lan-
guage. While maintaining discipline and the thomugh and
prompt performance of military duty, all officers, in dealing
with enlisted men, will bear in mind the absolute necessity of
so treating them as to preserve their self-respect. Offieers will
keep in as close touch as possible with the men under their
command and will strive to build up such relations of confidence
and sympathy as will insme the free approach of tbeir men to
them for counsel and assistance. This relationship may be
gained and maintained without relaxation of the bonds of
discipline and with great benefit to the 8ervice as n whole.
"4. Courtesy among military men is indispensable to dis-
cipline; respect to superiors will not be confined to obedience
on duty, but will be extended on aU occasions.
"5. or discussions among military men convey-
ing praise or censure, or any mark of approbation, to,vard
others in the military service, and all publications relating to
private or personal transactions between officers are prohibited.
MILITARY DISCIPLINE AND COURTESY.
Efforts: to influence legislation affecting the Army or to procure
personal favor or consideration neyer made except
through regular military c11[111ne1s; the adoption of nny other
method by any officer 01' man \yjJ/ be noted in the miJi.
tary recon] of those concern('(l," (Army HCf/ulrzfion8.)
"The diseiplill(' which mnkes tho of a ftec country
relinble i!1 battle is not j-o he .2:;lilW(l by lwn-:ll or tyrannical
trent:i.lent. On tlw c()llti'ury, such treatment is far more likely
to destroy than to mab' nn fumy. It is possihIe to impart
struction and give in :-:uch IWHlller and in such tone
of voice as to inspire in the soldier no feeling but an intense
sire to obey, while the opposite manner nnd tone of voice can
not fuil to excite strong l'PSentlllPllt desire to disobey_
The 1110ae 01' OtllCl' of dealing '\vith subol'uinntes springs
frOll] n correspolHliug spoirit in the breast of the commander.
He who feels the resDect "\yhirh is to oj ('an not fail to
inspire in them regard for himself, while he viho feels, and
hence toward otlters
j
especially his in-
feriors, can not fail to inspire hatred against himself."
a,.e" vf Mnj. Gen. John AI. Schofield to the United States Corps
at Cadets. Ll11g. 11. 181.9.)
'Vhen, by long-continued drill and subordination, you have
learned your duties, and obedience becomes second nature,
you have acquired diScipline. It can not be acquired in a
dny nora month. It is a growth. It is the habit of obedi-
ence. '1'0 te[lch this habit of obedience is the main object of
the close-on1er flriIJ, find, if good results arc to be expected, the
greatest attention bp paid to even thL', smallest details.
The company Or squad must he formed at the pre-
scribed time-not a minute or even a second late. All must
,veal' the exUct uniform pre8crlbed uncI in the exact manner
prescribed. 'Vhell at attention there must be no gazing about,
no raising of hands, no chmving or spitting in ranks. The
manual of urms and all movements be executed
Intely as prescribed. A drill of this kind teaches discipline.
A careless, s,loppy drill breecls clisobedience and insubordi-
natioll. In other ,vords, discipline simpl,)' means e:ffi.ciency.
Section 5. Military courtesy.
In all walks of life men who are gentlemanly and of good
breeding are always respectful allcl courteous to those about
SALUTING.
1s
~ h e m It helps to make life move along more smootbly. "In
,ivil life this courtesy is shown by the custom of tipping the
iat to 1:1dies, shakIng hands with friends, and greeting pel'-
;ons with u. nod or n friendly" Guod morning," etC'.
In the Army courtesy is just as necessary, and for the same
reasons. It helps to keep the great machine movIng withont
friction .
.. Courtesy among military men is indispensable to discipline;
respect to superiors will not be confined to obedience on duty.
but will be extendecl on all occasions." (Par. 4, Army Regula"
tion8, 1913.)
One method of extending this courtesy Is by saluting. When
In ranks the question of what a private sbould do is Simple-
he obeys any command that is given. It is \vhen out of ranks
that a private must know holY and when to salute.
Section 6. Saluting.
In the old days the f"ee men of Europe were all allowed to
carry weapons, and when they met each would hold up his
rigbt hanrl to show that he had no weapon in it an(1 that they
met as friends. 8lavps ur serfs, however, we Fe not allowed to
carry weapons, and slunk past the free men without making
any sign. In thls way tile salute came to be the symbol or sign
by which soldiers (free men) might recognize each other. The
lower classes began to imitate tbe soldiers In this respect,
although in a clumsy, apologetic way, and thence crept into civil
life the custom of raising the hand or nodrling as! Olle passed an
Rcqnaintance. The soldiers, however, kept their individual
salute, and purposely made it intricate and cllfficult to -learn in
order that it coulcl be acquirerl only by the constant training all
real solrliers received" To this clay armies have preserved their
salute, and when correctly done it is at once recognjzed and
never mistaken for that of the civilian. All soldiers should he
careful to execute the salute exactly as prescribed. The c!,ilian
or the imitation soldier \vho tries to imitate the military salute,
invariably makes some mistake whieh shows that he is not a
real soldier; he gives it in an apologetic manner, he fails to
stand or march at attention, his coat is unbuttoned or hat on
awry, or he fails to look the person saluted in the eye. There
is a wide difference in the method of rendering and meaning
between the civilian salute as used by, friends in passing, or by
14 MILITARY DISCIPLINE AND COURTESY.
servants to their employers, and the MILITARY SALUTE, th,
symbol ane! sign of the military profession.
To salute with the hand, first a:-:;sum8 the posItion of a soldie'
or march at attention. Look the officer yon are to sal uti
strnigllt in the eye. Then, \vhen the proper distance separate:
you, raise the right hand smartly till the tip of the forefinge
touches the lower part of the headdress or forehead above thl
right eye, thumb and fillgers cxten(ted and joined, palm to tIll
left, fOl'eurro inclineil at nbout 45, hand and wrist strnight
Continue, to look the officer you are saluting straight in tIll
eye and keep your haIlll in the position of salute until tIll
officer acknowledges the saInte or until he has passed. Ther
drop the hand smartly to the side. The salute is given ,vltll Uu
right lIanG only. .
To salute with the rifle, bring the rifle to right shoulder arm,
if not already there. Carry the left hand smartly to the smal
of the stock, forearm hori7,ontaL palm of the hand down, thuml
and fingers extended and joined, forefinger touching the em::
of the cocking piece. Look the officer salnted In the eye
When the officer has acknowleclgeel the salute or has' passed
drop the left hand smartly to 111e side antI tUrn the head am:
eyes to the front. The rifle s"Jute may also be executed fron
the order or trail. See paragraph 94, Infantry Drill Regula
tions, and paragraph 111. Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916.
To salute with the saber, bring the saber to order saber if nol
already there, raise anel carry the saber to the front, base oj
the hilt as high as the chin awl 6 inches in front of the neck,
edge to the left, point 6 inches farther to the front than th,
hilt, thumb extendeel on the left of the grip, all fingers
the grip. Look the offirer saluted in the eye. \\chen the ofticeI
has ficknO\vledged the salute or has passed, lower the saber,
point in prolongation of the right foot and near the ground I
edge to the left, hand by the side, thumb on left of grip, arm
extended, and return to the order saber. If mounted, the band
is held behind the thigh, point a little to the right and front of
the stirrup.
(For Cavalry.) To salute with the saber, bring the saber tc
carry saber if not already there, carry the saber to the front
wit h firm half extended until the thumb is about 6 inches in
front of the chin, the blade vertical, gnard to the left, all four
RULES GOVERNING SALUTING.
15
fingers grasping the grip, the thumb extending along the back
in the groove. the fingers pressing the back of the grip against
the heel of the hand. Look the officer saluted in the eye. When
the officer has acknowledged the salute or has passed, bring the
saber down with the blade against the hollow of the right shonl-
del', guarrl to the front, right hand at the hip, tlJe third and
fourth finger on the back of the grip and the elbow back.
The pistol is not carried in the hand but in the holster,
therefore when armed with the pistol salute with tile hand.
Always stand or march at attention before and dui'ing the
saInte. The hat should be on .tneight, coat completely but-
toned up, and hands out of the pockets.
Section 7. Rules governing saluting.
"759. (1) Salutes shall be exchanged between olllcers and
enlisted lnen not in a military formation, nor at drill, work,
games, or mess, on every occasion of their meeting, passing near
or being addressed, the ollleer junior in rank or the enllsted
man saluting first.
(2) When an ollleer enters a room where there are several
enlisted men the word "attention" is given by some one who
perceives him, when: all rise, uncover, and remain standing at
attention until the olllcer leaves tile room or directs otherwise.
Enlisted men at meals stop eating and remain seated at
attention.
(3) An enlisted man, If seated, rises on the approach of' an
officer, faces toward him, stands at attention, and salutes.
Standing, he faces an officer for the same purpose. If the
parties remain in the same place or on the same ground, such
compliments heed not be repeated. Soldiers actually at work
do not cease ,,",ork to salute an offieer unless addressed by him.
( 4) Before addressing an olllcer an enlisted man makes the
prescribed salute with the weapon '\vith '\vhich he is t\rmed, or,
if unarmed, with the right hand. He also makes the same
sainte after receiving a reply.
(5) In uniform, covered or uncovered, but not in formntion,
olllcers and enlisted men salute military persons as follows:
IVith arms in hand, the salute prescribed for that arm (senti-
nels on interior guard duty excepted) ; without arms, the right-
hand sainte.
(6) In civilian dress. covered or uncovered, officers and en-
listed men salute milita.ry, persons with the right-band salute.
(7) Officers [.nd enlisted men will render the prescribed
salutes in a military manner, the officer junior in rank or the
enlisted men saluting' first. \Vh8n several officers in company
are saluted all entitled to the salute shall return it.
(8) Except in the field under campaign or si111ulatcd cam-
paign condHio1l8, a mounted officGr (or soldier) clismonnts before
addressing a superior officer not
(9) A man in formation shall not salute when directly ad-
dressP{1, but. Rua]] come to nttpntion it' nt I'est or at ease.
(10) Saluting distance is that \vithin \vhich recognition is
easy. In general, it does not exceed 30 paces.
(11) "Vhen an officer entitled to the salute passes in rear of
a body of troops, it is brought to attention \vhile he is OPPOSite
the post of tIle commander.
(12) III JJUhlk conveyances) such us raihvay trains and
street cars
1
and in public places, such as thenters, honors and
personal salutes may be omitted when palpably inappropriate
or apt to uisturb annoy civilians present.
(13) Soldiers fit all times amI ill all situations pay the same
compliments to officers of the Army, XavY1 )-Iarine Corps, and
Volunteers, and to officers of the )[ational Guard as to officers
of their mvn regiment, corps, or arm of service.
(14) Sentinels on post doing interior guard duty conform to
the foregoing principles, but salute by presenting arms when
9rmed with tJlf'" rifle. Thpy "\vll! not saillte jf it interferes with
the proper performance of their duties. Troops under .arms
salute 111'f.l'scl'ibed in drill regl1lrrtions.
760. (1) Commander's of m other commands
will salute officers of grades higher than the Derson
lng the unit, by first bringing the- unit to attention and then
saluting as require(l hy ::mlJpill'agl"nph ([i). 759.
If the person snluted is of' u junior or equal grnde, tIle unit
need not he at attention in the of salutes.
(2) If h'\o detachments or otl1er COlllIll<1nrls meet, their com
mandel'S will exchange salutes, both being at
attentioIl.
761. and honors. as a rule. are not paid by troops
actually engaged in drill, on the mm:cll, or in the field under
RULES' GOVERNING SALUTING.
17
campaign or simulated campaign conditions. Troops on the
service of security pay no compliments whatever .
. 762. If the command is in line at a halt (not in the field) find
armed with riffe, or with sabers drawn, it s}1al1 be brought to
present arms or present sabers heforc its commander salutes in the
following cascs: 'Vhcn the Nlltionul Anthem is played, or when
to the color or to the standard is S01..ll1dNI (luring ceremonies, or
,,,hen a person is snlutell who is its lrmnediate 01" higher com
munder or 0.. general officer, or ,"hen the national 01' regimental
color is saluted.
763. At an(l other ceremonies, Ululer arms, the command
shall render the preseribell salute and shall remain in the position
of. salute while the National Anthem is being played; also at re-
treat and durin.g ceremonies when to the color is if no
band is present. If Hot under artns, the organizations shall be
brought to attention at the first note of the National Anthem, to
the color or to the standard, and the salute rendere.d by the
officer or noncommissioned officer in command as prescribed in
regulations, as mnended herein.
764. W-henever the National Anthem is played ,at any place
when persons belonging to the military service are present, all
officers and enlisted men not in formation sha.ll stand at
tion facing toward the mnsic (except at retreat, when tbeY
shall face toward the liag). If in uniform, covered(or .uncov-
ered, or in civilian clothes, uncovered) they shall salute at the
first note of the anthem, retaining the. jJosition of salute until
the last note of the n.nthom. If not in uniform and covered,
they shall uncover a.t the first note of the antlu.:lll, holding the
heatld ["ess opposite the left shonlder and so remain nnti! its
close, except that in inclement weather the Ileaddress may be
slightly raised.
'I'he same rules apply when to the color or to the standard is
sounded as when the National Anthem is played.
When played by au Army band, the National Anthem shall
be played through without repetition of any part not reqnired
to be repeated to make it complete.
The same marks of respect prescribed for observance during.
the playin!,: of the National Anthem of the shall
be shown toward the national anthem of any othe!' couutry
when played npon official occasions.
i
18
765. Officers and enlisted men passing the uncssed color
will render honors as follov.'s: If in uniform, t.hey wHl salute as
required by subparagraph (5), paragraph 759; if in civilian
dress and covered, they 'will uncoYE'l", holding the headdress op-
posite the left shoulder with thE:, right hand; if uneovpred, they
will salute with the right-hand salute." (lnta.ntry Drill Regu-
lations, 1911.)
The llutional flag belonging to llisrnounted organizations is
culled a color; to mounted organizations, a stanc1al'd. An un
cased color is one that is nOt in its ,vaterproof I:OVCI'.
Privates do not salute lloncomrnissioned ufficerR. Prisoners
are not pennitted to salute; they merely come to attention if
not actual1y at work. The playing of the National Anthem as
a part of a medley is prohibited in the military service.
Section S. Courtesies in conversation.
In-'speal'ing to "n officer, always stand at attention and use
the ,yord " Sir.!' FJxamples:
" Sit', Private Brown, COlnpan.y B, reports as orderly."
H Sir, tJle first sergeant directed me to report to the captain."
(Question by an offieer:) "To \yhat company do you belong'! "
(Answer:) "Company H, sir.ll
(Question by an officer:) .. Has first call for drill sounded?"
(Answer:) ")Io, sir;" or "Yes, sir; it sounded ahout five
minutes ago."
(Question. by an officer:) "Can you tell me, please, where
1\1n.101' Smith's tent js'J"
(Ans\ver :) "Y sir; rl1 take you to H."
Use the third person in speaking to an officer. Examples
.. Does the Lieutenant wish," etc.
" Did the Captain send fot' me? n
In delivering a message from one officer to another, always
use the form similar to the follo\ving: "Lieutenant A presents
his compliments to Captain B and states," etc. form is
not \vhen the .... person sending or receiving the message Is
an enhsted mall. t')
In all official conversation refer to other soldiers by their
titles, thus: Sergeant E, Private C.
Cllr-OFF {7PIN/).' cur-OFF. EJECTt7H PFH.
\
03512-17. (To tace page 18.)
SUD CAP SCREW.,
8LlOEAIIlJ SifCAr WlNOACE
CHAPTER II.
ARMS, UNIFORMS, AND EQUIPMENT.
Section 1. The rifle.
The rille now uSf"l by tlw of the unitetJ States is the
United States magazine rifle, l;;:)(kl of eaJ U)er
It is 43.212 inches long a11(1 wei;;hs 8.69 p;)llJ}ds.
The baYDnet \Yeigi1ts 1 pmUl{\ :..:m1 t.\H:-', i.\\;ld' lG inches long.
The rifle is sighted for l1J1 1.0 2,850 yards.
The ma::s:imum range, \yhcn elc"\'.ltcd at an nng10 of 45 degrees.
is 4,891 yards (389 yards less than :.1 miles).
The smooth bore of the rifi(-' is 0.30 inch ill diameter. It is
then rillecl 0.004 inch deep, making the clinmeler from the
bottom of one groove to the bottom of the opposite groove 0.308
inch. The rifling makes one complete tUl'Il in each 10 inches
of the barrel.
The accompanying plate SllOWS the namCS of tbe principal
parts of the rifle.
'fhe only parts of a rifte tlU1t an enlisted lllan is permitted to
take apart are the bolt mechanism and the magazine meehanislll.
Learn hQW to do this from yom s'luad leader, for you must
kno,v how in order to keep your rifle clean. Never remove the
hand guard or the trigger guard, nor take the sights apart un-
less yon have special permission from a commissioned officer.
The cartl'idge .used for the rille is calleel the .30-cali her model
1906 cartridge. There are four types of cai'trillges.
The ball cartridge consists of the case or shell, the
primer, the charge of smokeless powder, nnt1 the bullet. The
bnllet has a sharp point, is composed of a lea<l core and n jacl<et
of cupro nickel, and weighs 150 grains. The hullet of this
cartridge, when fired from the rifle, stUl'ts with an initial
velocity at the muzzle of 2,700 feet per secon(1.
The blank cartridge contains a paper cup instearl of a hullet.
It is dangerous up to 100 feet. Firing "itll blan!, cartridges at
a represented enemy at ranges less than 100 yards is prohibited.
The guard cartridge has a smaller charge of powder than the
ball cartridge, and five cannelures encircle the bocly of the shell
at about the mirldle to distinguish it from the ball cartridge. It
is intended for use on guard or in riot dnty, andgivGs ,!Ood re-
. 10
20 ARMS, UNIFORMS, AND EQUIPMENT.
suIts up to 200 yards. The runge of 100 yards requires a sight
elevation of 450 yards, and the range of 200 :.yards requires an
elevation of 650 yards.
The dummy cartridge is tin plated and the shell is provided
with six longitudinal corrugations and three circular holes.
The primer contains no percussion f"OlflIlOsition. It is intended
for drill purposes to accustom the soldier to the operation of
loading the rifle.
All cartridges are SP-f'ured fiye in a clip to enable five car-
tridges to be inserted into the magazine at one motion. Slxty
ball cartridges in 12 clips are packed in a cloth bandoleer to
facilitate issue am1 currying. 'Vhen full the weighs
about 3.88 pounds, Bandoleers are packe{J 20 in a box, or 1
1
200
rounds in al]. The full box weighs 99 pounds.
Section 2. Care of thc rille.
EverjoT part of the rifie must be kept free from rust, dust, and
dirt. A dirty 0[" riffe is a sure si.s'1l that the soldier does
not realize the value of llis "\veapon, and that his training is
incomplete. rifle you are armed with is the most ac-
curate in the world. If it gets dirty or rusty it will deteriorate
in its accuracy an(l working efficiency, and no subsequent care
will restore it to its original condition. The most important
part of the rifte to keep clean is the bore. If, after firing, the
bore is left dirty over night, it will be badly rusted in the
morning, therefore YOilr rifle must be cleaned not later than
the evening of the day on which it was The fouling of
the blanl\: cal'tl'i(lge is as dangerous to the bore as the fouling
of tlle ball cartridge.
"ever attempt to polish any part that is hlued. If rust ap
pears, remove lJy rubbing with oil. Neyer use emery paper,
pomade, or any preparation that cuts or scratches, to dean any
part of the rifle.
To beautify and preserve the stock rub with raw linseed oil.
The use of any other preparation on the stock is strictly forbidden.
Always handle your rifle vdth care. Don't throw it around
as though it were a club. Don't stand it up against anything
80 that it rests against the front sight. Don't leave a stopper
or a rag in the bore; it will caUSe rust to form at that pOint.
It may also cause the gun barrel to bUrst if a shot is fired
Defore removing it.
CLEANING THE RIFLE.
21
Guard the sights nnd muzzle carefully from finy blow that
might injure them. The front sight covel' should always be on
the rifle except when rifle jg being 11''-'8d. This 1s especially
8ary to protect the front sight '''hile rit1e is being carried in
scabbar!l uy a mounted mun.
In coming to the" onler anns," lower the piece gently to the
grollm1.
\VlwII there is u cartridge in the chnmber tlle pieC'c is ;tl\vuys
carried locked. Til this po,;;,;itiOll the saf()t3' lock slHHlld be
kept tUl'nc{l fully to the right, SilWP if it he tUl'ne,l to [he left
nearly to the "rendy" position and the trigger be pulled, tho
ritie ,vill he (llsC'lwl'ged when the safety locI\: is turned to the
" rttady" pOSition at any time la tor on.
Cartridges can not be loaded from the magazine unless the
bolt is llrawn fully 'to the rear. Wilen tile bolt is closed, or
only partly open, the may be tUl'lw{l 11p or down as
desireci, but if the bolt is drawn fully to the rear, the magazine
can not: be cut off unless the top cnrtrWge or the follower be
pressed do\vn slightly <lnd the bolt u{-!. pushed fCI1'\yard so that
the cut-off may be turned" off,"
In the ease of fl misfire, don't open the bolt immediately, as it
may be a hanglire. Misfires are often due to the fact that the
bolt handle \vas not fully pressed do\vn, Sometimes in pulling
the trigger the solclier raises the bolt handle "'\vithout knowing it,
Unless othenvi:-;e ordered, arms will be unloadecl before being
tal.::en to quarters or tents, or :IS soon as thp men llsing them
are relieved from duty.
Keep the working parts oiled.
In eyery company there shou1l1 at least one copy of the
1\1annlil of the Ordnance Departrnent entit1ed "' Description and
for the l\Innugement of the U, 8. l\Ingazine Hifie." This
munual gives the nflme and a cut of every VH1t of the l'ifle,;ex-
plains its use, sho\vs how to take the rifle apart and care for
the same, and nlso gives m.llch other valuablo and interesting
information.
Section 3. Cleaning the rille.
" Cleaning the rille.- (a.) The proper care of the hore.
conscientious, careful work, but it pays well in the ;attainment
of reducecl labor of cleaning, prolonged accnraY)ife of the
barrel, and better result;:.;; in target practice. Briefly stated,
r
22
the care of the bore consists in removing the fouling,
from firing, to obtajn a chemically clean and ill continE
this surface with a film of oil to prevent rusting. '-"he fouling
whieh results from firing is of hvo kinrls-one, the IJI'iJducts 0:1
combustion of the po\vc1er; the other, cl1pro-nickel scraped oft
(under the abracling action of irregularities or grit in the bore)
Pmvder fouling, because of its acid reaction. is highly corrosive;
that is, it will induce rust and must he removed. 1\letul fouling
of itself is inactive, hut may cover po\vder fouling and prevent
the action 0" cleaning agents until removed, and ,vhen accumu-
luted in noticeable quantities it reduces the accuracy of the rifle.
(b) Powder fouling may be readily removed by scrubbing
,vith hot soda solution, but this solution has Il{l effect on the
metal fouling of cupro-nickel. It is necessary, therefore: to
tremove all metal fouling before assurance can be had that all
powder fouling h:1 S been removed and that the bore may be
safely oiled. after firing a barrel in good condition
the metal fouling is so slight as to be hardly perceptible. It is
merely a smem' of jnfinitesimal thickness, easily removed by
solvents of However, clue to pitting, the presence
of dust, other abrasives, or to acculnulatioll, metal fouling may
occur in dearly fialres or patches of much greater
ness, much more difficult to remove.
(0) In cleaning the bore alter firing it is well -to proceed as
follows: Swab out the bore with soda solntion (subparagraph
j) to remove powdp-l' fouling. A convenient method is to insert
the muzzle of the rifle into the cun containing the soda solution
!lllll, with the cleaning rod inserted from the breech, pump the
barrel full " few times. ltemove and dry with a couple of
patches. Examine the borp. to see that there are in evidence no
patches of metal fouling which, if presen1", can be readily de-
tected by the naked eye, then swab out with the swabbing solu-
tion-a dilute metal-fonling solution (subpluagraph j). The
amount of Stvubbing required ,vith tIre s\va/)bing solution ('an be
determined only by experience, assisted by the color of the
patclles. S,vabbing should be t'olltinued, ho\vever, us long as the
wiping patch is discolored by a bluish-grep.ll st.ain. Normally a
couple of minutes' worlr is sufiic1ent. Dry thoroughly and oi1.
(d) The proper method of oiling a barrel is as follows: ,Vipe
the cleaning rod dry; select a clean patch and thoroughly sat-
CLEANING THE RIFLE.
urate it witl] sperm 011 or warmed cosmic, being sure that the
eosmic has penetrated the patch; scrub the bore with the patch.
finally drawing the patch smoothly from tbe muzzle to tbe
breech. allowiug the cleaning rod to turn with the rifling. The
hore will be found now to be smooth 2nd bright so that any sub-
sequent rust Hnd sw(>nting can be easily lletectell by inspection.
(e) If palehes of metal fouling are seen upon visual 'inspection
of the bore the standm'u metal o u t i n ~ ",olutl{)Tl prepared as
11ereinafter prescribed nlust be us('{J. After scrubbing out \vith
the soda solution. plug the bore .from the breech with a cork
at the front end of the chamber or \vhere the l'ining begii-Is. Slip
a 2-inch section of rubber hose over the muzzle down to the
sight and fill with the standard solution to at least one-half inch
above the muzzle of the barrel. Let it stand for 30 minutes.
pOllr out the standard solution, remove hose and breech plug,
and swah out thoroughly with soda solution to neutralize and
remove all trace of ammonia ana powder fouling. "Tipe the
barrel clean, dry. amI oil. With few exceptions. one application
is sufficient, but if aU fouling is not removt;'(l, as determined
by careful visual inspection of the bore antI of the wjping
patches, repeat as described above.
(1) After properly cleaning with either the swabbing solution
or the standard solution, as has just been clescrihed, the bore
should he clean and safe to oil and put away, but as a measure
of safety a patch sliou]d nhva;vs lie run tbrough the bore on the
next day and the bore and 'viping putch examined to insure that
cleaning has been properly accomplished. 'l'he bore should then
be Oiled, as descritleu above.
(IJ) If the swabbing solution or the standard llletni-fouling
solution Is not available, the barrel should be scrubbed, as
already descrilwd, with the- soda solution, dl"ied, und oiled with
a light oil. At the end of 24 hOlll'S it should again be cleaned.
when it wlll usually be found to have" sweated"; that is. rust
having formed under the smear of metal fouling where powder
fouling was present, the surfaee is puffe<1 up. Usually a second
cleaning is sufflclent. but to insure safety it 8houl<1 be again
examined at the end of a few days, before final Oiling. The
swabbing solution shou1d ahvays he used. if availab1e. for it
must be remembered that each puff when the bore "sweats" is
an inelpient rust pit.
1
r
ARMS, UNIFORMS, AND EQUIl'MENT.
(h) A clean dry snrface having been obtained, to prevent
rust it is necessary to coat every portion of this surface with a
film of neutral oil. If the protection required is but temporary
and the arm is to be cleaned or fired in a few days, sperm oil
may be used, This is easily applied and easily removed, but has
not sufficient body to hold its surface for more than a few days.
If rifles are to be prepared for storage or shipment, a heavier
oil, such as cosmic, must be used.
(i) In preparing arms for storage or shipment they should be
cleaned with particular care, using the metal-fouling solution
as described above. Care should be taken, insured by carefUl
Inspection on succeeding day or days, that the cleaning Is prop-
erly done and all traces of ammonia solution removed. The bore
is then ready to be coated with cosmic. At ordinary tempera-
tures cosmic is not fluid. In order, therefore, to insure that
every part of the surface is coated with a film ot 'oil the cosmic
should be warmed. Apply the cosmic first with a brush; then,
with the breech plugged, fill tbe barrel to the muzzle, pour out
the surplus, remove the breechblock, and allow to drain. It
is believed that more rifles are ruined by improper preparation
for storage than from any other cause. If the bore is not clean
when oiled-that is, if powder fouling is present or rnst has
started-a half inch of cosmic on the outside will not stop ita
action, and the barrel will be ruined. Remember that the sur
face must be perfectly cleaned before the heavy oil is applied.
If the instructions as given above are carefully followed, arms
may be stored for years without harm.
(j) Preparation of solutions: '
Soda soluti01'.-This should bo a saturated solution of sal
soda (bicarbonate or soda). A strength of at least 20 per cent
is necessary. The spoon referred to in the following directions
is the model 1910 spoon issued in the mess outfit.
Sal soda, onefourth pound, or four (4) heaping spoonfuls,
Water, 1 pint or cup, model of 1910, to upper rivets.
The sal soda will dissolve more readily in hot water.
Swabbing 8olution.-Ammonium persulphate, 60 grains, one-
half spoonful smoothed ofr.
Ammonia, 28 per cent, 6 ounces, or three-eighths of a pint, or
12 spoonfuls.
\Vater, 4 ounces, or one-fourth pint, or S sliooufuls,
CLEANING THE RIFLE.
Dissolve the ammonium persulphate in the water and add the
ammonia. Keep in tiglltly corked bottle; pour out only what
is necessary at the time, and }{eep the bottle corked.
Standctrcl metal tatlling sol1ition.-Ammouium persulpi1ate, 1
ounce, or 2 medium heaping spoonfuls.
Ammonium carbonate, 200 grains, or 1 heaping spoonful.
Ammoniu, 28 ]Jer cent, I) ounces, or pint, Or 12
spoonfuls.
vVater, 4 ounces, or one-fourth pint, or 8 spoonfuls.
Powder the persulphate and carbonate together, dissolve in
the water and add the ammonia; mix thoroughly and allow to
stand for ono hour before using. It shoulel be kept in a strong
bottle, tightly corked. The solution shoul,] not be used more
than hvice, and used solution slioulcl not be mixed with unused
solution, but should bB bottled separately. solution, wllen
mixed, should be used ,vitllin 30 clays. Care should be exercb;ed
in mixing and using this solution to prevent injury to the rifle.
An experienced noncommissioned officer should mix the solution
and superIntend its use.
Neither of these ammonia solutions have any appreciable
action on steel when not exposcd to the all', but if allowed to
evaporate on steel they attack it rapidly. Care should, there-
fore, be taken that none spllls on the mechanism and that the
barrel is washed out promptly with soda solution. The first
application of soda solution removes thc greater portion of the
powder fouling and permits a more effective and economical
use of the ammonia solution. These ammonIa solutions are
expensi1ie and should be used economically.
(I,) It is a fact recognized by all that a highly polished steel
surfaee rusts much less easily than OIle ,vhich is roughened;
also that a barrel which is pitted fouls much more rapidly than
one which is smooth. Every effort, therefore, ShOUld be made to
prevent the formation of pits, which fire merely enlarged rust
spotH, and w h!clL not only a.ffect the accuracy of the arm but
increase the labor of cleaning.
(I) The chambers of rifles Ilre frequently neglected because
they are not readlly Inspected. Care should be taken to see
that they Itre cleaned as thoroughly as the bore. A roughened
chamber delays greatly the rapidity of fire, and not infrequently
causes shells to stick- .
ARMS, UNIFORMS, AND EQUIPMENT,
(m) A cleaning rack should be provided for every bal'rack.
Rifles shoul,l always be cleaned from the breach, thus avoirling
possible injury to the rifting at the muzzle, v,rhich would affect
the shooting adversely. If tilt! bore for a length of-6 inches at the
muzzle is perfect:, a minor injury near the chamber will have lit-
tle effect on the accuracy of the rille. The rifte should be cleaned
as soon as the firing- for the day is complet.ed. The fouling is
easier to remove then, and if left longer it ,vill corrode the barrel.
(n) The principles as outlined above apply equally well for the
care of the barrel of the automatic pistol. Special attention
shQulll be pnirl to cleaning the chambel' of the pistol, using the
soda solution. It has been found that the chamber pits readily
if it is not carefully cleaned, \vith the result that the operation
of the pistol is made less certain," (Par. 6
1
nwU Arms Firing
Manual, 1913.)
Section 4. Uniforms.
Uniforms and clothing issued to enlist eel men not be
solo, pawned, loaned, given u\vay, lost or damaged through
neglect or etlt'elcssness. AllY soldier \vho vio1ates this rule
may be tried by a military court and punished.
All uniforms and articles of clothing issued to enlisted men,
whether or not charged on tlleir t'1othing a1lowance, remain the
property of the United States and do not become the property
of the soldier either before or after discharge from the serVice.
Under the law a soldier honorably discharged from the Army of
the Unitetl Stutes is authorized to wear his uniform from the
place of his discllarge to his home \yithin three months after
the date of such discharge. To wear the uniform after three
months from the elate of such discharge renders such person
ljable to fine or imprisonment, or both.
The dress uniform (the blue uniform) consists of the dress
cap, dress coat! dress tronsers, and russet-leather f;hoes. The
straight. standing, military, white linen collar, showing no
opening in fl'OIlt, is always \vorn \vith this uniform, with not to
exceed one-half inch shOWing abo'Te the collar of the coat.
Turndown, pi('(.'arlll!,V, or roll collars are not authorized,
"'''hen nndel' r'llIS, Ivhite gloves and the garrison belt (or
russet-leather belt :uld cartridge box) are worn.
The full-dress uniform is the same as the dress ulliform, with
the breast cord added.
UNIFORMS.
27
The service uniform \s either cotton (summer) or woolen
(winter) olive drab.
For duty in tIle field it consists of the service hat, with cord
:;e,ved on, service eo at or SWPi-lt(!l", service breeches, olive-drab
1aoncl shirt, leggings, russet-Ieu1 her shoes) and identifieation
tag. In cold tveathcr oEve-drab woolen gloves are worn; at
)ther times, no gloves.
When not in the Jlelc1. the service cap is worn instead of the
lUlt. Under arms, white gloves and the garrison belt
(or russet-leather belt and cartridge tlOX) are worn.
'Veal' the exact uniform prescribed by your commanding
lfficer, whpther you on duty or off duty.
Never \venr a mixed uniform, as, for instance, a part of tile
uniform \'lith the nIne uniform.
Never any part of tI1e uniform with civilian elotlles.
:t very nnsoLclierly, for example, to wear n civiliau overcollt
)Ve!' the uniform or to \venr the ulliform ovcr a
'ivilinn suit.
Keep the uniform dean and neat and in goOf] repair.
Grease spots and dust and dirt should be removed as soon Ul')
)ossilJle.
Hips ane1 teurs s.honld be promptly mended.
1\1issing huttons and cap nnd collar ornaments shoulu be
)romptly replaced.
There is but one correct and soldierly ,vay to wear the cap.
';ever wear it on the back or side of the head.
The service hat sl10nld he ,,'701'11 in the regulation shnpe,
leaked, \vitll four indentations, ancl with hat cord on.
)() not Covel' it ,"yith pen or pencil maI'J::s.
Never appear outside your room or tent \vith yonI' cont or
live-drab shirt unbuttoned or collar of coat unhool'i:ed.
service Rt!'il)eS, and ea 11lpuign medals and badges are n
art of the uniforni and must he ,vorn as prescribed.
vVhen cmJts are not worn \vith the service uniform oUve-
rab shirts nre vrescribed.
SuspPllders must never be \V01'n exposed to view.
Never appear in breeches without
Leather leggings should be kept polished. Canvas leggings
IlOuld be scrubbed when dirty.
, 98
Russetleather (tan) shoes should be kept clean and polished
The overcoat when worn must be buttoned throughout aDt
the collar hooked. 'Vhen the belt is \vorn it will be worn out
side the oyercont.
Section 5. 'I.'he service kit.
The service 1,it is composed of two [larts-(a) the field kit
\vhich includes everything the soldier Wcal'S or carries witl
him in the field, and '( b) the surplus kit.
The field kit ctJJlsists of-
(a) The dothin;; worn on the person.
(b) Arms and equipment, of-
1"On. EACH E:-\LISTEU MAN.!.
1 first-aid packet.
1 [louch for firstaill pacl{ot.
1 canteen.
1 canteen
1 can, bar.on.
1 can, condiment.
1 pack carrier (except individually mounted men).
I havers"ck (except individually mounted men).
1 meat cun.
1 cup.
I knife.
1 forL.
1 spoon.
I shelter tent half.
1 s),elter tent pole (when issued)
5 shel ter tent pins.
1 identification tag with tape.
FOR EACH ENLISTED MAN ARMED WITH THE RIFLE.
1 United States magazine rifle, caliber .30.
I hayonet.
1 bayonet scabbard.
1 gun
1 rille cartridge belt.
-=T::h-e-o::\c::j-m-od-e::[-cq-u-i:-Plllent is the SaID{
except omit ('t(Ilt.Cll cover, bacon and condiment CUllS, and pa.ck carrier.
and add 1 cartridge-belt suspenders, 1 canteen strap, and 1 blanket-rolJ
straps, set.
THE SURPLUSXIT.
FOR EACH ENI,lSTl';n ARMED WITI!. THE PISTOL.
1 pistol, caliber A5,
1 pistol holster,
1 ma;,!;D-zine pocket, double, web.
2 extra
1 pistol belt (exc("pt for men arn1Ccd also with the rifle).
FOR EAcrr ENLISTED 2.-U .. N, INDIVIDlTAI,LY U01.'NTED, IN ADDITION TO
1'HE AIlOVE.
1 rifle scabbard (if armed with rifle).
1 spurs. pair.
1 straps, pair.
1 set of horse- equ:!.p1l10nt.
(c) Extra clothing and articles to be carried on the or
on the packed saddle,
1 blanket.
1 cornb.
1 c1rmvel's, pair.
1 poncho (dismounted men).
1 (mounted men).
1 soa p, cake.
2 stockings, pair.
1 toothbrush.
1 towel.
1 undershirt.
1 housewife (for one man of each squad).
(d) An,lJnllniUon, consisting oi-
90 rounds ball cartrirlges, caliber .30 (old model belt).
100 rounds ball cartridges, caliber .30 (new model belt).
(e) Rations, consisting of-
lor 2 reserve rations (bacon,hard and snJU.
( f) Intrenching tools, consisting- of-
2 pick mattocks, PCI' squad.
1 bolo or hand axe, per squad.
4 shovels, intrenching, per squad:
1 wire cu.tter, per squad.
Section 6. The surplus kit.
The surplus .kit for each man consists of-
1 breeches, pair.
1 drawers, pair.
...
30
1 shirt, olive drab. i>
1 shoes, russet leather, pair.
2' lW ir.
1 undershirt.
1 shoe laces, extra, pair.
Each surplus kit bag ('ontains 1 jointed cleaning rod and case.
Squad leaders are responsible that sUI'plus kit bags ure kept
in order and fully pacl-:Bd in the fieh1.
1
::\len are allo\ved access
to them for th0 purllose of making substitutions.
The surplus kits packed in surplus kit bags, 011e for each
squad, one for nncl one for cooks and buglers.
The kit of each lllan will he packed as follows:
Stoc1cillgs- to be rone{l tightly, 011e pair in the toe 'of each
shoe; placed together, heel:::; t opposite ends, soles out
,Yard, \Vl'Uppctl tightly in lllHlerwcar, and bUl1(Ue securely tied
nround the middle t<y 1-118 extra pair of the 8110e laces, each
buncile to he tagged "lyith the company llumber of the o\vner,
l These individual kits will 1)e pucked in the surplus kit bag
in hvo layers of four kits each, the breeches and olive drab
shirts to be neHtly folded and packed on the top and sides of
the the jointed cleaning rod and case, provided for each
squad, being attached by the thongs on the inside of the bag.
When overcoats or s\vcaters are not prescribed to be worn on
the DerSOll they \Yin uc collected into bundles of convenient size
nnd secured by burlap or other suitable material, or "rill be
boxed. They will lle marked ready for shipment to be
warded 'vhen reqnil'eu.
1
Section 7. Assembling Infantry equipment.'
TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIl'MENT.
WITH RA.TIONS.
Place the assE'mblcd equipment on the ground, suspender side
of haversack clo\vn, pocl::cts of cartridge belt up, havl'rsac].;:
1 In campllig)) or Rimulatc!l campai;;n, when an organization 1s re'
stricted to jts prrs('ribed Held-train transportation, surplus kits, over
coats/ and sweab?rs arE' stored on the line of communicatfons or otheI
designated place with the permammt camp eqnipm0nt of tbe organiza-
tion.
:l Since these instructions were written 1 drawer., and 1 undershirt
have been .added to the field kit. :Place tbem in pack when carried,
otherwise ill haversack.
ASSEMBLING INFANTRY EQUIPMENT. 31
!pread out, inside flap and pack carrier extended their full
ength to the rear,
Place three cartons of hard brend in tbe center of the havC\.'-
;ack hodYi the Tmver one on the Ene of attachment of the inside
:tap; lay the remaining earton of hard bread, the condiment
anel the oaenn can on the top of the:5, the condiment enn
lllUI the hacon can rrt the bottom, top of the bacon can to the
:ront; the socks and toilet arUctes are rolled, towel on the out-
;lde, into a bundle of the same approximate dimensions as a
of hard bread, and arc placed in front of the two rows
hus formed.
The inside fiap of the haversack is folded oycr these articles,
he enel of the flap beini( turnerj iIt ",1 that the flap, thus 81)ort-
med, extends about 2 inches beyond the top of the upper row;
he sides of the haversaek t:lre folded over the sides of the rows;
he upper binding straps are passe,] through the loops on the
mtslde of the 1nside ftap, each strap through the roup opposIte
he pOint of its attachment to the haversack body, and fastened
'y means of the buckle on the opposite side, the' strap
Jassed through the opening in the buckle next to its
nent, over the center 1mI', ancl back through the opening of
he buckle away from its attachment; the strap is pulled tight
u make the fastening secure; the outer fiap of the haversack
s folded over and fastenc(l by means of the lower haversack
dnding strap and the buckle on the inside of the outer flap;
he strap is pulled tight) dl'a\ving the outer fiap snugly over the
ined ha vel'sack.
The haversack is now packed and the carrier is ready for the
eceptlon of the p"ck,
If one reserve ration and one emergency ration are carried.
tl lieu of two rpserve rations, the haversack is packed in -the
lanner described above, excepl" that two cartons of hard bread
11(1 the baeon can form the bottom 1ayer, the bacon can on the
ottom; the condiment; can, the emergency ration, and the toilet
rticles form the top layer,
If one emergency ration is carried in addition to the two
escrvc rations, it is packed on top of the top layer.
To make the pack: Spread the shelter half on the ground and
old in the- triangular ends, forming an a.pproximate square from
he half, the guy on the inside; fold the poncho once acrOSS its
32 ARMS, UNIFORMS, AND EQUIPMENT.
shortest dimcnsion, thcn twice across its longest dimension, aD<
lay it In the centpl' of th,' shelter half; folel the blanket as de
scribed fol' the poncho :lIln place it on the latter; place the she]
tel' tent pins in the folds of the blanket, in the center and acros
the shortest (limension; fole[ the'edges of the shelter half snugl:
over the hlankflt: and poncho and, beginning on either of the shar
sides, roll tightly and compactly. This forms the pack.
To assemble the pack: Place the pack in the pack carrier aD!
grasp the ]O\\'e1' suspension rings, one in each hand; place th
right knee against the bottom of the roll; pull the carrier dow]
and force the up close ngainst the bottom of the pack0
haversack; "\yitbout remoying the knee, pass the 10\ve1' carrie
binding strUl) over the pacl{ nnd it by lllPans of the oppc
site buckle; ill a similar manller secure the lo,vcr huversac
binding strap Hnd thell the upper currier binding strap.
Engage the snap hook on the pat'k suspcmlers in the lower
pension rings.
The eq1lipment is now assembled and pucked as prescribed fo
the fnll equipmeat.
:ro ASSEMBLE :rHE FULL EQUIPMEN:r,
WITHOUT RATIONS.
Place the ns.semhled equipment on the grouncl as heretofor
described; fold up the flap of the haversack so that it
end will be on a line with the top of the haversack body; fol
up the 10\ve1' haversack strap in the same manner.
To make up the pack: Fold the poncho, blanket, and shelte
half, and make up the pack as heretofore prescribed, except tho
the condiment and bacon Can (the former inside the latter
amI the toilet articles and socks are rolled in the pack. In til!
case the pack is rolled, beginning on either of the long sidE
instead of the short sieles, as heretofore described.
To assemble the pack: Place the pack OIl the 11aversack an
pack carrier, its npper end on a line with the upper edge of til
haversack body; bind it to the huversack and carrier by mean
of the haversack and pack binding straps; fold down the oute
flap on the haversack and secure it by means of-the free end 0
the 1)1iddle haversack binding strap and the buckle provided 0
the underside of the flap; engage the snap hooks of the pac
suspenders in the lower susDension rings.
The equipment is now packed and assembled,'
I
ASSEMBLmG mFANTRY EQUIPMENT.
83
To adjust the equipment to the soldier: Put on the equipment,
the. arms one at a time thrOllgh the pack suspenders
as through the sleeves of a coat; by means of the adjusting
the helt suspenclers raise or lower the belt until It
rests Willi down over the hip bones on tIle sides and below the
pit of the abdomen in front; raise or lower it in rear until the
adjusting strap lies smoothly ucross the slllull of the back; by
means of the adjusting buckles on the pack suspenders, raise or
lower the loael on the back until the top of the haversack is on
a level with the top of the shoulders, the pack suspenders, from
their pOint of attachment to the haversack to the rue of tan
gency with the SllOulcler, being hOl'izontal. The latteT is abso
lutcly essential to the proper alljustmcnt oj the load.
The position of the helt is the same whether filled or empty.
TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT LESS THE PACK.
\VITH
Detach the carrier from the haversack; place the rest of the
equipment on thl' ground fiB heretofore described; place the
four cartons of hard brend, the lJncoa can, the cOIldiment cun.
and the toilet articles in one rClW in the middle of the
sack body, the toilet articles at tbe top, the bacon can at the
bottom, top to the front. the I'o\v from top tc oottom
of the haversack; fold the inside Hnp over the row thus formed;
fold the sides of the havers.ack up anel over; pass the three
:haversack binding straps through thf! loops on the insiclc fiap
and secure by mea ns of the buckles on the opposite side of .the
haversack; pass the lower l1u.vel'\'5Itck binding strap through tlle
small buttonhole in the }O\ve1' edge o[ the haversack, fold the
outer fiap of the haversack over the ,vhole, and secure by
means of the buckle on its ullderside una the lower haversack
bindjng strap.
Pass thp. ltaversaclt 8u-::.pension rings through the ('ontiguuus
buttonholes in the lower edge of tll(' hflYCrsack and engage the
snap hool{s on the ends of the p;lck sW'3penclers.
If one ration and OIle emergency ration are carried
in lieu of two reserve rations, the haversack is packed in
the manner described above, except that onc emergency ration
is substituted for two of the cartons of harel bread.
03G12-17--2
34 ARMS, UNIFORMS, AND EIlUIPMENt.
If one emergency ration is carried in a_dditlon to the two
reserve I'atiOlll"l, it is packed on top of the layer.
TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT LESS THE l'ACK.
WITHOUT RATIONS.
Detach the carrier from the haversack; place the rest of the
equipment on the ground. as heretofore described; fold up the
inside flap of the haversacl.;:: until upper end is on aline with
the top of the h()(ly; fold the sides of the haversack
over, pass the three haversack binding straps tllrough the loops
on the inside flap find secure by means of the buckles on the
opposite siele of the haverl5f1ck; [laSS the lower huYcrsacl{ binding
strap through the small buttonhole in the 10\ve1' edge of the
haversack; place the condiment and bacon can (the former in-
side the latter) and the toilet urticles and socks in the bottom
of the pouch thus formed; fold the outer fiap of the haversack
over the \v1101e and secure by means of the buclde on its unuerw
side and the lo\ver haversack binding strap.
Pass the haversack suspension rings through the; contiguouE
buttonl101es in the 10\\"e1' edge of the haversack and engage the
snap hooks on the eIl(h; of the suspenders.
To adjust the equipment to the soldier: Put on the equipment
as prescribed for the full equipment. the cartridge belt
as prescribed for the full equipment. Adjust the pack sus
penders so that the top of the haversack is on a level with thE
top of the shoulders.
TO DISCARD THE l'ACK WITHOUT REMOVING THE EQUIl'MENt
FROM THE BODY.
Unsnap the pack suspenders from the suspension rings and
snap them into the eyelets on top of the belt and in rear of
the rear pockets of the right and left pocket sections; SUllPort
the bottom of the paek wHh the left haud and ,viU! the right
hand grasp the coupling straJI at its middle and withdraw first
oue encl, then the other; press dmvn gently on the pack with
both hands and remove it. 'Vhen the pack hus been removed
lace the coupling strap into the buttonholes along the upper ,edg
of the carrier. Adjust the pack suspenders.
OLD MODEL EQUIPMENT.
tor01l the blanket page 120.
\
RATIONS AND FORAGE.
Section 1. The ration.
A ration is the allowance of food for one man for one day.
In the field thete are three kinds of rations issued, as
follows:
The garrison ration is intended to be issued in kind wheneve,r
[lossible. The approximate net weight of this ration is 4.5
)ounds.
The rcserre ration is the simplest efficiellt rntion, and con-
stitutes the reserve carried for field service. It consists of-
Ounces.
Rncon_______ .__ 12
Hard braa,l _. _____________________ 16
Coffee, roasted lind grouna 1. 12
Sugar ____________________________________ 2.4
SaIL ______ .___ .16
Approximate net \vei,ghL ___ pounds__ 2
The field ration is the ration pre:wribeu in orders by the com-
nander of the field forces. It consjsts of the reserve ration, in
",hole or in part, snp[)lementecl by articles requisitioned or
lurchased loeally or shipped from the rear.
In campaign a command carries as a part of its normal
the follmving rations:
(a) On each mun: At least two days' reserve rations.
(b) In the ration section of the field train, for eacll man:
days' fIeld nnd one day's reserve rations.
(c) In the nlpp1y trnin: ':r,yO days' fielc1 rations.
In addition to the foregoing, commanders win require each
nan on the to carry the unconsumed portion of the clay's
'ation issued the night before for the noonday meal. Reserve
'ations are eonsulllE'tl only in case of extreme necessity. when
)ther supplies are not available. They are not to be consurned
35
36 RATIONS AND 'FORAGE.
or renewed without an express order from the officer in com
mana of the troops \vho is responsible for the provision of
plies! namely, the division commander or other independent
dc1achment commander. Every officer within the limits"of'hiS
('ommand is 11el(1 responsib1e for the enforcement of thisregula-
tion. Reserve rations consumed must be replaced at the first
opportunity.
Section 2. Individual ,
Sometimes rations for several days are issued to the soldier
at OIle time, and in snch cases you should be very careful to so
use the rations that they will last you the entire period. If
you stuff yourself one day) or '\Yaste your rations, you will hnve
to starve later on.
Generally the cooking for the company will be done by the
company coolt, but sometimes. every soldier will have to prepare
his own meals, using bis field mess kit for the purpose.
The best fire for individual cooking is a small, dear one, or,
better yet, fi few brisk coals. To make such a fire, first gather
a number of sticks about 1. inch in diameter. These should be
dry. Dead limbs adhering to a tree are dryer than those picked
up from the ground. Split some of these and shave them up
iilto kindling. Dig a trench in the ground, laid with the wind,
about n foot long, 4 inches wide, and 6 inctes deep. Start the
fire in this trench gradually, piling on the heavier wood as the
fire grows. When tile trench is full of burning wood, allow
it a few minutes to burn down to coals and stop blazing high.
Then rest the meat can and cup over the trench and start
cooking. Either may be supported, if necessary, with green
sticks. If you can not scrape a trench in the soil, build one
up out of rOCKS or with two parallel logs.
The following recipes have been furnished from the office 01
the Quartermaster General, United States Army:
CO/1'ee,-]'ilL the cup twothirds full of water and bring
to a boil. Add one heaping spoonful of coffee and stir well,
adding one spoonful of sugar if desired. Boil five minutes and
then set it to [he side of the fire to simmer for about 10
minutes. Then, to clear the coffee, throw in a spoonful or two
of cold water. This coffee is of medium strength and is withi!!
the limit of the ration if made but twice a day.
INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT. 37
Cocoa.-'rake t,vo-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a bon.
ldd one heaping spoonful of cocoa, and stir until dissolved.
A.dd one spoonful i of sugar, if desired, and boil for five
cninutes.
Ohocolate.-Tnke tv.'o-thircls of a cupful of water, bring to
1 boil, add a piece of choeolate about the size of a hickory
::mt, breaking or cutting it into small pieces and stirring until
lissolved. Add one spoonfnl of sugar, if desired, and boil for
lye minutes.
Tea.-Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a boil,
ldd one-half of a leyel spoonful of tea, and then let it
or "draw" for three minutes. If allowed to stand
onger the tea ,vill get bitter, unleSB separated from the tea
eaves.
ME..'tTS.
Bacan.-Cut slices about five to the inch, three of which
;hould generally be sufficient for one man for one meal. Place
_n a meat can with about one-half inch of cold water. Let
to a boil and then pour the ,vater off. Fry over a brisk
fire, turning the bacon once and quickly brovvning it. Remove
:he bacon to lid of meat can, leaving: the grease for frying
;otatoes, onions, rice, fiapjaeks, etc., a.ccording to reclpe.
Fresh meat (to fry) ,-To fry, u small amount of grease (one
:0 two spoonfuls) is necessary, Put grease in the meat can
lud let come to a smoking temperature, then drop in the steak
llld, if about one-half inch thick, let fry for about one minute
)efore turning, depending upon whether it is desired it shall
)e rare, medium, or well done. Then turn un(l fry briskly as
)etore. Salt and pepper to taste.
Applies to beef, veal, pork. mutton. venison, etc.
F1'6Sh rneat (to broil).-Out in slices about one inch thick,
:rom half us large as the hand to foul' times that size. Sharpen
1 stick or branch of convenient length--say, from two to four
:eet long-antI weave the point of the stick tbrough the steak
;everal times, so that it may be rmulily hu'ne(} ove[' a few brisk
or on the windward side of a small fire. Allow to brown
licely, turning frequently. Salt and pepper to taste. Meat
with considerable fat is preferred, though any meat may be
)roiled in this manner.
38
RATIONS AND FORAGE.
J!'1'esh meat (to into chunks from one-half inel
to one inch cubes. li'ill cup about full of me'at aUI
co:ver with about 011e inch of water. Let boil or simmer abou
one hour, or until tender. Add such librous vegetab1e,r'as cm
rots, turnips, or cabbage, cut into sIIlall chunks, soon th
Illeat is put all to boll, and potatoes, onions, or other tentle
:vegetables whcn the meat is about half done. Amount of veg'
tables to be aelded, about the same as meat, depending UpOi
supply and taste. Salt and pepper to taste. Applies to all fresl
meuts and fowls. The proportion of meat and vegetables use4
varies \vith their abundance, and fixed qnantities can not b
adhered to. Fresh fish can he handled us above, except that i
is cooked much quicker, and potatoes and onions and cannel
corn are the only vegetables generally used ,,,ith it, thus mat
ing a cho\vder. A slice of bacon ,vQuld greatly improve' th
flavor. May be conveniently cooked in meat can or cup.
VEGETABLES.
Potatoes (fried) two medium-sized potatoes or on
large one (about one-half pound), peel and cut into slice
about one-fourth inch thick and scatter well in the meat ca:
in which the grease remains after frying the bacon. Ad
sufficient water to half cover the potatoes, cover with the Ii,
to keep the moisture in, and let come to a boil for about 15 t
20 minutes. Remove the cover and dr.v as desired. Salt an,
pepper to taste. DiJring the cooking the bacon already prf
pared may be kept on the cover, which is most convenient!,
placed bottom side up over the cooking vegetables.
Onion. as potatoes.
PotatoeR two medium-sized potatoes (abou
o.ue-half pound) or one large one, and cut in (:oarSe chunks 0
about the same size-say inch cubes. Place in meat ca'
and three-fourths fill witl] water. Covel' with lid and let bo:
01" simmer for 15 or 20 minutes. They are done when easil,
perietrnted witb a sharp stick. Pom off the water and Ie
dry oqt for one or two minutes over hot ashes or light coals.
Patatoes (baked) two medium-sized potatoes (abou
one-baif pound) or one large one cut in half. I,ay In a be,
of light coals and cover with same and smother with
Do not disturb for 30 or 40 minutes, when they should be dOnE
INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT.
39
Ca .... ed tomatoes.--One 2pound eUD is gencrully sufficient for
five men .
into the meat can one man's allowance of toma-
toes and add about two large hardtacks broken into small
pieces amI let come to :1 boil. Add. suIt and peppel' to taste, 01'
add it pinch of and one-fourth spoonful of sugar.
0.,., bUYing fried the hacon, pour the tomatoes into the meat
the grease remaining, and add, if desired, hvo broken
hardtacks. Set over a brisk fire and let COlUe to a boil.
Or, heat the tomaf:opg as they (,ome from the can, addillg
two pinches of salt and one-half spoonful of sugar, jf desired.
Or, espeeialJy in hot weather. eatcn cold \vith hard hread,
they are very palatable. .
Ricc.-Take about two thirds of a cupful of water, bring
to a boil, add foul' heaping spoonfnls of rice, and hoiL until the
grains are soft enougll to be easily mashed between the fingers
(about 20 minutes). Add two pinches of salt and, after stirring,
Jour off the water and empty rice out on meat can. Bacon
or sugar may be added.
meal, fine hominy, about one-third of a
of water, bring to a boil, add 4 heapiug spoonfuls of
:he meal or hominy. and boil ahout 20 mtnates. Then add
tbout two pinehes of salt and stir well.
D1'lcd beans and peas.-Put 4 heaping spoonfuls in about
:wo-thlrds of a cupful of water anrI boil until soft. This
takes from three to four hours. Add onB pinch of
mIt. About half an hour before the beans arc done add one
llice of bacon.
Flapjac7,s.-Take 6 spoonfuls offtour ane] one-third spoon
:ul of baking powder and mix thoroughly (or dry mix' in a
arge pan before issue, at the rate of 25 pounels of flour and 3
lUlf cans of baking powder for 100 men). Add sufficient cold
vater to make a batter that will (lrip freely from the spoon,
Ldding a pinch of salt. Ponr into the ment cau, which should
the grease from fried bacon or it spoonful of butter 01'
:at, and place over medium hot coals sufficient to bake, so that
n from 5 to 7 minutes the flapjack may be turned by a quicl,
40 RATIONS AND FORAGE.
toss of the pan. Fry from G to 7 minutes longer, or until hy
examination it is found to be done.
Hoecake.-Hoecake is made exactly the same -as flapjacks
by substituting corn mea! for /lo",.
Emergency 1"ai'ions.-Detailed instructions as to the maIlner
of preparing the emergenl'Y ration ure found' on the label of
each cun. Remember that even a very limited amount of bacon
or hard bread, or both, consumed ,vith the emergency ration
makes it far more palatrrble, and generally extends the period
during \vhich it can be consumed with relish. For this reason
it would be better to husband the supply of hard bread and
bacon for use \vlth HlP ernerg-enc,'l" ration wlwn it becomes
evident that the latter must be consumed rather than to retain
the emergency ration to the last extremity and fOI'ee its x ~
elusive USe for a longer period than two or three days.
Section 3. The Forage Ration.
U 1077) Army Regulation8,-,]:he forage ration for a horse is
14 pounds of hay and J 2 pounds of oats, COl'n, 01' barley, anll 3i
pounds of straw (or hay) for bedding; for a Field Artillery
horse of the heavy-draft type. weighing 1.300 pounds or over,
17 pounds of hay and 14 pounds of oats, corn, or barley, and 3ir
pounds of stl'a w (or hay) for bedding; for a mule. 14 pounds
of hay and 9 pounds of oats, corn. or barley. and 3! pounds of
straw (or hay) fo), bedding. 'fo each animal 3 pounds of bran
may be issued in lieu of that qnantity of grain.
" The commanding officer may. in his discretion, vary the pro
portions of the components of the ration (1 pound of grain, Ii
pounds of hay. and 2 pounds of straw being taken as equiva-
lents), and in the fielcl may substitute other recognized articles
of forage obtained locally, the variation or the substitution not
to exceed the money value of the cOlllPonents of the ration at the
contract rates in effect at the time of change.
"1078, Army Rcgu1aUons.-'Vilere grazing is practicable, or
when little ,Yorl;:: \$ required of the animals, commanding officers
will reduce the forage ration. Wben, on the other hand, condi-
tions demrnd it, they are authorized to increase the ratioD, not
in excess, however, of sQ.vings Innde."
THE FORAGE RATION.
41.
In the field the authorizer! allowances must often be reduced
and supplemented by grazing and other kinds of food, such as
green -forage, be;Hls, peas, rice, palay, wheat, and rye. Wheat
and rye should be crushed and IP(l spa,rlngly (about one-fourth
of the allowance). "'or unshelled corn, add about onequarter
weight.
On the march the grain ration is lhe only forage carried. It
consists of 12 pounds of grain for each horse and 9 pounds of
grain for cad> mule. Ilecourse must be had to grazing If It Is
not possible to procure long forage in the country traversed.
In campaign il command carries as a part of its normal equip-
ment the following forage:
(a) For each draft animal: On each velticle a reserve of one
day's grain ration for its draft animals.
(b) On animals and vehicles: A portion of their grain ra-
tion issued the night before, :[01' a noonday feed.
(c) In the ration section of the field train, for each animal,
two fl(] y's g-r"ain rati ons.
(tI) In supply train of an Infantry clivision two days' grain
rations, und of a Cavalry division one days' grain ration.
CHAPTER LV.
l'ERSONAL HYGIENE AND CARE OF THE FEET.
PERSONAL HYGIENE.
History shows that in almost every war lYlany more men die
of disease than from ,\younds received in battle. Much of t i ~
disease is preventable and is due either to the ignorance OI
carelessness of the person ,vIto lU-1S the disease or of othe!
persons about him. It is a terrible truth that one man wlu
violates any of the great rules of health may be the means 01
killing many more of his comrades than are killed by the bulletf
of the enemy.
It ;s therefore most important that every soldier shonld learn
how to take care of his health when in the field a1ld that h'
should also insist that his comrades do 1lot violate any of th,
rules prescribed for this purpose.
A great many diseases arc due to germs, which are eithet
little animals or ]jttle plants so vel'Y small that they can onl:;
be seen by aid of the microscope. All diseases caused by germ,
are II catching." All other diseases are not "catching."
There are only five 'vays of catching disease:
((j,) Getting certain germs on the body by touching some on,
or something which has them on it. Thus, one may eatct
venereal diseases, smallpox, measles, scarlet fever, chicken pox
mumps, boils, body lice, ringworm, barber's itch, dhobie iteh
and som8 other diseases. vVounds are infected in this manner
(b) Breatliing in eertain germs which float in the air. It:
this way one mn;r cateh pneumonin, consumptioll, influenza
diphtheria, whooping cough, tonsilitis, spinal meningitis, mea
sles, ancl certain otlier diseases.
(c) rraking certain germs in through the mouth 1n eating 01
drinking. Dysentery, cholera, typhoid fever, diarrhea, and In
testinal \Varms may be caught in this manner.
(d) Rliving certain germs injected into the body by the bite!
of insects, such as mosquitoes, flcas, and bedbugs. Malaria
yellow fever, dengue fever, and bubonic plague may be caugh1
in t i ~ W:1Y.
4.2
PEltSONAL HYGIENE.
43
(8) Inheriting the germ from one's parents.
Persons may ha vo these germs sometimes without apparently
leing'siac$: 'with any disease. Such persons and persons who are
ick -witti the diseases are a great source of danger to others
.bout them. Germs which multiply in such persons are found
[l their urine and excretions from the bowels; in discllarges
rom ulcers and in the spit or particles coughed or
neezed into the air; in the pcrspira tion or scales from the
kin; and in the blood sucked up biting insects.
Those who have taken care of their health and who have not
ecomo weakened by bad habits, exposure. nnd fatigue are not
nly less liable to catch disease, but are more apt to recover
chen taken sick.
Knowing all these things, the soldier can understand the rea
ons for the follo.ving rules and how important it is tbat they
hould be carried out by each and every person:
Stay away from persons having" catching" diseases.
If you have any disease, don't try to cure it yourself, but go'
o the surgeon. Insist that other soldiers do likewise.
TyphoId fever is one of tbe most dangerous and common camp
iseases. Modern medicine has, however, discovered nll effec-
ive preventative for this disease in the typhoid prophylactic.
chich renders the person immune from typhoid fever. The
reatment consists In injecting Into the arm a preventative
erum. The injection is given three times at lO-day intervals.
Association with lewd women is dangerous. It muy result
disabling you for life. It is the cause of a disease (syphilis)
,hich may be transmittea by a parent to his children. So]rliers
\lith venereHl diseases should not use basins or toilet articles
tsed by others, as the germs of these diseases if gotten into the
ye very often cause blindness. Likevdse, if they use the samE'
rinking cup used by others they may give others the disease.
'hey should promptly report their trouble to the surgeon, that
hey may receive tbe best medical advice and attention.
Should a soldier expose himself to infection by having inter-
ourse with an unknowll woman, he should report as soon as
.Qssible afterwards to the regimental infirmary for prophy
actie treatment, which. if taken within a few hours after
ntercQurse, will prevent to a large degree the liability of
ontraeting any disease.
M FERSONAL HYGIENE AND CARE OF THE FEET.
Cooked germs are dead and tllerefore harmless. Water
even when clear, may be alive with deadly germs. Therefore
when the conditions are such that the commanding. officel
orders all drinking water to be boiled, be careful to live up t<
this order.
Use the latrines and don't go elsewhere to relieve yourself
In open lutrines cover your deposit with dirt, as it breeds flie:
and may nlso be fnll of germs. .
Flies C.'lITY germs from one place to another. Therefore sel
that your food nnd mess kit are protected from them.
All slops a11(1 scraps of food scattered about camp soor
proclnce bad oelo1's and draw flies. rl'herefore do your par'
toward keeping the eamp free from disease by de
positing such refuse in the pits or cans used for this purpose.
Urinate only in the latrines, or in the cans set out for thl!
purpose, never on the ground around earnp, because jt not
causes ha(l smells but 1Irine sometimes contains the germs 0:
" catching II diseases.
Soapy 'water thrown on the ground soon produce.>:; bad odors
Therefore in camps of several da,Ys' duration t.his water shoull
be thl'o\vD i.n covered pits or in cans used for this purpose.
As certain mosquitoes .-;an transmit malaria and fever
use your mosquito bar for this reason as well as for persona
comfort.
Keep your mouth clean by brushing your teeth once or twiCE
a day, It helps to prevent the teeth from decaying. Decayec
teeth 'cause toothache. also Jead one to swallow fooe
,vithout properly it, a.nd this leads to stomach
of various kinds. Food left around and between the teeth h
bad for the teeth and forms good breeding places for germs.
Keep the skin c1ean. Tlirongh the pores of the skin tIle bodS
gets rid of much ,yuste and poisoncus matter. Therefore re-
move this and keC'p the Dores open by bathing every day
if possible, If W;lH'1' IS 8CaeeE':, rub the body over with a we1
towel. If no water is fit hand, tall::e a dry rub. Wash care-
fully the armpits, between the legs, and under the foreskin
as this will pren::.nt chafing .
. The skin protects the sensitive parts underneath from
and helps to keep out germs. Therefore when bUsters an
formed uon't tear off the skin. Insert a needle under the
PERSONAL HYGIENE.
El little distance back from the blister and push it through to
tbe opposite side. Press out the liquid through the holes thus
formed:: .. Hl:at the needle red hot first, with a match or caudle,
to kill" the germs.
When the skin is broken (in cuts and wounds) keep the open-
ing covered with a bandage to keep out germs and clirt; other-
the sore may fester. Pus is always caused by germs.
Keep your hair short. Long hair and a long beard in the
!ield generally means a dirty bead and a dirty face ancl favors
skin diseases, lice, and dandruff.
Don't let any part of the body become chilled, as this very
Jften is the direct cause of diarrhea, dysentery, pneumonIa,
rheumatism, and other diseases.
Wet clothes may be ,varn "'hile marching or exercising with-
r)ut bad results, but there is great danger if one rests in wet
as tbe body may become chillec1.
Don't sit or lie or sleep directly on llamp ground, as this is
sure to eh ill the body.
When hot or perspiring or when wearing damp eJothes, don"'t
remain where a breeze can strike ;you. You are sure to be ..
oorne chilled.
Every day, if possible. hang your blanket and clothing out to
air in the sun; shake or beat them with a small stick. Germs
and vermin don't like this treatment, but damp, musty clothing
suits them very well. Wash your shirts, underwear, and socks
tl'equently. The danger of blood poisoning from a wound Is
!p'eatly increased if the bullet passes through dirty clothes.
Ditch your tent as soon as you can, particularly a shelter
tent, even if you camp for one night only. Otherwise a little
,'ain may ruin a whole nigbt's rest.
Always prepare your bed before dark. Level 011' the ground
md scrape out a little hollow for your hips. Get some straw
Dr dry grass If possible. Green grass or branches from trees
are better than nothing. Sleep on your poncho. This keeps
the dampness from coming up from the ground and chilling the
body. Every minute spent in making a good bed means about
an hour's good rest later on.
Avoid the food and drInk found for sale in the cheap stands
about camp. The quality is generally bad, and it is often pre-
hi filthy places by very dirty persons.
16 PERSONAL HYGIENE AND CARE OF THE FEET.
The use of intoxicating liqUOL' is particularl.v dangerous II
the field. Its excessive use, even at long intervals, breaks dOWl
one's system. Drinking men are more apt to get sick and l s ~
liable to get well Ulan arc their more sober COhlf.ulles. 11
alcohol is taken at all, it is best after the work of the day il
over. It shoule1 never be taken when the body is expose(1 tc
severe cold, as it diminishes the resistance of 1he body. Ho1
tea or coffee is much preferable under these circumstunces.
CARE OF THE FEET.
A soldier call not march with sore feet, and marching is thE
main part of an infantryman's daily duty in the field. All
soldiers shonld be familiar with tho proper methods of carin
for the feet. Sore feet are generally due to carelessness, nog
lect, or ignorance on the part of the soldier.
The most important factor in the care of the feet and thE
marching ability of the solclier is the shoe. Civilian shoes.
particulnr1y light, patent Jeather, or low shoes, arc sure tc
cause injury and in time will ruin a man's foot. Only thE;
marching shoe issued by tile Quartermaster Oorps should bE
WOl'l1, and they must be properly fitted to the individual. It
will not suffice to ot'der a marching :shoe of the same size as
one's ordinary civili.an shoes, for it must be remembered that a
soldier may have to march muny miles daily over rough roads
and carrying a heavy pack. The pack itself causes the foot to
spread out to a larger size, and the rough roads give so mucb
exercise to the mllsdes of the feet that they swell greatls
through the increased blood supp1y. (For directions as to
measuring the foot for the marching shoe see General Order
No. 26, 'Val' Department, 1912, a copy of which should be on
hand in each company.) C
Do not start out OIl a march ,vearing new shoes. This is a
frequent cause of sore feet. New shoes should be properly
broken in before beginning a march by wearing them for
several hours daily for a week before the march, and they
should be adapted to the contours of the feet by stretching them
with shoe stretchers with adjustable knobs to lake the pres-
sure off painful corns and bunions. Such stretchers are issued
by tile Qunrtl'WaSlel' 001"PS, and there should be one or more
CARE OF THE FEET.
47
,air in every company of infantry. Should this be impractl .
able, then the follovving is suggested:
The diolt1ier stands in his new shops in about 2! inches of
about fIve minutes until tbe leather is thoroughly
)liab1e ancl moist; he should then walk for about an hour on
, level surface! the shoes dry on his feet, to the irregu-
arities of which the leather is thus 11101dcd in the same \vay
18 it was previously molded over tile shoe last. On taldng
he shoes off a very little neat'gfoot oil shoulc1 be rubbed into
,he leather to prevent its hardening and cracking.
If it is desired to waterproof shoes at any time, a considerable
lmount of neat'sioot oil should be ruhbed into the leather.
Naterproof leather muses the feet of some men to perspire
mduly and keeps them constantly soft.
Light woolen or heavy \,,"oolen soeks will habitual1y be worn
'or marching. Cotton socks will not be worn unless speCifically
ll'dered by the surgeon. The socks \vill be large enough to per-
nit free movement of the toes, but not so loose as to permit of
"''Tinkling. Darnell socks) or socks 'vith holes in theln) will not
)e worn in marching.
Until the feet have hardened they should be dusted with foot
;o,vder, which can be obtained at the l'egilnental infirmary,
lefore each day's march. etean soelts shOUld be worn daily.
As soon, as possible after reaching camp after a day of march.,.
tng the feet should be was11ed with soap and wnter, and the
<oldier shOUld put on a dry pair of socks and his extra pair of
shoes from his surplus kit. If the skin is tender, or the feet
perspire, wash with warm salt water or alum water, but do not
soak the ceet a long time, as this, although very comforting at
the time, tends to keep them soft. Should blisters appear on
the fect, prick amI evacuate them 11y pricking at the lower edge
with a pin which has been passed through the flame of a match
and cover them with zinc OJdde plaster applied llOt. This
plaster can be obtained on request at the regimental infirmary.
If serious abrasions appear on tIle f.eet, or corns, bunions, and
lngro\ving nails cause trouble, huYe your name placed on sIck
report and apply to the surgeon for treatment. Cut the toe
naas; square (fairly close in . the middle, but leaving the sidell
somewhat longer), us this prevent:; ingrowing nails.
CRAPTER V.
EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONf
UNITED STATJ<;S 1911.
[Corrected to April 15, 1917.]
Section 1. Definitions.
Alignment: A. straight line npon which several elements ar
formed, or are to be formed; Or the dressing of several eI
ments upon a straight line.
Base: The element on which a movement is regulated.
Battle sight: The position of the rear sight when the leaf i',
laid down.
Center: middle point or element of a command.
Column: A formation in which the elements are placed one be
hind another.
Deploy: To extend the front. In general to change from coluun
to line. or from close order to extended order.
Depth: '.rhe space from head to rear of any formation, inc\udin!
the leading and rear elements. The depth of a man
assumed to be 12 inches.
Distance: Space between elements ln the direction of deptb
Distance is measured from the l)uck of the man in front tc
the breast of the man in rear. The distance between ranks
is 40 inches in both Jine and column.
Element: A file, squad, pla.toon, company, or larger body, form
ing part of a stilI larger body.
48
DEFINITIONS.
49
rile: Two men, the front-rank man and the corresponding man
of the rear rank. The frontrank man is the file leader.
A file which has no rcar-rank man is a blank file. The .term
file applies also to a single man in a formation.
rile closers: Such officers and noncommissioned officers of a
company as nrc posted in rear of the line. For convenience,
all men postecl in the line of file closers.
?lank: The right or left of a command in line or in column;
also the on the right or left of the line.
?ormation: Arr:tl1gelllcnt of the elements of a command. The
placing of all fntC't(ons in their orner in line, in column, or
for battle.
Iront: The space, in width, occupied by an element, either in
line or in column. The front of a man is assumed to be 22
inches. Front also denotes the direction of the enemy.
tuide: An officer, noncommissioned officer, or private upon
whom the command or clements thereof regulates its
march.
[{ead: The leading element of a column.
:nterval: Space bet\"w,rcen elements of the same line. 'llhe in:-
tcrval between men in ranks is 4 inches, and is measured
from elbow to_ e-lbo\v. Between companies) squads, etc., it
is measured from the left elbow of the left man or guide of
the group on the right to the right elbow of the right man
or guide of tile group on tile left.
,eft: Tile left extremity or element of a body of troops.
,ine: A formation in which the different elements arc abreast
of each other.
)rder, close: rl'he formation in \vhich tbe nnits) in double
are arranged in line or in column with normal intervals
and distances.
)rder, extended: The formation in whkh the nnits are
rated by intervals greater than in close order.
Thirty inches; the length of the full step in quick time.
of rest: The point at which a formation begins. Specifi-
cally, the point toward which units are aligned in successive
movements.
[tank: A line of men placed side by side.
,tight: The right extremity or element of a body of troops.
60 EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
PART I.-DRILL.
Section 2._Introdllction.
1.1 Suece:;;s in battle is the ultimate object of all militn!":
training; success may he lookerl Jor only when the training i
intelligent und thorough.
2. Commanding officers arc accountable for the proper traiI
ing of their respective within t11e limits prescribe4
by regulations anel orders.
'l'lle excellellce of an organization is jndged by its field efli
cienc
J
'. Tlw fielrl of an organlzation depends primari1:
upon its effectiveness as a \"hole. Thoroughness and nniformit:
in the training of the units of nn organi7.iution nro indispensabl.
to the efficiency of the it is by such means alone tha
the requisite team\vork may (leveloperl.
3. SimV1c movements nnd elastic formations are essential t,
correct training for battle.
4. The Drill Rgnl:ltioIl" are furni"bel1 as a gnide. They pro
vide the principles for training and for increasing the proba
bility of success in battle.
In the of the regulations
1
the spirit must bl
songht. Quibbling over the rninuth:e of form is indicative 0
failure to grasp the spirit.
5. 'l'he principles of combat are considercd in Part II of thes,
regulations. They nre treated in the various schools include(
in Pm't I only to the extent necessary to indicate the functlom
of the varions commanders and the division of
between them. The mnplificatton necessary to a proper under
standing of their application is to he sought in Part II.
6. r.i'he following important distinctions must be observed:
(a) Drills executed at attention and the ceremonies are dis
ciplinary exercises designed to teach precisle and soldierly move
and to inculcate that prompt and subconscious oberliencf
whieh- is eSls:.ential to proper military control. To this euc
smartness and precision should be- exacted in the execution OJ
every det(lil. Such drills should be frequent, but short.
1 '.rhe numbers refer to paragraphs in. the Infantry Drlll Reguhitions
1911.
INTRODUCTION. 61
(b) The purpose of extended order drill is to teach the mecha-
ism of deployment, Of the firings, and, in genera], of the em-
lorment of troops in combat. Such drills are in tlw nature of
isciplinary and should be frequent, thorough, and
xact in order to habituate men to the firm control of their
mders. Extended order drill is executed at ease. The COID-
Ul"!Y is the largest unit executes extended order drill.
(0) Field exercises are for instruction in the duties incident
) campaign. ASHumed situations crnp1oyed. Each exer-
LSO should conclude \vith a discussion, on the ground, of the
xerciRe and principles involved.
(d) The combat exercise, a form of fl.eld exercise of the com-
any, battalion, and Inrger nnits, consists of the application of
tctical principles to assumed situat1.ons, employing in the exe-
ution the appropriate formations and movements of close nnd
xtended order.
Combat exercises must simulate, as far as possible, the battle
anditions assumed. In order to familiarize both officers and
len with such conditions, companies and hattalions will fre-
uenily be couso1iuatefl to provide \vur-strength organizations.
,meers and noncommissioneu officers not required to complete
he full quota of the units participating are assigned as
ervers or umpires.
rJ1hc firing line can rarely be controlled hy the voice a]one;
tlOrough training to inslire the proper usc of prescribed signals
; necessary.
'j'he exercise should followed by a brief drill at attention
:l order to restore smartness and control.
7. In field exercises the enemy is said to be imaginary when
is position and force arc merely assumed; outlined when his
osition and force are indlcated by n few men; represented
rhen a body of troop acts us such.
General Rules for Drills and Forma.tioDs.
8. When the preparatory commands consists of more than one
art its elements are arranged as follows:
(1) Fo'r movements to be executed successively by the sub-
ivisions or elements of an organization: (a) Description of
be movement; (b) how or 011 what elernent executetl.
(2) For movements to be executed simultaneously by tl
subdivisions of an organization: (0,) The designation of tl
subdivisions; (b) the movement to be executed.
9. Movements that may be executed toward either flank at
explained ns toward but one it being necessary to sul
stitute the word" left!t for OJ right,!! and the reverse, to ha,
the explanation of the corl'espol1cling movement toward tl
other flank. The cOllllllunds are given for the execution of tl
movcments toward either flank. The substitute word of tl
is placed \vlthin parentheses.
10. Any movement may be executed either from the halt c
-when marching, unless otherwise prescribed. If at a halt, tl:
command for movements involving marehing need not be pre
aced by forward, as 1. Column right (left), 2. MARCK.
11. Any movement not specially excepted may be execute
in double time.
If at It halt, or if marching in quick time, the command daub]
time precedes the command of execution.
12. In successive movements executed in double time tb
leading or base unit marches in quick time when not otherwi,
prescribed; the other units march In double time to their plaCE
in the formation ordered and then conform to the gait of tl
leading Or base unit. If marching in double time, the cornman
double time is omitted. 'I'he leading or base nnlt marches i
quick time; the other nnits continne at donble time to thei
placcs in the formation ordered and then conform to the ga
of the leading or base unit.
13. To hasten the execution of a movement begun in quic
time, the command: 1. Donble time, 2. MARCH, is given. Tt
leading Or base unit continues to march in quick time, or
mains at a halt if already halted; the other units complete til
execution of the movement In double time and then conforl
to the gait of the leading or base unit.
H. To stay the execution of a movement when marching, fo
the correction of errors, the command: 1. In place, 2. HALT, i
given. All halt and stand fast, without changing the positlo
of the pieces. '1'0 resume the movement the command: 1. R,
sume, 2. MARCH, is given.
INTRODUCTION.
63
15. To revoke a preparatory command, or, being at a halt,
o begin anew a movement improperly begun, the command,
,S YOU WERE, is given, at which the movement ceases and the
ormer posiUon is resume(l.
16. Unless othenvise anllounced, the guide of a camp.any or
nbllivisioll of a company in line is right; of a uattalion in line
r line of subdivisions or of a deployed line, center; of a rank
2 column of squads, toward the side of the guide of the com-
any.
To m:ueh with guide other than as prescrihed above, or to
hnngc the guide: Gl1ide (right, left, or center).
In successive formations illto line, the guitie is toward the
oint of rest; in platoons or larger subdivisions it is so ao-
.ounced.
The announcement of the guide, when given in connection
vTith a IllOyemen,t, follo\vs the command of execution for that
lOvement. FJxeeption: 1. As skirmishers, guide right (left or
enter), 2. MARCH.
17. The turn on the fixed pivot hy subdivisions is used in all
from nne into column allrl the reverse.
The turn 011 the moving pivot is used by subdivisions of a
olumn tn executing changes of direction.
18. Partial eha.ngcs of direction may be executed:
By interpolating iu tbe preparatory command the word half,
s Column half right (left), or Right (left) half turn. A change
f direction of 45 is executed.
By the COllllll>ll,,1: INCLINE TO THE RIGHT (LEFT). The
uide, or guiding element, moves in the indicated direction and
he remainder of the command conforms. movement ef-
ects slight chang-es of direction.
19. The desigl1tltions line of platoons, line of companies, line
f battalions, etc., refer to the formations in whkh the platoons,
olllllunies, battalions, etc., each in column of squads, are in
.ne.
20. Full distance in column of subdivisions is such that in
orming line to the right or left tlle subdivisions will have their
roper intervals.
In column of subdivisions the guide of the leading subdivision
; charged with the step and direction; the guides in rear pre--
Cl've the trace, step, and distance.
M-' EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGU:LATIONS.
21.- In close order, all details, detachments, and other bodie'
of troops are habitually formed in (loubie rank.
To insure uniformity of interval between files when falJin!
in, and in alignments, each man places the palm of the left hane
upon the hiP: fingers pointing downward. In the first case thE
hand is dropped by tile sicle when the next man on the left ha,
his interval; in the second ense, at the command front.
22. The posts of officers. noncommissioned officers, specia
units (such as hilnd or machine-gun company), etc., in tht
varions formations of t110 company, battalion, or regiment, arl
sho'iyn in plates.
In all changt:s from one formation to another involving .l:
change of post: on the part of any of these, posts are promptll
taiwn by the most convenient route as soon as practicable aftel
the command of execution for the movement; officers and non
commissioned officers who have prescribed duties in connectiOI
with the mciyement ordered, take their new posts when sucl
duties are completed.
As instt'uctors, officers and noncommissioned officers g(
wherever their presence is necessary. .As HIe closers it is thei]
d1lty to rectify mistakes and insure steadiness and promptnes:
in the ranks.
23, Ixcept at ceremonies, the special nnits have no fixec
places. They take places as directed; in the absence of direr
tians, they conform 3S nearly as practicable to the plates, an,
in subsequent movements maintain tbeir relative positions witl
respeet to the flank or end of the command on which they werl
originally posted.
24, Geneml, field, and staff officers nre habltnally mounted
The staff of an officer fonns in Single rank 3 paces in rear 0:
him, the right of the rank extending 1 pace to the right of :;
point directly in rear of him. Members of the staff- are ar
ranged' in order from right to left as follows: General staf
Offi.(,Pl'f', lH.ljutant, airls, other staff officers, arranged in eacl
classification in order of rank, the senior on the right. Th.
flag of th" general ofiicer and the orderlies arc 3 paces In rem
of the staff, the flag on the right. When necessary to reduc.
the-front of the staff aud ord,erlies, each line executes twos rfghl
INTRODUCTION.
r fours right, as explained in the Cavalry Drill Regulations,
nd follows the commander.
'Vhen not otbenvise prescribed, staff officers draw and 'return
Iber with their chief.
25. In making the about, an officer, mounted, habitually turns
) the left.
'Vhen the cOInmander faces to give commands, the staff, flag,
od orderlies do not ch[Jnge position.
26. \Vhen mnking or receiYing official reports, or on meeting
ut of doors all officers \vill salute.
:Military l'Pfluil'es the junior to salute first, but \vhen
Ie salute is introductory to a report made at a military cere
lOllY or formatiolJ, to the representative of a comlllon superior
as, for example, to the adjutant, officer of the day, etc.), the
fficer making the report, \vhatever his rank, \viLl salute first.
'he officer to whom the report is made will acknowledge by
lluting that he has received and understood the report.
27. For ceremonies, all mounted enlisted men of a regiment
r smaller unit, except those helonging to tho machine-gull
rganizations, arc consolic1nted into a detachment. The senior
resent commands if no officer is in charge. The detachment is
)rmed as a platoon or squad of Cavalry in line or eoluinn of
)urs. NonCOlnmissioned stuff officers arc on the right or in
1e leading ranks.
28. For ceremonies, such of the nOllcommi:o;:sionetJ staff officers
s are dismounted arc formed u paces in rear of the color in
rder of rank from right to left. In column of squads they
,arch as file closers.
29. Other than for ceremonies. noncommissionel1 staff officers
llrl orderlies accompany their immediate chiefs unless other-
"ise directed. If mounted, the noncomrnissionecl staff officers
re orclinarily posted on the right or at the head of the orderlies.
30. In all formations and movements a noncommissioned
[ficer. commanding a platoon or company carries his piece as
19 men do, if he Is so armed, and takes the same post as an
llicer In like situation. When the command is formed in line
)r ceremonies a noncommissioned officer commanding a com-
any takes post on the right of the right gnide after the com
IlDY hal been aligned.
Section 3. Orders, comman'ls, and signals.
31. Commands only are employed in drill at attention. Othe
wise either 11 command, signal, or order is employed, as be
suits the occasion, or one may be used in conjunction ,vi
another.
32. Signals should be freely used in instrndion, in order th
officers and men may readily kno\v -them. In making arm si
nals the saber, rifle, or headdress may be held in the hand.
33. Offtcers and men fix their atttmtion at the first \'\"ord
command, the first of the hugle or 'whistle, or the fir
motion of the signal. A signal includes both the preparato:
command und the command of execqtion; the movement COl
as soon as the signal is Ullllel'stoo(], unleHs otherwi
prescribed.
34. I{:xcept in movements executed at attention, commande
or leaders of subdivisions repeat orders, commands, or signa
whenever sueb repetition is ueemed necessary to insure prom
and COlTPet execution.
Officers, battalion noncommissioned staff officers, platoon lea
ers, guides, and musicians are equipped ,vith \vhistles.
The major and his staff vl'ill use a .vhistle of distinctive ton
the captain and compauy musidans a second and distincti
whistle; the platoon leaders and guides a thil'd distincti
whistle.
35. Prescribed Signals are limited to such as are essenti
as a substitute for the voice under conditions whieh render t:
voice inadequate.
Before or during un engagement special signals may be agrei
upon to facilitate the solution of such special difficulties as t
particular situation is likely to develop, but it must be'reme]
bered that simplicity and certainty are indispensable qualiti
of a signal.
OIlDEltS
. 36, In these regulations an order embraces instructions
directions given orally or in writing in terms suited to the p.
ticular occasion and not prescribed herein.
ORDERS, OOMMANDS, AND SIGNALS.
67
Orders are employed only when the commands prescribed
,rein do not "uffieiently indicate tIle will of the commander.
Orders are more fully described in paragraphs 378 to 383,
elusive.
COMMANDS,
37. In these regulations a command is the will of the com
ander expressed in the phraseology prescribed herein.
38. rrherc ure two kinds of commands:
The preparatory command, such as forward, indicates the
ovement that is to be executed.
The command or execution, such as MARCH. HALT, or ARMS,
uses the execution.
Preparatory commands are distinguished by italios, those of
ecution by CAPITALS.
Where it is not mentioned in the text who gives the com
finds prescribed, they are to be given by the connnander of
e unit concerned.
The preparatory command should be given at such an interval
time before the command of execution us to admit of being
operly understood; the command of execution should be given
tho instant the movement is to COlnrncnce.
The tone of commanfi is anlmate!l, diHthlct, and of a louclness
'oportioned to the number of men for ,vhorn it.is intended.
Each preparatory command is enutlciated distinctly, with a
5ing infiection at the end, and in such manner that the o m ~
Ind of execution may be more energetic.
The command of execution Is firm in tone lind brief.
39. Majors nnd commanders of units larger than a battalion
peat such commands of their superiors us are to be executed
. their units, faCing their units for that purpose. The bat
lion is the largest unit that executes a movement at the com
am1 of execution o.f its comluuuder.
40. When giving commands to troops it is usnally best to
ce toward them.
Indifference In giving commands must be avoided, as it lea,]s
laxity in execution. Commands shonld be given with splrh
all times.
68 EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULAT10NS.
BUGLE SIGNALS.
41. The authorized bugle signals are published in Fart V (
these regulations.
The following bugle signals may be used off the battle fiell
when not likely to convey information to the enemy:
Attention: Troops are brought to attention.
Attention to orders: fl'roops fix their attention.
Forward, march: Used also to execute quick time from doub:
time.
Double time, march.
To the rear, march: In close order, execute squads right abou
Halt.
Assemble, march.
The following bugle signals may be used 011 the battle field:
Fix bayonets.
Charge.
Assemble, march.
These signals aIe used only when intended for the enth
firing line; hence they Can be authorized only by the command,
of a unit (f01' examp1e, a regiment or brigade) \vhich occupit
a distinct section of the battle field. Exception: Fix bayone
(See par. 318.)
The fol1o\ving bugle sIgnals are used in exceptional cases c
the bnttle field. Theil' principal uses are in field exercises an
practice firing.
Commence firing: Officers charged with fire direction and COl
trol open fire as soon as practicable. \Vhen given to a firir
line, the signal is equivalent to fire at will.
Cease firing: All parts of the line execute cease firing at onc,
T'hese signals are not used by units smaller than a regimen
except when such unit is independent or detached from i1
regiment.
WHISTLE SIGNALS.
42. Attention to orders. A short blast of the whistle. Thi
Bignal is used on the march or in combat when necessary to fi
the attention of troops, or of their commanders or leaders, pr<
paratory to giving commands, orders, or siguals.
ORDERS, COMMANDS, AND SIGNALS.
When the firing line is firing, each squad Jeader suspends
,ing and fixes his attention at a short blast of his platoon
ader's whistle. The platoon leader's subsequent commands or
gnals are repeated and enforced by the squad leader. If a
luad leader's attention is attracted by a whistle other than
mt of his platoon leader, or if there are no orders or commands
, convey to his squad, he resumes firing at once.
Suspend firing. A long blast of the whistle.
All other whistle signals are prohibited.
ARM SIGNALS.
43. The following arm signals are jlrescribed. In making
[gnaIs -either arm lllay be used. Officers who receive signals
n the firing line "repeat back" at Once to prevent misunder-
tanding.
Forward, march. Carry tile hand to the shou1c]er; straighten
nd hold the arm horizontally, thrusting it in direction of
larch.
Tllis signal is also used to execute quick time from double
(me.
Halt. Carry the hand to the shoulder; thrust tbe hand upward
nd hold the arm vertically.
Double time, march. Currjt the hand to the sllOulder; rttpldly
h1'ust tbe hand UDward the full extent of the arm several times.
Squads right, march. Raise the arm laterally until horizont,,!;
arry it to a. vertical J)osition al)ove the head rmd swing i,t.
'ral times between the vertical and horizontal positions.
Squads left, march. Raise the arm laterally until horizont,,\ :
'arry it downward to the side and s\ving it several be:'
ween the downward and horizontal positions.
Squads right about, march (if in close order) or, To the rear,
_arch (if in skirmish line). Extend the arm vertically allove
.be head; carry it laterally downw[IT(l to the side anll s\ving it
;everal tirnes between the vertical and dn\vn"vard positions.
Change direction or Column right (left), march. The hand on
;he side toward which the change of direction is to be made is
,arried across tlle body to the opPOSite shoulder, forearm hor!-
zontal; then swing in a horizontal plane, arm extended, poin
ing in the new direction.
As skirmishers, march. Raise both arms laterally until hor
zontal.
As skirmishers, guide ccnter"march. Raise both arms laterar
until horizontal; s\ving both simultaneously up\vard nntil ve
tical and return to the horizontal; t several times.
As skirmishers, guide right (left), march. Raise both arn
laterally until horizontal; hold thc arm on the side of the guic
steadily in the horizontal position; swing the other npvmI
until vertical and return it to the horizontnl; repeat sever:
times.
Assemble, march. Raise the arm vl'tieally to its full extel
and describe hul'izolltnl f'ireles.
Range, or Change elevation. To announce range, extend t1
arm to\vard the leaders or men for whom the signal is intenc1c
1
fist dosed; by keeping fist closed battle sight is indicated; t
opening and closing the expose thumb and fingers to
number equal to the hundrecls of Jlanls; to add 50 yards d
scribe a. short horizontal line "ylth forefingel', To change elev;
tion, indicate the amount of increase or hy fingers
above; point upward to indicate increase and downward 1
indicate decrease.
What range are you or What is the ExteI
the arms toward the person wId ressec1. one hand open, pal
to the front. resting on the othel' hand. fist closed.
Are you readyl or I am ready. Raise the hand. fingers e
tended and jOined, palm toward the person addressed.
Commence firing. Move the arm extended in full lcngth, har
palm down, several times through a horizontal arc in front j
the body.
Fire faster. Execute rapidly the signal II Commence firing,"
Fire slower. Execute slowly the signal H Commence firjng."
To swing the cone of fire to the right, or left. Extend tl
arm in full length to the front. palm to the right (left) ; SWiI
the arm to right (left), and pOint in the direction of the ne
target.
FiX bayonet. Simulate the movement of the right hand
"Fix bayonet" (par. 95).-(0. I. D. R.. No. 14, May 18.1916
Suspend !Iring. Raise nnd hold the foreCLrm steadily in a hOl
ORDERS, COMMANDS, AND SIGNALS.
81
,ntal position in front of the forehead, palm of the hand to
e front.
Cease firing. Raise the forearm as in suspend :firing and swing
up atul d(HVJl several times in front of the face.
Platoon. Extend fhe arm horizontally toward the platoon
ader; clesctibe small circles with the hand. (See par. 44.)
Squad. Extend the arm horizontally towarel the platonn
ader; swing the hand up and (lo\vn from the wrist. (See
11'. 44.)
Rush. Same as double time.
44. The signals platoon alld squad arc intended primarily for
mmunication bet\veen the captain and his plntoon leaders.
le Signal platoon or squad indicates that the platoon ('om
ander is to cause the signal which follo\vs to be executed by
atoon or squad.
FLlo.G SIGNALS.
45. The Signal flags described below are carried by the com
.ny musicians in the field.
In a regiment in wbieh it is impracticable to make the perilla
nt battalion division alphabetically, tbe fiags of a battalion
e as shown; fiags are aSSigned to the cOClpanies alphabetically.
lthin their respective battalions, in the Ol:der given below.
rst battalion:
Company A. Red field, white square.
Company B. Red field, blue square.
Company C. Red field, white diagonals.
Company D. Red field, blue diagonals.
,cond battalion:
Company E. White field, red square.
Company F. White field, blue square.
Company G. White field. red diagonals.
Company H. White field, blue diagonals.
lird battalion:
Company I. B1ne field, red square.
Company K. Blue field, white square.
Company L. Blue field, red diagonals.
Company IVI. Blue field, white diagonals.
46. In addition to tbeir IJse ill visual ;o:ignaling, these fin
serve to mark the assembly Iloint of the company \vben di
organi7.Nl uy cOlllbut, to mark the location of the eOJlll1aI
in bivouac and when. sueh use desirable.
47. (1) For communication het'iveen tlil.::' firing Hne and tl
reserve or commander in the rear, the subjoined sl,i;nals (Sign
Corps codes) art! prescribed and shollhl he memorized. ]
their concealment from the enemy's view shou
be insured. In the ahsence of signal Hags, the headdress '
other substitute may be used.
r ctter of
all'habet.
If signl:llHl from the rear to the
liDe.
rf slgnalcu from the firing
Unc to the rear"
-,------
A 11 ...... 1 Ammr:nition forward .....
e e C ....... Charge (n:u.nuntory at all time:;;'.
C y .. . : Cease firing ...............
D'l' ............. Double time or I'n::.sh" ......... .
F ................ Commenccflrtn,; ............... .
F H Fb.' bayonets .................... .
FL ............. ' Artillery flro is clJ,.uslng us losses.
G ............ 1 1fovc ........... .
II 11 IT .......... ; Ir3lt .......... .
............... N8:cativr. ....................... .
T, '1' .... , .... Lrft ... : ..............
0.. 'V11r1.t is the (R. N., etc.)? In
(A l' d 0 is ,1 n terrogatory.
Sr1n:1.11ilore
only.)
-- -- -- - - .-. do _._. ____ ... _a.OD
(All methods but
ardois and
,semaphore.)
P ................ AillrmaLive ..................... .
R ........... ..
R I' ............. Ttau!!;c .......................... .
R'1' ..... H:ight ................
S S S ............ Support gOing for-,.,ard ........ ..
S 1] F ........... Suspend fu-ing; ........ ...... .
T .......... T'a:rget .... .
Ammunition required.
.\m abont to charge it no
strnctions to the contrary.
Cease firing.
Double time or "rush."

Artillery tire 11': causing
losses.
Preparing to move forward.
Halt.
Negative.
I.e!t.
\Vlmt is the (E. :N., etc.)?
terrogatory.
Do.
Affirmati,c.
Acknowledgment.

l\.ight.
8ilnport nflfldf',d.
Snspfmd firing.
Target.
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER.
(2) THE T'VOt\RM SEMAPHORE COilE.
(See illustration8 on pages 280 and 281.)
Section 4. School of the Soldier.
!IS. instructor explains briefly each movement, first exe-
ting it himself if practicable. He requires the recruits- to
:(e the proper positions unassisted and does not touch them
. tbe purpose of correcting them, except 'when they are unable
correct themselves. He a \'01(1s keeping thelll too long at -the
Jle movement, although each should be understood before
ssing to another. He exacts by clegrees the desired precision
d uniformity.
19. In order thnt all may advance as rapidly as their abili-
s permit, tIle recruits are grouped according to proficiency. as
progresses. Those \1,'110 lad..: aptitude and quicliuess
2: separated fro111 the others and placed under experienced
ill musters.
INSTRUCTION WITHOUT ARMS.
50. }j""or preliminary 'instruction ft number of recruits, usually
t exceeding three or four, are formed as a squau in single
uk.
rOSl'HON OF TIIE SOLDIEU, OR ATTENTION,
51. Heels on the same line and as near each other us the
,formation of the man permits.
H'eet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45"',
Knees straight, without stiffness.
Hips level and drlnvn bacli: slightly: body erect and resting
Jally OIl llips; chest lifted and archeu; shoulders squnre and
ling equally.
c\rms and hands hanging naturally, along tile spam of
tronsers.
Head erect llnd s(jnLLrely to the front. chin drawn in so that
axis of the 11euu fl nel neck is vertical; eyes straight to the
mt.
Weight of the body resting eqnally npon the heels and balls
the feet.
TEE RESTS.
52. Being at a halt. the commands are: FALL OUT; RES'
AT EASE; and. 1. Parade, 2. REST.
At the command fall out, the men may leave the runks, t
are to remain in the immediate vicinity. They reSUl
their former places, at attention, :-1 t the command fall in.
At the command rest each man keeps one foot in place, bnt
not required to preserve silence or immobiJity.
At the comlllflnd at ease each mall keeps 011e foot in pltl
and is-required to preserve silence but not immobility,
53. 1. Parade, 2. REST. Carry the right foot 6 inches straig
to the rear, left knee slightly bent; clasp the hands, ,vi the
constraint, i!1 front of the center of the bod:r', fingers jOiUE
left hnlHl U[)f)erlIlOst
j
!eft thumb L'1aspt'd by the thumb and
finger of the right hand; preserve silence and steadiness
position.
54. '1'0 "esume tbe attention: 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION.
The men the position of the soldier.
EYES RIGHT on.
55. 1. Eyes, 2. RIGHT (LEFT), 3. FRONT.
At the command r"ight, turn the bead Lo the right obliql
eyes fixed on the linc of eyes of the men in, or supposed to
in, the same rani,. At the command front, turn the head a
eyes to the front.
FACINGS.
56. To the flank: 1. Right (left), 2. FACE.
Raise slightly the Jeft heel and right toe; face to the
turning on the right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on t
hall of the left foot; place the left foot by the side of the rig
Left face is executed 011 the left heel in the correspondi
munnet-.
Right (left) half face is execnted similarly, faCing 45
0

"To face in marclling" ancl advance, turn on the ball
either foot and step off with ,he other foot in the new line
SOHOOL OF THE SOLDIER.
6i
'ectlon; to face in marching without gaining ground in the
IV direction. turn on the ball of either foot and mark time.
;7. To the rear: 1. About, 2. FACE.
Darry the toe of the right foot about a half footlength to the
,r and slightly to the left of the left heel without changing
l position of the left foot; face to the rear, turning to the
:ht on the left heel and right toe; place the right heel by the
Ie of the left.
SALUTE 'VITH THE HAND.
58. 1. Hand, 2. SALUTE.
Raise the right hand smartly tm the tip of the forefinger
lches the lower part of the headdress or forehead above the
:ht eye, thumb and fingers extended and joined, palm to the
t, forearm Inclined at about 45, hand and wrist straight;
the same time look toward the person saluted. (TWO) Drop
~ arm smartly by the side.
For rules governing salutes, see" Honors and Salutes," para ..
aphs 758-765.
STEPS AND HAltOHINGS.
59 . .All steps and marchings executed from a halt, except
:ht step, hegin with the left foot.'
ao. The length of the full step. in quick time is 30 inches,
lasured from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of
o steps per minute.
The length of the full step in double time is 36 inches; the
dence is at the rate of 180 steps per minute.
The instructor, when necessary,indicates the cadence of the
~ by call1ng one, two, three, four, or left, right, the instant
e left and right foot, respectively, should be planted.
81 . .All steps and marchings and movements involving march
e executed in quick time unless the squud be marching in
uble time, or double time be added to the command; in the
tter case double time Is added to the preparatory command.
,ample: 1. Squad right, double time, 2. MARCH (School of the
und).
93512-17- -3
QUICK TIME.
62. Being ~ a halt, to march forward in quick time: 1. F,
ward, 2. MARCH.
At the command forward, shift the weight of the body to 1
right leg, left knee straight.
At the command march, move the left foot smartly strai!
forward 30 inches from the right, sole ncar the ground. a
plant it ,vithout shock; next, in like manner, advance the rif
foot and plant it as above; continue the march. The ar
swing naturally.
63. Being at a haIt, or In march In quick time, to march
double time: 1. Double time, 2. MARCH.
If at a halt, at the first command sMft the weight of j
body to the rigllt leg. At the command march, raise the fo
arms, fingers dosed, to a horizontal position along the wa
line; take up an easy run with the step and cadence of doul
time, allo\ving a natural s,vinging motion to the arms.
If marching in quick time, at the command march, given
either foot strikes the ground, take one step in quick time. a
then step off in double time.
64. To resume the quick time: I. Quick time, 2. MARCH.
At the command march, given as either foot strikes t
ground, advance nnd plant the other foot in double tiro
resume the quick time, dropping the hands by the sides.
TO MARK TIME.
65. Being in march: 1. Mark time, 2. MAltCH.
At the command march. given as either foot strikes t
ground, advance and plant the other foot; bring up the foot
rear and continue the cadence by alternately raising each f(
about 2 inches and planting it on line with the other.
Being at a halt. at the command march, raise and plant t
feet as described above.
THE HALF STEP.
66. 1. Half step, 2. MARCH.
Take steps of 15 inches in quick time, 18 inches in doni
time.
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER.
67. Forward, half step, halt, and mark time may be execnted
e from the other in quick or double time.
To resume the full step from half step or mark time: 1. For-
lId, 2. MARCH.
SIDE STEP.
68. Being at a halt or mark time: 1. Right (left) step,
MARCH.
Carry and plant the right foot 15 inches to the right; bring
e left foot beside it and continue the movement in the cadence
quick time.
The sirle step is used for short distances only and is not exe-
Ited in double time.
If at order arms, the side step is executed at trail without
rnmand.
DACI{ STEP.
69. Being at a halt or mark time: 1. Backward, 2. MARCH.
Take steps of 15 inches straight to the rear.
The back step is used for short distances only and is not exe-
Ited in double time.
If at order arms, the back step is executed at trail without
mmand.
TO HALT.
70 .. To arrest the march in quick or double time: 1. Squad,
HALT.
At the command halt, given as either foot strikes the grounu,
ant the other foot as in marching; raise and place the first
at by the side of the other. If in double time, drop the hands
, the sides.
TO MAllCR BY THE FLANK.
71. Being in march: 1. By the right (left) lIa.nk, 2. MARCH.
At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the
'ound, advance and plant the left foot, then face to the right
marching and step off in the new direction with the right
lOt.
68. EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATiONS.
TO MARCH TO THE nEAR.
72. Being in march: 1. To the rear, 2. MARCH.
At the command march, given as tIle right foot strikes tl:
gronnd, allvance anll plant the left foot; turn to the right abOl
on the b(l118 of both feet and immediately stcp off with the Ie
foot.
If marching in double time! turn to the right about, takir
foul' in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off ,vii
the left foot.
CHAKGE STEP.
73. Being in march: 1. Change step, 2. MARCH.
At the command march, gi\"en as the right foot strikes U
ground, advance and plant the left foot; plant the toe of tt
right foot near the heel of the left and step off with the 181
foot.
The Chan!{8 on tlle right foot is similarly executed, the can
mund maroh being given as the left foot strikes the ground.
MANUAL OF ARMS.
74. As soon as practicable the recruit is taught the usc
nomenclature (PI. I), and care of his rifle; when fair
has been made in tbe instruction without arms, he is taugl
the manual of arms; instruction ,vithout arms and that wit
arms alternate.
75. 'l'he following rules govern the carrying of the piece:
First. The piece is not carried with cartridges in either til
chamber or the magazine except when specifically ordere(
When so loa(]ed, or supposed to be loaded, it is habitually cal
ried locked; that is, with the safety lock turned to the" safe.'
At all other times it is carried unlocked, with the trlgge
pull eLl.
Second. 'Vhenever troops are formed under arms, pieces ar
Inllllerliately Inspected at the commands: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS
3. Order (Right shoulder, port), 4. ARMS.
A similar inspectIon is made immedlate1y before dismissal.
If cartridges nr(' found in ihe chamber or magazine, they ar
removed and placed in the belt.
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 811
Third. The cutoff is kept turned "off" except when co.r-
idges are actually used.
Fourth. The bayonet Is not fixed except in bayonet exercise,
. guard, or for combat.
Fifth. Fall in is executed with the piece at the order arms.
Lll out, rest, and at ease are executed as without arms. On
suming attention tbe position of order tUllS is taken.
Sixth. If at the order, unless otherwise prescribed, the piece
brought to the right shoulder at the command march, the
ree motions corresponding with the first three steps. Move
ents may be exeCl,lted at the trail by prefacing the prepara-
ry command with the words at trail; as, 1. At trail, forward.
MARCH; the trail is taken at the command march.
When the facings, alignments, open and close ranks, tnking
terval or distance, and assemblings are execu ted from the
'der, raise the piece to the trail while in motion and resume
~ order on halting,
Seventh. The piece is brought to the order on baiting. The
,ecutiou of the order begins when the halt is completed.
Eighth. A disengaged hand in double time is held as when
ithout arms.
76. '1'he following rules govern the execution of the manual
: arms:
First. In all positions of the left hand at the balance (ceoter
, gravity, bayonet unfixed) the thumb clasps the piece; tbe
iog is included in the grasp of the hand.
Second. In all positions of the piece .. diagonally across the
Jdy" the position of the piece, left arm and band are the same
:; in port arms.
Third. In resuming the order from any position in the manual,
Ie motion next to the last concludes with the butt of the piece
oout 3 inches from the ground, barrel to the rear, the left balld
hove and ncar the right, steadying the piece, fingers extended
ad jOined, forearm and wrist straight and inclining down-
'ard, 'Ill fingers of the right hand grasping the piece. To
)lIlplete the order, lower the piece gently to the ground wltb
lC right hand, drop the left quickly by the side, and take the
osition of order arms.
70 EXTRACTS FROM J.NFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
Allowing the piece to drop through the right hand to tJ
ground. or other similar abuse of the rifle to produce etfect
executing the manual, is prohibited.
Fourth. The cadence of the motions i8 that of quick tim
the recruits arc first required to give their whole attention
the details of the motions, the cadence being gradually a<:qllirj
as they become accustomed to llundling pieces. The i
8tructor may require them to count aloud in cadence with tl
motions.
Fiftll. The manual is taught at a halt and the movements ar
for the purpose of instruction, divided into motions and ex
cuted in detail; in this Cfise the command' of execution dete
mines the prompt execution of the .first motion, and the cor
mands, two, three, four, that of the other motions.
To execute the movements in detail, the instructor first ca'
tious: By the all movements diYided into motions al
then executed as above explained until he cautions: Without t1
numbers; 01' cOllunands movements other than those in the mal
ual of arms.
Sixth. Whenever circumstances require, the regular POSltlOI
of the manual of nrms nnd th-a firings may be ordered WithOl
regard-to the previous position of the piece.
Under exceptional conditions of weather or fatigue the rif
may be carried in any manner directed.
77. Position of order arms standing: The butt rests evenly c
the ground, barrel to the rear, toe of the butt on a line with 1<
of, and touching, the right shoe, arms and hands hanging na
mally, right hand holding the piece between the thumb au
fingers.
78. Being at orde" arms: 1. :Present, 2. ARMS.
With the right Iland carry the pIece In front of the center c
the body,. barrel to the rear and vertical, grasp it with the lej
hanel at the balance, forearm horizontal and resting agaiust tb
body. (TWO) Grasp the small of the stock with the right hani
79. Being at order firms: 1. Port, 2. ARMS.
With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonall
across the body. grasp it smartly with both hands; the rlgh',
palm down, at the small of the stock; the left palm up, at tb
balance; barrel up, sloping to the left and crossing opposite tb
SCHOOL OF THESOLDIER. '71
lction of the neck with the left shoulder; right forearm
,izontal ; left forearm resting against the body; the piece in a
,tical plane parallel to the front.
10. Being at present arms: 1. 1'0rt, 2. ARMS.
JUrl'f the piece diagonallf across the body and take the posi-
n of port arms.
11. Being at port arms: 1. Present, 2. ARMS.
Jarry the piece to a vertical positiOn in front of the center of
, body and take the position of present arms.
12. Being at present or port arms: 1. Order, 2. ARMS.
Get go 'vith the right hand; lower and carl'Y the piece to the
:ht with the left hanel; regrasp it with the right hand just
Dve the lower baml; let: go with the ieft hand, and take the
<t to the Jast pOSition in coming to the order. (TWO) Com-
,te the order.
13. Being at order arms: 1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS.
With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally
l'OSS the body; carry the right hand quickly to the butt, em-
lCing it, the heel between tlle lirst two fingers. (TWO) With-
t changing the grasp of the right hand, place the piece on the
shoulder, barrel up and inclined at an angle of about 45
)m the horizontal, trigger guard in the hollow of the shoulder,
elbow near the side, the piece In a vertical plane perpen-
to the front; carry the left hand, thumb and lingers
tenued and joined, to the small of the stock, tip of the fore-
touching the cocking piece, wrist straight and elbow
WH. (THREE) Drop the left hand by the side.
S4. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. Order, 2. ARMS.
Press the butt down quickly and tilrow the piece diagonally
ross the body, the right hand retaining the grasp of the butt.
WO), (THREE) Execute order nrms as described from port
ms.
85. Being at port arms: 1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS.
Change the right hand to the butt. (TWO), (THREE) As In
;ht shoulder arms from order arms.
8a. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. 1'0rt, 2. ARMS.
Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally
'fOSS the body, the right hand retaining its grasp of the butt.
Change the right hand to the small of the stock.
on EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
87. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. Present, 2. ARMS.
Execute port arms. (THREE) Execute present arms.
88. Being at present arms: 1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS.
Execute port arms. (TWO), (THREE), (FOUR) Execute ril
shoulder arms as from port arms.
89. Being at port arms: 1. Left shoulder, 2. ARMS.
Carry the piece with the right hand and place it on 1
left shoulder, barrel up, trigger guard in the hollow of the sho
der; at the same time grasp the butt with the left hand, h
between first and second fingers, thumb and fingers closed
the stock. (TWO) Drop the right hand by the side.
Being at left shoulder arms: 1. Port, 2. ARMS.
Grasp the piece with the right hand at the small of the sto,
(TWO) Carry the piece to the right with the right hand, regr'
it with the left, and take the pOSition of port arms.
Left shOulder arms may be ordered directly from the ord
right shoulder or present, or the reverse. At the command ar
execute port arms and continue in cadeuce to the positi
ordered.
90. Being at order arms: 1. Parade, 2. REST.
Oarry the right foot 6 inches straight to the rear, left ~
Slightly bent; carry the muzzle in front of the center of t
body, barrel to the left; grasp the piece with the left hand jl
below the stacking swivel, and with the right hand helow a
against the left.
Being at parade rest: 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION.
Resume the order, the left hand quitting the piece opposi
the right hlp. .
91. Being at order arms: 1. Trail, 2. ARMS.
Raise the piece, right arm slightly bent, and incline t
muzzle forward so that the barrel makes an angle of about 3
with the vertical.
When it can be done without dauger or inconvenience
others, the piece may be grasped at tIle balance and the mUZ2
lowered until the piece is horizontal; a similar position in tl
left hand may be used.
92. Being at trail arms: 1. Order, 2. ARMS. .
Lower the piece with the right hand and resume the order.
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDDm.
RIFLE SALUTE.
13. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. Rille. 2. SALUTE.
jarry the left hand smartly to the small of the stock, forearm
'izontal, palm of hand down, thumb and fingers extended and
ned, forefinger touching end of cocking piece; look toward
person saluted. (TWO) Drop left hand by the side; turn
ld and eyes to the front.
4. Being at order or trail arms: 1. Rifle, 2. SALUTE.
jarry the left hand smartly to the right side, palm of the
1(1 do,vn, thumb and fIngers extended and jOinell, forefinger
linst piece near the mnzzle; look toward tho person saluted.
ATO) Drop the leTt hand by the side; turn the head and eyes
the front.
~ r rules governing salutes, see Ii Honors and Salutes."
THE BAYONET.
5. Being at order arms: 1. Fix, 2. BAYONET.
f the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade
t; grasp the bayonet with the right hand, back of hand to
rd the body; draw the bayonet from thescabbaril and fix it
the barrel, glancing ut the muzzle; resume the orc;ler.
"f the bayonet is carried on the haversne!,: Draw tile bayonet
h the left hand and fix it in the most convenient manner.
'6. Being at order arms: 1. Unfix, 2. BAYONET.
f the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: IDxecute para(jc
t; grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with tile right
ld, preSSing the spring with the forefinger of the right hand;
se the bayonet until the handle is about 12 inches above the
zzle of the piece; ilrop the point to the left, back of the hund
card the body, and, glancing at the Scabbard, return the
Tonet, the blade passing between the left arm and tbe body;
'rasp the piece with the right hand and resnme tlle ordEr.
f the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take
. bayonet from the rifle with the left Iland and return it to
i scabbard in the most convenient manner.
If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and nnfi]
in the most expeditious and convenient manner and the pi
returned to the original position.
lnx and uufix bayonet are executed with promptness ,
regularity but not in cadence.
97.' CHARGE BAYONET. Whether executed at halt or
motlon, the bayonet is held toward the oppohent as in the pi
tion of guard in the Manual for Bayonet Exercise.
Exercises for instruction in bayonet combat are prescribed
the Manual for Bayonet Exercise.
THE INSPECTION.
98. Being at order arms: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS.
At the second command take the position of port ar]
(TWO) Seize the bolt handle with the thumb and forefinger
the right hand, turn the handle up, draw the holt back, ,
glance at the chamber. Having found the chamber empty,
hn ving emptied it, raise the he!ld and eyes to the front.
99. Being at inspection arms: 1. Order (Right shOUlder, pOl
2. ARMS.
At the preparatory command push the holt forward, turn
handle down, pull the trigger, and resume port arms. At
command arms, complete the movement ordered.
TO DISMISS 'l'HE SQUAD,
100. Being at halt: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Port, 4. ARl
5. DISMISSED.
Section 5. School of the Squad.
101. Soldiers are grouped into sqU!l(]s for purposes of instr
tion, discipline, control, and order.
102. The squaa proper consists of a corporal and sel
privates.
The movements in the School of the Squad are designed
make the squad a fixed unit and to facilitate the control "
movement of the company. If the number of men grouped
SCHOOL O'F THE SQUAD.
'i6
ore than 3 and less than 12, they are formed as a squad of
file,:;;" the excess above 8 being posted as tHe closers. If the
Lmber grouped is greater than 11, 2 -or more squads are formed
Id the group is termed a platoon.
For the instruction of recruits, these rules may be modified.
103. The corporal is tlw sqUtt.] teafler, and when absent is
placed by a designated private. If no private is designated,
e senior in length of service acts as leader.
The corporal, when in ranks, is posted as the left man in the
ont rank of the squad.
When the corporal leaves the ranks to lead his squad, his rear
nk man steps into the front rank, and the file remains blanl<
ttil the corporal returns to his place in ranks, when his rear
uk mun steps back into the rear rank. r
104. In battIe olficers and sergeants endeavor to preserve
e integrity of squads; they ,designate new leaders to replace
ase disabled, organize new squads when necessary, lind see
at every man is placed in a squad.
Men are taught the necessity of remaining with the sqnad to
Idch they belong and, in ""S8 it be broken up or they become
para ted therefrom, to attach themselves to the nearest squall
Id platoon leaders, whether these be of their own or of another
ganization.
105. The squad executes the halt, rest, facings, steps, anrl
lrchlngs and the man ua! of arms as explained in the Schoo!
the Solllier.
TO FORM THE SQU.All.
106. To form the squad the instructor places himself 3 paces
front of where the center is to be and commands: FALL IN.
r.rhe lTIen assemble at attention, pieces at the order, and "fire
ranged by the corpnral in double rank, as nearly as practicable
order of height from right to left, each man dropping his left
,nd as soon as the man on his left has his interval. The rear
nk forms with distance of 40 inches.
The instructor then commands: COUNT OFF.
At this command all except the right file execute eyes right,
Id beginning on the right, the men in each rank count one,
two, three, four; each man turns his head and eyes to the frc
as he counts.
Pieces are then inspected.

107. '1'0 align the squad,' the base file or files having be
established: 1. Right (Left), 2. DRESS, 3. 'FRONT.
At the command dress all men place the left hand upon t
hip (whether dressing to the right or left) ; each man, exec
the base file, when on or ncar the new line executes eyes rig]
and, taking steps of 2 or 3 inches, places himself so that 1
right arlll rests lightly against the arm of the man on 11is rigl
and so that his eyes anel shoulders are in line with thosc of t
men on his l'ight; the real' rank men cover in file.
The instructor the alignment of both ranks from t
right flank and orders up or bac!, such men as may be in rei
or in tulvul1cc, of the line; only tlle men designated move.
i\..t tbe command front, gi'\"cn when the ranks are aligned, en,
man turns his head and eyes to the front and drops his 1
hand by his side.
In the fh,t (Ir1118 the basis of the alignment is established 0
01' puraliel to, the front of the squad; afterwards, in obliql
directions.
Whene\'er the position of the base file or files necessitates
cOllsiclomble movement by the squad. such movement will I
executed by marching to the front or oblique, to the flanl, ,
backward, as the case may be, without other command, and;
the truil. ,
108. To preserve the alignment when marching: GUll
RIGHT (LEFT).
'I;.Ile men preserve their intervals from the side of the guid
yielding to pressure from that side and resisting pressure fro
the opposite direction; they recover intervals, if lost, by grad
ally opening out or closing in; they recover alignment by slight
hmgthening or shortening the step j the rear-rank IDen COVI
their file leader..., nt 40 inches.
In double rank, the front-rank man on the right, or designatf
flunk, ('onducts the march; when marching faced to the fian:
the leading man of the front rank is the guide.
SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD.
TO TARE INTERVALS AND DISTANCES.
109. Being in line at II halt: 1. Take interval, 2. To the right
eft), 3. MARCH, 4. Squad, 5. HALT.
At the second command the rear-rank men march backward
steps and halt; at the command march all face to the rigllt
nd thc leading man of each rani, steps off; the other men step
tr in succession, each following the preceding man at 4 paces,
mr .. rank IDen marching abreast of their file leaders.
At the command halt, given when all have their Intervals, ali
alt and fnce to tile front.
110. Being at intervals, to assemble the sqnad: 1. Assemble,
, the right (left), 2. MARCH.
The front-rank man on the right stands fast, the rear-rank
tan on the right closes to 40 inches. Tlle other men face -to
le rigllt, close hy the shortest line, and face to tlle front.
Ill. Being in line at a halt and huving counted off: 1. Take
istance, 2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT.
At the command march No.1 of the front rank moves straight
1 the front; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 of the front rank and Nos. 1, 2, 3,
tld 4 of the rear rank, In the order named, move straight to
lC front, each stepping off "0 as to follow the preceding man
t 4 paces. The command halt is given when all have theil'
i$tances.
In case more than- one squad is in line, ea.ch squad executes
Ie movement as above. The guide of each rank of numbers is
:ght.
112. Being at distances, to assemble the squad: 1. Assemble,
MARCH.
No. 1 of the front rank stands fast; the other numbers
)rward to their proper places in line.

TO STACK AKD ARMS.
113. Being in line at a halt: STACK ARMS.
Each even number of the front rank grasp,':'; his piece with
Ie left hand at the upper band unu rests the butt between his
barrel to the front, lnuzzle inclined slightly to the front
ad opposite the center of the interval on his right, the thumb
nd forefinger raising the stacl{jng swivel; each even -'Dumber
78 EXTRACTS FROM mFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
of the real' rank then passes his piece, barrel to the rear,
his file leader, 1vl1O grasps it between the bands with his rig
hand and throws the butt about 2 feet in advance of that
his own piece and opposite the right of the interval, the rig
hand slipping to the upper band, the thumb and forefing
raising the stacking swivel, which he engages with that of J
own piece; each odd number of the front rank raises his pie
with the right hand. carries it well forward, barrel to the fron
the left hnnd, guiding the stacl,ing swivel, engnges. the low
hook of the swivel of his own piece with the free hook of th
of the even number of the rear rank; he then t.urns the barr
outward into the angle formed by the other two pieces aJ
lowers the butt to the ground, to the right of and against tl
toe of his right shoe. .
The stacks malle, the loose pieces are laid on them by tl
even numhers of the' front rank.
When eaell man has finished handllng pieces, be takes tl
position of the soldier.
114. Being in line hehind the stacks: TAKE ARMS.
The loose pieces are returned by thc even numbers of tl
front rank; each even number of the front rank grasps his 0\'
piece with the left hand, the piece of his rearrank man wil
his right hund, grasping both between the bands; each oc
number of the front runk grasps his piece in the same way wil
the right hanll. disengages it by raising the butt from tl
ground unci then, turning the piece to tbe right, detaches
from the stad:;:; each even number of the front rank disengagl
and detaches his piece by turning it to the left, and then pass.
the pieee of his renr-rank man to him. and all resume the orde
115. Should any squad have Kos. 2 and 3 blank files, No.
real' rank takes the place of No. 2 rear ranI' in making an
bre8king the stack; the stacks made or broken, I,e resumes hi
post.
Pieces not used in making the stack are termed loose pieces.
Pieces are neVeL' stacked with the bayonet fixed .
. THE OBLIQUE MARCH.
U6. For the instruction of recruits, the sqllad being
colllmn or correctly aligned, the illstructor callSCS the squad
:e half right or half left, pOints out to the men their relative
;iHons, and explains that these are to be maintained in the
lque march .
. 17. 1. Right (Left) oblique, 2. MARCH.
"ach man steps off in a direction 45' to the right of his
ginal front. He preserves his relative position, keeping his
mlders parallel to those of the gnide (the mun on the rIght
Int of the line or column), and so regulates his steps t!(at the
Iks remain parallel to their 6rigtnnI front.
U the command halt tbe men twit faeed to the front.
ro resume the (j('iginal direction: 1. Forward, 2. MAROH.
rhe men half face to the left in marching and then move
aight to the front.
[f at half step or mark time while obliquing, the oblique
,reh is resumetl by the commaniIs: 1. Oblique, 2. MARCH.
TO TURN ON MOVING PIVO'l'.
118. Being in line: 1. Right (Left) turn, 2. MARCH.
rhe movement is executed by each rftnk successively and on
, same ground. At the seconil command, the pivot man of
? front rank faces to the right in marching and tal\:es the
If step; the other men of the rank oblique to the right until
posite their places In line, then execute a Recond right oblique
d tuke the half step on arriving abreast of the pivot man.
I glance toward the marching flank wbile at half step and
ke the full step without commanil as the last man arrives on
e linc.
Right (Left) half turn is executed in a similar manner. The
vot man mukes a half change of (lirection to the right and
e other men malte quarter changes in obliquing.
TO Tvn:q" ON FIX!;n PIVOT.
119. Being in line, to tnrn and march: 1. Squad right (left),
MARCH.
At the second command, the right flank man in the front rank
res to the right in marching anti marks time; the other front-
rank men oblique to the right, place themselves abreast of 1
pivot, and mark time. In the rear rank the third man from I
right, followed in column by the second and first, moves strail
to the front until in reRr of his front-rank man, when all f.
to the right in marching and mark time; the other number
the rear rank moves straight to the front four paces and pia,
himself abreast of the man on his right. Men on the new 1:
glance toward the marching Hank while marking time and,
the last man arri,es on the Une, both ranks execute forwa
march, 'without command.
120. Being in line, to turn and halt: 1. Squad right (left).
MARCH. 3. Squad. 4. HALT.
The third command is given immediately after the secOl
The turn is executed as prescribed in the preceding paragra
except that all men, on arriving on the new line, mark til
until the fourth command is given, when all halt. The four
command should be given as the last man arri,es on the line.
121. Being in line, to turn about alld march: 1. Squad rig
(left) about, 2. MARCH.
At the secolld command, the frollt rallk twice executes squ'
right, initiating the second squad right when the man on t
marching flank has arrived abreast of the rank. In the re
rank the third man from the right, followed by the second a:
first in column, moves straight to the front until on the p r o o n ~
tion of the line to be occupiecl by the rear rank; changes dir.
tion to the right; moves in tIle new direction until in rear
his front-rank man, when all face to the right ill marchi"
mark time, alld glance toward the marching flank: The four
man marches on the left of the third to his llew position; as I
arrives on the line, both ranks execute forward, march. withol
command.
122. Being in line, to turn about and halt: 1. Squad rig]
(left) about. 2. MARCH, 3. Squad. 4. HALT.
The third command is given immediately after the secon
The turn is executed as prescrilJed ill the preceding paragral
except that all men, on arriving on the new line, mark tin
until the fourth command is given, when all /lalt. The four1
command should be given as the last man arrives on the line.
81
TO FOLLOW THE CORPORAL.
123. Being assembled or deployed, to march the squad with-
It unnecessary commands, the corporal places himself in front
I it anfl commanrls FOLLOW ME.
If in line or skirmish line, No.2 of the front ranl< follows in
p trace of the corporal at about 3 paces; tbe other men COIl-
l"1ll to the movements of No.2, guiding on him and maintain-
~ their relative pOSitions.
[f in column, the head of tbe column follows the corporal.
TO DEPLo.y AS SKIRMISHERS.
l24. Being in any formation, assembled: 1. As skirmishers,
MARCH.
'I'be corporal places bimself in front of tbe squad, if not
.ready there. J\.foving at a run, the men place themselves
):"east of the corporal at half-puce intervuls, Nos. 1 and 2 on
s right, Nos. 3 and 4 on his left, rear-rank men on the "Ight
their file leaders, extra men on the left of No.4; all then
,nform to the corporal's gait.
When the sqnad is acting alone, skirmish line is similarly
Irmed on 1\
T
o. 2 of the front rank, \vho stands fast or con-
Gues the march, as the case may be; the corporal places him-
If in front of the squad when advancing and in rear when
lIted.
When deployed us skirmishers, the men march at ease, pieees
the trail unless otherwise ordered.
The corporal is the guide when in the line; otherwise No.2
ont rank Is the guide.
125. '1.'he normal interval between skirmishers is one-half
:ce, resulting practically in one man per yard of front. The
ont of a squad thus deployed as skirmishers is about 10 paces.
TO INCREASE OR DIMINISH INTERVALS.
126. If assembled, and it is desired to deploy at greater than
e normal interval; or if deployed, and it is rlesired to increase
or decrease the interval: 1. As skirmishers, (so many) pace
2. MARCH.
Intervals are taken at the indicated number of pa ces.
already deployed, the men move by the flank toward or aWl
from the guide.
THE ASSEMBLY'.
127. Being deployed: 1. Assemble, 2. MARCH.
The men move toward the corporal and form in their prOI!
places.
If the corporal continues to advance, the men move in doubl
time, form, and follow him.
The assembly while marching to the rear is not executed.
KNEELING AND L Y I ~ DOWN.
128. If standing: KNEEL.
Half face to the right; carry the right toe about 1 foot to tl
left rear of the left heel; kneel on right knee, sitting as neari
as possible on the right heel; left forearm across left thigl
piece remains in position of order arms, right hand grasping
above the lower band.
129. If standing or kneeling: LIE DOWN.
Kneel, but with right knee against left heel; carry back tl
left foot and lie fiat on the belly, inclining body about 35' to tl
right; piece horizontal, barrel up, muzzle off the ground aI
pointerl to the front; elbows on the ground; left band at tl
balnnce. right hand grasping the smail of the stock opposite tl
ned,;:. This is the position of order arms, lying down..
130. If kneeling or lying dmyn: RISE.
If kneeling, stand up, faced to the front, on the ground markl
by the left heel.
If lying down, raise body on both knees; stand uP. faced
the front. on the ground marked by the \;nees.
131, If lying down: KNEEL.
Raise the body on both knees; take the position of kneel.
132. In double rank, the positions of kneeling and lyi)
down are ordinarily nsed only for the better utilization of cov,
When deployed as skirmishers, a siUing position may be tukl
in Jleu of the position kneeling,
83
LOADINGS AND FIRINGS.
l33. The commands for loading and firing are the same
hether standing, kneeling, or lying down. The firings are
vays executed at a halt.
-tVhen kneeling or lying do\vn in double ran Ii", the reur rank
)tS not loacl, aim, or tire.
The instruction in firing will be preceded by 11 command for
ooing.
Loadings are executed in line and skirmish line only. "
134. Pieces having been ordered loaded are kept loaded
thout command until the unload, or inspection arms,
esh dips being inserted \vhen the magazine is exhausted.
135. The :dming pojnt or target is carefully pointed ont.
lis may be done before or after announcing the sight sctti,l1g.
)th are inclicatec1 before giving the command for firing, but
lY be omitted when the target nppears suddenly and b; un
istakable; In such case battle sight is used if no sight setting
announced.
136 . The target or aiming point having been designated and
e.sight setting announcecl, such deSignation 01' announcement
ed not be repeated until a change of either 01' both is ncces-
t"Y.
Troops are trained to continue their fire upon the aiming
int or target designated, and at the sight setting announced,
til a ('hange is ordered.
l37. If the men are not already in the posilion of load, that
;::ition is tuken at the announcement of the sight setting;
the announcement is omitted, the position js taken fit the
st command for firIng.
138. When deployed, the use of the sling as an aid to accu-
;e firing is discretionary with each man.
TO LOAD.
39. Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. With dummy
ank or ball) cartridges, 2. LOAD
the commnnd load each fl'ont-rnnk man 01' skirmisher
'S half right and carries t.lw l'jg;ht foot to the right, ubotit 1
,e to such pOSition as ,yill insure the greatest firmness and
II EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
of the body; raises, or lowers, the piece and dropt
into the left hand at the balance, left thumb extended nl<
the stock, muzzle at the height of the breast, nnd turns the,
off up. With the right hand he turns ancl (I raws the bolt hE'
takes -u lou(led clip and inserts the end in the clip slots,
the thumb on the powder space of the top cartridge, the !lngl
extending around the piece ancl tips resting on the maga:::i
floor plate; forees the cartridges into the magazine by pressi
down with the thumb; without removing the clip, thrusts i
bolt home, turning down the hfll1clle; turns the safety lock
the .. safe" anel carries the hand to the small of the sto
Each rear-rank man moves to the right front, takes a simi:
position opposite the interval to the right of his front-runl, ml
muzzle of the piece extending the front rank, and loa
A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces beiug h'
as nearly as practicable in the position of load.
If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is similar;
kneeling, the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting, I
elbows are ,mpported by the knees. If l,'iug down, the left ho
steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of I
butt resting on the ground, the muzzle off the gronnd.
For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lyj
down) nre <.lesignatcc1 as that of load.
140. For instructlon in loading: 1. Simulate, 2. LOAD.
Execnte(l as. above described, except that the cut-off rema
II off H and the hundling of cartridges is simulated.
The recruits are first taught to simulate loading and fir!1
after a few lessons dummy cartridges may be used. Lal
blank cartridges may be 'tsed.
141. The rifle may be used as a single loader by turning
magazine "off." The magazine may be filled in whole or
part while "off" or "on" by pressing cartridges do
and back until they are in the proper place ... The use of 1
rifle as a single loader is, hOlycver, to be regarded as exceptior
TO UNLOAD.
142. UNLOAD.
Take the position of load, turn the safety lock up and'm,
bolt alternately back and forward until all the cartridges ,
ejected. After the last caItriclge is ejected the chamber
SCHOOL O'F THE SQUAD.
86
ose,j by first thrusting the bolt slightly forward to it
om the stud holding it in place when the chamb.er is.
'essing the follower down and back to engage it ul\der the
.It ane! then thrusting the bolt home; the trigger is pulled.
18 cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and returneel to tl;le
,It anel the piece is brought to the oreler.
TO SET Tl3:E SIGHT.
143. RANGE, ELEVEN HUNDRED (EIGHT-FIFTY, etc.), or
lTTLE SIGHT,
The sight is set at the elevation indicated, The instructor
:plains and verifies sight settings.
TO FIRE BY VOLT_EY.
144. 1. READY, 2. AIM, 1\, Squad, 4. FIRE.
At the command ready tUrn the safety loel;: to the ., ready";
the command aim ralse the piece with both llancls fmd
rt the butt firmly against the hollow of the right shouleler,
:ht thumb clasping the stock, barrel horizontal, lei! elbow
,11 uneler the piecL', right elbow as high as the shoulder; in-
ne the head Slightly for wan! and a little to tlle right, cheek
ninst the stock, left eye closed, right eye looking through the
tch of the rear sight so fiS to perceive the object aimed at,
.ioint of forefinger resting lightly Dgainst the front of
trigger and taking up the slack; top of fl'ont sight is care-
L1.v raised into) and held in, the line of Sight.
EJach rear-rank man aims through tI18 interval to the right
Ills file leaeler and leans Slightly forward to advance the
lzzle of Ilis piece beyond the front rank.
In aiming kneeling, the left elba,v rests on the left knee,
int of elbo\v in front of l::neecap.
[n aiming sitting, the elbmvs are supported by the, knees.
In aiming lying do'\vn, raise the 11iece with both hands; rest
both elbows unel press the butt firmly against the right
)ulder.
\t the command fire press the finger' against the trigger; -fire
thout deranging the aim and ,vithout lowering or turning the
>ce; lower the piece to the position of Load llnd load.
It EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
145. To continue the firing: 1. AIM, 2. Squad, 3. FIRE.
Each command is executed as previously explained. Lo
(from magazine) is executed by drawing back and thrust!'
home the bolt with the right hand, leaving the safety lock
the "ready."
'1'0 FIRE A.T WILL.
146. FIRE AT WILL.
Each man, Independently of the others, comes to the read
alms carefully and deliberately at the aiming point or targ.
fir"s, loads, and continues the firing until ordered to suspend
cease firing.
147. '1'0 increase (decrease) the rate of fire in progress t
instructor shouts: FASTER (SLOWER).
Men are trained to fire at the rate of about three shots p
minute at effective ranges and five or six at close ranges, (
voting the minimum of time to loading and the maximum
deliberate aiming. To illustrate the necessity for deliberati(
Ilnd to habitUate men to combat conditions, small and compal
t1vely Indistinct targets are designated.
ro ~ I l I BY CLIP.
148. CLIP FmE.
Executed in the same manner as fire at will, except that ea
man. nfter having exhausted the cartridges then in the pie,
suspends firing.
ro SUSPEND FIRING.
149. The instructor blows a long blast of the whistle a
repeats same, if necessary, or commands: SUSPEND FIRI:N
Firing stops; pieces are held, Loaded and locked, in a po
tlon of readiness for iostant resumption of firing, rear sigl
unchanged. The men continne to observe tlle target or aimi
point, or the place at which the target disappeared, or at whi
it is expected to reappear.
This whistle signal may be used as a preliminary to ceo
firing.
SCHOOL OF THE SO-UAD.
87
TO CEASE }'IRING.
150. CEASE FIRING.
Firing stops; pieces not already there arc brought to the
.osition of lOll{}; those not loaded are loaded; Sights are laid,
,ieces are locked and brought to the order.
Cease firing is used for long pauses, to prepare for changes of
OSition, or to steady the men.
151.. Oommands for suspending or ceaSing fire may be given
t an:;.' time after the preparatory cOlllmand for firing ,"vllethel'
he firing has actually commenced or not.
THE USE OF COVER.
152. The recruit should be given careful instruction in the
ldividual use of cover.
It shoul<l be impressed upon him that. in taking advantage
f natural cover, he must be able to fire easily and effectively
pon the enemy; if advancing on an enemy, he mnst do so
teadily and as rapidly as possible; he must conceal himself as
meh as possible \vhile firing and while advancing. While
his Sight he should be under cover or lying prone.
153. '1'0 teacll him to fire easily and effectively, at the same
me concealing hhnself from the view of the enemy. he is
racticed in simulated firing in the prone, sitting, kneeling, uno
pOSitions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps of earth
r rocks. from depressions, gullies, ditches, tloonvays, or win-
ows. He is taught to fire :ll'Olll1cl the right side 01: his eonceal-
lent whenever possible, or, when this is not pOSSible, to rise
lough to fire over the top of his concealment.
When these details are understood, he is required to select
)Vel' with reference to an assullwd IlllI
J
! ancI to place himsell
:!hind it in propel' position for firing.
154. l1'he evil of remaining too long in one place, llOwevel'
)od the concealment, should be explained. He should be taught
I advance from cover to covel', selecting cover in advance
Ire leaving his concealment.
It should be impressed upon him that a man running
an enemy furnishes a poor target. He slio111u be trained
l springing from a prone position behind concealment, running
(
at top speed to cover and throwing himself behind It. He shaul
also be practiced in advancing from covel' to cover by crawlinl
or by 1ylng on the left side, rifle grasped in the right hand, an
pnshlng himself forward with the right leg.
165. He should be taught that, when fired on while actir
independently, he should drop to the ground, seek cover, an
then endeavor to locate his enemy.
156 . . The instruction of tlle recruit in the use of cover is COl
tinued in the combat exercises of the company, hut he mOl
then be taught that the proper advance of the platoon or con
pany aud the effectiveness of its fire is of greater Importan(
than tho qlles;tiorl of rover for individuals. IIe should also t
taught that he may not moye about or shift his position in tl
fiI'ing line except the better to see the target
OBSERVATION.
,.157. The ability tu use his eyes accurately is of great impo
tance to the soldier. The recruit should be trained in observir
his surronnding from positions and when on the march.
He should be practiced in pointing out and naming militm
featul"eS of the ground; in distinguishing between living beings
in counting distant groups of objects or beings; in recognizir
colors and forms.
158. In the training of men in the mechanism of the firir
Une. they shOUld be practiced in repeating to one another targ.
fiod aiming point designations and in quickly locating and poin
lng out a designated target. They should be taught to dl
tinguish, from a prone position. distant objects, particulari
troops, both with the naked eye and with field glasses. SiID
Jarly. they shonld be trained in estimating distances.
Section 6. School of the company.
159. The captain Is responsible for the theoretical and pra
tical instruction of his officers and noncommissioned officers, fiI
only in the dnties of their respective grades, but in those of tl
next higher grades.
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.
160. The company in line is formed in double rank with the
len arranged, as far as practicable, according to height trom
gilt to left, the tallest on the right.
The original division Into squads is effected by the command:
)UNT OFF. Tile squads, snccesslvely from the right, connt 011:
l in tile School of the Squad, corporals placing themselves
, Nos. 4 of tile front rank. If the left squad contains less .than
x men, it is either increased to that number by transfers from
,her squads or is broken up aml its members assigned to other
,uads and posted in the !lne of file closers. These squad or-
lllizations are maintained, by transfers if necessary, until the
mpany becomes so reduced in numbers as to necessitate a new
vision into squads. No squad will contain less than six men.
161. The company is further divided into t,yO, three, or four
atoons, each conSisting of not less than two nor more than
nr squads. In garrison or ceremonies the strength of platoons
~ y exceed four squads.
162. At the formation of the company the platoons or squads
e numbered consecutively from right to left and these designa-
>us do not change.
~ o r convenience in giving commands and ,for reference, the
signations, right, center, left, when in line, and leading, center,
,r, when in column, are applied to platoons or squa<ts. These
signations apply to the actual right, left, center, head, or rcaI',
wlmtever direction the company may be faCing. The center
lad is the middle or right middle squad of the company.
rhe designation U So-and-so's" squad or platoon may. also
used.
l63. Platoons are assigned to the lieutenants ane! noncom
ssioned officers, in order of rank, as follows: 1, right; 2, left;
center (right center) ; 4, left center.
rhe noncommissioned officers next in rank are assigned '. as
<tes, one to each platoon. If sergeants still remain, they are
igned to platoons as additional guides. When the platoon is
,loyed, its guide or guides accompany the platoon leader.
)uring battle, these assignments are not changed; vacancies
filled by noncommissioned officers of the platoon or by the
rest available officers or noncommissioned officers arriving
h reenforclng troops.
II Ii I ! II f I Ii Ii I
I I
Ii I , I Ii Ii
III
E3 e
Cib. a ...
"''''
III
.1 DOSqds-
, 2 PIQ:ts)
Plate 11.
COLUMN OF SOD 'COLUMN
1
(l2?qds.- "PLATOONS
4Plo.tS) -
=ow
III
lliE COMPANY

;.
=
=
==
=
=
==
=

(=

u::::o:::::w
=
==
=
=

"=
=Dol
'"
QiilZI::CL::'21 I g I
' ..... PLAT.
y 'w
CAPTAIN
ii, I Ii" I iii " II
,"LJf.UT ,
E3
t!lw"
III
C
, ,
e
UNEOf" PLATOONS
"'"
4"'PI..J\T
=
=
==
=
=
=
."
J'OPlAT.
0:=
=
=
=
2"'\JEUT.
ISfSERGT.
l.AOR,;lOOPLAT.
GuIOE
SOuAO l-EAOE:R
MVSICIAN

I i2LLLI8l
OTHERS 'N l.INE
or rILECI.OSER$
PR.lvATE.
E3
--1-.
,
..
2"OPLA1'
=
=
!<DIE
=
=
=
SKiRMISH LINE - HALTEO.(16 Sqd:>. \4AoTS.)
4'""P\.AT,

III
III

'"'
IZI
III
"
0
' .... .. :: .. .... " ........ ..... r' .. .... .. ...... ................ ........ -
"
90
;:;'<D
SCHOOL OF mE cOJIPAlIIT.
81
164. The first sergeant is never assigned as a gnide. When
: commanding a platoon he Is posted as a file closer opposite
, third file from the outer flank of the first platoon; and when
, company is deployed he accompanies the captai'n.
rhe quartermaster sergeant, when present, is assigned accord-
. to his rank as a sergeant.
"nils ted men below the grade of sergeant, armed with the
e, are in ranks unless serving as guides; when not so armed,
'yare posted in the line of file closers.
,Iusicians, when required to play, are at the head of the
amn. When the company Is deployed, they accompany the
Itain.
65. The company executes the halt, rests, facings, steps and
rchings, manual of arms, loadings and firings, takes intervals
I distances and assembles, increases and diminishes intervals,
urnes attention, obliques, resumes the direct march, preserves
kneels, lies down, rises, stacks and takes arms, as
lained in the Schools of the Soldier and the Squad, sub
nting in the commands company for squad.
'he same rule applies to platoons, details, etc.,
stituting their deSignation far squad In the commands. In
same manner these execute the movements prescribed for the
'pany, whenever possible, substituting their designation for
'pany In the commands.
SG. A company eo depleted as to make division Into platoons
ractlcable Is led by the captain lIS a Single platoon, but re-
IS the designation of company. The lleutenants and first
reant assist tn fire control; the other sergeants place them
es In tbe firing line as skirmishers.
'
CLOSE ORDER.
lI1JLIC8.
S7. The guides ot the right and left, or leading and rear,
:oons, are the right and left, or leading and rear, guides,
,ectlvely, of the company when it is in line or in column of
lds. Other gnldes are In the Une ot file closers.
I platoon movements the post ot the platoon guide Is at t\le
i of the platooB, if the platoon 18 In column, and on the
guiding flank if in line. When a platoon has two guides thl
original assignment to flanks of the platoon does not change.
168. The guides of n column of squads place themselves
the flank opposite the file closers. '1'0 change the guides a
file closers to the other flanl,. the captain commands: 1. F
closers on left (right) Jlank: 2. MARCH. The file closers d,
through the column; tlle captain and guides change.
In column of squads. each rank preserves the alignment
ward the side of the guide.
169. Men in the line of file closers do not execute the 10:
Ings or firings.
Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers execute 1
manual of arms during the drill unless specially excused, wI
they remain at the order. During ceremonies they execute
movements.
170. In taking intervals and distances, unless otherwise
rected, the right and left guides. at the first command. pI:
themselves in the line of file closers. and, with them, takl
distance of 4 paces from the rear rank. In taking Intervals,
the command march, the file closers face to the flank and e:
steps off with the file nearest him. In assembling the gui
and file closers resume their positions in line.
171. In movements executed simultaneously by platoons
platoons right or platoons, column right), platoon leaders
peat the preparatory command (platoon right, etc.), applic,
to their respective platoons. The command of execution is gi'
by the captain only.
TO FOR11 TIlE COMPANY.
172. At the sounding of the assembly the first sergeant ta
position 6 paces in front of \vhcre the center of the compau:
to be, ,faces it, draws saber, and commands: FALL IN.
The rIght guide of the company places himself. faCing to
front, ,,,here the right of the company is to rest, and at E
point that the center of tile compauy will be 6 pltCCS from
opposite the first sergeant; the squads form in their pr(
place,S on the left of the right guirle, superintended by the 0:
sergeants, who then take their posts.
'he first sergeant commands: REPORT. Remaining in posi
1 at the oreler, the squad leaders, in succession from the
It, salute aud report: All present; or Private(s) --- ab-
t. The first sergeant does not retnrn the sal utes of the
ad leaders; he then commands: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3.
er, 4. ARMS, faces about, salutes the captain, reports: Sir,
present or accounted. for, or the names of the unauthorized
:mtees, and without command, takes his post.
the company can not be formed by squads, the first ser
ot commands: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Right shoulder, 4.
M:S, and calls the roll. Each man, as his name is called,
fvers here and executes order arms. The sergeant then
cts the division into squads and reports the company as
;cl'ibed above.
he captain pi aces himself 12 paces in front of the center of,
facing, tbe company in time to receive tbe report of the
, sergeant, whose salute he returns, and then, draws saber.
lle lientenants take tbeir posts when the first sergeant has
>rted and draw saber with the captain. The company, if not
er arms, Is formed in like manner omitting reference to
s.
13. For the instruction of platoon leaders and guides, the
pany, when small, may be formed in single rank. In this
lation close order movements only are execnted. The single
, executes all movements as explained for the front rank of
mpany.
TO DISMISS THE COMPANY.
'4. Being in line at a halt, the captain directs tbe ilrst
eant: Dismiss the company. 'l'he officers fall out; the first
eant places bimself faced to the front, 3 paces to the front
2 paces from the nearest flank of tlle company, salntes,
toward opposite flank of the company, nnd commands: 1,
eetion, 2. ARMS, 3. Port, '1. ARMS, 5. DISMISSED.
ALIGNMENTS.
5. Tbe alignments are executed as prescribed in tbe School
Ie Squad, tM guide being established instead of the flank
II! EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
file. The rear-rank man of the flank file keeps his head a
eyes to the front and covers his file leader.
At each alignment the captain places himself in prolongat:
of the line. 2 paces from and facing the fiank toward wh
the dl'ess is made, verifies the alignment, and commum
FRONT.
Platoon leaders take a like position when required to vel'

ON THE FIXED PIVOT.
176. Bein;; in line, to tUl'll the comparw: 1. Company ril
(Jeft), 2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT; or, 3. Forward,
MARCH.
At the second command the right-flank man In the front r!
faces to the right in marching and lllarks time; the other fre
l'ank luen oblique to the right, place themselves abreast of
pivot, and marl{ time; in the rear rank the third man from
right, followed in column by the second and first, moves strai
to the front until in rear of his front rank man, when all f
to the right in marching and mark time; the remaining mell
the rear rank move straight to the front 4 paces, oblique to
right, place themselves abreast of the third man, cover their
leaders, and mark time; the right guide steps back, takes D
on the fiank, and marks time.
'rhe fourth command is given when the last man is 1 paCE
rear of the new line.
The command halt may be given at any time after the m(
ment begins; only those halt who are In the new posit.i
Each of the others halt upon arriving on the line, aligns h
self to the right, and executes front without command.
177. Bejng in line, to form column of platoons, or
reverse: 1. 1'latoons right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. Company
HALT; or, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH.
Executed by each platoon as described for the company.
Before forming line the captain sees that the guides on
flank toward which the movement is to be executed are co'
ing. This is effected by previously announcing the guidE
that flank.
178. Being in line, to form column of squads, or the reverse;
, being in line of platoons, to form column of platoous, or the
,erse: 1, Squads right (left), 2, MARCH, or, 1, right
2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT.
Executed by each squad as described iu the School of the
uad.
U .tlle company or platoons be formed in line toward the side
the file closers, they dart through the column amI take posts
rear of the company at the second command. If tile column
squads be formed from line, the file closers taKe posts on
pivot lIank, abreast of and 4 inches from the nearest rank,
MOVEMENTS ON THE l.IOVIN G PIVOT.
l79. Being in line, to change direction: 1. Right (Left) turn,
rrIARCH, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH,
Blxecuted as described in the School of the Squad, except
It the men do not glance toward the marching lIank and that
take the full step at the fourth command, The right guifle
the pivot of the front rank. Each rear-rank man obllques
the same ground as his file leader_
SO. Being in column of platoons, to change direction: 1.
umn right (left), 2. MARCH,
the first command the leader of the leading platoon com-
ods: Right turn, At the commaud march the leading pl:lloon
ns to the right on moving pivot; its leader commands:
Forward, 2. MARCH, on completion of the turn. Rear pln-
ns march squarely up to the turning point of the ie,uling
toon and turn at command of their leaders.
81. Being in column of squads, to change direction: 1. Col.
n right (left), 2. MARCH.
,t the second command the front rank of the leading squad
ns to the right on moving pivot, as in the School of the
lad; tl1e other ranks, without command, turn successively
the same ground and in a similar manner.
82, Being in column of squads, to form line of platoons or
reverse: 1. Platoons, column right (left), 2, MAltCH,
by each platoon as described for the company.
96 EXiTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
183. Being in line, to form column of squads and char
direction: 1. Squads right (left), column right (left),
MARCl;t; or, 1. Right (Left) by squads, 2. MARCH.
In the first case the right, squad initintes the column right
soon as it has completed the squad right.
In the second case, at the command march, the right sqU
marches forward; the remainder of the company executes sqUi
right, column left, and follows the right squad. The r1i
guide, when he has posted himself in front of the right squ
takes four short steps, then resumes the full step; the ril
squad conforms.
184. Being in line, to form line of platoons: 1. Squads Til
(left), platoons, column right (left), 2. MARCH; or,l. l'latoo
right (left) by squads, 2. MARCH.
Executeil by each platoon as described for the company
the preceding paragraph.
FACING OR MARCHING TO 'IRE R l ~ A R .
185. Being in line, line of platoons, or in column of plato,
or squads, to face or march to the rear: 1. Squads right (Ie
about, 2. MARCH; or, 1. Squads right (left) about, 2. MARl
3. Company, 4. HALT.
Executed by each squad as described in the School of
Squad.
If the company or platoons be in column of squads, the
closers turn about towarcl the column, and take their posts
in linc, each darts through the nearest interval between squ
186. To march to the rear for a few paces: 1. About, 2. FA
3. Forward, 4. MARCH.
If in line, the guides place themselves in the rear rank, I
the front rank; the file closers, on faCing about, maintain tl
rclative positions. No other movement is executed until
line Is faced to the original front.
ON RIGHT (LEJ/T) INTO LINE.
187. Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line
rigbt or lcft: 1. On right (left) into line, 2. MARCH, 3. C
pany, 4. HALT, 5. FRONT.
SCHOOL OF tHE COMPANY. 97
,t the first command tlle leader of the leading unit communds:
:ht turn. The leaders of the other units t'omman(l: Forward,
It a halt. At tbe second command tbe lealling unit turns to
right on moving pivot. rrhe command halt is given \\Then
leading unit has advanced the (1esired distance in the new
it halts; its leader then commands: 'Right dress.
'he units in rear continue to march straight to the front;
h, when opposite the right of its place in line, executes right
n at tile command of its leader; each is baIted on the line
he command of Its leader. who then commands: Right dress.
dress on the first unit in Iinc.
e executed in double time, the leading squad marches In
DIe time unt!! halted.
]'&0 NT INTO Llr>.Jt.
88. Being in column of plntoons or squads, to form line to
front; 1. Right (Left) front into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Com-
y, 4. HALT, 5. FRONt .
. t the first command the leaders of the units in rear of
leading one comIllund: Right oblique. If ut a halt, the
ler of the leading unit commands: Forward. At the second
[[[JUnd the leading unit moves straig-ht fonvard; the rear
oblique as Indicated. The command halt is given when
leading unit has advanced the desired distance; it halts ; its
ler then commands; Left dress. Each of the rear units,
,n opposite Its place in line, resumes the original direction
he command of Its leader; each Is baited on the line at the
Imand of Its leader, who then commands: Left dress. All
,9 on the first unit In line.
!9. Being In column of squads to form column of platoons,
being In line of. platoons, to form tIle company in line:
'lntoon., right (left) front intQ line, 2. MARCH, 3. Company,
[ALT, 5. FRONT.
xecuted hy each platoon as described for the company. In
ning tbe company In line, the dress is on the left squad of
left platoon. If forming column of platoons, platoon leaders
fy the allgnment before taking their posts; the captain com-
,ds front when the alignments have been verified.
93;12-17- ..
\Vhen front into line is cxccutE'd in douQle time the cammm
for halting und aligning ure omitted and the guide is
the side of the first unit in line.
AT EASE AND lWUTE STEP.
190. The column of squads is the habitual column of rot:
but route step anel at ease Ul'e applicable to any march
formation.
191. To march al. route step: 1. Route step, .2. MARCH:
Snhers are carried nt \vill or in the- scabLJ:H'd; the men ea:
their pieces at \v'Lll, keepjng- the muzzles elevated; they fife
required to 1101' to keep the step. The rar
('over and preserve their distoIlce. If halted f.rom route st
the men stand at rest.
192. To march at ease: 1. At ease, 2. MARCH.
The cOlnpany mnrches as in route step. exeept that silenCE
preserved; when halted, the men remain at ease.
193. Marching at route stP or at ease: 1. Company, 2. ).
TENTION.
At the command attention the are brought to the ri;
$houlder and the cadenced step in quick time is resumed.
TO DIMINISH THE FRONT OF A COLUMN OF SQUADS.
194. R"ing in" column of squads: 1. Right (Left) by t ...
2. MARCH.
At the command march all file:.; except the two right files
the leading squad execute in place halt; th(' two l>ft of
leading squad oblique to the right when diseugaged and foll
the right tiles at the Rhnrte:.:;t practi('ahle (listance_ rerun
iug squads follow succes:::;jyety ill Like mnnner.
19.5. Being in column of squads or twos" 1. Right (Left)
file, 2. MARCH.
At the command march, all tile:-:. ex ('('ute in place halt exc
'the right file of the leading two or squad. The left file or
of the leading two or squad ohlique successively to the rii
when aisengugecl and each follo;vs the flIp. -on its right at
shortest practicable (listan('e. rema"iIling t\yOS or SqUl
follow successively in like manner.
SCHOOL OF 'IRE COloU'ANY. 99
96. Being in column of files or twos, to form column of
ads; or being in column of liles, to form column of twos; 1.
ads (Twos), rig'ht (left) front into line, 2. MARCH.
Lt the ('()mmnnd march, the lending til' or files halt. 'rhe
minder of tlle squad, or two, obliques t.o the right and halts
line with the leading file or files. The l'emaining squads
twos close' up antI successively form ill rear of the first In
manner.
Ihe movement described in this paragraph will be ordered
ht or left, so as to restore the files to their normal relative
itlons in the two or squad.
97. The tnovemcnts pl'e::o:cribecl in the three preceding para-
phs are dift1cult of execution a t attention and have no vulue
jisciplinary exercises.
98, Marching by l\vos or files can not be executed without
ious delay and waste of road space. Every reasonable pre-
tlon will be taken to obviate the necessHy for these forma-
lS.
EXTENDED ORDElI..
BUIJI:S FOB DEPLOYMENT.
99_ The command guide right (left or center) indicates the
e squad for the deployment; If in line it deSignates the actual
Ilt (left or center) squad; if in column the command guide
Ilt (left) designates the leading squad, and the command
de center designates the center squad. After the deployment
ompleted, the guide is center without command, unless other-
e ordered.
:00. At the preparntory command for forming skirmish
from eitber column of squads or line, each sqnad leader
cept the lender of the base squall, when his squad does not
ance), caution, his squad, follow me or by the Tight (left)
lk, ns the en S(> lUllS lJe: nt the command march, l1e steps iu
nl of bis squad and lends it to its place in ilne.
OL Having gi veD the command for forming skirmish line,
captaIn, if necessary, indicates to the of the base
ad the point on which tile squad Is to march; the corporal
,!tunlly ldoks to the captain for such directions.
02. The base squad Is deployed !is soon as it has sufficient
The other squads are deployed as they arrive on the
general line; each corporal halts in his place in line an'd co
mands or signals, as skirmishers; the squad deploys and ha
abreast of him.
If tactical demand it, the squad is
before arriving on the line.
203. Deployed lines pre sene a general alignment toward 1
guide. 'Vithin their respective fronts
1
individuals or UD
march so as best to secure cover or to facilitate the advan
but the general and orderly pro:;ress of the 1-vhole is paramou
On halting a deployed line faces to the front (direction
the enemy) in all cases and takes advantage of cover, the m
lying -do\vn if necesssary.
204. The company in skirmish line advances, halts, moves
the ftank} or to the rear, obliques, resumes the direct mar,
passes from quick to double time and the revel'se by the sa
commands ano in a similar manner as in close order; if a1
halt, the movement by the flank or to the rear is executed
the same comm"ncls as when marching. Company right (IE
half right, half left) is executed as explained for the ft<
rank, skirmish int.ervals heing maintained.
205. A platoon or other part of the company is deployed"
marchecl in the same manner R..'1 the company! substituting
the eDlIllllands, platoon (detachment, etc.) for company_
DEPLOY:ME::q'TS.
206. Being in line, to form skirmish line to the front:
As skirmishers, guide right (left or center), 2. MAROH.
Tf rrJarchlng, the corporal of the base squad moves straight
the front: when that squad hus odvancc'r1 the desired dlsta"
the captnin commnnds: 1. Company, 2. HALT. If the guide
right (left), lhe olher corporals move to the left (right) fro
and. in succession from the base, place their squads- on the IiI
if the guide be .centel" th.e other corporals move to the right
left frout, uct'ol'l1ing as they are 011 the right or left of-the cen
squad, and in succession from the center squad place tb
squads on the line.
If at " halt, the b;ose squad tsdeployAd wlthout'nilvancir
the other squads may be condncted to their proper places by 1
101
Ii:; interior sqllud8 may be mOVf"ti when squu(ls more distant
n the base huve gained comfortable marchiIlg cliHtunce.
07. Beiug- ill column of to form :skirmish line to th.e
1t: 1. As skirmishers, guide right (left or center), 2.
RCH. .
: marching, the corporal of: the :o;Quao ueploys it and
straight to the front; if at a halt, he deploys his squad
IlOut advancing. If tile guide be right (left), the other cor
als move to the left (right) front, and, in succession from the
plhce their squads on the line; if the guide be center, the
)orals in fro lit of' the cente-r squad move to the rigl1t (if at a
:, to the right rear)! the corporals in of the center squad
'e to tlle Left front, ftnd each, in from the lJase,
his squad on the Une.
he column of twos or files is deployed by the same commands
in lilw manner.
08. Tile company in line or in column of squads may he
Loyed in an oblique direction by the same commands. The
tain pOints out the desired direction; the corporal of the
squad moves in the direction indicated; the other corporals
Eorm.
oe. 1'0 form skirmish line tu tile Hank or re'l1" the line 01'
column of squads is turned by squads to the flank or rear
then deployed as deseribec1.
10. The iutervnls between men are increased or decreased
lescribed in the School of the Squad! nrlfllng to tlw prepara-
, command, guide right (left or center) if necessary.
THE ASSEMBLY.
II. The captain takes his post in front of. or deSignates,
element on ,vhich the com.pany is to assemble and com-
,ds: 1. Assemble, :? MARCH,
in skirmish line the men move promptly to"\vard the ue;;sig-
point and the company is re-formed in line. If assembled
platoons, these me conducted to the designated point by
:oon leaders, and the company is re-formed in line.
latoons Illay be assembled by the command: 1. Platoons,
!mble,. 2. MARCH.
Executed by each platoon as described for the company.
One or more platoon;'; mny be assembled by the comma"
1. Such platoon(s), assemble, 2. MARCH.
Executed hy the designated platoon or platoons as de'Scri
for the company.
THE ADVANCE.
212. The advance of a COlllpany into an engagement (whet
for atta(!k 01' iR conducted in close order, prefer[l
column of squads, until thC' probability of encountering 1108
fire makes it advisable to deploy. After deployment, and beJ
opening fire, the advance of the company may be continuec
skirmish Line or other suitable formation, c1t:'pending upon
cumstances. The advunce may often be facilitated, or be1
advantage tat:en of or losses reduced by the employm
of the platoon or squad columns 01' by the use of a successioI
thin lines. Tbe selection of the method to be llsed is made
the captain or Inajor, the choice flepenc1ing upon conditions a
ing during -the progress of the advance. If the deploymem
found to be prematuro, it \vilJ be best to asselnble
company and proeeed in close order.
Patrol8 are us\:"")d to provide the uecessary security agai
surprise.
213. Being in skirmisb line: 1. Platoon columns, 2. MAlt
The platoon lpaclers IllOye fonvard through the center of tl
respective platoons; men to the right of tile platoon leader ma
to the left and follow him in file; thos0 t.o the left march in
manner to the right; each platDon Tender thus conducts
march of his platoon in double COlUlllll of files; platoon gui
follow in rear of their respective platoons to insure prompt:
orderly expeution or the advance.
214. Being in skirmish line: 1. Squad columns, 2. MARCE
Each squad le-a(ier to the front; the members of e
sqUall oblique to\vunl and follow their squad leader in Single
at easy mm'ching distances.
215. Platoon columns are profitably used \vhere the grouDI
so difficult or cover so limited as to make it desirable to t
advantage of the fe\": favorable routes; no tw'o lllatoollH 81w
march withiu the area of hurst. of a single shrapneL'" -Sq
1. Ordinarily about 20 yards wide.
103
lImns are of value principally in facilitating the advance over
gh or brush-gro'wll gronml ; the;v afforu no matedal ad vantage
iecuring cover
16. To deploy platoon or squad columns: 1. As skirmishers,
CARCH.
kirmishers move to the right or left front and successively
~ themselves In their original positions on the line.
17. Being in platoon or squad columns: 1. Assemble, 2;
RCH.
'he platoon or squad leaders signal assemble. The men of
h platoon or squad, us the case may be, advance and, moving
he right and left
f
take tlJeir proper places i.n line, each unit
,mbling on the leading element of the column and re-forming
iue. The platoon or sqund leaders conduct their units toward
element or point indicate,1 by the captain, and to their places
ine; the company is re-formed in line.
18. Being in skirmish line, to advance by a succession of
I lines: 1. (Such numbers), forward, 2. MARCH.
he captain pOints out in advance the selected position in
It of the line occupied. The clesignated number of each squarl
~ s to the front; the line thus formed preserves the original
'rvals as nearly as practicable; when this line has advanced a
able distance (generally from 100 to 250 yards, depending
n the terrain and the character of the hostile fire), a seconrI
lent forward by sirniJar commands, and so on at irregular
ances, until the whole line hfts advancecl. Upou arriving at
indicated position, the first line is haiter\. Successive lines,
n arriving, halt on line with the first and the men take their
,er places in the skirmish line.
rdinarily each line is made up of one lllan per squad and the
I of a squad are sent forward in orrIer from right to left as
loyed. The first line is led by [he platoon leader of the right
oon, the second by the guide of the right platoon, and SO on
'rder from right to left.
he advance is conducted in quick time unless conrIitions rIe
lrI a faster gait.
he company having arrived at the indicated position, a fur-
o advance by the same means may be advisable.
19. The advance in a succession of thin lines is used to
:s a wirle stretch swept, or likely to be swept, by artlllery
104 EXTlLACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
fire or heavy. long-range ritle fire which can not profitably
returned. Its purpose Is tbe building up of a strong skirlll
line preparatory to engaging In a fire fight. This method
advancing results In serious (though temporary) loss oteonl
over the company. Its advantage lies in the fact that it off
a less definite target, hence is less likely to draw fire.
220. The above are suggestions. Other and better fori
tlons may be devised to fit particular cases. The best lormal
is the one whicb advances the line farthest with the least I
of men, time, and control.
THE FffiE ATTACK.
221. The principles governing the advance of the firing I
in attack are considered in the School of the Battalion.
When it becomes Impracticable for the company to adva
as a whole by ordinary means. It advances by rushes.
222. Being In skirmish line: 1. By platoon (two pia toe
squad, four men, etc.), from the right (left), 2, RUSH.
The platoon leader on the indicated flank carefully arran
the details for a prompt Rnd vigorous execution of the r
und puts it Into effect as soon as practicable. It necessary,
desIgnates the lender for the indicated fraction. Wben aboul
he causes the men of the fraction to cease firing and
hold themselves tlat, but in readiness to spring forward
Bluntly. The leader of tile rusll (at the signal of the pint
leacler. if the latter be not tile leader of the rush) cornman
Fellow me, and, running at top speed, leads the fraction to
new Hne, where be haIts it and causes it to open fire.
leader of the rush selects the new line If it has not beeD I
viously designnted.
'I'he first fraction having established itself on the new I
the next like fractiou is sent forward by its platoon leal
without further command of the captain, and so Oll, 8llccessiv
unti I the entire company Is on the Une established by the t
rush.
If more than one platoon I. to jOin in one rush, the jUl
leader conforms to the ad'lon of the senior.
A part of the line having "Ilvanced, the captain may IncrE
or decrease the size of the fractions to complete the rnovem
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 105
:23. When the company forms a part of the firing line. the
h of the company as a whole is conducted by the captain. as
cribed for a platoon in the preceding paragraph. The cap-
1 leads the rush; platoon leaders lead their respective pla-
ns; platoon guides follow the line to insure prompt and
erly execution of the advance.
24. When the foregoing method of rushing, byrunnlng, be-
les impracticable, ally method of advance that brings tho
wk closer to the enemy, such as crawling, should be em
yed.
regulations governing the charge, see paragraphs 318
1319.
TilE COMPANY IN SUPPORT.
25. To enable it to follow or reach the firing line, the sup-
t adopts suitable formations, following the principles eX4
ined in paragraphs 212-218.
'he support should be kept assembled as long as practicable.
after deploying a favorable opportunity arises to hold it for
1e time in close formation, it should be reassembled. It is
eployed when necessary.
26. The movements of the support as a whole and the dis-
ch of reenforcements from it to the firing line are controlled
the major.
e reenforcement of less than one platoon has little influence
I will be avoided whenever practicable.
'he captain of a company in support is constantly on the
rt for the major's signals or commands.
27. A reenforcement S8Ut to the firing line joins it deployed
;kirmishers. The leader of the reenforcement places it in an
in the line, if one exists, nnd commands it thereafter
a. unit. If no such suitable interval exists, the
1t is advanced with increased intervals between sl;;:irmishers;
h man occupies the nearest interval in the firing line, and
h then obeys the orders of the nearest squad leader and
tOOD leader.
28. A reenforcement joins the firing line as quickly as pos-
e without exhansting the men.
229. The original platoon division of the companies in
firing line should be maintained and should not be broken ur
the mingling of reenforcements.
Upon joining the' firing line, officers and sergeants accompn
lng a reenforcement take over the dutieR of others of like gr
who have heen disabled, or distribute themselves so as besl
exercise their normal functions. Conditions will vary and
rules can be prescribed, It is essential that all assist in mas
itlg the increasing diffkulties of control.
THE COMP}.NY ALONE.
230. In Lhe cOIllDany, when acting alone, is emplo
according to the principles applicable to the battalion acl
alone; the captain employs platoons as tile major employs c
panies)' making due allm,yunce for tl1e llifference in strength.
The support may be smaller in proportion or may be
penscd with. '
231. The company must be \vell protectecl against surpr
Combat patrols on the flanks are specially important. E
leader of a flank platoon l1etails a Ulan to \vatch for the sig'!
of the patrol or patrols 011 his lIank.
FIRE.
232. Ordinarily pieces are loaded and extra ammunitior
issued before the company deploys for combat.
In close order the company executes the firings at the c
manel of the captain, \vho posts himself in rear of the centel
the company.
UsualJy the firings in close order eonsist of saluting yoU
only.
2'33. \Vhen the is the men execute
firings at the eommanti of their platoon leaders; the latter
such commands as are necessary to carry out the capta
directions, anrll from time to time, add such further comma
as are necessary to continue, correct, and control the
ordered.
234. The vniee i$ gellE:,J'all:y- inadeqnate for giving comma
during fire and must be replaced l,y signuls of charn(
SCHOOL OF THE COMl'ANY.
107
t proper fire direction and control is ussured. To attract
mtion, signals must be preceded by the whistle signal
ort blast). A fraction of the firIng line about to rush shouhl.
)ractIcable, avoid using the long blast signal as an aid to
se firing. Officers and IDPn behind the llring line can not
inarily move freely along the liue, but must depend on lllutual
:chfulness and the proper usc of the prescribed signals. All
uld post themselves so as to see their immediate superiors
subordina tes.
35. 'fhe musicians assist the captain hy observing the puemy.
target, and the fire effect by transmitting commands or
lals and by watching for signals.
36. Firing with blank cartridges at an outlined or represented
my at distances less than 100 yurds Is prohibited.
37. The elIect of fire and the influence of the grol1nrl,in
l thereto, and the individual and collective instruction in
are treateu in the Small-Arms il'iring Manual.
RANGES.
For convenience of reference ranges nre classified as
ows;
o to 600 yards, close range.
600 to 1,200 yards, effective range.
1,200 to 2,000 yards, long range.
2,000 yards and over, distant range.
19. The distance to the target must be. determined as neeu-
!ly as possible and the sigllts set accordingly. Aside from
ning and morale, this is the most important single factor in
Iring effective fire at the longer ranges.
10. Except in a deliberately prepared defensive position, tile
,t accurate and oilly practicable method of detel"Inining the
:re will generally be to take the m.ean of several estimates.
ive or six officers or men, selected from the most accurate
mators in the company, are designated as range estimators
are specially trained in estimating distances.
'henever necessary and practicable, the captain assembles
range estl1;nators . points out the target to them, and adopts
mean of their estimates. The range estimators then take
r customary posts.
CLASSES OF FIRING.
241. Volley filing has limited application. In defense it I
be used in the early stages of the action if the enemy pres,
a large, compact target. It Illay be used by troops execu
nre of position. When the grounel ncar the target is such
the strilw of bullets can be seen from the firing line, r n ~
volleys m ~ r be used to con"eet the sight setting.
In (,OllliJflt, volle.\" firing js pxecuted babituully by platoon.
242. Fire at will is the claBs of fire normally employee
attuck or defense.
243. Clip fire has limited application. It is principally lU
1. In the early stages of cornlmt, to steady the men by hat
ating them to brief pauses in firing. 2. To produce a short b
of fire.
THE T.\RGJ:'-:r.
244. Orrlinarily the major will nssign to the company
objective in attack 01' sector in defense; the company's ta
will lie ,vir-hin the limits so nS8iglled. In the 'choice of tal
tactieal cons-icJpr:-ltions are paramollnt; the nearest hostile tr(
within the objectiYe or sector will thus be the usual tm
This will ordinarily be the hostile firing line; troops in I
are ordinarily proper targpts for artillery, machine guns. 01
times, infantry employing fire of position.
Change of targets should not be made without excellent ren:
therefor, such as the sudden appearance of hostile troops m
conditions which mnke them more to be feared than the t1'(
comprising the former target.
245. The distrillUtion of fire over the entire target is of spc
importance.
The captain nllots a part of the target to each platoon
each platoon leader takes as his tnrget that part which cc
sponos to his position in the company. Men are so instru,
that each fires on that part of the target which is dire
opposite him.
246. All parts of the target are equally important. Care ~
be exercised that the men 00 not slight its less visible parts.
109
,tion of the target not covered by fire represents a number of
, enemy permitted to fire cooly and effectively.
147. If the target can not be seen with the naked eye, platoon
select an object in front of or behind it, designate this
the aiming target, mIll direct n sight setting which will carry
eone of fire into the target.
FIRE DIRECTION.
"\Vhen the company is large enough to be divided into
.toons, it is impracticable for tlw captain to command. it
ectls in combat. His efficiency in managing the firing line
neusured by his ability to enforce his \vin through the platoon
(leI's. I-laving dearly ,vhat he desires them to do,
avoids interfering except io correct SE.'rious errors 91' omis-
ns.
149. The captain directs the fire of the company or of desig-
platoons. He rlesignates the target, and, '''hen pradi-
)le, allots a part of the targ-(-:t to each platoon. Before begin-
Ig the fire aetion he determines l'Hllgt', announces the
ht setting, and indicates the class of fire to be employed; and
: time to open fire. The.reafter, he observes the fire effect,
rects material errors in sight setting, prevents exhaustion of
ammunition supply. and causes the distribntion of SUell
:1'a ammunition as may be received from tIle rcal'.
FIRE CONTROL.
In combat the pIal-nOll is the fire unit. From 20 to 35
es, are as many as onC leader nm control effectively.
:51. Each platoon leader puts into ex(-'!eutloll the. commands
directions of the captain, having first taken ,5:l1eh precautions
[usure correct si-ght setting and clear description of the target
aiming target as the situation permits or requires; thcrenfte'r
gives such additional commands or directions as are, neces
y to exact compliance \-vitb the captain's will. He corrects
sight setting when necessary. He rlesignates an aiming
get when' the target can not be seen \vith the naked e;ye.
52. In general, platoon leaders observe the target and the
,ct of their fire and arc on the alert for the captain's com-
mands or signals; they observe and regulate the rate of I
The platoon guides watch the firing line and check every bre
of fire discipline. Squad leaders transmit commands and sigI
when necessary. observe the conduct of their squads and al
excitement, assist in enforcing fire lliscipline and participatE
tho firing.
253. The best troops uro those thut submit longest to
control. Loss of ('ontrol Is an evil 'which robs success of
greatest results. To a voill or delay such loss should be the (
stant aim of nIl.
Fire control implies rhe ablHty to stop firing, change
sight setting and targ'ct, and resume a well directed fire.
FmE DISCIPLINE.
254. "Fire discipline implies, besides a habit of obediencE
control of the rifie by the soldier, the result of truining, wi
will enablo him In action to make hits Instead of misses.
embraces taking advantage of the ground; care in setting
sight and delivery of fire; constant attention to the orders
the leaders, ancl careful observation of the enelllY; an lncre
of fire when the target is favorable, and a cessation of fire w
the enemy disappears; economy of ammunition." (SmallAI
Firing Manual.)
In combat. shots which graze the enemy's trench or posH
and thus reduce the effectiveness of his fire have the npprt
mate value of hits; such shots only, or actual hits, contrib
toward fire superiority.
Fire discipline implies that, in a fil'ing line without lead
each mun retains his presence of mind and directs effective
upon the proper target.
255. To create a eorrect appreciation of the
fire discipline, men are taught that the rate of fire should bE
rapid as is consistent with nccurate aiming; that the rate'
depend upon the visibility, proximity, and size of the target; ;
that the proper rate will ordinarily snggest itself to each trai
man, usually rendering cautions or commands unnecessary.
In attack the highest rate of fire is cmployed at the halt I
ceding the u"ssault, and in pursuing fire.
COMPANY INSPECTION.
111
'56. In un by rushes, Jendersof troops in' firing posi-
'IS are responsible for the delivery of heavy fire to cover
u(l'iu:mce of each rushing fnlction. Troops are trained to
mgc slightly the direction of fire so us not to endanger the
lks of U(lVallCec1 portions of the firing line.
:57. In clefpIlS(3, when the tal'get disappears behind cover,
toon leaders sw:;pend fire, prepare their platoons to fire upon
point. \yhere it is expected to reappear, and greet its- 1'e
instantly with vigorous fire.
Section 7. Company inspection.
45. Reing in line nt a halt: 1. Open ranks, 2. MARCH.
It the commanrl march front rank pxecut.es right tll'ess;
rear rank anel tll{' file closel's marcb back\vard 4 steps, halt,
I execute right clress; the lieutenants puss around their
pedive flnnln., nnll take post, facing to the front, 3 paces in
lIt ,of the ,center of their respecLlve platoons. The captain
the front rank, rear ranI;:, and file tIosers, takes 'post
aces in front of the right guide, facing to the left, and com-
nds: 1. FRONT, 2. PREPARE FOR INSPECTION,
It the second command lieutenants curry saber; the
,tain returns saber and inspects them, after which they face
lut, order saber, tllld at ease; UpOIl the completion of
inspection they carry saber. fnee about, nnd order sllber.
eaptain may direet thE' lieutenunts to accompany or nssist
1, in \vhich case they return saher and, at the close of the
pection, resume their posts in front of the company, draw
l carry saber.
laving the the captain proceeds to the
It of the company. Eacb man, as the captain approaches
I, exeeutes' .inspection arms.
captain takes the pier.e, it with his right hand
t above the rear sight, the mUll dropping his hands. The
,tuin inspects the piece, and, with the hand and piece in the
,le position as in it1 hands it batk to the man, who
cs it with the left hand at the balunce and executes order
IS.
US EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
As-the captain returns the piece the next man exect
inspection arms, anll so on through the company,
Should the piece be inspected without handling, each r
executes order arms as soon as the captain passes to the IJ
man.
The inspection is from ri.g-ht to left in front, and from lef'
right in rear, of each rank nneI of the linG of file closers.
When approached by the rnptain the first sergeant eXCCl
inspection saber. Enlisted men armed with the pistol exec
inspection pisiol by llrmvlng the pistol from the holster aml hi
ing it dingonally ucross the bodS I lmrt'el up, and 6 inches
front of the neck, muzzle pointing up anti to the left. r
pistol is returned to the holster as soon as the captain pas
Upon completion of the inspection the captain takes r
facing to the left in front of the right guide and on line"
the lieutenants and commuwls: 1. Close ranks, 2. MARCH.
At the command march the lieutenants resume their posh
line; the rear rank closes to 40 inches. each mun covering
file leader; the file closers close to 2 paces from the rear r[l
746. If the company is dismissed. rifles are put away.
quarters, headdress and accouterments arc removed and the r
stand near their respective bunl;;:s; in camp they stand COVel
but without accourterments, in front of their tents.
If the personal field equipment has not been Inspected In ra
and its inspection in quarters or camp is ordered, each man'
arrange the prescribed articles on his bunk, if in quarters
permanent camp, or in front of his half of the tent, if in shel
tent camp, in the same relative order as- directeu in paragfl
747.
'L'he captain. accompanied by the lieutenants, then inspects
quarters or camp. The first sergeant precedes the captain,
calls the men to attention on entering each squad room or
approaching the tents; the men stand at attention but do
salute. (0. I. D. R., No. 16, Aug. 25,1916.)
747. (Edition approved Aug. 10, 1911, and edItion correctc(
November, 1913,) If the Inspection is to include an examinat
of the equipment while in ranks, the captain, after closlngrar
causes the company to stack arms, to march backward unti
COMPANY INSPECTION.
113
ces in rear of the stacks and to take intervals. ,He then com
Ind.: 1. UNSLING EQUIPMENT, 2. OPEN PACKS.
At the first commancl, each man unslings bis equipment and
lces it 011 the ground at bis feet, baversack to tbe front end of
e pacl< 1 foot in front of toes.
At tIle second command, pack carriers are unstrapped, packs
:noved ancl uurolled, the longer edge of the pack along tbe
,ver edge of the eartridge belt. Each man exposes shelter tent
lS, rernoves nl0tlt enn, knife, fork, und spoon .from the meat
n pouch, and [J(HCOS Utem on the right of the haversack, knife,
rk, and .spoon in tlw open meat can; remOVeS the canteen and
p from the cover and placcs them on the left side of the baver
cl<; unstraps and spreads out haversack so as to expose its
ntents; folds up the carrier to UDcover the cartrIdge pockets;
ens same; unrolls toilet articles and places them on the outer
p of the haversack; places underwfmr carried in,pack on the
'tbalf of the open pack, witb round fold purullel with frout
ge of pack; opens first-aid pouch and exposes contents to view.
ledul articles carried by individual men, such as flag kit, field
lsses, compass, steel tape, etc., will be arranged on
e right half of the open pack. !Cach man then resumes the
tention. Plate VI shows the relative position of all articles
cept underwear -and special articles. .
The captain then passes along the ranks and file closers ascbe
re, inspects the equipment, returns to the Tight, and com
mds: CLOSE PACKS.
Each man rolls up his toilet articles and underwear, straps up
s haversack and its contents, replaces the meat caD, knife,
rk, and spoon, and the ('antE'en and ('up; closes cartridge
,ekets and first-aid pouch; restores special articles to their
oper rolls up and replaces pack in carrier; and,
lving the equipment in its position on the ground, resumes the
tention.
All equlpments being packed, the captain commands: SLING
lUIPMENT.
The equipments are slung and belts fastened.
The captain then canses the company to assemble and take
'IDS. Tile inspection is completed as already explained.
748. Should [he inspector bc" other than the captain,
latter, after commanding front, adds REST, amI faces to
front:. \Vllen inspector -approaches, the captain faces to i
left
j
brjngs the company to attention, faces to the front, a
snlllt.es. The sulnte acknov,rledged, the captain c<'Jl'ries sab
faces'to tlw IPlt. comnwnr]s: :PRE:PARE FOR INSPECTION, n
ftgnin fnces to the front.
The inspection proceeds' ag before; the captain returns sal
and ncco1l1pnnies inspector -as Soon as the latter passes hi
Section 8. Manual of Tent Pitching,
SIIELTER TE:K'l'b"
[For Infuntry Eqllipment, mQdel of 191:0.]4
792. Being in or in column of platdont'l, the caph
COllllll'lllds: FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS.
The officer:.;;;, first sergeant. and guides fall out; the CO(]
fonn uAile on the, flank of the company nearest the l{:itchen. t
first sel'!,;eant llnd right guide fall in, forming the right file
the company; hhlnl;;: files are filled by the file closers or
men talren from the front rank; the remaining guide, or guid
,
and file elosers form on a ftank.
Before fO'rming eolumn of preparatory to pitchi
tpnt-;.;, tIl(-' company may be redivided into t,"\'o ur more platoot
of the size of each.
723.. fl'he captain then CHuses the company to take
lIS des('rib0Cl ill the School of the Squad and cOlIJmands:- PIll(
TENTS.
A l the command pitch tents, each lllau steps off obliquely
the l'igl1,t with the right foot :-i'ltd lays his rifle on the ground. t
1,11ltt of the l'iJle nellr the toe of the right foot, rnnzzle to t
front, l)arrci to the lpft, and steps hack into his place; ea
frollt: 1':1 ilk man th.on drfl'iYS his hayonet and sticks it in t
ground by tlH-: outside of the right hee-l.
are uIlslung, packs oppned, shelter half and pi
relllOypd ; each mnll tl18U spn:-acls his shelter lw If, small triun,g
t</ tbe rc:Hl\ lint upon the tent is to ,occupy, the re:
"Ii'or method of pite:hing shelter tents with old model Infantry equ:
mont 01' old mouel shelter tent, fee page 121.
MANUAL OF TENT PITCHING.
1115
lk man's half on the right. The halves are then buttoned to-
her; the guy loops at both encls of the lower half are passed
ougb the buttonholes provided in the lower and upper halves;
whipped end of the guy rope is then passed through both
T loops and secured, this at both ends of the tent. Each
nt rank man inserts the muz7,lo of his rifle under the front
L of the ridge and holds the rifle upright, sling to the front,
,I of butt on the gronnd beside the bayonet. His rear rank
n pins down the front corners of the tent on the Iiue of bayo
,8, stretching the tent taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye of
, front guy rope and drives the pin at such a distance ill front
the rifle as to hold the rope taut; both men go to the rear of
t tent, each pins down a. corner, stretching tlle sides and rear
the tent before securing; the rear ranlt man then inserts an
rcnching tool, or a bayonet Ln Its scabbard, IInder the real'
1 of the ridge inside the tent, the front rnnk man
,vn the eml of the rear guy ropes; the rest of the pins are
m driven by both men, the rear rank man working on the
ht.
\( oTE.-The use of the hand ax and the pick mattock in organ
tions equipped with the intrenching tool [s authorized for the
rpose of driving shelter tent pins. The lise of the bayonet for
It purpose is prohibited.
rhe front flaps of the tent are not fastened down, but thrown
on the tent.
soon as the tent is pitched each man a.rranges his equip-
,nt and the contents of his paek in the tent and stands at at
Ition in front of his own half on line with tbe fro lit guy
)e pin.
ro have a uniform slope when the tents arc pitched, the guy
)es should all be of the same length.
[n shelter-tent camps, ill localities where Ruitahle material is:
)curable, tent poles may be improvised and uscd in Wiu of the
Le and bayonet or intrenching tool as supports for the shelter
,t.
794. When the pack is not carried the company is formeii: for
"lter tents, Intervals taken, arms are laid aside or on the
:l11nd, the men are dismissed and proceed to the secure
r packs, return to their place>3, and pitch tents as heretofore

116 EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATlONS.
795. Double sbelter tents may be pitcbeil by first pitel
one tBnt as heretofore described, then pitching a second
against tbe opening of the first, using one rille to support I
tents, and- passing the front guy ropes over and down the s
of the opposite tents. The front corner of one tcnt is not peg
down, but is thrown back to permit an opening into the tent
3INGL1<! BAG.
796. Spread the poncho on the ground, buttoned end at
feet, buttoned side to the left; fold the blanket once across
short dimension and lay it on the poncho, folded side along
right side of the poncho; tie the hlan]cet together along the
side by means of the tapes provided; fold the left half of
poncho over the blanket ancl button it together along the
and bottom.
DOUBLE SLEEPING BAG.
797. Spread one poneho on the ground, ')llttoned end at
feet, buttonec] side to the left; spread the blankets on top of
ponc\lO; tie the edges of the blankets together with the ta
provided; spread a second poncho on top of the hlankets, t
tonec! end at the feet, bnttoned side to the right; button the t
ponchos together along both sides and across the end.
-TO STRIKE SHELTER
798. Tbe men standing In front of their tents: STRI:
TENTS.
Equipments and rifles are removed from the tent; the te
are lowered, Ducks made up, anr1 equipments slung, and ,
inen stand at attention in the places originally occupied af
t,uking intervals,
TO PITCH TYPES OF ARUY TENTS, EXCEPT SHFLTER AND CONIC
WALL TENTS.
799. To pitch all types of Army tentg, except shelter a
conical \vall tents: Mark line of tents by rlriving a \vall pin
the spot to be Occupied by the right (or left) corner of ell
tent. For pyramidal tents the interval between adjacent pi
MANUAL OF TENT PITCHING.
117
auld be about 30 feet, which will give a passage of 2 feet
tween tents. Spread tripod on the grollnrl where the center
tent is to be, if tripod is used. Spreud the teut <lU the
ouud to be occupiro(l, door to the front, and place the right (or
't) front wall loop over the pin. The (1001' (or doors, if more
an one) being fastened and hel(L together at the bottom, the
(or ri,G:ht) waH loop is carried to the left (or
[IS (nr as it will go and :1 \vall pin (ll'iven through it! the
l1 being placed in line: \vith the right (or left) corner pins
(lriYen. At the snl1l{-:' tillle the wull loops
e pullet1 to tlH? outward so that the rearwull of the
ot is stretche(l to complete the rectangle. 'Vall pins are
en driven through these loops. Each corner pin should be
rectly in rear of tbe eorresponding front corner pin, makIng a
ctangle. Unless the canvas be wet, a small amount of slack
auld be allowed bofore the corner pins are driven. According
the size of the tPIlt, one or t'\vo men, under the tent
neces8ary! flt each pob or ridge or upright into the ring {)r
1ge-pole holes, and such accessories as hooel, fly, anll brace
pes are adjusted. If a t1'ipo(1 be nse,l an al\(]itional man will
nnllor the tenl to allju,t it. '1'he tent, steadied by the rc-
fllning men, one at each c:orncr guy rope, \vill then be raised.
the tent is a ward or storago type, corner poles will now be
aced at the four eornprs. fnur corner guy ropes are then
aced over the lmvcr notches Df tbe lnrge pins driven in pro-
ngation of the diagonals ut such distunee as to hold the ,valls
Id ends of the tent vertical and 811HlOth when the guy ropes
'e dra\vn taut. A wall pin is then driven through each
aining wall loop and a large pin for Q(!cb guy rope is driven in
10 with the (,orner guy pins already driven. The guy ropes of
e tent UTe pla('C"d over lo\ver \vhil0 the guy ropes
fly are plaeed over the upper notches; anel are then drawn
ut. Brace t'O[Jes when used, Hre then secured to stukes or
os suitably placed.
800. Rescinded.
CONICAL WAI,L 'rENT.
801. [)rive the door pin and center pin 8 feet 3 inches apart.
sing the hood lines, with eenter pin uS center, tlescribe- hvo
118 EX1'RAC1'S FROM INFAN1'RY DRILL REGULA1'IONS.
concentric circles with radii 8 feet 8 Inches and 11 feet 8 Incl
In the outer circle drive two door guy pins 3 feet apart.
intervals of nbout 3 feet drive the other gny pins.
In other respects conical tents are erected practically as
the case of pyramidal tents.
'1'0 STRIKE COl-IMON, WALL, PYR.\MIDAL, AND CONICAL WALL TEN
802, S1'RIKE 1'ENTS.
TI,e men first remove all pins except those of the four corl
guy ropes, or the fOllr quadrant gny ropes In the case of 1
conical wall tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed In th
receptacle.
One man holds each guy, and when the ground Is clear I
tent is lowered, folded, or rolled and tied, the poles or trlI
and pole fastened together, and the remaining pins collect
TO FOLD TENTS.
803, For folding common, wall, hospital. and storage ten'
Spread the tent flat on the ground, folded at the ridge so tl
bottoms of side walls are even, ends of tent forming trlang
to the rIght and left; fold the triangnlar ends ot the tent
toward the middle, making It rectangnlar in ahapa; fold the 1
over about 9 inches; fold the tent In two by carrying the 1
fold over clear to the foot; fold again In two from the top to 1
foot; throw all gnys on tent except the second from each en
foil! the ends In so as to cover about two-thirds of the seeo
cloths; foW Lhe left end over to meet the turned-In edge of t
j'ight encl, then fold the right end over the top, completing t
bundle; tie ",1th the two exposed gny .
METnOD OF FOLDING PYRAMIDAL TENT.
The tent is thrown toward the reaT and the back wall a
roof canvas pulled out smooth. This may be most easily aeeo'
plished by leaving the rear-corner wall pins In the ground WI
the wall loops attached, olle man at each rear-corner guy, al
MANUAL OF TENT PITCHING. 119
holding the square iron in a perpendicular position and
ling the canvas to its limit away from the former front of
tent. This leavBs the three remaining sides of the tent on
of the rear side, with the (1oor side in the middle. ,
carry the right-front corner over and lay it on the left-
r corner. Pu1l all canvas smooth, thro\v guys toward square
n, and pull bottom edges even. '.rIlen take the right-front
ner and return to the right, the right-rear eornt?r.
is foWs the right 8i(le of the tent on itself, ,vith the crease
the llliddlc and under the front side of tent.
carry the left-front corner to the right nnu back as de-
illed above; this when completed will leave the front and
r sides of the tent Iyi ng smooth and flat and the two side
LIs folded inward. each on itself.
:>lace the hood in the square iro11 which has been folded
rc1 toward the hottom of the tent, and continue to fold around
square iron us a core, pressillg al1 folds dO'Vll flat and
Doth and parallel with the bottom of the te)lt. If each fold
compactly maiJe and the canvas kept smooth, the 1;18t fold
1 exactly cover the lower edge of the eanvas. Lay all ex-
ed guys along the folded cunvas except the two OIl the
lter width, whieh should be pulled out and away from bot-
1 edge to their extreme length for tying. Now, beginning
one end, fold toward the center on the first seam (that
"ing the first and seconcl widtllS) anel fold again toward the
lter, so that the already folded ranvas will come to within
JUt 3 inches of thee middle width. Then fold over to the
)osite edge of middle \viclth of canvas. Then begin folding
m oPPosite end, folding the first width in then making
;econel fold to come within about 4 or 5 inches of that al-
dy folded; turn this fold entirely over that already folded.
Ke the exposed guys and draw tl1em taut across each other,
11 hundle over on the under guy, cross guys on top of bundle,
lwing tight. Tnrn bundle over on the crossed guys ana tie
gthwise.
;Vhen properly tied and .pressed together this will make a
!ltuge 11 by 23 by 34 inches, requiring about 8,855 cubic
hes to store or pack.
120 EXl'RACTS FROli/[ INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
Stencil the organization designation on the lower half of
middle width of canvas In the back wall.
WAB DEPABTMENT,
OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF,
Washington, December 2, 191.
Paragraphs 747, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796, 797, and 798, Infa,
Drill Regulations, 1911, apply only to troops equipped with
Infantry Equipment, model 1910. For troops equipped un
General Orders, No. 23, War Department, 1906, and orc
amendatory thereof, the alternative paragraphs published h'
with will govern.
By order of tbe Secretary of War;
LEONARD WOOD,
Major General, Chief of Stat
747. If the inspection Is to Include an examination of
blanket rolls the captain, before dlsmisRing the company :
after inspecting the file closers, directs the lieutenants to rem
in place, closes ranks, stacks arms, dresses the company bad
four paces from the stacks, takes intervals, and cornman
1. Unsling, 2. PACKS, 3. Open, 4. PACKS.
At the second command ellch man unslings his roll and pI,
it On the ground at his feet, rounded end to the front, squ
end of shelter half to the rIght.
At the fourth command the rolla are untIed, laid perpend'
lar to the frant, with the trIangular end or the shelter haU
the front, opened, and unrolled to the left; each man prep.
the contents of his roll for InspectIon and resumes the attent
The captain then returns saber, passes along the ranks :
file closers as before, Inspects the rolls, returns to the ril
draws saber and commands: 1. Close, 2. PACKS.
At the second command each man, with his shelter 1
smoothly spread on the ground with buttons up and trlangc
end to the front, folds his blanket once across its length ,
places it upon the sheiter half, fold toward the bottom, edge (
half inch from the square end, the -same amount of canvas
covered at the top and hottom. He then places the parts of
pole on the side of the blanket next the square end of she
half, near and parallel to the fold, end of pole about 6 Inc
JUlI''UAL OF TE1i'J! l'ItORmG. 121
ill the edge of tho blanket; nests the pillS similarly near the
'osite edge of the blanket and distributes the other articles
ried in the roll; folds the triangular end and then the' ex-
ed portion of the bottom of the shelter half over the blanket.
'he two men in each file roll and fasten first the roll of the
1t and then of the rear rank man. The file work simi-
y two and two, or with the front rank man of a blank file.
'h pair stands on the foided side, rolls the blanket roll closely
I buckles the straps, passing tho end of the strap through
h keeper and buckle, back over the buckle and under the
per. With the roll so lying on the ground that the edge of
shelter half can just be seen when looking vertically down- ,
,d one end is bent upward and over to meet the other, a clove
'h is taken with the guy rope first around the end to whicl1
is attached and then around the other end, adjusting the
gth of rope between hitcl1es to suit the wearer.
,s soon as a file completes its two rolls each man places his
in the position it was in after being unslung and stands at
:ution. .
ell tbe rolls being completed, the captain commands: 1. Sling,

,t the second command the rolls are slung, the end containing
pole to the rear.
company is ass8rnbled
1
takes arms, and the captain com-
tes the inspection as before.
92. Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain COlll-
nds: FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS.
:he officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks
m a file on the dank of the company nearest the kitchen, the
t sergeant, and right guide fall in, forming the right file of
company; blank files are filled by the file closers or by mLl
en from the front rank; the remaining guide or guides, and
c10sers form on a convenient flank. Before forming column
Dlatoons, preparatory to pitching tents, tbe company may be
.1vlded into two or more platoons, regardless of the size of
h.
93. The captam then canses the company to take intervals
described m the School of the Squad, and commands: l'ITCH

At the command pitch tents, each mon stws off obliquell
the right with the right foot anel lays his rifte on the grouud,
butt of the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to
front, barrel to the left, and steps back into his place; each fl
rank man then draws his bayonet and sticks it in the grounc
the outside of the right heel. All unsling and open the hlar
rolls and take out tlle shelter half, poles, and pins. Each t
spreads his shelter half, triangle to the rear, flat upon the r o ~
the tent is to occupy, rear rank man's half on the right. '
halves are then buttoned together. Each front rank man j(
his pole, inserts the top in the eyes of the halves, and holds
pole upright besicle the bayonet placed in the ground; his r
rank man, using the (lins in front, pins down the front corr
of the tent on ihe Hne of bayonets, stretching the canvas ta
he then inserts a pin In the eye of the rope and drives the
Ilt such distance in front of the pole as to hold the rope 11
Both then go to the rear of the tent; the rear rank man adjl
the pole and the front ranI, man drives the pins. The rest of
pins are then driven by both men, the rear rank man work
on the right.
NOTE.-The use of the hand fiX and the pick mattock in org
izations equipped with the intrenching tool is authorized for
purpose of driving shelter tent pins. The 11se of the bayonet
that purpose is prohibited.
As soon as the tent is pitched each mnn arranges the conte
of the blanket roll in the tent and stands at attention in fr
of his oWn half on line with the front guy-rope pin.
The guy ropes, to have 3 uniform slope when t11e shelter te
are pitched, shouuld all be of the same length.
794. When the blanket roll is not carried, intervals are tal
as described above; the position of the front pole is marked '"
a bayonet antI equipments are laid aside. The lllen then I
ceed to the wagon, secure their rolls, return to their places. ~
pitch tent'S ItS heretofore de5:cribed.
795. '.1'0 pitch double shelter tent, the cupta.in gives tbe sa
commands as before, except Take half interva.l is given instE
cif Take interval. In taldng interval each man follows 1
preceding mun fl t 2 paces. The captain then commands: rIT
DOUBLE TENTS,
MANUAL OF THE BAYONET.
'he first sergeant places himself on the right of the right
de and with him pitches a single shelter tent.
only the odd nnmbers of the front rank mark the liIle with
buyonet.
'he tent is formed by buttoning together the square ends of
, single tents. 'l'wo complete tcnts, except onc pole, are used.
o guy ropes are used at each end, the guy pins being placed
Eront o.f the corner pins.
'he tents are pitched by numbers 1 and 2, front and rear
k; and by numbers 3 and 4, front and rear rank; the men
ing in on the left arc numbered, ,counting off if necessary.
ell the men spread their shelter halves on the ground the
t is to occupy. Those of the front rank are placed with the
lllgular ends to the front. All four halves are then buttoned
etller, first the ridges and then the square ends. The front
ners of the tent are pinned by the front rank men, the odel
nber holding the poles, the even number driving the pins.
~ rear rank men similarly pin the rear corners.
Vhile the odd numbers stcacly the poles, each even number at
front r;lnk takes his pole and enters the tent, where, assisted
the even number of the rear rank, he adjusts the pole to the
ter eyes of the shelter halves in the following order: (1) '1'he
"er half of the front tent; (2) the lower half of the real'
t; (3) the upper half of the front tent; (4) the upper half
~ h rear tent. The guy ropes are then adjusted.
~ h tents huving been pitched, the trjangulnr cnds fire turne(l
k, contents of the rolls arranged
1
and the men stand at
:mtion, each OPPOSite his own shelter half and facing uut
m the tent
96. Omitted.
97. Omitted.
98. Omitted.
Section 9. Manual of the Bayonet .
. The infantry soldier relies mainly on fire action to disable
enemy, but he should know that personal combat is often
essary to obtain success. Therefore, he must be instructed
-he use of the rifle and bayonet in hand-to-band encounters .
. The object of this instruction is to teach the soIIlier how tu
~ effective use of the rifle and bayonet in personal combat;
:nake him quick and proficient in handling his riiie; 'to give
him. an accurate eye and a stcally hand; !lml t6 give him c
fidence in tho IJayonet in offense ::'lIHl \Vlten
these exercises has been acquired, tIle rifle will still l'Cmnil
most formhlablc '"capon at close qunrters should the bayo
be lost or (lisable(l.
3. Efficieney of organizutiolls in h8yollet fighting will
judged by the skill "hown by individuals in personal com!
For this purpose pairs 01' gronps of selecte(l at r
dom from fLlllong recruits :lIlcl l-rnined soldi.ers, should eng:
in assaults, using the fencing equipment pl'oviclecl for the IJ
pose.
4. Otllcers :mc1 ntl{l tllOl'ou;.d.ll,'y instru(:
noncolllll1i;:;.s:::llcd oH;cer." \YLll net as ins1.1'uctOl':S.
5. Instruction in lJaycllct cOlll1Jat sllo111{1 hegiu as 80011 as .
soldier is falllilial' with handling of his ritle and ,vill r:
gress, as far as practicnble, in the- cruel' f'ollovrec1 in the tex1
6. Igstrnction is ol'(linal'ily given on e\Tell ground; but pr
tiee should also be had Oll uneven ground, cspccial1y in the
tack and defense of lntrenchmcnts.
7. These exercises will not be used as a calisthenic urin.
8. 'l'be princip1es of the eomnmnds are the same as those gb
in paragraphs D, 15, and 38, Infantry Drill Regulations, In1
vals and distances "viII be tat:en in panlgt'aphs 109 an(.1 1
Infantry Drill exeepL that, in formations for ha
net exercises, the men should be at least four paces apart
every direction.
9. Defore reC]uil'lng Holl1iel's to take a position or execub
movement for the first time, the instructor executes the sa
for the purpose of illustration, ufter \vhich he requires the:
diers to execute the movement illllividually, j)Iuvements I
scribe<l in this manual \'lill not be executed in cadence as
attempt to do so results in incomplete execution ilnd lack
vigor, li.:aeh mOyemellt ",vill lIe expcut.ed correctly :IS quic
flS possihle by evers man, As soon us the niovements are
ecuted accurately, the commands nre given rapidly, as CXP(
ness with the bayonet chiefly npon quicknes:5 of moti
10. The exercises wiJl be interrupted at first by short and j
quent rests. The rests will be less frequent us proficiency
attained, Fatigue and exhaustion win be specially guar(
against, as they prevent proper interest being taken in
'cises and delay the progress of the instruction. Rests wlIl
from the position of order arms in the manner' pre-!
led in Infantry Drill Regulations.
THE BAYONEl:.
NOMENCLATURE AND DESCRIPTION.
The bayonet js fL cutting nnd tllrusting weapon consisting
lree principal parts, vIz, the blade, gU(l.Td, and grip.
The blade has the fo11owing parts: Edge, false edge, back.
Iyes, pOint, and tang. The length of the blade from guard
oint is 16 inches, the edge 14.5 inches, and the false edge
inches. Length of the rifle, bayonet fixed, is 59.4 inches.
weight of the bayonet is 1 poulld; weight of rifie without
met is 8.69 pounds. rJ:he center of gravity of the rine, with
met fixed, is just in front of the rear sight.
lTE.-The use of the hand aO{ and the pick mattock in organi-
ms equipped with the intrenching tool is authorized for the
lose of driving shelter-tent pins. The use of the bayonet
;hat purpose is prohibited.
I. INSTRUCTION WITHOUl: THE RIFLE.
The instructor es:pl3"ins importance of gDorl foot.\vul'l.:
impresses on the men the fact that quicklless of foot and
,leness of body are as important for attack and defense as
.e nblllty to parry nnd deliver n strong point or cut.
All foot movements should be made from the position of
:d. As far as practicable, they will be made on the balls:: of
feet to insure quicl{ness nnd agility. No hard and fa8t l'ule
be laid down as to the lengtll of the various foot movements;
depends entirely on the situations OCl'UlTing in COtubut.
The men having taken intervals 01' distances, the
ctor commands:
Bayonet exerclse, 2. GUARD.
; the command gnard, half filce to the right, carry bud:: :lnd.
e the right foot about once and a half its length to the rear
about 3 inches to the right, the feet fonning with (.Inch
r an angle of about 60, weight of the body balanced equally
he balls of the feet, knees slightly bent, palms of hands ()fa:
, fingers to the front, thumus to the rear, head erect, he,,,]
eyes straight to the front.
\
1l!6 EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRYDRILI. REGULATIONS.
16. To resume the attention. 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION.
men take lhe position or it,,; soldier and fix their attention.
17. ADVANCE. Advnnce the left foot 'Iuicl,l), about once
length, follow immf.:'diate1y ,vith the right foot the same
tance.
18. RETIRE. right foot quickly to the rear at
once its length, follow irnrnecliately with the left foot the s:
distance.
19. 1. Front, 2. PASS. Place the right foot quickly about (
its length in front of the left, advance the left foot to Its pre
position in front of the right.
20. 1. Rear, 2. PASS. Place the left foot quickly about (
its length in l'eal' of the right, retire the right foot to its pr'
pqsftion in rear of the left.
The passes arc usod to get quickly within striking distanc
to withdraw qulcl,ly therefrom.
21. ]. Right, 2. STEP. Step to thO right with the right
about once its length and place the left foot In ita proper r
tive position.
22. 1. Left, 2. STEP. Step to the left with the left foot at
once its length and place the right foot In Its pNper rela
position.
'l'hese steps are used to circle around an enemy. to
more favorable line of attack. or to Ilvold the opponent's ntt:
Bette,' "round or more favorable lio:ht may be gained In
way. Ill- bayonet fencing and 1n actual combat the foot J
moved in stepping to the right or left is the ODe which fit
bears the least weight.
II. INSTRUCTION WITH THE RIFLE.
23. The comronnds for and the execution of the foot m,
rnent:,; nrc the same as already given for movements without
rifle.
24. The men hn. vin;; ttl ken intervals or distances, the
strlwtor commands:
J. Bayonet exercise, 2. GUARD.
At the second command tnke the pOSition of guard (see I
15) ; at the same time throw the rllie smartly to the front, gr
I MANUAL OF THE BAYONET. 19.7
with the left hanr1 just below the lower band, fingers
the stock and gun sling, barrel turned slightly to the
the right hand grasping the small of the stock ahout 6
s in front of the right hip, elbows free from the body,
let point at the height of the chin.
1. Order, 2. ARMS.
lng the right foot up to the left and the rifle to the pusi
of order arms, at the same time resuming the position of
tion ....
During the preliminary instruction, attacl;;:s aud defenses
Je executed from guard until proficiency is attained, after
1 they may be executed f1'0111 any position in ,vbieh tlle
is held.
ATTACKS.
1. THRUST.
rust the r!fie qniekly forward to tlle full length of the Jeft
turning the barrel to the left, and direct the point of the
let at the point to be attacked, butt covering the dg;ht fo1'o-
At the same tilne straighten the right leg vigorously nnd
v the weight of the body forward anrl on the left leg, 'Ihe
)f the right foot always on the ground. Guard is resumed
,diately without command.
e force of the thrmU js delivered principally with the right
the left being used to direct the bayonet. points at
i1 the attack should be directed are, in rJl'<]er of their 1m'
.nee, stomach, chest, head, neck, and limbs.
1. LUNGE.
ecuted In the snme manner liS the thrust, except that the
foot Is carried forward about twice its length. left
must alwllYs be In rear of Uoe left Imee. Gncml is re-
d Imm'rllately wlthout command. Gual'f] may also ue reo
d by advaneing the right foot If for any rcnson it isele
to hold the gTound gained In lunging. In the latter em,e
,reparatory command forward will be given. Each method
tel be practiced. '
1. Butt, 2. STltIXE.
"'igbten right arm and right leg vigorously and swing butt
Ie against point of attack, pivoting the rille in the left hand
128 EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. I
at about the. height of the left shoulc!er. allowing the ba:
to pass to the !"e"r on the left shle of the Ileac!. Gum
PAR. 27.
resumed without COlD-
mand.
The points of athck in
their order of importance
fire head, neck, stomach.
and crotch.
30. 1. C1lt, 2. DOWN.
Execute a quick do\yn-
ward stroke, edge of
bayonet directed at point
of attack. Guard is re-
sumed without command. Pu.2(,
129
1. Cut, 2. RIGHT (LEFT).
th a quid\: extension of the arms execute it cut to the right
), direeting The edge tovirard the point Gu:u(l"is
ned \vithont eommilnd.
e cuts arc cspecialiy llseful against the head, nw1
s of an III executing left. cut it :-:llould be remelll-
( that the false, or b:1ek edge, is only 3.13 inches long.
PAR. 28.
ran eXf'cutecl in continuation of strokes, thrusts, Illng-es,
HlrrieR.
'1'0 tlireet flU attack to the right., left, or fPHT the soldier
front ftS qnickly as possible in the most. convenient
er, for example: 1. To the right rear, 2. Cut, 3. DOWN;
the right, 2. LUNGE; 1. To the left, 2. THRUST, etc.
93512'-17--5
, ,
180 EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULAT!ONS.,
\Vhenevel' possible the impetus gained by the turning n
ment of the bmJy shoultl be throwIl into the attack. In gener-a
will be best accomplished by turning on the ball of the right
These movements constitute n chang-e of front in_ \-"hid
PAR. 29.
of gu:u'd is
sumed at the completi(
the movement.
33. Good judgment oj
tOl1ce is essential.
racy in thrusting and
ing is best attained by
tieing these attacks ng
rings or other
openings, about 3 inth
diameter, suitflbl;y SUS]
ed at (lesiretl heights.
34. The thrust and 1\
at rings should firs
practiced by encleavol'i:
hit the opening lookcl
This shoulel be followE
direding the attack ag
one opening while lo(
at another.
35. The soldier 81
also experience the effE
actnal resistance
the awl the
of the rille in attacks.
\vill be taught l)y pr:
illg attacks again
dummy.
36. Dummies should be constructed in ::;:ueh a m:mner
permit the execution of attacks \vithout injury to the poi
edge of the bayonet or to the barrel or stock Of the rill,
suitable dummy can be made froni pieces of rope about [) it
length plaited closely together into a cablc between 6 ar
PAR. 36.
in diameter.' Old
rope is preferable. Bags
weighted nnd stuffed
with hay, stra,v, Hhuy-
ings, etc., are <llso
able.
Dl';FENSES.
37. In the preliminary
drills in the defenses
the position of guard is
resumed, by commnllcl,
ufter each pnrry, 'Vhen
the mell lw become
Pl'Ol1cicllt the instructor
,vili c:ansc them to re-
sume the vositiol1 of
gnard iIlstalltl,y ydtlloHt
COllllllantl afLp,l' the exe-
cution of each /larry.
38. 1. Par r y, 2.
RIGHT.
Keepinp: the right
lwnd in gWll'd posi-
tion, moye the "iile
sharply to the right
,yith tlw left arm, so
that the bayonet poillt
is about 6. inches to the
right.
39. 1. Parry, 2. LEFT.
Move the rifle "harp-
ly to tue left frout Witll
both hunds so as to
cover tlle poInt at-
tneked.
40. 1. Parry, 2. HIGH.
Raise the rifle with
both hands uigh enou.gh
to clear the line

- -.--
-s::- ._
PAR. 33.
181
182 ~ X T R C T S FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGcULATIONS.1
of vision, barrel down\vard, point of the
front.
I
bayonet to the
\Vhen necessary to raise the rifle well above the head, it
be supportecl between the thumb and forefinger of the left I
PAR. 40.
PAR 4:
This position will be necessary against attacks from highe
vations, such as men mounted or on tOD of parapets.
-41. 1. Low parry, 2. RIGHT (LEFT).
Carry the point of the bayonet 001V11 until it is at the.Il
of the knee, moving the point of the bayonet sufficiently t
MANUAL OF THE BAYONET. 133
t (left) to keep the opponent's attacks clear of the point
atenell.
[lese are rarely usec1, as; nIl attack belolv the waist
es the head [Ind body exposed.
PAR. 41. PAr.. -1-1.
Parries not be too 'vide or s\'\'eel1ing, but sharp,
motions, finished .... ylth a jerk or (';1TCi'. The hands
Ild, as far as possibh:\ be kept in the line of attack. Parries
nst butt strike are JlIade by moving the guard so as
)Ver the point attacl,ed. .
134 EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. '
43. To provide against attack from the right, left, or rear
soldier wi 11 change front as quicl-::ly as possihle in thp
venient manner; for example: 1. To the left real', 2. p(
3. HIGH; 1. To the right, 2. Parry, 3. RIGHT, etc.
movements constitute a change of front in '\vhirll
PAR. 44.
position of gnard is l'esu
at tile completion of tile 11
rnent.
III chaIlging front for
purpose of nttaek or def(
if there ts danger of WOU11
a comrade, the rifle
first be bronght to n Y81'
position.
III. INSTRUCTION WITH<
THE BAYONET.
44. 1. Club rifte, 2. SWI
Being at order arms, at
pl'eparatory eommand qui
rnise and turn the rifle,
grasping it with both h
between the rear 81gllt
muzzle, barrel down, thI
around the stock and to,
the butt; at the same
raise the rifle above the sl
der farthest from the c
nent, butt elevated and to
renr, elbo\vs slightly bent
knees straight. 1nd
ual takes such posItion 01
feet, shoulders, and hand
best accords with his na1
dexterity. SWING. Tighten the grasp of the hands and .'
tIle rifle to the front and downward, directing it at the hea
the opponent. and Immediately return to the position of club
by completing the swing or the rl1le clownwurd and to the I
Repeat by the command, SWING.
135
Ie rifle should be s"\vnng with sufficient force to break
lugh any guard or parry that may be interposed.
at club rifle, order is l'esnmetl b,v cOlllmand.
[le use of this attack against rlummies 01' in fellcing is pro
ted.
f. 'l'he position of club rifle may be taken from any position
he rifle prescrjbed in the J\:fanual of Arms. It \yill not be
in personal combat unless the emergency is such as to
lucIe the use of tile bayonet.
IV. COMBINED MOVEMENTS
. The purpose of combinefl movements is to develop more
rOllS attacks anci more effective defenses th,]ll are obtained
:he single movements; to develop skill in passing -from ut-
to (iei'ense uncI tIle reverse. Bvery luovement to the front
lId be :1.ccompanled an attnek. whirh is increased in
,tivcncss by the forward movement of the body. Every
ement to the rear 8hon1(1 ordinarily be accompanied by a
'y and should ahvays he fo]1O\yed by an attack. 1l'Iovements
he right or left may be accompullied by attacks or defenses.
'. Not more than tllree Tnovemellts ,,,ill- be llsec.l jn. any COlTI-
.tion. The instructor should first indicate -the number of
cmcnts that are to be combined as two mOlielnents or three
ements. The execution is tletPl'lIllrwd loS comlJland of
:utiOll! and the position of guard is taken upon the comple-
of the last movemel:'t only.
EXAMPLES.
,ont pass and LUNGE.
ight step and THRUST.
,ft step and low parry RIGHT.
,ar pass, parry left and LUNGE.
mge and cut RIGHT.
trry right and parry HIGH.
1tt strike and cut DOWN.
lrust and parry HIGH.
trry high and LUNGE.
lvance, thrust and out RIGHT.
138 EXTRACTS FROM: INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.l
:Right step, parry left and cut Down.
To the left. butt strike and cut DOWN.
Te the right rear, cut down and butt STRIKE.
48. Attacks against dummies will be practieed. The appr,
will be made against the dummies both in quick time
double time.
V. I'RACTICAL BAYONET COMBAT.
49. The princinles of practiml bayonet combat shonlo
taught as far as possible during the progress of instructlol
bayonet exercises.
60. r.rhe soldier must be continually impressed with the
trewe importance of the offensive due to its moral effect. Sh
an attack fail, it should be follo,\ved immediately by ano
attach: before the opponent has un opportunity to assume
otl'enslve. Keep the opponent on the defensive. If, due to
Cllmstances, it is necessary to take the defensive, consta
watch for an opportunity to assurue the offensive and tuke
mediate advantage of it.
51. Observe the ground with a view to obtaining the best j
Ing. Time for this will generally be too limited to pennit I
than fi single hasty glance.
52. In Dersonal combat watch the opponent's eyes it they
be plainly seen, and do not fix the eyes on his weapon nor t
the point of your attack. If his eyes can not plainly f
as in night attacks, watch the movements of hls weapon
of his hod),.
53. Keep the body well covered and deliver attacks vigorOl
The point of the bayonet should always be kept as nearl:
possible in the line of attaol,. The less the rifie is moved
wartl! to the. or to the left, the better prep:
the soldier is for attack or defense.
54. Constfl ntly tcb for a chance to attack the OppOOI
left hand. His position of guard will not differ materially 1
that describe(l in parngralih 21. If his bayonet is witho'
cutting erlgc; he \-vill be at a. great
58. The hutt is used for close and sudden attucks. It is
titularly useful in ri.ot (luty. From the position of port arI
sentry can strike a Severe blow with the butt of the rifle.
lirANlJAL OJ' THE BAYONET. 18'
. Against a man on foot, armed with a sword, be careful
the muzzle of the rifle Is not grasped. All the swordsman's
!'';ies will be directed toward getting past the bayonet. At-
, him with short, stabbing thrusts, and keep him beyond
king distance of his weapon.
r. Tl,le adversary may attempt a greater extension in the
1st and lunge by quitting the grasp of his piece with the left
d and advancing the right as far as possible. When this
lone, n sharp parry may cause him to lose control of his
'. leaving him exposed to a counter attack, which shonld
)w promptly.
I. Against odds a small nnmher of men can fight to best
antage by grouping themselves so as to prevent their being
'eked from behind.
). In fighting a mounted man armed with a saber every
rt must be made to get on his near or left side, because here
reach is mllch shorter and his parries much weaker. If not
,ible to disable such an enemy, attack his horse and then
,w the attack on the horseman.
J. In receiving night attacks the a.ssailant's movements can
best observed from the kneeling or prone pOSition, as his
roach generally brings him against the sky line. Whe:n he
[ves \vithin attacking distance rise quickly and lunge well
:vard at the middle of his body.
VI. FENCING EXERCISES.
1. Fencing exercises in two Jines consist of combinations of
llsts, parries, and foot movements executed at command or
;vill, the opponent replying with suitable parries and returns.
2. 1'1", i1,1"t1'u"to1' will Inspect the entire fencing equipment
"'e the exercise begins and assure himself that everything Is
nIC'h condition as will prevent acddents.
3. The men equip themselves and form in two lines at the
er, facing eacb other, Witll Intervals of about 4 paces between
;,: and a dIstance of about 2 paces between lines. One line
leslgnated as nnmber 1: the other, number 2. Also as attack
I defense.
4. The o p p o ~ t s being at the order facing each other, the
tructor commands: SAL UXE.
Each mnn, with eyes on his opponent, carries the left I
smartly to the right side, palm of the hand down, thumb
fingers extended and joined, forearm horizontal, fOl'efi:
touching the bayonet, (Two,) Drop the nrm smartly by
side,
This salute is the, fencing salute.
All fencing exercises and all fencing at will between i
vidua is will begin and terminate with the formal courtes;
the fnring salute.
65. After the fencing salute has iJPen rendered the instru
conullands: 1. Fencing exercise, 2. GUARD.
At the command guard each man comes to the POSitiOl
guard, heretofore detined, bayonets crossed, (-ach man's bay
bearing lightly to the right again8t the corresponding POl'
of the opponent's bayonet. TIlis position is known as
engage or engage right.
66. Being at the <llg'age right: ENGAGE LEFT.
The "ttack dl'ops the point of his bayonet qllickly until c
of his rifle and describes a semicircle with it 11P"
and to the right; bU.YOllP-tl-l nre crossed similarly as in the
gaged position, each mun's bayonet bearing lightly to the
against the corresponding portion of the opponent's bayonet.
67. Being at engage left: ENGAGE RIGHT.
'1'he attaclr quickly drops the point of Itis bayonet until c
of his oPPollent's rifle and d.escribes a semicirc1e with it uP"
and to the left and engages.
68. Being engaged: ENGAGE LEFT AND RIGHT.
The attack engage left :llHl irnmel]iat81y engages ri'
69. Being engaged left: ENGAGE RIGHT AND LEFT.
The attack engages right and then immediately engages
70. 1. Number one, ENGAGE RIGHT (LEFT); 2. Number
COUNTER.
Numbm" exPC'utes the movement ordered, as above; n
her two quickly drops the point of his bayonet and circle
up"ivard to the original position.
71. In all fenCing while maintaining the -;lressnre in the
gage n certain freedom of motion of the rifle is allowable, I
sisting of' the pla;y, or motion, of one bay(
agninst the other. This is necessary to prevent the OppOI
from divining tile intended attack. It also prevents Ilis m
I MANUAL OF THE BAYONET. 18S
"point of contact as a pivot for his assaults. In changing
L1 one engage to tllG the movement is controlled- by the
'hand, the right ren,,-lining stationary.
:. After SOHle exercise in engage) engage left. and counter,
'dses wH1 be gi"Yen in the assaults.
ASSAULTS.
i. The part of the body to be attackec! will lJe designated by
lE\ at; he.ld. ned;:, chest, stomach, legs. 1.\0 attacks 'vill be
Je below the knee...;, rrhe commands are nml the move-
ts for euell line are first explained thoroughly by the in-
ctor: the Cxccl1tl.on begins at the command assault. Knm-
one execute:;; the attack, and IlUlnber two parries; conversely,
ollunaud, number two attacks and number one parries.
For ('oDvenience in instruction assaults are tlivldell into
attacks, counter attacks, attacks on rUle, and ieints.
SI:1[Pr.E ATTACKS.
). Success in these attacks depends on qnickness of move-
.t. There arc three silllvie straight, the disen-
ement, ml1J the counter disengagement. They are not pre-
,d by 0 feint.
). In the straight the bayonet is directed at an opell-
from lhe engaged position. Contact with the opponent's
mayor may not be abandoned while making it. If the
ling "be bigh OJ' 10\v, contact "\vith the rifle will usually be
ndoned on commencing the attack. If the opening be near
igUUl'c1, light pressure used ill the engage may be con-
ied i[1 tlH:: aHack.
xf!Juplc: Being at the engage right, 1. Number one, at neck
nd, chest right leg, etc.), thrust; 2. Number two, party
It; 3. ASSAULT.
'I. III the disengagement eOlltnct wtth opponent's rifle is
wloned and the point of the bayonet is cll'cle{l1111der or over
bayonet or rlfie oncl dIrected into the opening attaCked. This
lek is delivel'e(l by one conlinuous spirnl movement of the
onet from the moment contuct is nbandoned.
xflmple: Bejng at the engage right, 1. Number one, at stom-
(left cllest. left leg. etc.), thrust; 2. Number two, parry
(etc.) ; 3. ASSAULT.
140 EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.!
78. In the counter disengagement a swift uttack is made'
the opening disclosed \vhile the opponent is attempting to eh:
the engagement of his riffe. It is delivered by one contin
spiral-movement of the baYOIlPt into the opening.
Example: Being at the engage right, 1. Number two, en:
left; Number one, <It ('lJest, thrust; 3. Number two, p
left; 4. ASSAULT.
Numher t\VO i:1iiiaff.>:o; the movement. numher onc thrust
soon as Hie ol)l21ling is made
1
and numher bvo then attemp1
pan-yo
79. A counter attack or l'etnrn is one instantly aftf
in continuation of a parry. The parry should he as narr01
possibJc. This makes it more ditlicult fOl' the opponent t(
eove.T' and countct' parr,f. The ('ountQr' attack shoulcl als.
made at or just before the full extension of the oppom
attaCk, as \vhen It is i"!) macle a simple extension of the :;
win generally he ::::;utllcienL to reach the opponent's body.
Example: Beill.go at engage, 1. Number two, at chest, IUl
2. NUn!.bel one, parry rig'ht awl at stomach (chest, head, e
thrust; 3. ASSAULT.
ATT.ACKS ON THE RIFLE.
80. These movements are made for the purpose of forcin
disclosing an opening iilto \,hieh an attack can be llladc. ']
aTe the press, the beat, and the twist.
81. In thp- press the attack quickly presses against the 0
nenes bayonet or rifle wHh his o\vn uncI continues the pres:
as the attack is delivered.
EXHlll111e: Being at the engage, 1.. Number one, press, anj
chest, thrust; 2. Number two
J
parry right; 3. ASSAULT.
82. The attack by disengagement i8 lJarticnlarly effective
lowing the press.
Example: at the engage, 1. Number one .. press) aw
stolladi, thrust; 2. Number two
J
low parry left; 3. ASSAUL'I
83. The beat is all attllck: in \yllich [l sharp blo\v is stJ
against the opponent's rifle for the purpose of forCing hin
expose an opening into which an attack immediately folIc
It is used \vhen there is but slight opposition or no contac
rifles.
MANUAL OF THE BAYONET. 141
anlple: Being at the engage, 1. Number one, beat, and at
Jeh (chest, etc.), thrust; 2. Number two, parry left; 3. AS-
fT.
III the twist the rifle is crossed over the opponent's ritle
lyonct and his 'buyonet forced downward '\Yith a circular
)11 and a straight attack made into the opening. It requires
on the part of the attack.
ample: Being at the engage, 1. Number one, twist, and at
aeh, thrust; 2. Number two, low parry left; 3. ASSAULT.
FEINTS.
l1'eints nrp- movements which threaten or simulate attacks
made. with a view to inducing an opening 01" pRn"y that
8es the des:red point crf attack. They are either single 01'
,Ie, according to the number of such movements made by
"ttack.
In areter that the' attHck TOny he changed quickly, as little
as possible is put into a feint.
:nmple: Bej,ng at the engage, 1. Number one, feint head
st; nt stornut'h, lunge; 2. Number two, parry right and low
right; 3. ASSAULT.
Imbe!' one executes tile feint and then tile attack. Number
executes; hoth parries.
In double feints first one part of tile body and tllen an-
r is threatene(l and a third attacked.
:ample: Being at the engage, 1. Number one, feint straight
st at chef)t; disengagement at chest; at stumach, lunge;
umber two, parry right, parry left, and low parry left; 3.

An opening may be offered or procured by opposition, as
Ie "press 01" beat.
In fencing exercises every feint should at first be parried.
the defense is able to judge or divine the character Of
lttnck the fei.nt is not nece.'lsarHy parried, but may be nulli-
by a counter feint.
A counter feint a feint foJ"Jo\ving- the opponent's feint or
,\ving a parry of his attack and generally occurs in com-
d movements.
i42 EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
COMBINED MOVEMENTS.
91. \Vl1en men have become thoroughly familiar wit
various foot movements, parries, guards, attacks, feints,
the instructor combines several of them and gives the comn
'in q(l"ek S\1.( the rapidity and number of 1
ll1ellti:; as the men beeorne more skillful. Opponents wi
chungecl freqnent1y.
J. E:;;.amp]e: at the engage, .1.. Number one, by c
nt thrust; 2. Nnmber two, pal'ry left, righ1
(len foot fi"':t) , ,mel lunge; 3, ASSAULT,
2. Example: Beillg at engage left, 1. Number one,
lunge; 2. Number two, parry right, left and thrus
ASSAULT.
S. Example: Being nt the engage, 1. Number one, by
gagement fit ("best, thrust; 2. Number two, parry left, front
awl ;It llead butt strikej 3. Number 011e, :right step; 4.
SAULT.
92, Examples 1 and 2 are typical of movements know
cross counters, and example :Xo. 3 of movements known as
C01.1nters.
93, A chancery is nn nUnc}.;: l)y Ineans of whkl1 the oppom
dislll'llle(l,. \vhich causes him to lose control of his r,ifie, or \'
disables his wenVon.
94. \Vlwn' the different combinatIons are executed with
ciellt skill the instructor \vill devise series of movements'
memorized HlHl at the command assault. The ncet
find ("elcrity of the movements will l)e carefully watched b:
instructor, with fl view to the correction of faulty executio
95. It is not. illiencler1 to restrict the number of movern
but to lea Y to the discretion of company commanders an(
ingenuity of the selection of snch ot.her exercis'
accord with tIw object of the drill,
VII. FENCING AT WILL.
96, As satiBfactory progress is made the instructor will
\:eec1 to the exerdses nt \vill, by- which is meant assaults bet'
two men, each endeavoring to -hit the other and to avoid l
I MANUAL OF THE BAYONET, 143
limself, Fencing at will shollld not be allowed to degenerRte
nUldom attacks and defenses.
The instruetor tan supervise ,but one pnir of combatants
time. 11'requent changes should be made so that the men
leurn different methods of attack and defense from each
I',
o The contest sbould begin with simple, careful movements,
n ViCiV to forming a correct opinion of the adversary;
'\Val'ds everything will depend on coolness, rapid anti cor-
of the movements, and quick perception of the
rsary's intentions .
. COlltinual retreat from the aclversary's attack and fra.
It doclging to escape attacIi:s should be avoided. The offen-
shouh1 be continually encouraged.
D. In fen .... ing at 'will, when no eOJllIuHTHls are given, oppo-
s facing other at the position of order arms, salute.
l then immediately and simultaneously assume the position
llmd 1Wes engRged. Neither man may take the position
nard before his opponent has completed his salute. The
"" of position is (lecided before the sainte.
1. The opponents being a bout two paces apart flnd the
mlute lurdng: been rendered, the instructor commands 1. At
2. ASSAULT, after which either party has the rlgllt to
ek. To lnr.errUI)t t.1w contest the instructor will command
,T, at which the combnt!lnts will immediately come to the
r. To terminate the contest, the instructor will command,
alt, 2. SALUTE) at which the combatants ,"vin immediately
::! - to the order. and remove their masks.
2. \Vhen men have acquired conficience in fencing at will,
opponent 5lliould be required to upon the other in
k time at charge bayonet, from a distance not to exceed 10
Is, fillcl cleliver an attack. As soon as a hit is made by
::r opponent the instrnctor commnnds, HALT, nnd the assault
linutes. Opponents alternate in assaulting.' The assailant
ke\vjse required to advance at double time from a dist&nce
exceeding 20 yards and at a run from a distance not exceed-
30 yards.
13. The instructor will closely observe the contest and decide
otflll pOints, He will at once stop the contest upon the
I
1114 EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.:
slightest indication of temper. After conclusion of the co:
he wi II comment on the action of IJoth parties, point out e:
a ~ l . l deficiencies amI explain how they may be avoided it;
future.
104. As :ttlditi.oI1aI instruction, the men may. be permittE
wiele! the rifle left hande(l, thnt is on the left sirle of the 1
left lJallfl at the smuU of the stock. Many men will be abI
use this methml to advantage. It is also of value in case
left hand is wounded.
105. Aftel' lIlen have fenced in pairs, practice should be gi
in fencing between groups, equally and unequally divi,
Wlten practicable, inti'encilmellts will be used In fencing of
characLer.
l
MANlJAL OF THE ,BAYONET. 14&
group fencing it will be necessary to have a sufficient num-
Qfumplres to decide hits. An individual receiving a hit is
drawn at once from the bout, which is decided in favor of
group having the numerical superiority at the end. The
Lng salute is not required in gr,oup fencing.
RULES FOR FENCINC AT WILL.
6. 1. Hits on the legs below the kr.ees wiII not be counted.
lit counts unless, in the opiulon of the instructor, it has
force to disable.
Upon receiving a hit, call out" hit.
j
,
After l'Pceiving a fair hit u counter attack is not permitted .
sition of engage iSl tn leen.
A seconll or thirll hit in a combined aUack wiII be counted
when the hit ,YUS not call cu.
'Vhcn it is necessary to stop the contest-for example,
e of breaking of \veapons or displacement of llleans of pro
on-take the position of the 0l'(1el'.
'Vhen it is necessary to suspcll(l the assault for any cause,
111 not be resumed until the adversury is ready :lllfl in con-
n to defend himself.
Attacks directed at the crotch are prohibited in fencing.
Stepping out of bounds, when established, counts as a hit.
SUGGESTIONS FOR FENCING AT \VILL.
1. When engaging in an nssnult, first stuc1y the ndversnry's
ion and proceed by false :1ttacks, exe-cutetl ,vitll speed, to
Iver, if possible, his instinctive In order to draw
Idversary out anll induce him to expose that part of the
at which the attack is to Le made, it is advisable to simu-
an attack by a feint and then make the real attack.
I. Return attacks shoul,l he f"equently practicec1, as they
1ifficult to parry, nnd the opponent is within easier reach
more exposed. '.he return cun be made n continuation of
)arry, as there is no previous warning of its delivery, al-
gh it should always be expected. Retul'lls are made with.
unging if the adversary can be reuched by thrusts .01' cuts.
,
109. Endeavor to overcome the tenc1eney to make a. rJ
without kumving where _it will hit, l\laking returns blind
a bad habit and leads to instinctive returns-that is. hah
returlls with eertain attacl\:s from certain parl'ies-a fault "
the skilled opponent ,vill soon discover.
110. Do not dl"U'w the rifle back prepuratory to thrusting
lunging.
111. r.rlle purpose of at will is to the sol diE
many forms of simple, efCective attacks and defenses aB
sible. Complicat(:lcl and intricate movements should not bl
tempted.
Hl1'.:TS FOli. INHTm;CTORS.
112. influence of the is great. He mus
master of his nut only to shcnv the nll'i()UH
but u180 to lead in the exercise::; at ,;vin. He shouJ(l Sti1111
the zeal of the Hlen and pleasue8 in the '.vork. Off
.should qualify themselves as instructors by fencillg with
other.
113. The cilaracter of each man, his bodily conformation,
his degree of skill lllUBt alw,1Y:-; be tnken into account. V
the instructor 1s demonstrating the combinations, feints
turns, and parrIes the rapidity of his attad:: should be t
luted by the skilJ of the pnpil an(l no -m01'2 forc.e than is n
sary. should be used. If the pupil exposes himself too muc
the feint:"3 :llld Juc'ries, the instructor will, by an uttack,
vince him of his error; but if these return::;; be too swiftl
too strongly mu(le the pupil \vill become overcautious and
precision of hb; attack: wtLl be impnJl'erl. 'l'l1e object is to t
the pupil, not to giYe exb5bitions of snperior skill.
114. Occasionally the instructor :::;hOll1d leave himself 11t
erecl and fail to parry, ill order to teach the pupil to take q
advantage of suell opportunities.
SUGGESTIONS.
Instruction in bnyollf't exerdRe und bayonet fencing sb
be conducted with a vie\Y to teacbing the aggressive use 01
bayonet. Unless troops are so thoroughly trained with the t
I MANUAL OF THE BAYONET. U7
~ t h t they believe that with it they are superior to their
Inents it will be difficult or impossible to develop that
ale which is necessary for a successful assault. Men should
mpressed with the importance of acting always on the of-
ive in bayonet combat. of pushing their attack with all
r might. rrn)ops ,yhich ure successful in their first few
met encounter:;; wil1 seldom therenftel' be caned upon to
the hayonet---their opponents will not await the assault.
VI.
FIELD SERVICE.
Section 1. Principles of infantry training.
Inaction gives p,vel'y to the enemy.
The offensive alone gives decisive results.
A quid..: and energ-etic offensive minimizes los;ses.
An advance the eIlPlll:(s position once entered
must be continued. To g-o back uncleI' fire is to (lie.
The best way to hold down the fire of the enemy an
diminish hi .... pO\Vel' to infliet los<.:.t.'S is to bring the positiOl
occupies under ,yell conducted and continuccl fire.
Present as small a target as possi!)!(-'.' to the enemy by u
ing every bit of cover tile gl'01llHl r:[[o1'(ls.
Individual skill in lllal'ksmanship h; an advantage in b
only \vhen united \vith fire discipline nnd control.
Constant movPllIent to the fl'{)llL lessens the effect of
enemy's fire. l\lodel'll buttles fought in the open si1o';Y that
heaviest losses Ul'e in the mid nJlcl long \Vhen (
range is reached the l"Jph1b
r

The best protection against urtillel':v fire is a constant
irregular movement to the front. \\,11011 dose to tJle ene
position his tll'P is
A knowJedge of 11mv to- use the bayonet flnd the, 'to
it must often be the clecicling f:lctors in oattle.
Finally:
In infantry training \VC can not go far "Tong 01' fnil tc
complish the best results if we J{eep lx'fore O1lr minrll-l the s
as \yell W5 the wonlillg' of paragraph 302 of the Infantry ,
Regulations: "The duties of inf<1l1tl'Y arc many and difii
All infantry must be tit to cope 'vitll all conditions thaI
arise. 110l1el'll war requires hut one kind of infantry
infantry."
148
COllfllAT.
149
Section 2. Combat.
e field of battle is the final test of the instruction, disci
., and efficiency of the fighting force of any army.
e battalion is the attack unit or the defense unit, whether
lting alone or as part of a regiment. rrhe companies con-
te the firing line allcl the support.
soldier is concerned onlv with the ellE>U1Y in his
front. in obeying or del's, and in::>tillctiYcly doing ,vhat
18 been trailled to do.
e one requisite necessary to win the battle is intelligent
work. army is handled just likE> a football team. A
is on tbe first line facing the enemy. Another part, like
,alf backs, is beld back as supports. Another part, like tho
backs, is held as a reserve. Each unit, like each player,
certain duty to perform. When the signal is given, all
together-all play the game-team work. The players
st of all branches of the service.
e same rule holds true dmvn to the srnallest unit and even
e individual enlisted man. Each regiment is a 1-eam com-
I of three plnyers-each a battalion. Each battalion is a
of four players-each fl company. In the SE:llC manner
company is a team of two or more platoons; each platoon
UTI of two or more squads; and last, but not least, each
] is a team of eight players.
e one qnestion that always presents itself on tile battle
every minute of the time to every person, \vhether he' be
leral 01' a private, is H What play has my team captain or-
and how best may I act so as to work in conjunction with
ther players to bring about the desired resultl "-team play.
t.he Infantry private this means-
st .. Prompt and loyal obedience to the squad leader. Every
t uhvays has u captain, If the lemler is killed
isablet1, anuther player previously designated takes his
If no one was desigIlated, then the private with the
st service takes command. When tile squad leader gives
ommand for a certain play, don't stop to think if the play
good one, but do your VPI'Y best to carry out the playas
ed. A poor play in wllich every player rmters with his
, heart (team work) will often win, while, on the other
110 FIELD SERVICE.
hand, the best play in which some of the pl:lyers are slcu
and shirkers will probably fail.
Second. Never lose tOllch with YO-'UT squad. 'Rvery inclivi
as well as every unit, sho'uld always be acting nnder the
troI of some higher C'ommill1cl(-'!r. This is if thf
to be any unity of action. rl'h!:'l'<:'fnrp -If ,.YOll lORe your
or it becomes broken up, join the iirst sqnad you Cun find
obey your uew squad leader as loyally and us cheerfully a:
dId your own.
Infantr,Y :lPl)J'oaches Hw LJilJ,LlP fleW in columns of sq
While yet several miles from the enemy's position the t
may come under artillery 111'. On gT2en men entpl'ing
their fight, the sonnet of the project.ile \vhistling throug}
air, the noise, flash, and smoke on the bllrst of the s
nel, and the hum of tIle various piece-s thereafter, an prod
very terrifying efi\:d, but olLl sohlitl.I's soon learll to pay
attention to as the dange.r is not great.
As the troops adyunce. the column hr0<-lks np into sn
columns, ,v11tcl1 form on an line wiLh llloy'e or
interval beL,veen. As the ad continuC's each column 11
up into smaller columns until finally a line of
formed.
Firing is delayed :lS long as possible for three reasons,
(a) At the extreme ranges .little darnnge can be 01
enemy, and ineffective firing always encow'ages him; (b)
jng to fire dp}ays the mlvance, and the great object to he :11
pUshed is to close in on the enemy ,yhero y.ou can meet hi
better terms; (0) plenty of amlllunitjon ,yilt be required tl
decisive stage of tile fight, and it Is 'ler,Y dlfHcult jn send
ammunition up to the firing linc. Therefore ne ... fire unt
dered to do so, and then never fire more than the nu.mb
founds designated. Never fire after the command" cease :til
is given.
Ammunition in the bandoleers "\vill ordinarily be exp(
first. Thirty rouncls in the right pockpt Rection of ,the
will be held as a reserve, to be expended only \vhen,
an officer.
Soon, howeyer, i.t wll.1 be necessary. to halt UlHl ,ft
the enemy in order to cause him some loss, to make his rift
! COMBAT. 151
Idown in their trenches, and to make them fire wildly. It
ohable that at this time and until you arrive much closer
vIII not see any of the enemy to fire at. You may not even
my trelJ.ches nor know just ,,,,here the enemy is. Your
!r officers, however, with their field glasses and the meS-
: they receive, will know. Each company will be assigned
tuin front to cover with its fire. Therefore be careful to
our sights at the designated range and fire only at the
nated target. This means team work in firing, which is
f the most important elements of success.
e firing line advances from position to position by meaDS
shes. At long range the entire line may rush for\vard at
awe time, but as the range decreases one part of the line
's forward while the remainder keeps up a hot fire on the
y. The number taking part in each rush decreases as the
)f the enemy hecornes warmer,_ until perhaps only one
I, or even less, rushes or era w]s fonvarcl at n time, p r ~
1 by the fire of the rest of the company. The (listance
ed by each rush also becomes less and less, After any
no part of the line again allvauf'es until the rest of- the
s up. In making a rush, the leader of the unit gives the
I and leads the way. The rest follow. No attempt is made
ep a line, but each man rushes forward at a run, seeking
to reach the new halting position as quickly and with
,tie exposure as possible. When halted. the skirmishers
not be in a perfect line. but every ndvantage should be
of the ground for concealmellt and protection. It- is
sary only that no man or group of men should interfere
the fire of other part-; of the firing line.
~ noise on the tiring line \vill be great. LeHciers will be dis-
and new men will take their places. Reinforcements
Ig up ,yill cause uni1s to become mixed. To the green man
thing may appeur to be in cOll:fURion, but this is not so.
is war as U really IS. If you have lost your squad or your
leader, join the leader nearest to you. This is the way the
is played.
long as the fight lasts every available rifieman must be
in the -firing line. The first ancl 12.st consideration is to
he battle. Therefore, under no circumstances will any Sol ..
IU
cUer be permitted to go to tho rear, either for ammunition
assist the wounded.
If the attacking force cnn no longer advance. It is much
to throw up hasty Intrenchments and await the arrival ,
inforcements or darkness thun it is to retreat. Retn
troops are the one that suffer the greatest. This less
tanght by every greut war. Therefore, always remember
the safest thing to do is to stick to uring line.
Troops on the firing Hnc, when not actually engaged In
at the enemy. busy themselves throwing up shelter trCl
It only requires a fmy minutes to construct a trench that
great protection. Therefore, n.ever get separated from YOl
trenching tool.
Concealment Is no less important than protection. ~
fore, when conditions permit, as Is generally the case wh
the defensive, every effort should be made to hide IntI
'ments by the use of sod, grass, weeds, bushes, etc.
In making nn attack t ~ Infantry is always supported
possible by its own artillery, which continues to fire ov
head until the Infantry nrrive.s very close to the en
trenches. This fire Is helping you a great eleal by keeping
the fire of the enemy's Infantry anel artillery. Therefore,
think you are being fired Into by your own artillery bE
you hear their shells and shrapnel stnging through the l
bursting a .hort distance in your front, but rather be th,
you are receiving their help up to the very last minute.
In the last rush which carries the enemy's position th
always much mixing of units. The firing line does n01
tilllle rushing; madly as individuals after the enemy, but
and fires on him until he gets out of good range. The p
is tn ken up by formed troops held In reserve or by the
line only after Its units are again gotten together.
As the fighting often lllsts all day. and gre>lt snffer
caused from thirst, don't throwaway your canteen whe
ught commences. It may also be impossible to get rations
the line eluring the ni,ht. Therefore, 1t 1s Ildvisable t. hoI,
at least one ration.
As the recent WII1' hilS shown the posslblllty of band-t,
fighting, especially at night, each soldier should be schoo
the use of the bayonet.

COMllAT. 113
following has particular reference to the duties of
lD and squad leaders and to the team work of the platoon
bat:
troops must first gain fir. superiority In order to
I tbe hostile position. By gaining fire superiority is meant
ng one's fire superior to that of the enemy 1n volume and
'acy, and it depends upon the number of rifles employed,
'ate of fire, the character of the target, training and dis-
le. amI fire clireetlon and control. When the fire of the
'ken; becomes elTeetive anu superior to that of the defenders
atter are no longer abl. to effectively and coolly aim and
Lt the former. and. as a consequence. the attackers are able
augurate a successful rush or advance whicb carries them
to the enemy's- position.
len a trained organization has been committed to the attack,
of fire superiority depends upon the v.ray in which
lire.tion and fir. control are exercised.
e captain dlreots the fire of tbe company. He indicates
e platoon commande.!'. tbe target (enemy) which the com-
Ia to fire and advance upon, Rnd tells each upon which part
10 target be 1. to dIrect tbe fire of his platoon. When he
e.s the fire to be opened he gives t11e necessary commands or
.Is. Inclndlng the range at which the Sights are to be set.
len the fire fight has onC<! started it become. to a great
It n fight of II number ot platoons. The platoon is tbe
8t organization which can be controlled by a single leader
:t10ll. r:I,'he platoun commander (lieutenant or sergeant)
'DIs its fire in order to gain tbo maximum fire effect and
wid wasting ammunition. He must try his best to make
ire of his platoon effective, to get it forward, and to sup
neighboring platoons in their effort to advance. At the
time he ruust hold himself subject to his captain's clirec-
. He should take advantage of every chance to carry his
'on forwanl unless otherwise ordered. In all this I1e is
ted by bis platoon guIde (sergeant) and by his corporals.
the of an engagement the platoon corn-
Ier wlli gIve the objective (part ot the enemy's line or
19 target) at wllicb hIs platoon is to direct Its fire. Non
lissioned officers must be sure that they seo and understand
lli4
FIELD SERVICE.
the objectiyc, and that all the men in their squads do
Fire is then directed nt this objective without further com
until the platoon commander gives U Dew objective.
Men should be instructed to aim at that part of the t
assigned to their platoon \\'hleh corresponds with their own
tion in their own platoon, so that there will be no porti,
the target ,vhich is not covered by fire. A portion 0:
enemy's I ine not co\'c1'e(1 hy fire means that that portion if.:
to coolly aim and fire at their opponents.
In an engngement the voice can seldom be heard over
feet, antI the platoon commander \vill generally have to c(
his orders by signals. A corporal may be able to shout 0
to' his squad. 311(1 orders may bE repeated along a skirmisl
by shouting. Care should be taken that orders intendei
one platoon only arc not thus conveyed to another platoon.
A short blast on the whistle, given by the platoon comma
means "Attention to Orders." All noncommissioned office
once snspend firing and glance to\vard the platoon
to see if tlle latter has any signals or orders for them. 1J
they resume firing. A long bll'lst on the wbistle means I
pend Firing." "'\Vhen a noncommissioned officer hears thi:
nul from his plntoon commander he should at once shout
pend Firing," Vpon receiving a signal, the noncommiss
officer for whom it is intended should at once repeat it bal
be'sure that it is eorrectly understood.
",Vhen a leader in command of a platoon or squad receiv
order or sig'iw] to l'11sJl, he should cause his men to Stl:
firing aml to hold themselves fiat but ready for a spril
start. He selects the pOint, as far as possible with refe
to covel', to ,vhich he intends to carry his unit forward.
then g1'1"es the command" RUSH," springs forward, and
ning nt ful1 ahout three paces ahead of his men,
them in the \'llsh. Arriving at the position he has selecte
th1'O'\"\'8 himself prone, nnll the men drop on either side of
All crmyl 1'0\'\\'[11'11 to goorl firing positions, considering the
also, and tile leader g'ives the necessary orders for resumln
fire. r:L'he latter will include giving the range again, the 14
of the rush being subtracted from the sight setting order,
the last position.
COMBAT.
a nIle, .rushes s:hOlild be started by a unit on one flank,
;ho111d ,be follo\ved in succession by the other units to the
ite flank. Eaeh succeeding unit should halt on the .I!ne
I islJed uy the unit \vl1kh first rushecL. \-Vhen u unit is
, to rush, leaders in charge of adjacent units should caution
men to be careful not to fire into the rushing unit as it
18 fOl'\vard.
len o11e unit suspends fire for the purpose of ruslling, ad-
t, leaders ::;bould arrange to have a portion of their
their fire on target of the rushing uBit, to the end that
may ue no portion of the enemy's line not under fire and
to fire coolly on the ru:-:;hing unit.
shes should be made for as long.u distance as possible, due
c] l)eing hail for the wind of the men nnel not to get beyond
)rting distance of the other units. Long rushes facilitate
c]yunce, ane] quickly place Q skirmish line close to the
Y'H po::;ition, where its fire "vill have more effect. An at-
l1g line suffers less from casualties at short ranges than it
at mid l'nng:e.
ery advantage should be taken to utilize the cover avail-
The best kind of cover is that which, ,vhile it masks the
lishers from the Sight and fire of the enemy, affol'ds fa VOl'-
condItions for firing and for readily advancing. In order
tow men to regain theIr wind, or should the fire of tbe
y be so effective to prevent a further advance without
,rcement. advantage may be taken to lie close in cover, or
fire trenches may bo thrown up in order to allow the line
dntain its position. _ (j To go back under fire is to die.';
len n platoon Is firing, all noneommissioned officers watch
opportunity to make the fire more effective. The platoon
, should constantly watch the men to see that they do not
oe excited, fire too hastlly or without aim, that their Sights
et at the correct range, that they are obviously fIring at
eslgnatedtarget, a,nd that they assume steady firing posi
and take advantage of cover. In performing these duties
L1 be necessary for the guldea to be constantly cr"wUnl;
the line. A corporal in like manner supervises his squad,
with It wben be II not actlTel1 engaged in controlling it.
rOllets are lIxed preparatory t" a charge. This commHnd
Ilally g:\vea by the bUlle. Only olle or two men in each
156
FIELD SERVICE.
squau should fix their at the same time, in order
there may be no marked pause or diminution in the Ii
this {Titical stage of the engagement.
In order to be effective in comhat, the platoon mnst be
oughly trained to work as a team. Each noncommissionc<
eel' must be ('on versant with the signals and commandE
the proper methods for instantly putting into effect the a
of his platoon commander. Each privilte must be trained
he instinetively does the right thing in each phase of the a
Section 3. Patrolling.
The deSignation of a patrol indicates the nature of the
for \vhich it is as, for example, visiting, reCOlllloit(
exploring, flanking, combat, harassing, pursuing, etc. Al
fan try patrol consists, as a rule, of from 3 to 16 men.
Reconnoitering patrols are habitnally small and seek s
in concealment or flight, fighting only when their missio
munds it. The most skillful reconnoissance is where patro
complish their mission and return without being discoverE
the enemy. When resistance Is expected stronger detachr
are required. These cover themselves with small patrols 0:
to four men, the remainder acting as support.
The commander determines the number and strength 0
trols and '''hen they are to be sent out. It is a cardinal
ciple to send out patrols of such strength only as will :11
plish the object.
ThB officer sending out the patrol verifies the detaLl, (
nates a second in command, and gives the necessary instrul
The orders or instrnctions for a patrol, or for any detach
going on reconnaissance, rnust state clearly where the e'
is or 'is to be, \vhat information is desired, what
tures are of spec in 1 importance, the general direction 1
01101ve(1, whether friendly vatrols nre Hable to lJe enCDunt
and ,,,here m8ssng-es nrc to be sent or the patrol is to l'E
Important and comprehensive instructions should be in WI'
but precautions against capture of papers must be taken.
officer sending out a patrol must be certain that his order:
nnrlerstood. DeLaile<l instructions are. as a rule, avoided. "
necessary the time of return is stated.
I
PATROLLING. 167
epatrl\l [eaeler should he selected with care. He should
l' good judgment" courage, be able to read ma.ps, make
and send clear and concise messages. In addition to
ll'llinary etluipment, he should have a map of the country, a
field glass, compass, whistle, message blanks, and pencils.
Ie leacicl' of a patrol should carefully inspect it before start ..
l1lt amI see that each i:-; ill good physical condition,
serviceable shoes. a full canteen, one ration, a
et, and that his rifie and ammunition are in good ccmdi-
He will see Gmt thp eQuipmenL is arranged so as not to
e; that nothing; bright is exposed so as to glitter In the
ight; that nothing is taken along that \vl11 gi,'e informa-
to thp enemy ShOllltl any memIJl:]' full into his hands, as, for
Oplc, eODies of m'Llers, l:naps ,'lith position of troops marked
c;on, Jettcl's, newspapers. or collar ornaments. Blanket rolls
Id generally be lett Lwhind) in oI'ller that the patrol may
d as l.ighl: as possible.
le leader the!) his patrol information and instructions.
38 el1lbra('f' instrudl.ollB -fl'om :lil2;bel' authol'it,Y; his detailed
s; information of the eountry and enemy; the countersign,
ly; the point -where the patrol vdn assemble if scattered.
,Yill see that the mel} nrllleI'stand ihe prescribed signals.
must always be remembered that it makes no di1ferenee
valuable may be the information that the patrol gets, it is
:hless if not sent back in time to be of service. Herein is
c'e most patrols fail. This applies particularly to the infor-
on obtained by patrols acting flS a point or flankers of ad-
:e, real', and iltl nk gmu'(l::.;. vVlJenever the patrol gets any
['malion. the leuder mnst think whether the commanding
:::1' would chang,? his plans 01' issue nmv orclers if he had the
nnatjon. If he woulL1, the should he sent back
nce. If the distance is great or the inhabitants arc hostile,
,Yen to send hvo men with the message. These men should
travel side by sWe, hnL rrs a patrol of t.wo men. If the infor-
[on is very important, and the danger of capture is con-
ruble, the message should be sent by two parties, each trav-
; O;V a (liffel'ellt route.
message from u patrol should ahvuys show (a) the place
1 Iyhich,it is sent; (0) tIle time it sent (clate, hour, and
LIte); (c) to \vhom it is sent; (d) lhe message itself; (e)
168
FIELD SERVICE.
what the patrol intends doing after sending the message:
the llame of the sender. Pnder (d) care must be take
separ!J,te what has actually heen seen IJY the patrol from i
mation received from other sources. Care must also be t
not to' exagger:l te \vhat is seen, but to report only the E
facts.
In their conduct patrols exercise the greatest vigilan(
prevent discovery. No formal formation is or should be
scribe!]. Under the leader's guidance it moves so as to g
against surprise, usually with point and flankers. To e ~
the sphere of its obserYatioll. still smaller patrols (one or
men) may be SCllt out for short (]istrlnces, commnnication
the leader being maintainerl hy signals. \Vhatever thp fo
tion adopted, it should fayor the escape of at least one nu
case of surprise.
In Imtrols of twu to five men the commander genenllly 11
In this formation few signals are necessary, the men si
regulating their movements by his.
In questioning civilians caution is observed not to dis
information that lllay be o[ value to the enemy, Stranger:
not allowed to precede the patrol. Patrol leaders ure an
ized to sei:r.e telegl'ams anCi mail matter, and to arrest ind
uuls, reporting the facts as soon as possible,
Patrols should observe everything for signs of the en
Even apparent trifies may be of great value. The finding
collar ornament !'howillg a man's regiment may enable the,
of staff to determine that the enemy has been reenforced.
Patrols shollle1 not travel on the main roads if they Cat
serve'them and :1t the same time make the necessary p r o ~
by moving some distance to the side of the roads,
Unless in case of attack or of great personal danger, no r
bel' of the patrol shrmlcl fire on hostile troops without 01
from the patrol leader. ,\Vlwil sent out to gain informa
patrols should UYoid lightillg unless it is absolutely n e e ~
in order to carry out their onlers.
Villages and inclosures involving" danger of snrprise
entereel with precalltion, nnd for brief periods only. Hall>
made at points affording good vimv, and the country is St\l
in all directions, landmarks to the rear being impreSsed or
l
PATROI.LING. 169
of the men so that the way back can be readily found;
rnder -consults his map r.nc1 locates himself thereon.
Ilell- a patrol is scattered it reassemble:o; at some place pre-
:-ly selected-; l.f cileekefl in one directioll, it talres another; if
ff, it returns by a detour or forces its ,vay through. As
:t resort, it scatters so tllat at least one man may return
il1iormati.oll. Patrols nearing their O"\V11 lines should march
walk unless pressed hy tIle enemy,
it is advisable for' the leader to conceal his
Il and continue the reconnaissance with Olle or two corn-
ms.
trois fur from tbeir commands or In contact with the enemy
remain out overnight. In ::-;uch cases they seek a place of
thereto ufter nightfall or under cover.
1en the enemy is encountered it is very necessary to locate
llain force. Information is desired of his
gth, whether he hilS infantry, cavalry, and artillery, the
\ and direction of hjs march; or the location of his camp
.ine of outposts.
;st clouds indicate Inoving bodies. Infantry a low
l
cloud; cavalry a high thin cloud; artillery and \ytlgons
}ken cloud. rrlH:1 kintl of troops, direction of march, nnd
)ximate strength may thus sometimes he roughly
tl. If from some position H body of troops can be seen
hing along in column, the exact time in minutes and sec-
it requires fol' them to pass a certain point should be
l, together with the formation they in. thus: Infantry,
nn of squads, three minutes and t\velve seconds; cavalry,
nilS of t\VOS at u trot, one minute and twenty seconds;
Ins, four-mule, frye minutes. IT'rom this information the
gth can be determined by the following rule:
i:5uming tbat infantry in column of squads occupy half a
per man, cavalry in colurrln of fonrs 1 yard per man, and
ery and \vugons in Single column 20 yarns per gun, caisson,
,Jgon, a given point \vould be passed in one minute by
t--
17ij infantry.
110 cavalry at a \valk.
200 en vnll'Y n t n trot.
5 guns, caissons, or \vugons.
160
FIELD SERVICE.
For troops in column of twos, take one-half of the above
mate.
Patrols should always observe tile country marched over,
a view to making a report on the same. The following inf(
tiOll is always of value:
Roads.-Direction; kind, whether dirt, gravel, macadam,
width, whether suitable for column of squads, etc.; be
whether fencerl wH,h stone, barued v.rire, rails, etc.; steel
in crossing hills anel where they pass through d
and along commaTlding heights, etc.; crossroads.
Surrounding countr:y.-\VllPLhE'l' generally open and pas;
for infantry, en vall'Y, and or whether broken an(
passnble, due to wooels, crops, ravines, etc.
Railroads.--Single 01' douhle track, nill'l'mV or broad ,gl
tunnels, bridges, cuts, direction, stations, etc.
Bridges.-l\{ntl?rial, ,,,Dod, stone, steel, etc.; length
breadth; number and kind of piers or supports.
Rivers.-Dil'cction; '\vidth, depth; kind of bottolll, sue
mud, san(l, roc]ry, etc.; banks, steep or gentle, open or woe
rapidity of current; ill (1epth at different timf
indicated by drift\vood and high-water marks; islands; he
in vicinity commanding streams.
Woods.-Extent and shape; kind of trues; free from Ul
brush or not; clearings, roads, swamps, ravines, etc.
Telegraph lines.-Number of 'vires, along roads or railrl
stations, etc.
Villages.-Sizc, kind of houses, nature of streets, meal
defense, etc.
Hills and ridges.-Whether slopes are gentle or steep; who
top is nurrow or wide; ,vhethel' ground is broken or sm
wOQ(led or clear; '\vhethcr difficult or easy to cross,
whether COllllllaIl(le(l other hills.
Defiles.-Thdr direction, :HHl \vidth; Whether
rounding heights are passable for infantry and artillery;
of country at each opening of the defile, etc.
Ravines, ditches, etc.--\Vidtll and (lepth; hanks, whether]
able for infantry, cavalry, and \vagons; whether suitablf
trenches, or for moYement of troops therein, etc.
In general, everr soldier should be constantly on the l'DO
to obtain iuformation that might be of some military v:
l'ATROLLING.
1&1
lllber that information of the enemy and of the country-is
less unless illude known to the proper officials in erne to
USe.
ry soldier shoultl be able to find his way in u strange
'y; should know ho\,/ to 'use a should know how
lte the North Sbu'; shouhl he able to travel across COUll-
;cping a given direction, both by day anO by night, and by
'ing landmarks he should lJe able to return to the starting
over the sume route or by a more circuitous one.
an eaSily he lpamell by a little practice.
etcls a great denl to HlP value.. of a soldier if he knows hmv
! a map to tlnd his way_ If lip kno,,,"s 110\V to maken
sketch of UH:l eountry, showing the of rowls,
18, '\Yoods, railroHc]s, bridges, houses, fields,
. llills, etc., he has added to his value as a soldier very
indeed, because a rough sketch of a country will giYe
and better illformation at a glance than can be obtained
(ling rnany pngcs of \vrittell description.
oIling is une of the most important uuties a soldier can
Any enlisted lllan \vho understands 1'hOl'oughl;y his du-
; a member of a patrol \yill understand also most 0"1 hi:";
when wHII advance or rear guards or 'vhen on olltpm;t
Patrolling can IH)t be learned merely by reading books
i wor1;;: incloor}'. comes only by actually
out in the country and acting as ,;1 patrol.
:arrying out this idea the foUm'\-ing sdleme is recolU-
rI:
four or more Il)en and a nOlltommissionec1 officer act as
01. They assemble at "a certnin time. at a convenient
On some country rOild. An officer. ,"vhom we will cnll
n A, ndA ,as the director; the noncolllmissionecl otli('el'.
,vc ,vill dLll Sergeant B, acts as patrol leader; Hud tht.'
(Privates C, D, E, etc.) act as members of Sergeant B's
me that the company (battalion, etc.) has just made
n tllis Vicinity and t.1wt the inhnbitants :u'e friendly (or
) .
ain A indicates to the rest of the men where the camp is
d and points out where the various sentinels are posted.
13G12-17- -6
FIELD SERVICE.
(This in Itself affords an opportunity for much discussi,
for teaching many valuahle lessons.)
Captain A then calls up Sergeant B and tells him-
(,,) Just what Information Captain A has of the Cllerr
also any information of the country or of friendly tre
the vicinity that might be of servicc to Sergeant B.
(b) How many men he shall take for the patrol (
another problem for Captain A to solve). Any men pres,
used as part of the patrol go along with Captain A
servers.
(c) How far he shall go and what country he shal!
with tbe patrol.
(d) Just \vhat information It is particularly desired h
obtain.
(e) Where he shal! send his messages and when h,
return.
Example 1:
" Sergeant B, it has just been reported to me that n cc
of hostile infantry was in camp last night at X, about!
from here on this road. Take 5 men and proceed to"
and find out whether the enemy is still there, and if not
he left and where he went. Send messages to me he]
return by 8 o'c1ock this evening."
Example 2:
" Sergeant B, I think I heard the firing of field guns,
that direction a short while ago. Take 6 men and pro,
thut high hill you see over there about 4 miles away.
Inessage to me here when you reach there. You may go
if ron then think it uclvisable, but return before daylight
sire pluticularly to know if there are any h(Jstile troops
vicinity, especiallr artillery. I shall send Sergeant X
men to observe tho country from that bill yon see Dve
fllrther to tile south. He will remain there till dark.
messages to me here. If the company is not here 0
return you "\vill find a note for you l1nuerupaih this rail.'
Example 3:
H Sergeant B! this friendly country boy has just report
foul' hostile cavalrymen stopped about half an hour age
father's Ilouse, which he says is about 2 miles up thi
One of the men seemed to be very sick. You will sele(
men from your section and endeavor to capture these n
PAtROLLING,. 163
lave flisappeaJ'ec1 you will reconnoiter in that vieinitv
urk. This boy ,yill yon as a g'uide. I desire
Ilarly to learn the position, strength, and ('Ulllpositiol1
hostile troops jn this vicinity. Send reports to me here.
I before daylight."
"pIe 4:
'g'eant E, here is n lnap of the connl-ry ill vicinity
:ale of 1 incli to the mile. Here is ,"vllere we al'e emllped
ting position 011 map], I lU1V8 just lea1'11c(1 that forng-
-ties of the enemy are collectin,g supplies over here ut X
ting Dolnt on map], which is 10 miles of I in that
)ointing across tc)'\v<1l'd XJ. It is reported that
'l.(lge over this strel.un [inL1ientiTlg' same on the lllap],
is auout 3 Illites dow'n this road [ilHlieating road und di-
an the ground], has been dcstL'oyec1. You \yill take three
'om your platoon find verify this report. You \yill also
'liter the stream for a distance of 1 mile both aboye nnet
be bridge for fOl'cls for infantry. will
ne here. Reiul'n by 8 o'clock to-night."
cant B then inspects his men and giYes them their in
on8. The patrol is then formed HnCi lllOyeS out exactly
under actual war conditions.
ain A may hult (anel assemble if desirable) the patrol at
Is in order to discuss: the formation used and the move
'f any members of the patrol, their route, use of cover,
ith the reaSons t.herefor, and compare the same witl}'
"0.1 modifications of the formations, etc. After the rlis-
the patrol is again set in motion. Captain A liMy ac-
lY any part of the patroL From time to time 118 pl"e-
situations to some member of the patro1. being
lrefnl to assume only such situutions as might nuturnl1y
:, take Example 1:
ain A is \vith Sergeant B, \vho, with Privnte C, is
ng the road as the point of the- patrol. The other mem
E the patrol are distributed to suit the nature of t.he
r over which the patrol is marching. The point
:achel1 a ridge beyond which the country is open nncl
164 FIELD SERVICE.
cultivated for about half a mile. Beyond this the road
n ,yoods. Captain A now says: "Sergeant 13, from thiJ
YOll see tV{Q soldiers in .khaki on the road thol'e at the
ning of that cornfield about 200 vards from the woods
out same 1. They are moving fn this direction. Abo
yards to the rigl1t of the:-3e and sOJnC'ivlwt farther to the
you sec two more men moving along that rail fence."
Sergeant B now does exactly as he would do in
How floes he signal to his patrol? Doeg he assemble hi:
If so, ho\v f1lHl W1181'O"( Does he send a message back to
and if so, by ,,,hom, and is it written or verbal? (If v
Sergeant B actually writes it and delivers It to Privat,
with the necessary instructions. If verbal, it js
to Private -- ,vitIl instructions.) Captain A must in tIl
make notps of 'what the message was. In either case, ]
-- ceases to be a member of the patrol and joins OaI
as an obsel'Ycr. He should, ho,\vever, at some later time
quired to l"epc:at his to Captain A, on the nssu
that he had reached camp with the same. The m
whether oral or written, should be thoroughly analyzed a
cussed. \Vas it proper to send a message at this time?
SE'rgeant R intend to remain in observation; if so, hO\1
(Captain A can give such information from time to ttr
cerning the hostile patrol as Sergeant R might rensom
supposed to Jearn in view of his dispositions. In ordl
Captain A lllU? present natural assumptions, It Is very
that in his own mind he should, at the outset, assume,
tion for the hostile forces and that he should consider'
us in COTlHlHlIHl or all hostile troops. In this particular I
should assume himself to be in command of the hostile
acting under certain specified orders similar
and he should conduct this patrol in his o\vn mind in
ance 'iyith these orders, giving Sergeant B only such infol
>1" he might reasonably be expected to obtain in view 0:
ever action Sergeant B takes.) Will Sergeant Batte
capture this patrol? If so, how? Will he avoid fighti
attempt to pass it unobserved; and if so, how and why?
In this manner the exercise is continued. Oare must b<
not to have the patrol leader or members state what the)
PATROLLING. 166
tbey must actually do it. Explanations and discussions
,ke place later.
similar manner the director may inform Sergeant B (or
ember of the patrol) that this hostile patrol is followed
quad (on the assumption that it is the leading unit of an
:e guard), and the exercise is then continued along these
follmving are examples of assumption that might oe
~ n d carried out:
'l'llat the patrol is unexpectedly fired upon,
Tlmt one or more of the patrol is wounded,
'1'h<1t a prisoner is captured (let an observer act as
2r).
r.rlwt a friendly inhabitant gives certain information.
That a dust cloud is seen in the distance oYer the trees.
That a columll of troo11s can be seen marching along a
t road,
That an abandoned camp is discoyerec1 and certain signs
That the patrol is attacked b
J
I
a sUV81'iol' force n wl o m ~
to scatter.
l'e is practically no end to the numb('r of reasonable as-
LOllS that IIlay be made.
pany officers may use this method of insLructing n011-
ssioned officers in patrolling, adyuncc and real' guard
outposts, and in squad leading, in '''TitIng messages, in
ng positions for trenches, ::lllfl in construct ing and COll-
~ same. This form of instruction is called U f\ tactical
It is very greatly used by all foreign armies. ExercisE'S
the same general lines- are cOIll]ueted fOJ" fIelr] and staff
:; and even general officers, and are called "tactical
, and" strategical rides," depending upon their object.
~ r some proficiency has been attained as a re:-::ult of these
II ivalks, the greatest interest and enthusiasm can be
ned in this work by sending out two patrols the same day,
) operate against the other. Ehich should ,wear a d18-
'e uniform. The strength of each patrol, its starting point,
to be followed, and its orders should all be unlmown to the
patrol. If blank ammunition is used, an officer should
166
FIELD SERVICE.
i::;sue nnd carefully inspect to see that n
CHl'rlCS nny ball curtridges. One umpire should fl.ccompa
comnwlHlel' of each party. Eaeh umpire should he in
of tile strength, orders. and route of both patrol
howen'l', earefnlly avoid giYing suggestions or 0
allY information to the coni1llallder. Observers in these
IWlnenyel' IH'c,blcms arc generally in the way and none
be perlIlitted to be along.
These small may gradually cleveloped 1J
ing OlW side establish au outpost or fight a delaying netic
It shoul<l always be remembered that there is no lUll
fast rule I)l'Pscl'ibillg hOI\' a patrol of three, five, or any II
of mell should murch. The same is equillly true of W
gU;\l';.:s, ant] npplies also to the establishment of QutPOf:
i8 simpl.\' a qUP;.;tiOll of common sense basecl on military
edge. try to remember ally diagrams in it book.
only of whut you huyc been ordered to do and how be
(':.\11 halHl1p men to accomplish your mission, ancl
snme time saye the 111en from an.r
nsC' two 01' morc men to do what one can do just a
and don't let your men get be-yond your controL
In adtlitioll to the signals }H"PserioetJ in the
l-{egnlc1tions, the follow'jug should be clearly understood
lllemlH?1S of fl patro1.
Ellt'!Il.\' in Right ill small numbers, hoJ(1 rUle above tlll
horj7.(mtnlly; f'nE'lny in forcE', same proceeding, raisin
l{)\','(:::.dllg the l'iiie several times; take coyer, n down,vard J
of the haml.
Other may bp- upon, but tbey must be ftl
to the mC"n; ("I)mplicatc<l signals ftre ftyoic1eu. Signals m
used cilutiously so as not to convey information to the enj
Section 4. Advance Guards.
':tl:e a(\YGIlC'i;:' )!lWl"U is a l1etachment of the lnain body
]nE'C'E'(1es and (,oyers it on the march. The primary dUl."
adYtln<:e gunrcl to insurE' thE' safe and nnintcl'l'upt('{l
of the maill bOlly, Spec:ifically its (tuties nre:
1. To guard agaimlj- filld furnish infonnatlon
connojtering.
ADVANCE GUARDS. 18'1
'0 push back small parties of the enemy and prevent their
ing, firing upon, or delaying the main body.
'0 check the enemy's advance in force long enough to per-
e main body to prepare for action.
Vhen the enemy is encountered on the defensive, to
I good position and locate his lines, care being taken not
19 on a general engagement unless the advance guard com-
~ r is empowered to do so.
'0 remove obstacles, repair the road, and favor in every
he steady march of the column.
strength of the advance guard will vary with the prox:-
of the enemy and character of the country; for a regi-
it will generally consist of from two companies to a bat-
, for a battalion of one company; for a company of from
ad to a platoon. The advance guard commander is re-
ble for the proper performance of the dnties with which
harged and for its conduct and formation.
~ advance guard provides for its security and gains infor-
n by throwing out to the front and fian),s smaller bodies.
part must keep in tonch with the unit from which it is
~ u t An advance gunrd is generally divided into a reserve
support; where it consists of less than a battalion, the
'e is generally omitted.
~ support sends forward un advance party, which, in turn,
forward a point. In small advance guards the point p r e ~
the advance party alJout 150 yards, the advance purty
upport about 300 yards, and the support the main body
4.00 yards. 'Vhere advance guards afe large enough to
L'e a reserve these distances fire in('reased about one-fourth,
)serve follo\ving the support, the main body follo,\ving the
{e nt a distance varying from 500 to 800 yards.
less the country to the fianks is distinctly visible from the
for a distance of what may be saill to be effectiw rllte
approximately l!OOO YHrds, flanking patrols of two or
men each should be sent out from the advance party, ani!,
in proximity of the enemy, in addition from the support.
1 the nature of the country is such that patrols may move
s conn try \vithout undue effort and fatigue these pfll'tols
d march at a distance of from 200 to 300 yards from
168 FIELD SERVICE.
the flank of the body from which detached. For the
ination of any object, such as a ,vood, buildings, etc
:IUliniug patrols should he sent Ollt from the main body.
usual me thou of protecting the flanks, particularly ,vhe
country is at nll cut up or difficult, is to send out patrols
timp to time to some point from which a good outlook c
obtained. or ,vhicll will afford protection to the euewy.
pa1ToIs renwin in obsPl'yvti{)n until the gual'{
passed, ",lIeu they rejoin the nearest subfliYision, as quid
!)ossibJc worl;;ing tlH"ir way to tllilt to which they belong d
tlw halts. By sending out a succession of small patrols il
mU1.1ner the flanks are protcded. Should the advance
become depIcted, it mllst 1)8 l'muorced from the support.
A hnH:.lIion acting as advance glIal'll "would have hvo
11ies in reserve nIHl t,yO in support. The support \voul(i
forward as tHlvance -party two platoons, the advance par
t11rn fonvard as pOint one squad. A company acti
advance guard waul{1 have no reserve Hnu ,vould senll fO!
as :l(lnlllce parry one platoon.
Cases may arisp when the best menDS of covering the
and flnnlrs of the column will be by :l line of skirmisheJ
tended at .intervals of from 5 to 50 yards, as, for instance,
Imssing: through high {'0I'1l, lluclerbrush. etc.
It Illll:-:t ahvays be that the principal duty (
advance guard is to secure the uninterrupted march of the
iJofly. If the paint is tire(l upon, it should at once deplm
endeavor to ndvance fighting, The flankers should assist il
Hl1(1 elH1eayor to loe;lte the enemy's f1ank should there be
l'exi:-;tal1ce that advance impossible. Each succeeding
shnuhl march JJIon:!.ptly fonvard, aIH1 in turn be plaet
action, with the idea of {'lea ring the ,yay for the advance c
main body. Should this be impossible, the commander 0
entire body must determine "yhat measures he will take.
Section 5. Rear guards
A rear guurd is a detachment detailed to protect the
b{)dy from attack in rear. In a retreat it checks pursuit
the mnin body to increase the distance lH,-..tween ij
the enem,Y and to te-form if di:;;;organized. The general f(
tion is thnt of :-tll,advance guard reversed.
FLANK GUARDS, OUTPOSTS. 169
commander should take advantage of every favo.rahlfop-
mity to delay the pursuers by obstructing the road or by
g up specially favorable positions from which to force the
y to deploy. In tllis latter case care must be taken not
corne so closely engaged as to render ",vithdrawal unneces-
r diffir.ult. rrhe position taken shou1(1 be selected with ref-
'e to ease of \vithdrawal and ability to brjng the enemy
t' fire at long range.
Section 6. Flank guards.
flank gun l'd is a detachment detailed to cover the flank of
lUUl1 marching past, or across the front of, an enemy. It
be placed in position to the passage, or it lllay be
urc:hed as to cover the passage. The object of the flank
1 is to hold the enemy in check long enough to enable the
body to pass, like the advance guurd. to enable the
body to dep1oy. Like all other detachments, it should be
thUll is nec8ss .. 11'Y, ancI should not be detailed except
its protection is required.
len a flank guard consists of a regiment or less, its
from the main body 8110111c1 not exceed a mile and a half,
icable communication must exi::.1t between it and the main
'l'he flank guar(l js mnrchecl as a separate eonununc1;
ls, with uclvunce or rear gunrds, 01' both. as circul1l%tunces
nd, and 'with patrolling on the exposP-l.l flank.
Section 7. Outposts.
not On the march provide for their secllrity by out-
'l'he general duties of an outpost are reconnoissance.
lation, una
speCific duties are:
Co proleet the main body, so that the troops mny fest uo-
'bcd.
II case of attack, to cheek the enemy long enongh to enable-'
ain 'hOlly to make the necessary dispositions.
'jng an advance the outposts are usually from the
e guard, During the retreat the outpost for the night
y forms tIle rear guard the next day. If tile command
170 FIELD SERVICE.
remains in bivouac, the new outpost generally goes on o;1u
daybreak.
.- The vigilance of outpost troops must be unceasing, but
SllOUld avoid br-inging on COlllbuts or unneeessarily alar
the command. Firing disturbs the res:t of troops and, if
quently indulged in
j
ceases to be a wnrning.
No trumpet signals except it to arms)) OJ' "to horse"
sounded, and an unnecessary noises be avoided.
As a rule an outpost will not exceed onc-sixth the 8t1'(
of a COlmnawl. li"'or a single company a fe,\' sentinels
patrols \"ill sutuce; for fl larger command a morc elnb
system 111USt be devisccl. The troops composing the outpos
generall:,.' divi{led into a reserve and several supports.
At :l proper distance in front of the camp of the main 1)(
line \vhich offers a good defensive position is selected. Tl
cnllecl the line of resistance, nnd should be so located thf
advancing enemy \vill be hE':l(t in eherk beyond effective
r.ange in case of n. small forcp., artillery range in case of a
force, of the main body until the latter can deploy. Th
sel'Vp is stationed at some point in rear of this line, Whf
can be moved quickly to reinforce any point as needed.
Jine of resistance is divlc1eu into sections, the limits of en
which are clearly defined. A support is assigned to eacl
tion, which are numbered from right to left, and OCCup
position on or the line, having special regnrri to cov
avellues of approach. The position oc('upied should alwa
intl'ench('(1. The reserve and supports proceed to thei
spective positions by the shortest routes, providing for
own protection by sending out covering tlelachments.
Genernlly speaking, about one-balf the Infantry of th
vance guarll should be in the supports. !;lach support Ul
at its position it sends ont observaticll groups, varying it
from four men to u platoon, to watch the country in the
tion of tho enemy. These groups nrc called outgllards.
convenience they ure eiassified. as pickel:.;;;, sentry squads
cossack posts, and should be sufficient in nUll1bcr to COv
fl'Ont of the section occupied by the support ",lU connect
the neighboring supports.
A. picket is a group com.,istillg of tlvo or more squads,
narily not exceeding half a company, posted in the line 0
OUTPOSTS. 1'71
s to cover a given sector. It furnishes patrols and one- or
e sentinels, sentry squads, or cossack posts for observatioti.
are placed at the more important points in the line of
;uards
J
surh as road forks. The strength of each depends
1 tile number of small groups required to observe properly
:eClor.
sentry squad is a squad (eight lIIen) postec11n observation
n indicated point. It posts a double in observntio'n,
remaining Inell resting near by and furnishing the reliefs
Glltillels. In sorne cases it may be required to furnish a
01.
cossack post consists of four men. It js Ull observation
11 similar to u sentry squntl, but employs fi single sentinel.
n rule llot more than on-thh'tl of the support shouhl be
>utguul'd duty. As 800n as tllCY are seut out to their
:; the support COllJllUU1([er selects n defensive position on
line of resistance; gives instl'uction for intrenching same;
blishes a to watch fOl" flull transmit signals from
nards; sends out patI'ois to reconnoiter the couutry to the
t of his section and, if 011 tllC fianl{ of the line, the flank;
then pl'oecetls to make a corcful rcccmnoissance of the
assigned him, rectifying the position of outgum'(lfoi if ncres-
, seeing that they understand tlJelr instructions in casE" of
::k or when sl.l'iwgers approach their posts, fluel pointing ont
lines of retreat in ense the'Y are cornpcllccl to fall lmek bn
mpport.
llen the out.guards are eSlablished, the memlJel'S of thE'
may stack nrms autl r(:,moY(' equipment except cHl'tl'iug'e
='To fires ,yin be built 01' SIllokjng pl?-rmitted unless
V ant1}()I'ized, or no loud talking or other nOlsf', An pntrol-
to the fron! will l)e ([one, n l'ule, from the rrhe
ort commander shoulll locEte the of the adjnCfmt
OI'ts a ncr mnke wi III tlle ccnnmanders for the
clefen3.e of tIle line of l'C'sistflHC(-\ J .. t all l'ollds Hu(l
'i shou1d be c-al'efully ('oYerE'{l and the COll11try to the fl'ont
between [u.1jneent outgl1Hl'{ls wt'll patrollet1.
e ]ilw (}{'('npfe[l l.y {l2c , .. mt:Hill'ds ls (:;-t1l0(1 the line of ob-
ltion. lllnyC to the-il' positiuns providing for
own protection al1(1 so as tn cOll{,pul the movement from
1ft FIELD SERVICE.
the enemy. These positions are Intrenched and arc numb
from right to left In each support.
The duties of the outguard are to observe the enemy, to g1
the outpost from surprise, and to malre a resist
to the enemy's advance. The strength of the outguard will .
according to its object. 'Vhen an important road. wIlie]
night will afford a line of advance, or a bridge i:o; to be COYi
or wllen several posts nrc established from an outguar
should be of consi(]erable strength, 1:"'0 squads or a pIa!
'Vhen mere observation and alarlll are all that is required
men will suftke. A sQufld is a goo(l unit to use as an outgu
this will allo\v onc double sentry post 01 three reliefs and
man in addition to the comrnander, who may be userl
messenger service. The ontgnarc1 should be carefully com:!c
The utmost quiet should be observed, and there should b
cooking or smoking. 'The hetween outguards
depend upon the sitnatiou Hnd the terrain. The line of ObSI
tlon is not necessarily continuous, but all avennes of appr
must be carefully guarded. distance of toe Qutgnard
the support likewise is governed by the terrain, but in gel
-may be said to be from 300 to 400 In thick country j
-night outgullrds "pnt1'01 along the line of observation bet
posts. Communication bet'iveen ontgunI'ds and the suppo
by signal and messenger, in special cases by Wire.
the outgual'fl retain possession of their weapons and do
remove their equipment.
Sentinels from the outgnan1 are posted so as to avoid 0
vatton, hut so that they nlay have a clear lookout and be
to see, if possiule, by dny .. the sentinels of the adjacent
gnards. Double sentinels are :lhvays posted near enoug
each other to commnnicate easily in ordinary voice. Sent
fil'e generally on post hvo honrs out of six. For every sen
and ever:r putrol there should ue three reliefs, and
should bp of a strength sufficient to allow this. The pos
of a sentinel should be selected with reference to observo
It muy be advantageous to place a sentinel in a tree. Sent
furnished 11:)-' cossack posts or sentry squads are kept near
group. Those furniShed by their pickets may be kept as f,
100 yar(]s away.
OUTPOSTS. HI
elleis, visiting patrols, and inspecting officers approachsentl.
from the rear.
sentinel on the line of observation should always have the
Hving instructions: The names of villages, streams, an'd
ninent features in sight and "Ivhere the roads lead. The
tber (if any) of his post, "]](1 the number of his and of the
)ining outgnnrds; the position of the support; the line of
eat to be followed if the out guard is compelled to fall back;
position of advance detachments and whether friendly
'ols are operating in front; to 'w-atch to the front and flanks
lOut intermission and devote special attention to unusual
,uspicious occurrences; if he sees indications of the enemy,
t once notify his immediate superior; in case of Imminent
ger, or when an attack is made, to give the alarm by firing
.dly; by day to pass in or out officers, noncommissioned
ers, and detachments recugnizer1 as part of the outposts,
omcers known to have authority to do so; to detain all
,rs and notify the outguard commander; at night, when
:ons approach hjs post, to come to a ready, halt them, and
fy the olltguard commander; the latter challenges, ascer-
s their identity, and acts accordingly. When Individuals
to halt, or otberwlse disobey, to fire upon them after a
,nd warning, or sooner if they attempt to attack or escape;
equire deserters to lay down their arms, and remain until a
'01 is sent out to bring them in; to order deserters pursued
;he enemy to drop their arms and to gIve an alarm; If they
to obey they are fired upon; to require bearers of flags of
e and their escorts to halt and to face outward; to permit
n to hoW no conversation and to see that they are then blind
ed and disposed of in accordance with instructions from the
oort commander; If they fail to obey to fire upon them; at
tt, to remain practically stationary, moving about for pur-
,s of observation only; not to sit or lie down unless author-
to do so; in the daytime, to make use of nntural or artificial
" and assume such positions as to give him the best field of
,; to inform passing patrols of what he has seen; to carry
weapon habitually loaded and locked and at will.
utpost patrols are divicled into those which operate beyond
Jines and those whose duty lies principally withIn the llnes.
1';4 FIELD SERVICE.
former, called recoIllloitering patrols, scout in the dire(
<?:t the enem;y; the latter, calleel patrols, maintain I
n;mnicntion bet\veen the parts of the outpost and supel'yisp,
performance of duty Oli the line of observation. Recom
sanee should be continuous. Though 8('OUts and c1etachm
of cavalry remain in contact with the enenry, or at least 1
for,\vard to a considerable distance, more detailed reCQlll
Rance by lnfantry patrols in the fOl'egnnllld must not be
lected. Reconnoitering patrols are composed of at
lllen and a skillful leauer, \1'ho, ill i111!lOrtnnt cases, \vou},
officer. They obtain infol'matioll, aseel"tain the presenc
the enemy, or discover his approach. All \VhPil
cross the line of ohsel'yation, inform tllC nearest scntine
the direction in which tl1ev arc to on their 1'e
they similfLrly report wllUt they ha VB seen of tho encmy; sig
urc ag-..:-eed upon so thnt they can be recognized ,vhcn retul"I
An;'r' ground neal' the Ijne of wlJich might a1
covel' [or troops, or for scouts or spies, and the appl'oac
which cun not be observec] b3" sentinels, is searched frcquE
by patrols. Definite information cOlIrprnillg tJl'2 enemy h
ported at once. Patrols fire only in self-defense or- to give
ularm. Supports on t.he flank of an outpost position patrol
country on the exposed flank. Visiting Tmtl'ols anci 1'e
shouh.1 not march in the open, and thereby expose the posi
ofsentinds.
I)uring a march in the vicinity of the enemy when halts
made, f'peeial measures for protection are takell. ""Vhen
halt is for a short period, less than half an hour. the adv:
party and support remain at ease, the pOint anel flankers r
to positions ftom which they can obtain a good lookout,
additional patrols may be sent out from advance parties
supports. 'Vhere the halt is for :l perioll excef'cling halJ
hour a march outpost .honld be formed. With an adv:
guard consisting of a battaHoD
I
2 companies in the l'E!SC1"o;;
in the support. the latter having as advance party one-h3
company, a typical march outpost would be formed as foIl(
The advance party would send one platoon, four or five hunl
yards to the right as outgunI'd No.1, the remaining pIa
constituting outgunrd No.2. A platoon from the head of
support would be sent a similar distance to the left as outg,
RIFLE TRENCHES.
176
.. The bfllflnce of the support would constitute the support
e march outpost, the reserve of the advance guard acting !IS
On signal being given to resume the Tnal'ch, the vari6US
, would close in, flnd as soon as the advance party hatt
nbled the march would be taken up.
Section 8. Rifle Trenches.
Idiers should remember that only by acting vigorously on
Jffensive can an army hope to gain the victory. The de-
ve may delay or stop the enemy, but it can never destroy
"Troops dig because they are forced to halt; they do not
to dig."
enches will frequently be constmcted, without being used,
soldiers must expect this as II feature of campaigning arid
!t cheerfully what at times may appear as unnecessary
hen intrenching under fire cover is first secured in the
: pOSition, each man scooping out a depression for his bOdy
throwing the earth to the front. In this position no ex-
tion can be conveniently made for the legs, but if time per ..
the original excavution is enlarged and deepened untHIt
Jssible to assume a sltting pOSition, with the legs crossed
the shoulder to the parapet. In sl1ch a position a man pre-
a smaller target to shrapn01 bullets than in the lying
and can fiee more comfortably and \vith less exposure
in the kneeling trench. From the Sitting position the ex'
tion may be continued until a standing trench is secured.
Ie accompanying plate shows some of the more common
LS of trenches in profile. Figure 1 is the simplest form of
ding trench. Figure 2 shows the same trench Jeepened in
, so as to allow men to walk along in the rear (deeper)
lon of the trench without exposing their heads abovc the
pet. Jj
1
igure 3 shows a cover an(1 firing with a chum-
in -which men can find shelter \vhen under nrtillery
When the excavated earth is easily removed' figure;i
a good profile. The enemy's infantry, as. \vell us his
lery, will generally have great difficulty in secing this type
:ench.
, "
176
FIELD SERVICE.
The mound or bank of earth thrown up for shelter in
of a trench is called the parapet. It should be at len
inches thick on top, and the front should slope gradnall
shown in the plate, so that shells ,vill tend to glance fre
rather than penetrate and (xplode. The top should be co
,vlth sorl, grass, or Ipu ves, so as to hide the ne\vly turnecl f
which could be casily seen and uLmed at by the enemy. '
should be no rot;ks, loose stones, or pebl11es on top, which 1
be iStruck by the bullets, splintering" lInd flying, thus a'
greatly to the number of dangerous projectiles, and ofte
fier.tillg bullets (10\\,11\Varc1 into t h t : ~ trench. A .. stone waH
very dangerous thing to be behind in a fight.
The portion of the ground in rear of the parapet and bel
the parapet llnd the trench not covered by the parapet is t,
the elho,\ys on when firing, the rifle being rested 011 top (
parapet.
To ohtain head covel' in a trellch fin n g'unny sack or oUlf'
,vith sand 01' soil and pluce it on top of the parapet, a:
around the right-hancl side of it, or dig a small lateral tl'(>u
{he p[ll'apet large enough to hold the rifle. Roof it over
boards, small logs, or brush, and heap elirt on top, a'
througll the small trench or resulting loophole.
Figure [) shmvs the plan of a section of a rifle trt"llch.l
h,,-ecn the portions occupied by eaCh sqnad there is often r
amoum1 of earth as high us the top of the parapet and
jeeting haek illto the trench. This is called a traverse
protects the occupants of the trench from fire from a j
Bullets from this direction hit a traverse, instead of flying
into the trench ullrl 1vollndlng several 11um.
Trenches arc sclc10111 continuol1s, but arc made in SEX
pJace(l at. the most advantageous points, as shown in figr
A company or battalion may OCCul1:r a single secl.ioll. l ~ h
ing trenches have cover trenches in rear of thell1, ,vheri
supports can rest ullclisturbecl by the hostile fire until
-are needed in the firing trench io repel a se1:ious assau
to take part in a counter attack. Passages consisting of
1 'I'he traverse should be at least 6 feet wide instead of' 3 fel
shown in figure 5.
RIFLE TRENCHES.
177
unicating trenches facilitate passage from the cover
les to the firing trenches when under fire. These com-
lilting trenches are usually zigzag or traversed to prevent
being swept hy hostile fire.
en troops are likely to remain in trenches for a consid
, time drainage should be arranged for, and latrines and
ng stations should be constructed in trenches. Water
I be brought into the trenches and holes excavated in the
wall of the trench for extra ammunition.
digging trenches men usually work .in reliefs, one relief
,g while the others rest, the proportion of shovelers to
nen being about 3 to 1. If" plow can be obtained to turn
,d, it will greatly facilitate the initial work of digging.
93512-17--7
r-- 9'---< 1

"lfoofc()I1Imond
I '
Figl
ISOU40 TRlNCH
{fool Cornm:JM
enbrged fJ
IOb!WdS,"'-'>-''''
f
Plate V
Fig.2.
PARAPET
SQUAD TRt:NCH
Fig5.
/ B r c
IT-A At:(
A /

, , .....
C 8 0:::.,
M.6.
""",,;W< "'nJIIf'"fflUlI of Z Bns. of In!. m/mrdT<d (R<pmcl "SlIWaf I Bn,ndJk
A F iriry trUICi?es. '
8 Covtr frtndle.s.
C Comt/!vnicd*"n; french .. 0 ""me Irdws<d .. E CLmf71fJn,c4finJ "'!Y
F C/oJed JtJI'fO!Im; 1"'01 for flrmlr pufeclion
MG AJJJ;ble jXWim fw mlf;'" ;U"'. c(Jt1(uld fran /"""
Fig 6
178
CHAPTER VII.
MARCHING AND CAMPING .
etion 1. Breaking Camp and Preparation for a March.
THE EVENING HEFORE THE MARCH.
lcn a command learns that it is to malre a march on the
ving day, presumably starting early in the morning, cer-
letails should be attended to the evening before.
men should fill their canteens as there will probably be
ne for this in the morning.
mess shoulu find out whether lunch or the re-
ration will be carried on the march and should attend to
cletails in the evening in order' that the issue can be made
C)tl:y in the morning.
commander of the guard should be given a memorandum
what time to a\vaken the cooks and where their tent is.
nemher of the gmll'd who does this should H\vaken them
,ut noise so as not to disturb the r.est of the remainder of
ommand.
coo].;:s should be instructed as to ,vhat time breakfast is
served and what time to a\\'aken the first sergeant.
cooks or cook's police must cut and split all firewood for
lOrning before 9 p. ID. There must be no chopping, talk-
II' rattling of pans before reveille whieh will disturb the
,f the command. This applies to every morning in camp.
OF '('f1I<; M;\HCH.
Iks arise when called by the guaru and start the prepara-
)f breakfast without noise. 'rhe first sergeant is usually
179
180
][AllCRIl.'l"G AlilI CAXPIlII'G.
awakened by one of the cooks about half an hour before re
in order that he may complete his toilet and breakfast
and be able to devote all his time to supervising the det"
the morning's work. If the officers desire to be awaken(
fore reveille they will notify the first sergeant aecordingl,
At first call the men turn out, perform their toilets,
their shelter tents (unless it has been directed to awal
sounding of the general for this), and make up their I
At the sounding of assembly immediately after reveille
man must be in his proper place in ranks. This asseml
under arms. The first sergeant starts to call the roll or
mands "Report" at the last note of assembly. Arm
stacked before the company is dismissed.
Breakfast is served to the company immediately afte
call. Immediately after breakfast each man will wash his
kit in the hot water provided for that purpose at the kltche
will at once pack the mess kit in his haversack.
The cooks will provide hot water for washing mess kits I
same time that breakfast Is served.
Immediately after breakfast the company proceeds t
work of breakIng camp and packing in accordance with j
arranged system similar to the following:
One squad assists the cooks in packing the kitchen.
One squad strikes and folds the officers' tents and I
them to the kitchen.
One squad fills in the sink. The sink should not be fill
earlier than Is absolutely necessary.
One squad pOlices the camp within the company police I
One squad is available for possible details from regin
headquarters.
Officers and first sergeant supervise the work.
A permanent assignment of squads to these duties Ilg
the labor and decreases the time necessary for breaking ,
After the breaking of camp the entire company is used to '
camp.
Men should not start from camp thirsty, but should dril
the water they want ImmedIately after breakfast. All car
should be filled before marching, one man in each squad
d,etailed to fill the canteens for his squad.
lrAltClfING. 181
assembly for the march the men fall in In rear of the
s fully equipped for marching.
Section 2. Marching.
~ principal work of troops in the field consists of marching.
~ s take place only at indefinite intervals, but marches are
i1y occurrence. It is only by good marching that troops
rrive at a given point at a given time and in good con-
for battle.
~ rate of march depends greatly upon the condition of the
and the weather, but the average rate for Infantry Is
2, miles per hour. This allows for a rest of 10 minntes
honr. The total distance marched in a day depends not
)ll the rate of march, but upon the size of the command,
commands often covering only ahont 10 miles a day, while
commands easily cover double that distance.
Drder to make tbe march with the greatest comfort and
ast danger, it is necessary that each unit be kept well in
Each man Is permitted and encouraged to make himself
nfortable as pussible at all times, excepting oniy that he
not interfere with the comfort of others or with the march
column.
mtry generally marcbes in column of squads, but on nar-
Dads or trails column of twos or files i8 used. The route
s habitually used when silence is not required. In large
ands, in ,order that the column be kept in hand, it is very
lary that each man keep his place in ranks and follow his
ader at the prescribed distan.... This is one of the best
for determining the discipline and efficiency of. troops.
quipment should be carefully adjusted before starting out,
ny part that is not comfortable should be rearranged at
."5t opportunity. 'L'he r!fte is carried at will, except that
uzzle must be pointed uP. so as not to interfere with the
men.
ler no circumstances will any man leave the ranks with-
,rmission from his company or higher commander. If the
~ is to be for more than a short while, he must be given
; showing his name, rank, and organization, and the rea-
MARCHING AlITD CAMl'ING.
son he is permitted to be a bsen t. If sick. it is better to
by the roadside at some comfortable place for the arrival (
surgeon or the amlmlunce. In any case, the soldier keel
rifle and equipment with him, if possible. Soldiers absent
their organization without a pass will be arrested and ret
to their commaIld for punishment.
Marches in hot weather are particularly trying. Green I
or a damp cloth carried in the hat lessens the chance oj
stroke. The IlUt sbould have ventilators, and when not ex
to the direct rays of the sun it should be removed frol
head. It is well to keep the clothing about the neck and t
open, and sometimes to turn up the shirt sleeves so as to
the wrists free.
The canteen should always be filled before starting out.
the water very sparingly. None at all should be drunl< d
the first three or four hours of the march. After that tak.
a few mouthfuls at a time and wash out the mouth 'lnd t'
EXl'ept possibly in very. hot weatber, one canteen of
should last for the entire day's march. Bxcessive water 4
ing on the march will playa man out very quickly. 01
diers never drink when marching. A small pebble carrj
the mouth keeps it moist and therefore reduces thirst.
small piece of chocolate may occasionally be eaten. Sm
is very, during a lllal'ch.
Canteens will not be refilled on the march without autl
from an officer, as the clearest water, whether from a
spring" or running stream, may be very impure and the
of many camp diseases. If canteens are to be refilled, it !
be d'lne by order, and a detail is generally made fo]
purpose .
. _Entering upon private property without permission, or
. ing- fruit, etc., from gardens and orchardS, is a serious ml
offense, as well as a violation of the civil laws.
When cooked meal is carried, it should not be eaten
the proper time. .
A command ordinarily marches for 50 minutes and hal
10 minutes. The first halt in a day's march is for abc
minuteR, is made after about 30 minutes' marching, and
the express purpose of allowing the men to relieve tllelll'
MAKING .. CAlfl',
;vho Wish to do this should attend to it a,t Qpee
lTltil the command is almost ready to march again .. " ',., .... ,.
every halt get all the rest possible and (\On'tsPflnd ,the
;vandering .around or about. Only
s. If the ground is dry, stretch out at full length, remove
e pack or blanket roll and belt, and get in as comfortable
In. as possihle. The next best way is to sit down with a
back. rest against. a tree ora fence or some other
sit down or lie down, however, on wet or .damp .ground.,
your pack or blanket rull, or on anything else th.at
lalt it is very refreshing to ad.iust theunderclothihg.
Section 3. Making Camp.
reaching the camp site the men should be allowed to fall
nd' rest as soon as the have been. stacked the
r tents pitched. If the blanket rolls have. been carried on
agons, then the location of the front poles of the .shelter
should be marked before they are allowed to fall out. The
ivill not be .ullo\ved to relieve th.emselves until sinks are
Temporary sinks may be dug with intrenching tools, if
d. A guard should be placed over the water supply Itt
,oon as the shelter tents are pitched the company proceeds
remainder of the camp work in accordance with a perD;la:-
lssignment to the following:
, squad helps arrnnge the kitchen.
, squad -pitches the officers' tcnts.
: squad digs .the Hink.
! squad procnres wood and water. .: ;,
,squad is held available for deta.i1s from JCegiI:nental i1ead.

,. officers and supervise the work.
,sinks are located by the commanding officer. The deta.i.r
; thernshould walt until informed of the ]()catiQTl .. An
should inspect the sink as soon as the detail reports.it as
eteel.
l.f thecnrnp has been put in order the fir"t sergeant
,tails from roster fur kitchen police. and llQncommiss.ione,d
''7''!
184 lI[ABCHING AlfD CAlIIPmG.
officer in charge of quarters for the next day and for
guard as may 00 ordered for that day.
The details called for by regimental headquarters for
ing the headquarters camp for the quartermaster, etc., S
be reported to the adjutant without delay.
The cooks pitch their tent at that end of the company
nearest the kitcllen. Space must be left for this tent .
cooks are not in ranks when the company pitches tents. T
lunch has been carried or cooked during the march, the
should get to work on a hot meal as soon as possible.
kitchen police report at the kitchen as soon as their t.
pitched. Wood and water will be required at once.
Officers should avoid keeping the men unnecessarily
arms or on their feet after a hard day's march.
When the details of making camp have been complete
men should at once care for their riJles anI! feet. (For d
8S to the care of the rifle see page 20, for the care of th
Ilee page 46.)
Section 4. Camp Service and Duties.
In camp" Reveille" is preceded by H First call," and a 1
played by the band or field music, and is followed immed
by "Assembly." If there [s a reveille gun, it is fired at th
note of the march and is the signal for all to arise. The
called at the last notes of assembly after reveille. At this f
tion men should fall in in the proper uniform-riJle ane
service hat, olive-tirab flannel shirt, service breeches, leg
and shoes. The regimental commander may prescribe
coats are to be worn and will prescribe the exact unifor
:all drills, parades, and other formations, as well as fOJ
going on pass.
Immediately after reveille roll call the sergeant next in
to the first sergeant takes command of the company and d,
it for a general police of the camp within the limits as!
to the company. Men pick up all scraps of paper and rl
()f all kinds, depOSiting it in the company incinerator or
designated for the purpose. The police limits of each cor
are usually designated as extending from head to rear of
CAMP SElt'VICE Al!rD DtlTIES. 185
n the space oecupied by tbe company street, including the
Ld occupied by the tents of the company, no unassigned
being left between companies.
nediately after breakfast men pollee their tents and raise
of same. If the day is fair, all bedding shonld be spread
e tents for several hours' airing.
sick call all men who are sick fall in and are marched to
infirmary. under charge of the noncommissioned
. In <,llfirge of quarters. The noncommissioned officer takes
him the company sick report previously filled in and signed
e company commander. The surgeon examines all those
ting and indicates their status on the sick report. This
! may be "Duty" (available for all duty), "Quarters"
ent to remain in tent or company street), and" Hospital ..
"nt to be sent to the hospital). The noncommissioned offi-
len returns to the company with all the men not marked
pital" and hands the sick report to the first sergeant.
"Drill call" the company prepares for drill and falls in
at it will be completely formed at assembly, which is
ly sounded 10 minutes after drill call. All men are re-
j to attend drill except those excused by sick report and
speeially excused from headquarters. The excused list
d include in each company only the mess sergeant, the two
, one kitchen police, and men on regimental guard. DUl"--
rill hours the guar,d to be excused should be limited to a
patrol to guard against fire and thieves in camp. "
the bedding has been aired, it should be tal'en in imme-
y after drill and placed in the tents neatly folded.
ne time during the morning, at a time deSignated by him,
'mpany commander inspects the entire company camp. At
nspection the entire street should be policed, kitchen in
, and tents policed, as follows:
permanent camp, when pyramidal, conical, or wall tents
sed: Bedding foilled neatly anil placed 011 the head of the
(If bed sacks are used, they will be folded in three folds
:he bedding placed on top.) Hats on top of the bedding.
, under fD'Jt of cot. Surplus kit bag at side of squad
r's cot. Equipment suspended neatly from a frame ar-
d around the tent pole. Rilles in rack constructed arrrund
,nt pole.
186
MARCHING AND cutPING;
In shelter-tent camp: Bedding neatly folded and plae<
rear of tent, ponchos 'underneath. .ffiquipment arranged 0
bedding. Rifles laid on be(lding except when used as tent
The regimental r:ommander prescribes the exact -scheme
fulluwed in the police of tents.
Should there lJe no para(le, retreat roll call is held at the
hour. This roll call is under arms and is supervised by an (
of the company. After the roll call and at the sounding of
treat," the officer brings the company to parade rest and
it in this position during tlle sounding of this call. At thE
note of the National Anthem (" The Star-Spangled Banner
"To the Color" the company is brought to attention UI
stands until the eml of the playing. '.rhe officer then re
the result of the roll call to the adjutant or officer of the
returns to the company, inspects the arms, and rlismisses
At the souncling of "Call to quarters" all men will [
to their company street.
After taps has sounded all- talking must cease and all '
Tnllst be extinguished, and so remain until first call for re'
In camp all enlisted men are prohlbited from crossin:
officers' street, or-frOlll visiting officers' tents unless actual]
gaged in some duty requiring them to do so, or sent for I
officer.
Men are not allowed to leave camp without a pass signt
the coinpany commander and countersigned hy the regin:
adjutant. The first sergeant is sometimes allowed to giVE
permission to leave camp from retreat to taps.
'rhe noncommissioned officer in charge of quarters, del
for 24 huurs goes on duty each day at reveille. He is r
sible that the grounds around the company are kept in p
police; that no loua noisf\ disturbance, or disorder oceu
the company street; that men confined to the company strE
not ]PHve the same \vithout proper authority. He reports
who are sick to the He may be required to r
all other details called for. He accompanies the captain i
daily inspeetion of the company. He Vi--ill not leave the con
street during his tour of duty exeept as provlded above.
Oue or two privates are detailed daily as kitchen D
They go on duty at reveille. It is their duty to assist the
CAMP SERVICE AND DUTIES. 187
kitchen. They assist in the preparation of meals, wait
e table. wash dishes. procure water and wood, chop fire-
and kee!.' the kitchen, mess tent, and surrounding ground
d. They are under the orders of the mess sergeant and
IOks.
es need careful attention in camp. They should be cleaned
lied daily, preferably just before retreat or pllrade. It is
lble for each man to have a canvas. cover to keep off tlte
lnd dampness. In a shelter-tent camp tie the rille, llluzzle
the pole of the tent, placing a chip of wood under the
)late and an oily rag over (never inside) the muzzle.
t shoes should be filled with oats or dry sand, and set in
I place to dry. Never dry them by a fire.
forms need special care, as camp service is very hard on
In a permanent camp every man should have two pail"
The coat \vill selclom be ,varn except at parade
:reat. One pair of hreeches and the coat should be kept
clean, and pressed for use on ceremonies, inspections, and
going on pass. Woolen uniforms may be cleaned and
from spots by rubbing with a flannel rag saturated with
ne. Cotton uniforms may be wa5ihed ,vith water, soup,.
1 scrubbing brush, wrung out. and stretched; properly
on a flat wood surfuce in the sun to dry. Leggings can
llilarly washed. Hats should be cleaned with gasoline, and
ened and ironed to restore their shape.
isted men should be very careful to observe all the sani-
:-egulations of the camp. Flies are the greatest spreaders
mp disease. All fecal matter and food should be care-
guarded from them. In camps extreme precautions are
to screen the sinks and kitchens from fDes, and all en-
men should cooperate in the effort to make these prc-
illS successful. One fly carrying germs on his feet from
inks to the food can start a serious and fatal epidernk
camp. Defecating on the ground in the vicinity of camp
[natlng in camp are extremely dangerous to the health of
ommand, and are serious military offenses. At night It
1 can is provided in each company street.
a permanent camp cots or bed sacks are usually provided
Ie men to sleep on. In a shelter tent camp beds should be.
188 XAltCHDlG ABD CAlIPIHG.
maGe of hay, grass, leaves, pine or spruce boughs, or
needles, on top of which the poncho and blanket are s]
thns softening the ground and keeping the sleeper away
the cold and dampness. Neglect to prepare tlte I1ed when
ing without cot or bed sack means a loss of sleep, and ma;
to colds, bowel disorders, and rhenmatism.
In wet weather tents should be ditched, and in windy 0
weather dirt may be banked around tllem. A place for
iog the person and clothes should be arranged for in
company street, and tlte waste water disposed of by me.
drainage or rock-filled pits. In dry weather the streE
camp sltould frequently be sprinkled with water to keep
the dnst. This is specially necessary around the kitchel
CHAPTER VIII.
TARGE'r PRAC'rICE.
Section 1. Preliminary training in markmanshlp.
,ctive rille fire Is generally what counts most in battle.
Lye effective rifle fire, the men on the firing line must be"
:0 HIT what they are ordered to shoot at. There is no
.vho can not be taught how to shoot. It is not necessary
m desirable to begin instruction by IIrlng on a rille range.
'fectly green re""uit who has never fired a rille may be
into a good shot by a little instrnction and some prelimi-
drills and exercises.
ore a man goes OIl the range to fire it is absolutely neces-
:hat he should know-
low to set the rear Sight.
low to sigltt or aim.
low to sqneeze the trigger.
low to hold the rille in all positions.
,e does not know these things It Is worse than useless for
) fire. He will not improve; the more he shoots the worse
11 shoot, and it will become more difficult to teach him.
Section 2. Sight adjustment.
, must be able to adjust their Sights correctly aI!d quickly.
'["or in adjustment so small that one can scarcely see it
, sight leaf is sufficient to cause a miss at an enemy at
ltds and over.
Ice your rear sight. When the leaf is laid down the battle
appears on top. This sight Is set for 547 yards and is
189
190
TARGET PRACTICE.
not adjustable. When the leaf is raised four sights COIll
view. 'I.'he extreme range sight for 2,850 yards at the
the leaf is selctom used. The open sight at the upper e
the drift slide is adjustable from 1,400 to 2,7f)() yarrls. '
it the upper edge of the slide is made to correspond wi
range reading on the leaf, and the slide is then clampe(
the slide screw. This sight also is sell10m used. The oper
at the bottom of the triangular \/pening in the drift sl
adjustable from 1'\)0 to 2,450 yards. To set it the index I
the lower corners of the triangle is set opposite the range g
tion on the leaf and the slide clamped. This and the peer
just below it are the Sights most commonly used. To s
peep Sight, the index lines on either side of the peephole ,
opposite tbe range desired and the slide clamped.
Notice the scales ror the various ranges on either s
the face of the leaf. The oddnumbered hundreds of
are on the right and the even on the left. The line bel'
number is the index line for that range. Thus to set til<
for 500 yards the index line of the slide is brought in
line with the line on the leaf helow the figure 5 and thr
clamped. To set for 550 yards the index lines of the
are set half way between the Index lines on the leaf bel'
figure 5 on the right side and the f i ~ u r 6 on the lefl
Look at your sight carefully when setting it and take
pains to get it exaCt. An error in setting the width of '
the lines on the leaf will cause an error of about 8 inc
where your bullet will strike at 500 yards.
The wind gauge is adju,terl by means of the windage
at the right front end of the base of the Sight. Each grad
011 the wind-gauge scale is called a "point." Ij'or conve
in adjusting the line of eaeh third point on the scale is
than the others. If yon tnrn the windage screw so th:
movable base moves to the right, you arc taking right wi
which will canse your rille to shoot more to the right.
It is seldom that a rifle wi1l shoot correctly- to the point
at at a given range with the sights adjusted exactly
scale graduations for that range. If your sight is no
rectly adjusted for your shooting and yon wish to m
slightly to make it correct, remember to move it in the
tion you wish your shot to hit, If you wish to shoot
SIGHT CORRECTIONS, AIMING.
sight. If to the right, move the \vind gauge to the
Always move your sight the correct amount in accord-
vith the following table:
Section 3. Table of sight corrections.
ng to ''''lfti extent the point of impact i8 moved by (J;
'hange of 25 yards in elevation 01'.1 point in windage.
I
Correction I Correction
Range.
by a change 'byachange
in elevation in winda.ge
of 25 yards. of 1 point.
I
I
Yards.
[fIChe,';.
Inches.
100 0.72 4
200 1.62 8
300 2.79 12
400 4.29 16
500 6.22 20
600
8.59 24
i
l
800 1.'5.43 32
1,000 25.08 46
easy rule to remember the windage correction by is: "A
, of 1 point of wind changes the point of Impact 4 inches
100 yards of range."
I this table and take it to the runge with yon.
mple of sight adjustment: Suppose you are tiring at 500
The first two or three shots show you that your shots
tting about a foot below aud a foot to the right of the
of the bullscye. I;'rom the above table you will see that
,vill raise your ,sight 50 yards and move the wind gauge
point to the left the rifle will be Righted RO that if you
IITectly the bullets will hit well inside the bull's-eye.
Section 4. Aiming.
L sighJ: Always align your Sights with the front sight
ly in the middle of the .. U" or notch of the rear
192 TARGET .PRACTICE ..
and the top of the front sight even with the upper corners
.. U." (See fig. 1.) All the sights on the rille except th,
sight are open sights.
Peep sight: Always center the tip of the front sight
center of the peephole when aiming with this Sight.
fig. 2.)
Always aim below the bull's-eye. Kever let your front
appear to touch the buWs-eye in aiming. Try to see the
amount of white target between the top of the front sigl
FIGURII 1.
the bottom 01 the bull's-eye each time. The eye must be f,
on the bull'seye or mark and not on the front or rear si
Look at figures 1 and 2 until your eye retains the mem
them, then try to duplicate the picture every time you aim
consistently, always the same, Never clmnge your aim; (
your sight adjustment if your shots are not hitting in th,
place.
Section 5. Battle sight.
The battle sight is the open sight seen when the leaf
IIllt. It is adjusted for II range of 547 yards. It is illten
be used in battle when yon get nearer to the enemy th:
TRIGGER SQUEEZE.
lea
Always aim at the belt of a standing enemy, or just be-
n if he is kneeling, sitting, or lying. On the target range
~ t is used for rapid fire. With it the rifle shoots about
high at ranges between 200 and 400 yards, so you must
low the figure on the target "D." Find out in your in
on practice just
ouch you must
,low to hit the
.on 6. Trigger
squeeze ..
the first joint of
'ore finger to
e the trigger. It
most sensitive
)st controlled
1 of the body.
1 place the rifle
)ur shoulder
e the trigger so
,ull it back about
:hth of an inch, .
taking up the
portion. or slack,
pull. Then eon- FIGUR1Il 2.
he triggpr finger
lly, slo\vl:r and steadily increasing the pressure on the
while the aim is being perfected. Continue the grad-
erease of pressnre so that when the aim has become
the additional pressure required to release the point of
~ r can be given almost insensibly and without causing
,flection of the rifle. Put absolutely all your mind and
.wer into bolding the rifle steady and squeezing the trig-
: without disturbing the aim. Practice squeezing the
in this way every time you have your rifle in your hand
on can surely and quickly do it without a suspicion of a
gS512'-17--8
194 TARGET PRACTICE.
By practice the soldieruecomes familiar with the
squeeze of his rifle, ann knowing this, he is able to jt
any time, within limits, what additional pressure is r
for its discharge.. By constant repetition of this exer
should be ahle finally to squeeze the trigger to a eertni
be'yond which the slightest movement w ill release th
Having sqneezed the trigger to this point, the aim is COl
and, when trne, the additional pressure is applied and 1
charge follows and the hullet files true to the mark.
Section 7. Firing positions.
When In ranks at close oreler the positions are til
scribed in the Infantry Drill Regulations. t\7"hen in e:'i
order, or ""hen firing alone, these positions may be n
somewhat to better suit the individual. The follow
marks on the various positions are offered as sugf
whereby steady positions may be learned by the soldier
Standing position: Face the target, then execute rig
face. Plant the feet about 12 inches apart. As you ra
ritle to the shoulder lean very Slightly backward just
to preserve the perfect balance on both feet which the
of the rifie has somewhat disturbed. Do not lean fa
and do not lean forward at all. If your body is out of
it will be under strain and you will tremble. .The righ
should be at about the height of the shoulder. The Ie!
should grasp well around the stock and handguard il
of the rear sight, and the left elbow should be almost,
under the rifle. The right hand should do more than t
,\vork of "holding the rifle up and against the shoulder,
hand only steadying and guiding the piece. Do not try
the recoil; let the whole body move back with it. Do
afraid to press the jaw hard <lgainst the stock; this f
the pOSition, and the head goes back with the recoil
sures that your face is not hurt.
Kneeling ASSUlllP- the position very much
scrihed' in the Infantry Drill Regulations. Sit on th
heel. The right knee should point directly to the ri,g-l
is, along the firing line. The Jloint of the left elbow
rest over the left knee. There 1s a fiat place under th,
FIRING POSITIONS.
fits It flnt place on the knee and makes a solid rest.
he body well forward. This position is uncomfortable
racticed, when it quickl,y ('eases to be uncomfortable.
19 position: Sit down h'alf faced to the right. feet from
Inches apart, knees bent, right knee slightly higher than
t, left leg pointed toward the target It,,gt both elbows
knees, hands grasping the piece the sa.me 38 in the
position. This is a very steady position, particularly if
an be found or made In the ground for the heels.
e position and use of the gun sling: To adjust the sling
ng, unhook the straight strap of the sling and let it out
as it will go. Adjust the loop so that when stretched
he bottom of the stock Its rear end (bight) comes about
e the comb of the stock. A small man needs a longel'
an a taIl man. Lie down facing at an angle of about
the right of the direction of the target. Spread the
wide apart as they will go with comfort. Thrust the
n through betweeu the rille and the sling, and then back
1 the loop of the sUng, securing the loop, by means of the
around the upper left arm as high up as it will go.
le hand under and then over the sling from the left side,
asp the stock and handguard just In rear of the lowel'
Raise the right elbow. off the ground, rolling slightly
I the left side. Place the butt to the shoulder and roll
lto position, clamping the rille hard and steady in the
)OSitiOIl. The rifle should rest dee.p down in the palm of
t hand with fingers almost around the handgnard. Shift
t palm a little to the right or left until the rille stands
ly upright (no cant) without effort. The left elbow
rest on the ground directly under the rifle, and right
on the ground about 5 indHe's to the right of a pOint di-
under the stock. In this position the loop of the sling,
g at the lower band, passes to the right of tbe left wrist,
ence around the left upper arm. The loop shonld be so
hat "bout 50 pounds tension is placed on5t when the po,
is assumed. This position is uncomfortable until p r c ~
\Vhen it quickly ceases to be uncomfortable. It will he
!r if small holes can be found or dug in the groul)d for
ows. In this position the sling hinds the left forearm to
Ie and to the ground so thut it forms a dead rest for the
196 XABG EX PRAC'lICE.
rifle, with a universal joint, the wrist, at its upper en(
the rifle is so bound to the shoulder that the recoil is
at all. This is the steadiest of all firing positions.
The gun sling can also be used in this manner with ad
in tIle other positions.
Section 8. Calling the shot.
It is evident that the sights should be so adjusted
range that the riJie will hit where you aim. In ordin
termine that the Sights are so adjusted it is necessary t
shall know each tiIlle just where you were aiming on tho
at the instant your rifle was discharged. If you know t
your rifle hits this point your rifle Is correctly sighted.
shot does not hit near this point, you should change y01
adjustment in accordance with the table of sIght COri
on page 191.
No man can hold absolutely steady. The rifle t
slightly, aud the sights seem to wobble and move over I
get. You try to squeeze off the last ounce of the trigger
just as the sights move to the desired alignment un'
bull's-eye. At this instant, just before the recoil l o t ~
view of the sights and target, you should catch with you
llicture, as it were, of just where on the target your
were aligned, and call to yourself or to the coach thh
This point is where your shot should strike if yOUl' sig
{;orrectly adjusted, and If you have squeezed the trlgge
out disturbing your aim. Until a man can call his sh01
not a good shot, for he can never ten if his rifle is sight<
or not, or if a certain shot is a good one or only the r<
luck.
Section 9. Coordination.
Good marksmanship consists in learning thoroughly
tails of-
Holding the rille in the various positions.
Aiming.
Squeezing the trigger.
Calling the shot.
Adjusting the Sights.
ADVICE TO RIFLDIElf.
, when these have been mastered in detail, then the co-
tion of them in the act of firing. This coordination con-
u putting absolutely all of one's will power into an effort
I the rifle steadily, especially in getting it to steady down
the aim is perfected; in getting the trigger squeezed off
at the instant the rifle is steadiest and the aim perfected;
Ing the shot at this instant; and, if the shot does not hit
he point called, then in adjusting the sights the correct
Lt so that the rifle will be sighted to hit where you aim.
Section 10. Advice to rillemen.
)re going to the range clean the rifle carefully, removing
trace of oil from the bore. This can best be done wit!) a
turated with gasoliue. Put a light coat of oil on the bolt
lms. Blacken the front and rear sights with smoke from
ling candle or camphor or with liquid sight black.
l!: through the bore and see that there Is no obstruction
p the rifle off the ground; the stock may absorb damp-
he sights may be injured, or the muzzle filled with dirt.
:ch your hold carefully and be sure to know where the
r sight is at discharge. It is only in this way that the
of calling shots, which is essential to good shooting, can
luired. ,
ly the conditions, adjust the sling, and set the sight before
to the firing point.
k at the sight adjustment before each shot and see that it
It changed.
llre of your hold and if the hit is not as called, determine
ake FULL correction in elevation and windage to put the
hot in the bull's-eye.
p a written record of the weather conditions and the
ponding elevation and windage for each day
1
s firing.
; elevation will generally be required on hot days; on wet
in a bright sunlight; with a 6 o'clock wind; or with a
arrel.
e elevation will generally be required on cold days; on
Iry days; with a 12 o'clock wind; wit a hot barrel; In a
r cloudy light.
198 TAltGET PRACTICE.
The upper band should not be tight enough to bind the
Do not put a cartridge into the chamber until ready
Do not place cartridges in the sun. They will get hot an,
high.
Do not rub the eycs-especlally the sighting eye.
In cold weather warIn the trigger hand before ShOOtil
After shooting, clean the rifle carefully and then oi
prevent rust.
Have a strong, clean cloth that will not tear and jam
erly cut to size, for use in cleaning.
Always clean the rifle from the breech, using a brass c:
rod when available. An injury to the rifiing at the
causes the piece to shoot very irregularly.
Regular physical exercise, taken systematically, will (
marked improvement in shooting.
Frequent praetiee of the "Position and aiming dri
of the greatest help in preparing for shooting on the ran
Rapid firing: Success is rapid firing depends upon Cl
a quick and accurate aim, holding the piece firmly and
and in squeezing the trigger without a jerk.
In order to give mnr.h time as possihle for
rately, the soldier must practice taking position, loadin
the Clip, and working the bolt, so that no time will be
these operations. \Vith constant practice all these mov
Illay be made quickly and without false Illotions.
When the bolt handle is raised, it must be done with,
force to start the shell from the chamber; and when the
pulled back, it must he with sufficient force to throw the
shell well away from the chamber and far enough to eng'
next cartridge.
In loading, use force enough to load each cartridge w:
motion.
The aim must be caught quickly, and, once caught, n
Ileld and the trigger squeezed steadily. Rapid firing, as
holding, aim, and the trigger are concerned,
be done with all the precision of slow fire. The gain i
should be in getting ready to fire, loading, and worki
bolt:
Firing with rests: In order thut the shooting may be u
the piece should always be rested at the same point.
PISTOL AND itEVOL VEJI. PRACTICE.
, that it is free from obstruction. When loading 1 the pistol
arget practice plaee five cartridges in the magazine and
t the magazine in the handle; draw back tbe slide and insert
irst cartridge in the chumber and carefully lower' the
aer fully down.
loading the revolver place five cartridges in the cylinder
et the hammer down on the empty chamber.
Whenever the pistol is being loaded or nnloaded, the muz-
ust be kept up.
I Do not point the weapon in any direction where -an
1 discharge might do harm.
I After loading do 110t cock the pistol or the revolver until
, to fire.
Keep the working parts properly lubricated .
. POSition, dismounted.-Stand firmly on both feet. body
ctly balanced and erect and turned at such an angle as is
eomfortable when the [Irm is extended toward the target;
eet far enough apart to in:o;;ul'e firmness and steadiness of
ion (about 8 to 10 Inches) ; weight of hody borne equally
both feet; right arm fully extended, left arm hanging
'ally.
I LOAD PISTOL: Being at raise pistol (right hand grasping stocIe
height of and 6 inches in front of the 'Point of the right shoulder"
1ger alongside barrel, barrel to the rear and incIiued forward
30').
bout deranging position of the hand, rotate the pistol so the
move to the left, the barrd pointing to the right front and up.
h the thumb and forefinger of the left hand (thumb to the right)
the slide and pull it towarrl -the 'body until it stops. And then
it. The pistol is thus loarleo, and the hammer at full cock.
he is to be kept in tbe band and not to be fired at once, en-
he safety lock with lhe thumb of the right band.
he pistol is to be cS.rried in the . I'la.fety lock,
'wet' the bammf!r fully down.
I LOWER THE. HAMMER: 1leing at the loading position At full
'irmly seat thumb of -right hand on the hammer; insert forefinger
trigger guarfl.
With thumb of left hand exert a momentary pressure on the
tfety to release hammer from sear.
At the same exert pressure OP the trigger and carefully
owly lower the ha,.mmeT fully down.
Remove finger from trigger.
[nsert pistol in holstp.r.
TION.-The pistol must never be placed in the holster until llam-
: fully down.
TARGET PL\CTICE.
REMARKs.-The right arm may be slightly bent, althou!
difl:iculty of holding the pistol uniformly and of keeping
well as the forearm in the same vertical piane make!
objectionable.
137. The grip.-Grasp the stock as high as possible wit
thumb and last three fingers, the forefinger alongside the t
guard, the thumb extended along the stock. 'l'he barrel,
and forearm should be as nearly in one line as possible
the weapon is pointed toward the target. The grasp shou
be so tight as to cause tremors of the hand or arm to b,
munlcated to the weapou, but should be firm enough to
losing the grip when the recoil takes place.
REMARKs.-The force of recoil of the pistol or revol
exerted in a line above the hand which grasps the stock.
lower the stock is grasped the greater will be the movem
.. jump" of the muzzle caused by the recoil. This nol
results in a severe strain upon the wrist, but in loss of acc
If the hand be placed so that the grasp is on one side
stock, the recoil w!ll cause a rotary movement of the"
toward the opposite side.
The releasing of the sear causes a slight movement ,
muzzle, generally to the left. The pOSition of the thumb
the stock overcomes mnch of this movement. The soldier,
be encouraged to practice this method of holding until it b.
natural.
To do uniform shooting the weapon must be held with e
the same grip for each shot. Not only must the hand gra
stock at the same point for each shot, but the tension ,
grip must be uniform.
138. (a) The trigger squeeze.-The trigger must be sq'
in the same manner as in rUle firing. (See p. 193.)
pressure of the forefinger on the trigger should be st
increased and should be straight baCk, not sideways. Th,
snre should continue to that point beyond which the sli
movement will release the sear. Then, when the aim u;
the additional pressure is applied and the pistol fired.
Only by much practice can the soldier become familial
the trigger squeeze. 'l'hls is essential to accurate shooth
Is the most important detail to master in pistol or re
shooting.
PISTOl. AJn) Jl.EVOl.VElI. PlI.ACTICE.
) Selt-cocking action.-Tlle force required to squeeze the
'er of the revolver when the selfcocking device is used is
iderably greater than with the single action. To accustom
dier to the use of the self-cocking mechanism, and also to
Igthen and develop the musdes of the hand, a few minutes'
tice daily in holding the unloaded revolver on a mark and
ping It. using the selfcocking mechanism. is recommended.
use of the sclf-cocking device In firing is not recommended
)t in emergency. By practice in cocking the revolver the
"I' can become sufficiently expert to fire very rapidly, using
e action, while his accuracy will be greater than when
: double action.
I. Alming.-Except when delivering rapid or quick fire, the
and front sights of the pistol are used in the same manner
Ie rifle sights. The normal Sight is habitually used (see
'I), and the line of Sight is directed upon a point just
, the bull'seye at "6 o'clock." The front sight must be
through the middle of the rear'sight notch,' the top being
line with the top of the notch. Care must be taken not to
the pistol to either side.'
the principles of aiming have not been taught, the soldier's
)ction will begin with s i ~ t l n drills as prescribed for the
30 far as they may be applicable. The sighting bar with
sight will be used to teach the normal sight and to demon
, errors likely to be committed.
construct a sighting rest for the pistol (see PI. VI) take
ce of wood about 1Q inches long, 1* inches wide, and i'o
,thick. Shape one end so that it will fit snugly In the
e of the pistol when the magazine has been removed.
, or nail this stick to the top of a post or other object at
an angle that the pistol when placed on the stick will be
.ximately horizontal. A suitable sighting rest for the re-
r may be easily improvised.
. (a) How to cock the pistol.-The pistol should be cocked
e thumb of the right hand ane. with the least possible de-
ment of the grip. The forefinger should be clear of the
e instructor sbould take cognizance ot the fact that the proper
~ point h often all'ecteq by the personal and fixed pecuJiaritiell
:firer. and it unable to correct sucb abnormalities
t
permit firer to
sight at such point as promises elfective results.
TARGET PRACTICE.
PLATE VI.
PISTOL AND REVOLVER PltACTICE. 207
when cocking the pistol. Some men have difficulty at
in cocking the pistol with the thumb. This can be
ome by a little practice. the p!stol forward while'
ng the thumb on the hammer will not be permitted.
How to cock the revolver.-The revolver should he cocked
Ltting the thumb on the hammer at as nearly a right angle
e hammer as possible, and by the action of the thumb
les alone bringing the hammer back to the position of full
Some men with hands are able to cock the revolver
the thumb while hold41g it !n the position of aim or raise
'Vhere the soldier's hand is small this can not be done,
n this case it assists the operation to give the revolver a
tilt to the right and upward (to the right). Particular
should he taken that the forefinger is clear of the trigger
e cylinder will not revolve. Jerking the forwar,!
, holding the thumb on the hammer will not he permitted.
Position and aiming drIlls, dismounted.-F'or this instruc-
:he squad will be formed with all interval of 1 pace between
Black pasters to simulate bull's-eyes will be pasted op-
! each man on the barrack or other wall, from which the
I is 10 paces distant.
squad being formed as descrihed ahove, the Instrudol"
the command: 1. Raise, 2. Pistol (par. 156, Cavalry Drill
Lations), and cautions, H Position and aiming drill, dis-
ted." The men take the positions descrihed in paragraph
,xcept that the pistol is held at "Raise pistol."
instructor cautions, H Trigger squeeze exercise." At the
Land READY, cock the weapon as described, in paragraph
A t the command, 1. Squad, 2. FIRE, slowly extend the arm
is nearly horizontal, the pistol directed at a point about G
s below the bull's-eye. At the same time put the fore-
inside the trigger guard and gradually" feci" the trigger_
,e enough air to comfortably fill the lungs and gradually
the piece until the line of sight is directed at the point of
i; e., just below the bull's-eye at 6 o'clock. While the sights
irect.ed upon the mark, gradnally increase the pressure on
rigger until it reaches that point where the slightest ad-
wi pressure will release the sear. Theu, when the aim is
the :Hlditional pressure necessary to fire the piece is given
lOOt!lIy liS not to derange the alignment -of the sights. The
on will' be held on the mark for an instant after the ham-

TARGET PRACTICE.
mer falls and the soldler will observe what el1'ect, if an
slJueezing of the trigger has had on his aim.
It is impossible to hold the arm perfectly still, but eacl
the line of sight is directed on the point of aim a sJig]
ditional pressure is applied to the trigger until the pl.
finally discharged at one of the moments when the sigh
correctly aligned upon the mark.
When the soldier has become proficient in taking the I
position, the trigger squeeze should be executed at will.
instructor prefaces the preparatory command by "At will
gives the command HALT at the conclusion of the exerCise,
the soldier will return to the position of "Raise pistol."
At first this exercise should be executed with deliberatlo
gradually the soldier will be taught to catch the aim q
and to lose no time in beginning the trigger squeeze and
ing it to the point where the slightest additional pressur
release the sear.
service few opportunities wl1l be ol1'er<
slow aimed fire with the pistol or revolver, although us
be made of the weapon under circumstances when ac.
pointing and rapid manipulation are of vital importanc
In delivering a rapid fire, the soldier must keep hi!
fixed upon the mark and, after each shot, begin a stead
creasing pressure on the trigger, trying at the same ti
get the Sights as nearly on the mark as possible befo:
hammer again falls. The great diffieulty in quick IIrin1
the pistol lies In the fact that when the front sight is hl
upon the mark, the rear sight is often found to be ontsil
line joining the eye with the mark. This tendency to ho
pIstol obliquely Can be overcome only by a uniform man
holding and pointing. 'hls uniformity is to be attaine<
by acquiring a grip which can be taken with
time the weapon Is fired. It is this circumstance which
the position and aiming drlIls so Important. The soldier,
constantly practice pointing the pistol until he acquir.
ability to direct it on the mark in the briefest Interval 0
and practically without the aId of sights.
The soldier then repeats the exercises with the pistol
left hand, the left side being turned toward the target.
142. To draw and fire quickly-Snap shooting.-Wit
squad formed as described in paragraph 141 except th
PISTOL AND REVOLVER PRACTICE.
209
is in the holster and the flap, if any, huttoned, the in-
r cautions "Quickfire exercise." And gives the com-
1. SQUAD; 2. ] .... ire. At this f'ommand eue.h soldier, ].;:eep-
eye on the trrrget, quicldy draws his pistol, cocks it us
"graph 140, thrusts it toward the target, squeezes tile
, and at the instant the \veupon is brougbt in line with
and the objective increases the pressure, releasing the
To enable the soldier to note errors in pointing, the
l will be momentarily heIrl in after the fnll of
llllWl', Efforts at deliberate aiming in this must
oUl'aged.
lrks under paragraph 141 specially applicable als"o to
of "Vhen the soldier has become proficient in the
of this exercise, it should be repeated nt will; the in-
r cautions, "At will; Quick fire exercise." The exercise
be practiced until the mind, the eye, and trigger finger
unison.
hnulute this type of mounted, t11e instructor places
mel so thnt the simulated ill tUl'll, to the
" to the LEFT, to the RIGHT FRONT, to the LEFT FRONT,
RIGHT REAR. Wilh the ,quael in one of these positions,
tructOl' cautions, "Position nnd aiming (11'111, Inonnted."
cautioll tho right foot is curried 20 inches to the right
, left hand to the position of the brielle ham! (par. 246,
Drill Hegulations). The eX(,l'C'ise is carriell ant as de-'
for the exen'ise dismounted, using the commands and
laid down in pUl'ngraphs 161 to 168, inclusivE'. Cavalry
egulations, for firing in the several directions. The exel'-
to he expcuted at "i-vill when the squad has been suffi-
'well instructed in detail.
tlring to the left the pistol hand will he ahout opposite
, shollltler and the shoulders turned about 45
0
to the left;
ring to the right rear the shoulders are turned about 45

1 the ::oldipr is proficient in these exercises with the pistol
right hand, they are repeatet1 with the pistol in the left
[ver or pistol range practice.-Tlle courses in range prnc-
8 given in paragral1hs 147 to 199, Small Arms Fjring
, 1913.
3512-17-,-D
CHAPTER IX.
EXTRACTS FROM MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUl
DUTY.
UNITED S'fA'I'ES ARMY, 1914.
[The numbers refer to paragraphs in the Manual.]
Section 1. Introduction.
1. Guards mny be divided into four classes: Exterior j
Interior guards, military police. and provost guards.
2. Exterior guards are used only in time of war. Tl
long to the domain of tactics ana are treated of in thE
Service Regulations and in the drill regulations of the di
arms of the service.
The purpose of exterior guards is to prevent surprise, tl
attack, and otherwise to provide for the security of th,
body.
On the march they take the form of advance guard
guards. and flank guards. At a halt they consist of outpc
3. Interior guards are used in camp or garrison, to. p.
order, protect property, and to enforce police regulatio:
time of war such sentinels of an interior guard as I
necessary are placed close in or about a camp, and liC
there is an exterior guard further out consisting of 01
In time of peace the interior guard is the OIlly guard in :
or garrison.
4. Military police differ somewhat from either of these I
(See Field Service Regulations.) They are used In t
,val' to guard prisoners, to arrest stragglers and desel'te
to maintain order and enforce police regulations in U
of armies, along lines of communication, and in the vici
large camps.
5. Provost guards arc used in the absence of military
generally in conjunction ,vitlI HIe civil authorities at (
large posts or encampments, to preserve order among f:
beyoncl the interior guard.
210
DETAILS AND ROSTERS. 211
Section 2. Classification of interior guards.
'e \,,1 riOl1s elements of an interior guard classifiecl ac-
to their particular purposes and the manner in which
rforn1 their duties are as follo\vs:
['he main guard.
,pecial guards: Stable gnards, park guards, prisoner
herd guards, train guards, boat guards, watchmen, etc.
Section 3. Details and rosters.
every militar.y post, and in every regiment or separate
Lel ill the fielel, all interior guard will be detailed and
mnteu.
n consist of such number of officers and enlisted n1en
commanding officer may deem necessary, und will he
lrleu by the senior officer or noncommissioned officer
th, under the supervision of the officer of the day or
Heel' detailed by the cornmancling oificer.
e system of sentinels on fixed is of valne in clis-
and training because of the direct individual responsi-
is impo::;;;ed and required to be discharged in a
and precise manner. "\Vll.ile the desirability of this type
is recognized, it should only be put 1n practice to an
mfficicnt to insure th01'ougll instruction in this rnet1lOd
l'ming guard duty and should not be the routine method
crformanc8. The nsual guard duty ,viII hB Jlerformetl
hmen, patrols: or snch metJlOcl as, in the opinion of the
ding officer, may best secure rpsults l1Jlder the pnrticn-
I conditions.
posts where there are less tll,lll three companies the
lard and special guards lllUY all be furnished by one
r or by details from each company. It is directed that
possible such guards shull lJe furnished by n single
i, for the reason that if guard details are taken from
at a post of t,vo companies, troops, or bat-
'vill result in both being so l"educecl as to seriously inter-
Jl drill and instruction, \vhereas if details are tal{en
Lly one, the other is available for instruction at full
J there are three or more companies, the main guard
be furnished by a single company, and, as
\
212 MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUAR , DUTY.
far as practicable, the same organization will supply
tails for that day for special guard, overseer, and fatigl
In this case the officer of the day nncl the officers of th,
if there 111'8 any, ,vill, if .practkable, be frOn1 the campi
nishing the guard.
10. At a post 01' camp where the headquarters of mc
one regi.ment are stationed, or il1 the ease. of a small
in the field, if but one gllal'd he necessary for the wh.
mand, the details will be made from the 11eadquartel"
COml1Hlnll.
If formal gllnnl monnting is to be the adjutant, f
major, and band to attend guard mounting '\yill be desigr
the commanding officer.
11. Vi,Thell a single organization furnishes the guard,
of Ol'ganizations win be l;;:ept by the sergeant major ut
supervision of the adjutant. (See Appendix B.)
12. 'Vhen the guard is detailed from several ol'gani
\vil1 ue kept by the adjntant, of officers of the I
offi('ers of the guarcl by name; by the sergeant major UI
supervision of the adjutant, of sergeants, corporals, Itil
and privates of the guard by number per organization;
first sergeants, of sergeants, corporals, musiCians, and
by name. (See Appendix A.)
13. \\1'"hen organizations furnish their own stable, 0
awJ park guards, credit will he given each for the nn
enlisted men so furnished as though they had been det'
main gnard.
14. Special guarcls, other than stable or park guards,
crerlited the same as for main guurd, credited with
duty, carried on special dnty, or credited as the coml
officer may direct. (Pars. 6, 221, 247, and 300.)
15. Captains will superdse the keeping of company
and see that all duties performed are duly credited.
355-304, A. R., for rules governing rosters, and Fo
A. G. 0 .. for as to ho\v rosters should be k
16. There will be an officer of the day with each guar,
in the opinion of the commanding officer the guard is :
that his )O;81'vices are not needed. In this case an officer
detailed to supervise the commund and instruction of U-
for such period as the commanding officer may direct.
DETAILS AND ROSTERS.
213
{hen more than oue guard is required for a command,
officer of the day will be detailed, who will receive h i ~
from the brigade or division commander, as the latter
recto 'Vhen necessary captains may be placed on the
'or field officer of the day.
he detail of officers of the guard will be limited to the
ies of the serviee lind efficient instruction; inexperienced
may be detailed as Snpel'lltlllWl"ary officers o ~ the guard
Joses of instruction.
tfficers serving Oil staff departments arc, in the discretion
:ommanding officer, exempt from guard duty.
nard details \-yin, if practicable, be posted or published
preceding the beginning of the tour, and officers notified
lIy by n written order at the same time.
he strength of guards and the llumbm' of consecutive
r which an organization furnishes 1 he gnard \vill be so
~ fiB to insure prIvates of the main guard an interval
ess than five days between tours.
l this is not othenvise practicable, extra ancI special duty
a be detailed for night gnard duty, still perfol'ming their
uties. When so detailed a roster will be kept by the
t sho\ving the duty performed by them.
he members of mailf guards and stable and park guards
bituuIly be relieved every 24 hours. The length of the
enlisted men detailed as special guards, other than
r park guards, will be so regulated as to permit of these
i n ~ h,eld accountable for a strict performance of their
hould the officer of the day be notified that men are reo
to fill vacancies in the guanI, he will cause them to be
I from the organization to \vhkh the guard belongs. If
e available in that organization, the adjutant will be
and \vill cause them to be supplied from the organization
next for guard. (Par. 63.)
be adjutaut wiII huyc posted on the bulletin board at his
I data needed by company commanders in maklng detailR
leir companies.
st sergeant's call, first sergeants ,yin g9 to headquarters
-_e from the bulletin board all data necessary for making
lils required from their companies; these details will be
:om their company rosters.
214 MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUAR:D DUTY.
25 .. In order'to give ample notice, first sergeants wil
practicable, publish at retreat and post on the company
board all details made from the company for duties to
forweu.
26. Where rosters are required to be kept by this mm
details will be made by roster.
Section 4. Commander of the guard.
41. 'rho commander of the gnanl is responsible for
stl'udion and discipline of the gUfll'd. He ,vill see that s
members are correctly instructed in their orders aIul dU1
that they nnderstand and properly perform them. He"
each relief at least once \vhile it is on post, anu at leas1
these visits ,yill be made bet\veell 12 o'clock midnight a
light.
42. He receives and obeys the orders of the COllU
officer and the officer of the day, and reports to the lntt.
out delay all oruel's to the guard not received from th
of tile (lay; ile transmits to his snccessor all material
tions and information relating to his duties.
43. He is responsible nnder the officer of the clay
general safety of the post or camp as SOon as the ol{
'marches fr'ivay from the In case of"' eml
while both guards are at the gUfinlllOUS(\ the senioi." corn
of the two guards will be responsible that Ule proper a
tal{en.
44. Officm';;! of the guard will remain constantly wi1
gnards, except ,vhile visiting vatrols or ncc'cssarili j
elsewhere in the performance of their duties. The co'
ing officer \\' ill :l 110\\/ n l'easona ble time for meals.
45. A commander of a guard leaving his vost for any
will inform the next in command of his destination anell
time of return.
46, Exec))i", in j he commander of the gu::
rliyide the night with the next in cOl1nnand, but reb:
the one on \YfltCl1 mnst be constantly
nlprt.
47. 'Yhen <lny alarm is raised in camp 01" garrison, th
will l)'O' iniorm!:'(i immediately. (Par. 234.) If the case
1:11(' prover {'all \yin bf' !:o1ouwJ ell , allll 1l1e COTllma
COMMANDER OF THE GUARD.
216
arc1 ,vill cause the commanrling; officer and the officer of
I to be at once notified.
f n sentinel (;alls: "r:ehe guard," the commander of the
will at once send a patrol to the sentinel's post. If the
be great, in which case the sentine1 will discharge his
.lIe patrol will be as strong as possible.
Vhen practica!Jle, there should always be an officer or
lmissioned omrer and two privates of the guard at the
couse in addition to the sentinols there on post.
)et\veen reveille und retreat, when the guard hall been
out for any person entitled to the compliment (see pars.
d 224), the comllHtwler of the guard, if nn officer, \vill
the report of the sergeant, returning the salute of the
\vith the right hanel. He ,vill then draw his saber and
limself hvo paces in front of the center of the guard,
the person for Wh0111 the guard has been turned out
ches, he faces his guurd and commands: 1. Present, 2.
faces to the front unel salutes. 'Vhen his salute is
ilcdgcd, he resume;.:; the ealory, faces about, and commands:
r,2. ARMS; and faces to the front.
he an officer entitled to inspect the gnard, after saluting
fore, bringing his guan::l to an order, the officer of the
'epl}rtR: "Sir, all present or accounted for"; or H Sir, (80-
is absent"; or, if the roll call has lJeen omitted: "Sir,
lrd is formed," exeept that at guard mounting the COlll-
~ of the guards prescnt their guards and salute without
: any report.
'een retreat and reveille tile commander of the guard
and reports but does not hring the guard to a present.
'0 those entitled to have the guard turned out but not
1 to inspect it, no report 'vill be made; nor '\Till a report
,e to any officer unless he halts in front of the guard.
\7hen a guard commanded by a noncommissioned officer is
out as a compliment or for inspection, the noneunnnis-
officer, standing at a right sbouJcler on the right of the
ruicle, commands: 1. Present, :3. ARM.S. lIe then exc-
he rifle salute. If a report be also required, he will, after
g, and before bringing his guarc;l to an order, report as
bed for the officer of the guard. (Par. 50.)
216
MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUARD DUTY.
53. \Vhen a guard is in linE\ not under inspection, ar
lllunded by un officer, the commander of the guard salt:
regimental, battalion, and company commancler, by bring
guard to attenUon and snluting in person.
For all other officers, excepting those entitled to the
ment from a guard (par. the commander of HIE:
salutes ill person, hut: {1oes not bring the guartl io attel
'Vhen commanded oy a noncommissioned office!'. the g
brought to atteJltion in either casp, an(1 the noncommi
officer salut.es.
The commander of a gUHl'c1 exchanges salutes with tl
mandel'S of all other bodies of tl"OOPS; the g-u:u"(l is bra
attention during the excllllnge.
"Present arms)1 is executed by ,1 guard only when
turned out for inspection or as a compliment, and at tl
monies of gnal'(l mounting and relieying the old guard.
54. In marching u guard or it detaclnnent of a gm
principles of paragraph 53 apply. "Eyes 'right." is e:
only in the ceremonies oC guanl mounting and relieving
guurd.
55. If a person entitled to the compliment, or tIle regi
battalion, or cOlllpany eOlTImanrlel', in rear of a
neither the cornpliment nor the salute is given, but the g
brought'to nttention ,vhile such person is opposite the
the comm'andel',
After any person has reccivell or declined the complin
received the sfllutc from the commander of tbe guard,
recogllition of his presente thereaIter while he 1'e111ains
"jeinit.v \vill be taken by bringing the guard to uttentio
50. The commander of the guard ,yilt inspect the gl
reveille and retreat, and at such other times us may bE
Sal'YI t.o assure himself that the men arc in proper cond
perform their lluties und that their arllls and equipme
in proper COIHlitioI1. For inspection by other officers,
pares the guunl ill each casc us directed by the inE
officer.
57. The guard win not be paraded during ceremonies
llirected by the commanding officer.
58, At flll formations' mcmbers of the guard or reliE
exeClltp anns <IS IJeescrlbed in the drill regl
of Uwil' arIll.
COMMANDER OF' THE GUARD.
217
The commander of the guard will See that all sentinels
lbitually rolieved ever.Y two hours. unless the weather or
cause makes it necessary that it be done at shorter or
intervals, [IS directed b,v Uw cornrn;mding officer.
He \yill que:5tion his officers and sen-
relative 10 the instrlIctions they lJl<tr hilve received from
c1 guard; he ,vill sec that pntt'oj,:; ane] \'isits of inspection
ade as clirected by the oftlept' of the day.
He will see that the special onlcrs for each post aocl
21' of the guurd. either wriLten 0]" printed, are posted in
and, if pl'iH'tkilllle, in lbe sentry box or other
reel 111nce to \vhieh the memhcJ' ot the guard has COll-
access.
He will see that the proper call' are sounded at the honrs
lted by the COIlllll:lIl{lill!l," oillcf>I".
Should a member of the g-u<ll'd be ta1rell sick, or be ar-
, or desert, or le:l\'e his g1lard, he will at once'notify the
of the day, (Par. 23,) .
He wilL when the countersign is usod (pars. 210 to 216).
Llnicatc it to the noneummissloned oflken; of the guard
ee tImt it is duly {'OlrHnUIlicatef1 to the sentinels before
nu' for .challenging; the ('ountcrNign will not be given to
eIs posted at tlw
He \yin have llie details for llOisting the flag at reveille
J\vering it nt retn_"'tlt nnd for firing the reveille and re-
gun, made in time 1'Ol the proppr peI'formance of these
(See pars. 3!3S. 3-14. 34':-l, ani1 He \vin sec that the
lre kept in the best condition po:::;sible. and that they are
handled exct:'pt in the proppr of duty.
Re may permit members of the .t!un I'd wllile at the guard-
to remove their head dress. oVPl'conts, aoel gloves; if they
the guanlhouse for any lHlI'[lOS(' whatever. he ,yill require
be propel'ly equipped amI armed according to the
of the service in \vhich engaged, or as directed by tbe
anding officer.
He win enter in the gnard report a report of his tour of
llld. on the completion of Ills tour. will present it to the
of the day. He will transmit vdth his report all passes
I in at the post nf the guard.
Whenever [l iR s(>nt to the guardhouse or guard
)r confiW--'llWl1(-f he \vill l'ause ll:I1I to be searched, and will,
.,
'.
, )
B18 MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUARD DUTY.
without unnecessary delay, report the case to the officer
day.
69. Under war conditions, if anyone is to be passed
camp at night, he will be sent to tile commander of the
who wi11 have him passed beyond the sentinBls.
70. :ehe cOlllmander of the guard will detain at the
house all suspicious characters, or parties attempting to
sentinel's post 'Yitllout authority, reporting his action
officer of the day, to whom persons so arrested will be :::
necessary.
71. He will inspect tile guardrooms and cells, and thE
of such prisoners as may be ironed, at least once duri
tour, and at such other times as 11e Illay deem necessary.
72. He will caUSe the corporals of the old and lleW reI
verify together, immediately before each relief goes on po
number of prisoners who should then properly be at tile
house.
73. He will see that the sentences of prisoners und
charge are executed strictly in accordance with the act
the reviewing anthority.
74. When no special prisoner guu rd has been detniled
300), he will, as far as practicable, assign as guards over
ing parties of prisoners sentinels from posts guarded at
only.
75. The commander of the guard wlll inspect all meals
the guardhouse and see .that the quantity and quality 0
are in accordance with regulations.
76. At gnard mounting he will report to the old officer
llay all cases of prisoners ,vhose terms of sentence exp
that dflY, and also all cases of prisoners concerning wh
statement of charges has been received. (Sec par. 241.)
77. r:L'he commander of the is responsible f(
secnrity of the prisoners under the charge of his gum
betomes responsible for ihell1 after their number
verlfiecl and they have been turned over to the custody
guard by the old guard or by the prisoner guard or overSf
78. The prisoners 'will be verified nnd turned over to t11
guard without parading them, unless the commanding
or the officer of the day shall direct otherwise.
79. To receive the prisoners at the guardhouse when
been parade!} and after they have been verified by the <
SERGEANT OF THE GUARD.
c day, the commander of the new guard directs his
lnt to form his guard \vith nn interval, and commands:
soners, 2. Right, :1. FACE, 4. Forward, 5. MARCH. The
lers having arrived opposite interval in the new
, he commands: 1. Prisoners, 2. HALT, 3. Left, 4. FACE,
:ht (or left), 6. DRESS, 7. FRONT.
I1l'isoners dress on the line of the new
Section 5. Sergeant of the guard.
The senior noncommissioned officel' of the guard always
lS sergeant of the gnard, and if there he no officer of the
, will perform the dntics prescribed for the commander of
.lard.
The sergeant of the guard has general supervision over
ther noncommissioned officers ami the mu:sicians and pri-
of the guard, ancl must be thoroughly familiar with all
!ir orders and duties.
fIe is directly l'es:.ponsible for tlle property under charge
: guard, and ,viII see that it is properly c:ll'edfor. He ,vin
lists of articles tuken out by "'orking partics and sec that
[cll articles are duly returned. If they are not, he ,viI)
:Uately report the fact to the commander of the guard.
Immediately aitel' guard mOUl)ting be \yi11 prepare dupli-
ists of the n:lE18S of all nonCOllllnissionetl officers, musi-
and privates of the ,gllard, sllOwlng the relief and llQst
ties of cacho One list \vill be handell llS soon us possible
commander of the gnnrcl; the othel" will be retainecL by
'
He will see that all relicfs nrc turned out at the proper
and that the thoroughly understand
j
and are
)t and efficient in, the dischm'gp of their (luties.
During the temporary tlbsenrc from the guardhouse of
!rgeant of the guard, the next in rank of the noncornniis'
l officers ViTill perforlll his duties.
Should the corporal whose relief is on post be called
from- the gunr(lhousc, the sergeant of the guard ,vill
Late a noncommissioned -ofilcer to take the corporal's place
llis return.
'I'he sC'rgeant of the guard is at an times for
opel' poriee of the g-nnrdhouse or guard tent, including the
11 about them UIHl the prisoll cells.
220
8S. At first sergeant's call he will proceed to the arlju
office and obtain the guanl report book.
89. When the national 01' regimental colors are taken
the stacks of the color line, the color bearer and guard, '
sergeant of the guard, unarmed, and t\''i'O armed
guard, will escort the colors to the colonel's quarters, a
scribed for the color guard in the (]l'i1l l'eg'ulations of th
of the service to which the guard belongs.
90. He ,vill report to the commallclel' of the guard an:
picious or unusual occurrence Umt tomes llndel' his notiel
warn him of the approach of any armed body, and will s,
him all persons arrested by tho guarcl.
91. 'Vhen the gnard i::o; turned out its formation \vlll
follows: The senior noncommissioned office!', if cornmant
the guard, is on the right of the right guide; if not comrr
of the guard .. he i:"l in the line of file elosers, in rear of thE
four of the guard; the next in rank is right guide; tlH
left guide; the others in the line of file closers, usually e:
rear of. his relief: the f1e]0. music, with its If:'ft three pa
the right of the right guide. The relicfs form in the same
us the guanl was first llividecl, except that if the
consists of dismounted cavnll'Y anll infantry, the cavalry
on the left.
92. The 8ergeallt fOl'llls the guard, calls the roll, and, if
comnland of the guaru, rpports to tIle commander of the
HS prescribed in urill regulations for a first sergeant [orn
troop or company; the gnard is not divided into plato(
and, extept ,v-hen the whole guard is formed pr
marching oft', fours are not COllntcd.
93. rl'lH-' sergeant reports as follmvs: H Sir, all prese
accounted for," or H Sir, (so-and-so) is absent"; or if tt
ca.ll has been ornittec1, H Sir, the guard is formed."
aiJsent without proper authority are reported absent. H(
takes his vlace, ,vitholll: command.
94 .. At night the roll may be called by reliefs and nll
instead of wlmes; thus, the tIn:;t relief being on post: E
relief;_ No.1; No.2, etc.; Third relief, Corporal; No.1, etc
95. Calling the roll will be dispensed with in fOl'miu
brtwn1 when it js turned out as a compliment, on the appro:
an armed body, or in any sudden emergency; but- in such
the roll mny be called before dismissing the guard. ]
SERGEANT OF THE GUARD. SIll
be turned out for an officer entitled to inspect it, the roll
m!ess he directs otherwise, always he called before are
s made.
The sergeant of the guard has direct charge of the
leI'S, except during such time as they may be under the
of the prisoner guard or over,seerf4, and is responsible to
,mmander of the guard for their security.
He will carry the keys of the guardroom and cells, and
ot suffer them to leave his personal possession while he is
guardhouse, except as hereina.fter [Jl'ovWel. (Par. 99.)
d he leave the guardhouse for any purpose be will turn
WS over to the noncommissioned officer who takes his plaCe.
86.)
He will count the knives, forks, etc., given to the prisoners
their food, and see that none .of these articles remaia in
possession. He will see that no forbitl(jen "rticles of 'iny
lre conveyed to the prisoners.
Prisoners \vhen paraded v/ith the guard are placed in line,
center. The sergeant, immediately before forming
J will turn his ke:ys to the nont'omnri:-:;sioIlP{l officl'
,guardhouse. Having formed the guard; he will divi(l.,. it
wo nearly equal parts. Indicating the point of (\iyision
his hand, he commands: 1. Right (or left), 2. FACE, 3 .
. rd, 4. MARCH, 5. Guard, 6. HALT, 7. Left (or right). S.
the first command be right face, the right half of th{l
only will execute the movements; if left face, the left
,nly ,vill execute them. The command halt is given
ent interval is obtained to admit the The
guardroom and cells are then opene( 1 by the nOllCOElr: is-
I officer having the keys. The prisoners will file out uuJer
llpervision of the sergeant, the (rffi('er,
mtinel Qn duty at the guardhouse, and such other sentinels
.y be necessary; they will form in Jine in the interval be-
the two parts of the guard.
To return the prisoners to the gnard-l:00111 and cell:;;. the
Lilt commands: 1. Prisoners, 2. Right (or left), 3. FACE,
umn right (or left), 5. MARCH.
! prisoners, under the same supervision as before, return to
proper rooms or cells.
222. MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUARD DUTY.
1.01. To close the gmuc1, the sergeant com munds : 1. Le
right)', .2. FACE, 3. Forward. 4. MARCH, Guard, G. :
7. Right (or left), S. FACE ..
The left or right hulf only of the guard, as indicated, ex
the movement. .
102 .. be but few prhwncl's. the sergeant )l1UY in
the point of division as alJoyc, and form the necessary in
by the eommands: 1. Right (or left) step, 2. MARCH, 3.
4. HALT, and close the illtcnnls by the commands: 1. Le
right) step, 2. MARCH. il. Guard, 4. HALT.
103. If sentilwls are Illunerous, reliefs at the disc
of the commanding officer, be posteel in detachments, an
geants, as well as corporals, required to relieve and post til
Section 6. Corporal of the Guard.
104. A corporal of tIle gllar(l receives find obeys orden:
none but noncommissioned officers of the guard senior tc
the offtcers of tho guard. the offtcer of the day. and th.
mauding officer.
105. tt is the duty of the corporal of the guarcl to po,
relieve sentinels and to instruct the members of his reI
their order's an{.1 (luttes.
106. Immediately aftcr the division of (he guard into
the corporals 'viII assigll the members of their respective]
to posts by number, all(1 11 soldier so assigned to his pos
not be changed to another i.luring tbe same tour of guard
llllless by direction of the commander of the guard or I
Usually. experienced soldiers are placed ove
arms of the guard, and at remote and responsible posts.
107. Each corp01'il1 will then make" list of the memb
his relief, including himself. rrhis 1 ist will contain the ill
of the relief, the name! tl.le company, and the regiment of
member thereof, and the pOst to which each is assigned.
list will be made jn duplicate, one copy to be given to tb
geunt of the guard as soon as completed, the ollier to be rei
by the corporal. .'
108. When hy the eOIlllwlnaer of the guarc
corpornI.of j:he tirs't relief forms his relief, and then comm
CALL DRY.
Commen"cing 011 the right, the men call off
and front rank, "one," II two," "three," II four," and SI
CORPORAL OF THE GUARD.
ngle rank, they call off from right to left. The corporal
lmlmll1ds: 1. Right, 2. FACE, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH.
corporal marches on the left, and near the rear file, in
to observe the march. The corporal of the old guard
,s on the right of the leading file, and takes command
the last one of the old sentinels is relieved, changing
with the corporal of the neW guard.
'Vhen the relief arrives nt ~ i x paceR from a sentinel
n. 168), the corporal halts it and commands, according
number of the post: No. (--.)
sentinels execute port arms or saber; the new sentInel
ehes the old, halting about one pace from him. (See
2.)
The corporals advance and place themselves, facing each
" little in advance of the new sentinel, the old corporal
right, the new corporal on his left, both at a right
":, and observe that the old sentinel transmits correctly
:ructions.
following diagram will illustrate the positions taken:
R
I I I I I
I I I
CI
A
ID
B
the relief; A, fue new corporal; B, the old; 0, the new
I; D, the old.
The instructions relative to the post having been co:p1-
ted, the new corporal commands, Post.: hath sentinels
>sume the right shoulder, face toward the new corporal
p back so as to allow the relief to pass in front of them.
IV corporal then commands: "1. Forward, 2. March"; the
tine! takes his place in rear of the relief as it passes him,
,e in the same position as those of the relief. The new
I stands fast at a right 8houl(ler until the relicf has
six paces bey<Wl.. him, when he walks his post. The cor-
take their p l ~ as the relief passeS them.
Mounted sentinels are posted ana relieved in accordance
Ie same principles.
224 MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUARD DUTY.
113. On the return of the oW rolief, the corporal of tl
gnard falls out wllen the relief halts; the corporal of 1
guard forms his relief on the left of tIle old guard, snlub
reports to tIle COllllllalider of hIS guard: H Sir, the re
present"; or "Sir, (so and so) is absent," and takes hh
in the guard.
114. To post a relief other than that which is posteu
the old gnard is relievpd, {"(Jl'poL'ul commands:
1. (Such) relief, FALL HI'; and if arms are stackel
are taken at the I)l"Opel' ('01111nancls.
The relief is fOl'lllPd faC'ing to the front, with firms
order, the men plnce themscl yes according- to the nUInl
tllt!il' respective posts, \'iz, two, f9ur, six, and so on, ill th
rank, uncI one, three. five, mH] RO on, in the rear rank
strrnclin:; about hvo paces in front of the center
relief, then corilll:;lnfls.: CALL OFF.
The men call otf as prest'l'ilJed. '1"'he eorporal then COllI
1. Inspection, 2. ARMS. 3. Order, 4. ARMS; faces the conn
of the ;:"'1.l:ird, execute::; the ritle salute, reports: "Sir, thf
is prese-nt"; or H Sil', (so and so) is absent"; he then ta
place on the right at ol'del" arms.
115. ,Vhen tlw com1tl;ul(ler of the guard directs the
Post your relief. corporal salutes and posts his 1'e
prescribed (Pars. lOS to 111) ; the corporal of the relicf (
not go with tile Iiew relief, except when necessary t
the way.
116. To dismis:-; the 01r1 t'('licf, it is halted and faced
front at the guardhollse the corporal of the ne",' relic
then falls out; nw (:ol'lloral of the old relief then steps il
of the relief and dismisses.it by the proper commands.
117. Should the pieces have been Imuie!l before the re1i
posted. corporal will, before dismissing the relief, Sf
no cnrtdtiges arc left in the chambers or magazines. Th
rule to sentinels over prisoners.
118. Each corporul will thoroughly acquaint himself"
the special orc1Pl's of yery sentinel on his relief, and Si
each understands and correctly transmits such orders in
to his successor.
119. There SllOUld he at least one noncommissioned
constantly on the alert at the guardhouse, usually tIle c(
whose relief is on post. This noncommissioned officer
I
CORl'ORAL OF THE GUARD.
,
the entrance of the guardhouse. and does not fall in
he guard \vhen it is formed. He ,vill hnve his rUle can-
T '\vith him.
Whenever it hecomes necessary for the corporal to leave
::t ne:lI' the entrance of the gUHnlhouse:, he \vil) notify the
nt of the guurd, who "'ill at once take llb l)lnce, or c1esig-
nbtter officer to cIa so.
He wHI see that no person enters the guardhouse or
tent,or crosses the posts of the sentinels there posted
it proper anthor!ty.
Should any sentinel call for the corporal of the guard.
rpOl'al 'vill, in every CUBe, at once and quickly procefl(l to
:entjnel. He will nottty the sergeant of the guard bef.?re
g the gunrdllOuse.
He win at once report to the colllmander of the
iolatlon of regulations or allY unusual Occurrellce
Drteu to him by a sPIltinel, or which comes to his
other way.
guard
\vhich
notice
Should a sentinel call H The Guard," the corporal will
Itly notify the commandor of the guard.
Shoul(l a call Ii Relief," the corporal win at
)l"oceed to the post of such selltinel, taking 'ViOl him the
Jext for duty on that post. If the sentinel is relieved for
time on1r, the corporal ,yill again p05'1; him as soon as
for his relief ceases.
'Vhen the is used, the corporal at the post-
the relicf dl1rjng \vhose tour challenging is to begin gives
mntel'sign to the members of the relief) excepting those
L at the guardhousc>,
He will wake the corporal whose relief is next on post
]e for the 1atter to verify tlw :ll'isoners, form his relief.
ost it at the proper hour.
Should the gUaT'''' lJp turuccl out, each eorjloml will call
vn relief. and CftllSe its members to fall in promptly.
Tents or bunks in the same vicinity be designated
le reliefs so that all the members of each relief rnay, if
;ary, be found an(} turned out by the eorporul in the least
libd wltti We least confusion.
When challenged by a sentinel while posting his relief,
"rporal commands: 1. Relief, 2. HALT; to the sentinel's
93512'-17--10
challenge he unswers "ReUef/' and at the order of the s
he advances alone to give the countersign, or to be -reeD
Wben the sentinel says, "Advance relief/' the corpora
mands: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH.
If to be relieved, the sentinel is then as prescr
131. Between retre>lt and reveille. the corporal of the
will challenge ull suspicious looktng persons 'or partiEs.l
observe, first halting his patrol or relief. if either be ,vit
He will advance tllPm in the sume manner thut sentir
post advance like parties (pars. 191 to 1\J7), but if tile
of a patrol is on a continuous chain of sentinels, he shOt
challenge persons cornjng near him unless he has reason
Heve that they have elude!} tIle vigilance of sentinels.
132. Between retreat and reveille, whenever so ordered
officer entitled to inspect the guard, the corporal will
H Turn out the guard," nUllolIIlC'illg the title of the omce
then, if not otherwise ordered, he \vill salute anfl retur-\!
post.
133. As a general rule he will advallce parties appro:
the guard at night in the same manner that sentinels 0
advance like parties. the sentinel at the gU!lJ'(
and repeats the alls,ver to the corpo1'al. as
hereafter (par. 200); tile corporal. advancing at port
suss: "Advance (so and so) with the conntersign," or-'
recognized," jf there be no countersign used; t11e count
being correctly giveIl, or the party being duly recognize
corporal says: "Advance (so and so)," repeating the n
to the of the sentinel.
134. When officers of different rank approach the gllarc
from <-111'1'e1'ent directions at the same time, the senior \'
advanced fil'Rt, unc1 ,vill not be marle to ,vait for his junic
135. Out of ranks nnd under arms, the corporal
the rifle salute. He will sal ute all officers, wbetber by (
night.
136. The corporal will examine parties halted and de
by sentinels, and. if he have reason to the
no authority to cross sentinel IS posts, ,vill
commander of the guard. . .',:
137. The corporal of the guard will arrest all' suspic'!ou,
iug characters prowling about the post or camp, all pers,
a disorderly character distmbing the peace, and all p'
ORDERLIES AND COLOR SENTINELS.
n the act of cOl1lmitting crime against the Government
ilitary reservation or posl. All persons arrested by cor-
of the guard 01' flY sentinels will at Ollce lJe candtlded
:::ommander of the guar<l the corporal.
Section 7. Musicians of the guard.
The musid:1ns Qf tlle gnard 1vill soull'-l calls as prescribed
commanding oUicer.
Should the guarf1 be tnrne(l out for national or regimental
)r stundanls, uncnsed, the field ll1Usic .of the guard will,
he gU}lrd present arms, sound, " To the color" or " To the
:i"; or, if for any person enti-tlel1 theretu, the march,
les, 01' ruflles, prescribell in paragraphs 375, 370, und 377,
Section 8. Orderlies and color sentinels.
'Vhen gO dil'ected by the commanding officer, the officer
spects the guard at guard mounting 'win .select from the
rs of the new guard. an orderly for the commanding
and snch number of other or(lerlies and color sentinels
, be required.
For these positions the soldiers will be chosen. who are
arrect in the performance of llnty and in military lJeur-
utest in person and clothing, nnd whose arms and
Its are in the best condition. Clothing, arms, and equip-
must conform to regulations. If tlwre is ans doubt as
relative qualitications of two 01" more soldiers,
19 oflicer will cause them to fall out at :he guardhouse
form in line in single lank. lIe wlll then, by testing
n drill regulations, select the most proficient; The com-
T of the gUHrd )yill be notified of the selection.
'Vhen (Urected by the commander of the guard to full
ld report an o}"llerly ,vill give his name, company, and
'Ilt to the sergeant of the guard, unll. leaving his rifle in
m rael..: ill his company quarters, will proceed at once to
ticer to \yhorn He is assigIled,. reporting: U Sir, Private
, Company ---, reports as ordeI'ly.H
If the orderlY selected be a cavalryman, he ,,?ill leave
Le in the arm rack of his troop quarters, and report \\'ith
It OD, but without side arms unless specially otherwise
d.
lIt8
144. Orderlies, while on duty as such, are
orders of the commanding officer and of the offico.rs t(
.they nre ordered to report.'
145. 'Vhen an orderly is ordered to carry u message,
be careful to deliver it exactly as it was given to him.
146. His tour of- dutr ends "when he is relieved by
selecte<:1 from the guard relieving his own.
147. Onlerlies ,1J'G mcml)ers of the guard, and t:11eir
company, nnd regiment nre entered on the guard rep(
lists of the guard.
148. If a color line is estal)]ished, sufficient sentiu'
placec1 on tlle color line to guard the .colors anc1 stacks. ,
149. Color sentinels .ore posted onl)' so long us the sta
formed. TIle cOlllmander of the guard will divide tI:
equally among them.
150. When stacks are broken, the color sentinels may
mltted to. return to tlldr respective companies. They
qui red to report in person to the commander of the gl
reveUle and retreat. They "ill fall in with the guard,
arms, at guard mounting.
151. Color sentinels are not placed on the regnlar relie
are their posts numbered. In calling for the corporal
gunr.}, they call: 1/ Corporal of the guard. Color line."
152. Officers or enlisted men IJassing _ the uncased colo
render the prescribed salute. tf tbe colors are on the
the salute wlll be made on crossing the color line or on 1
the colors.

1li3. A sentinel placed over the colors will not p0rmil
to be moved except in the presence of an armed escort.
otherwise ordered by the commanding officer, he will at:
one to touch them but the color bearer.
.
He will not permit any soldier to take arms from the
or to tonch them except by order of an officer or nonc(
sioned officer of the guard.
If any person passing the colors or crossing the col(
faiis to saInte the colors, the sentinel will caution him to
Bnd if the caution be not beeded he will call the corporal'
guard and report the facts,
Section 9. Privates of the Guard.
154, Privates are assigned to reliefs by the .co,)Unander
, guard, "nd to posts usuaUy by the corporal of their relief.
l)
.
ORDERS PORSENTINELS.
229
cha'nge from one relief or-'post to another during the
If of guard duty unless by proPel' tlllthol'itr.
Section 10. Orders for
IPclel's for sentine18 are of hvo General orders
,rOll orders. General or(Iers apply to all sentinels. Spe-
relate to particular posts nnd duties.
:entinels will be required to memorize the follo\vlllg-:
meral orders nre:
take charge of this post and all Government property In
walk my post in (l 'military manner keeping always on
t and observing everything that take. place within sight
mg.
report all violations of orders I am in!i.tntcted to enforce.
repeat all cans from posts more distant from the guard
l3.n my own.
quit my post only when properly relieved. ..
receive, obey, and pass on to the se:ltinel, who reliev;es
orders from the commanding officer, officer of the day,
cers and noncommissioned officers ,of the guard only.
talk to no one except in Hne of duty.
case of :lire or disorder to. give. the alarm.
allow no one to commit tJ.. nuisance on or near my post.
1 any case not covel'ed instructions to call the corporal

a salute all officers, and all colors and st&,ndardsnot
o be especially watchful at night. and during the time
.Uenglng, to challenge all penons on or near my post
allow no one to pass without proDer authority.
nONS RELATING TO GENER.\.L ORDERS Fon SENTINELS.
TO take charge of this post and all Government property
in view.
All persons, of whatever rank in the service, are
to observe respect toward sentinels and members of the
when such are in the performance of their duties.
230 MANU4L OF INTERIOR GUARD DUTY.
15$. A sentinel will at once report to tbe .corporal of tl
every unusual or suspIcious occurrence noted.
159. lIe will arrest suspicious persons prowling al
post or camp at any time, all parties to a disorder 0
on or near his post, and an, except authorized versons,
tempt to enter the camp Ht night, and will, turn oveJ
corporal of the guard all persons arrested. " ,
160. The number, limits. and extent of bis post
variahly constitute part of the special orders of a SeD
post. The ilmits of his post shuu]e] be so defined as to
every place to wllieb be is reqnired to go in the perforn
his duties.
No.2: To walk my post in a military manner, keeping
on the alert and observing everything that takes plae.
sight or hearing.
161. A sentinel Is not reqnlred to halt and change t
tion of his rifle on arriving at the end of his post, nor to
to the rear, march, precisely as prescribed in th" drill
tions, but faces about while walking In the manner m
venient to bim and at any part of his post as may
suited to the proper performance of his dutil'S. He cal
rifle on eitller shoulder, and in wet or severe weathe.
not in n sentry box, may carry it at a secure.
162. Sentinels when In sentry boxes stand at ease.
boxes will be used in wet weather only. or at other tim.
specially authorized by the commanding officer.
163. In very not weather, sentinels may be anthOJ
stund at ease on their posts, provided they can effecth
charge their duties in this position; but tbey will take
tage of this privilege only on the express authority
officer of the rluy or the commander of the guard.
164. A mounted sentinel may dismount occaSionally a
his horse, but ,vill not relax his vigilance.
No.3: To report all violations of orders I am instru
enforce.
165. A sentinel will ordinarily report a vio1riti6il bl
when he Is inspected or relieved, but if the case 6,,' urI
will ('ull the curporal of the guard, and also, if necessa
"rrest the offenoer.
ORDERS FOR SENTINELS.
231
To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the
guardhouse than my own.
To the corporal of the guard for nny purpose other
,lief, fire, or disorder (purs. 167 and 173), a sentinel will
Corporal of the guard, No. (--)," adding the number
rJOst. In no C:lse will any' sentinel "Never mind the
Ll "; nor will the corporal heed suth call if given.
). 5: To quit my post only when properly relieved.
If relief becomes necessary, by reason of sickness or
a will call, H Corporal of the guard, No.
) Relief," giving the Dumbel' of his post.
Whenever a sentinel is to be relieved, he will halt, llnd
lrlUS at :l right sheulder, will face to\vard the relief,
it is 30 pacrs from hin1. lIe wiJl to u port arms
he new sentinel. find in a low tone will trnnsmit to him
special orders relating to l,he post und fillY other infor-
L Which will assist him to better perform his duties.
To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who re-
:!-s me, all orders from the commanding officer, officer of
day, and officers and noncommissioned officers of the
cd only.
During his tour of duty n so14lier is subject to the orders
commanding officer, officP"l' of the day, and oflicers nnd
11ll1issionl?:d officers of the gnard only; Inlt any, OffiCtT is
tent to investigate apparent violations of regulations by
of the guard.
A sentinel will quit his piece on an explicit order from
erilon from wholn he hnvfully receives orders while on
under no circumstances will be yield it to any other per-
Unless necessity therefor exists, no person will require
inel to quit his piece, even to allow it to be inspected.
A &!lntiuel will not divulge the countersign (pars. 209 to
to anyone except the sentinel who relieves him, or to a
l from whom he properly receives orders, on such person's
289 MANUAl OF INTER10lt GUAll.D DUTY.
verbal order gIVen personally. Privates of: the guard \,
use the countersign except in the performance of their
while posted as sentinels.
No.7: To talk to no one except in line ot duty.
172. Wllel1 calling for auy purpose, challenging, or
oommunicntiOn with any person a dismounted sentinel
with a rifle or saber will take the position of port aJ
saber. At night a dismounted selltinel armed with a
takes the position of raised pistol in challenging or I
c.omtllunication. A ltIounted sentinel does not ordinarII)
weapon In the dnytiIIIe when challenging or holdiIi
versation; but If drawn. he holds it at advance rifle, raj
tol, or port saber, according as he is armed with a rifle,
or saber. At night in challenging and holdIng con'll,,)
weapon is drawn and helel as jllst prescribed. depend
whether he Is armed with a rifle, pistol, Or suber.
No.8: In case of 1Ire or daotder to give the aiarm.
-17$. In cnile oJ' tire, n sentinel will call, "Fire, Bo. (-
adding the l1umber of his post; if possible, he will ext!
the flre himself. In cliSe of disorder he will call, "The
No. (--)," adding the nnmber of his post. If the dan
grent, he will in either case discharge his piece betore c
No. 11: salute all officers and all colors and .tallaar,
cased.
174. When not engaged in tbe performance of a spectJlc
the proper execution of which would prevent It, a meml
the guard will salute all oillcers whO pass him. ThlI
at all hours ot the day or night, except In tbll c:
mounted sentinels urruM with II rifle or pistol, Or dlemc
armed with a ptstol, after challenglng. (S ... par.
17$. Sentinels will Illlute as follows: A dl8tnilunted IE
Armed with n rIfle or label'. sll.hltAR by pr .... entlng an:
otherwise artned, he salntes with the rIght halld.
238
mnted sentinel, if armed with a suber und the saber be
by presenting saber; otherwise he salutes in aU
lith the Yight hand.
To sHlute, a dismounted sentinel, with piece at a rIght
or saber at a carry, halts and faces toward the person
,luted when the latter arrives within 30 paces.
limit within '\vhich indlviduaJs unel insignia of rank can
lily recognized is assumed to be about 30 paces, and there
this distance cognizance is tuken of the person or party
lluted.
The salute is rendered at six paces; if the person to be
I does not arrive within that distance, then when he is
A sentinel in a sentry box, armed with a rifle, stands at
on in the doonvay on the approach of 11 person or party
:l to salute, and salutes by presenting arms acqording' to
egoing rules.
:med with n saber, he stands at a carry and salutes as
A mounted on a regular post. halts, faces, and
; in accordance with the foregoing rules. If doing patrol
"e salutes, but does not halt unless spoken to.
Sent1nels in accordance \vith the foregoing rules,
sons and parties entitled to compliments from the guards
224, 227, and 228); officers of the Army, Navy, and
Oorp;;;; military and naval officers of foreign powers;
: of volunteers and militia officers when in uniforUl.
A sentinel salutes aR just prescribed when an officer
on his post; if the officer holds communication with the
the sentinel again salutes when tile offieer leayes him.
ng the hours ,vhen challenging is prescribed, the first
is given aSl. soon as the officer has heen (Iuly recognized
Ivanced. A mounted sentinel armed with a rifle or pistol,
ismounted sentinel armed with a pistol, does not saInte
,hallenging.
stands at advance rifle or raise pistol until the ofllcer
In case of the approach of an armed party of the guard,
nUnel will halt when it is about 30 paces from him,
facing toward the party with his piece at the right sl
If not himself relieved, he will, us the party passes, pia,
self so that the party will pass in front of him; he r
walking his post when the party has reached six paces
him.
183. An officer is entitlcd to the compliments pre,
whether in uniform 'or not.
184 ... \. sentinel in communication with an officer "\1
interrupt the conversation to salute. In the case of seni
officer will salute, whereupon the sentinel ,yill salute.
185. 'Vhen the flag is bein,g Imvered nt retreat, a sent
post and in of the flag 'Yill face the flag, and, at t!
note of the Star Spangled Bunner or to the color will (
a present arms. At the sonmting of the last note he will
wnlking his post.
No. 12: To be especially watchful at night and during tl
for challenging, to challenge all persons on or near n:
and to allow no one to pass without proper authority.
18S. During challenging bonfs, if a sentinel sees any
or party on or DCaI' his post, he will advance rapidly
post toward such person or party and \vhen \vithin at
yards will challenge sharply, "Halt, Who is there t " ]
place himself in the best possible position to receive
necessary, to arrest the person or
187. In case a mounted party be challenged, the sen tit
call, H Halt, Dismount. Who is there H
188. The sentinel will pel'mit only one of any party
proadl him for the purpose of giving the c.ountersign (pu
to 217), or, if no cOIlIltersign be used, of being (luly reeo
When this is done the whole party is advanced, i. e., aUo
pass.
189. In all cases the sentinel must satisfy himself be
reasonable donbt that the parties are what they repre"enl
selves to be ami have a right to pass. If he is not sa
he must cause them to stand and call the corporal of the
So, likewise, if he have no authority to pass ""'.
coun tersigll, or when the party has not the 0
an incorrect one.
sentinel will not permit any person to approach so
to lJre.vent the proper usc of his o,,'n weapon before
ng the person or recehing the countersign.
hen two or more persons npproftch in one party, the
on receiving nn rll1swel' thnt. indicates that SOlne one
lrt;v has the- countersign, will say, HAd-vance one with
tersign," and; if the countersign is given correctly, will
. "Advance (so-and-so)," repNlting the answer to hi:R
. if the answer be "Relief (friend with the
ign, patrol, etc.) ," the sentinel ,,,ill say, "Advance one
countersign"; then "Advance, relief (friends, patrol,
: a IJPrson 11:1 ving the countersign approach alone, he
lced to giYC the countersign. Thus if: the nns\ver be
with the conntersign (or officer of the day, or etc.),"
inel ,vill sa;v, "Advallce, friend (or officer of the day,
with the countersign"; then "Advance, friend (or
: the day, or etc.)."
f Awo or more persons approach n post from
; clirectioTls at the same all such persons are chaI-
n turn and required to halt am1 to remain haltell until
rl.
enior is first advanced, in accordance with the foregoing
f a party is already advanced ana in communication
sentinel, the latter will challenge any other party that
prouch; if the party challenged be senior to the one
on his post, the sentinel wlli mlvance the new party at
(lhe senior may allow him to advance finy or all of tlle
at,ties; othcr\vise thc sentinel \Yilt not udvnnr.e any of
ntil the leaves him. He will then advance the
m]y of remaining parties, and so on.
rhe follo\ving order of rank will govern a sentinel in
eng different persons 01" parties approaching his post:
ncling offtcers, offtcer of the day, officer of the guard,
Il!ltro\s,reliefs, noncommissionec\ offteers of the guard
1 of rank, friends.
A .. sentinel win never allow hhnsclf to be surprised, nor
two parties to advance upon him at the same time.
197. If no countersign be used, the rules for challen,
the same. The rules for advancing parties are modi!
as follows: Instead of suying "Advance (so-and-so) ,
co'untersign," the sentinel will say, "Advance (so-and-s
recognized." Upon recognition lJe will say, "Advance
so)."
19S. Ans"\yers to a sentinel's challenge intended to COl
misle[lfl hirn are prohihitell, but the use of such an au
"Friends with the countersign," is not to be underE
misleading. but as the usual answer made by officers,
etr., when the Durpose of their visit makes it desirable tl
official capacity should not be announced.
SPECIAL ORDERS AT THE post OF THE Gl
199. Sentinels posted at the guard will be required 1
orize the following:
Between reveille and retreat to turn out the guard
persons designated by the commanding officer, for all c
standards not cased, and in time of war for all arme'd
approaching my post, except troops at drill and reliefs
tachments of the guard.
At night. after challenging any 11erson or party, to
no one but call the C01'11oral of the guard, repeating the
to the challenge,
209. After receiving an ans,\yer to his challenge, the
culls, "Corporal of the guard (so and so)," repeating
s\ver to the challenge.
He rloes not jn such cases repeat the number of his r
201. He remains in the posi.tion ill
the corporal has recognizeu or u(}vnnced the person c
challenged, when he resumes ,,,aIking his post, or, if thl
01' party be entitled thereto, he saiutes and, as soon
salute has becn nClUlO\vlerlgerl, resumes walking his post
202. The sentinel at the post of the guard will be not
direction of the commanding officer of the presence in 1
garrison of persons entitled to the compliment; ,PaT.
203. The follO\ving exnmnles illustrate the manner il
the sentinel at tile post or" the guard will turn out til
COUNTERSIGNS AND PAROLES. 1137
Ie approach of persons or parties entitled to the compll-
pars. 224, 227, and 228) I "Turn out the guard, command ..
eer "; H Turn out the guard, governor of a Territory u;
out the guard, nation.al colors"; "Turn out the guard,
party"; etc.
tie approach of the new guard at guard mounting the
1 will call, "Turn 'out the guard, ,armed party."
Shoulrl the person named by the sentinel not desire tbe
formed, he will salute, whereupon the sentinel will call
, mind the guard."
After ba'ling called if Turn out the guard," the sentinel
vel' call" Never mind the guard," on tbe approach of an
party.
Though the guard he already formed he will not fail to
Turn out the guard," as required in his special orders,
that the guard will not be turned out for any person
lis senior is at or corning to the post of the guard.
The sentinels at the post of the guard will warn the
nder of the approach of any armed hody and of the pres-
the Vicinity of nIl suspicious or disorderly persons.
In caSe of fire or 'disorder in sight or hearing, the sen-
t the guardhouse will call the corporal of the guard and
the facts to him.
Section 11. Countersigns and Paroles.
Seventy seventh article Of war.-Any person subject to
'y law wbo mal,es known the parole or countersign to any
not entitled to receive it according to the rules and
ine of war, or gives a parole or counten:lgn different from
hieh he received, shall, if tht' offense be committed:ln
f war, suffer death or such other punishment as a court-
I may direct. (See par. 171.)
The countersign is a word given daily from the principal
mrters of a command to aid guards and sentinels in
'ying,persons who may be authorized to pass at night.
; given h>'sueh ,persons as may be adhorlzed to pass and
sentinels' posts during the night, and to officers, noncom
aedofficers, and sentinels of tlte guard.
211. The parole is a word used 'f" a check on the conn
in' order to obtain more accurate identification of pers(
is impartell' only to those who are entitlell to inspect
and to commanders of gnards.
r:rhe parole or t'onntersign. or both. al"e sent sealed -in tl
of an order to those entitled to them,
212. ",Then the commnndel' of g'u1l.l'd demands the
he ,yill H(hnnce anc1 receive it as the corpornl receives tIl
(See pur. lfm.)
213. As tlJe communications containing the p,Hole nnd CI
sign must: at timeg be distrihlltp{l hy many orderlies, t.he
intrusted to many ofilcers, and the countersign and pa
ninny officers and sentinels, and as hoth the
parole must, for large commandS, be prepared severnl (
advance, there is always danger of their being lost or be
known to persons who WOUld' mnIre improper use of thein
over, a sent'incl is too npt to take it for grantP-f.1 that ony
\vho gives the right countersign is ,,,hat he represents ]
to be; hence for outpost uuty there is greater security 11
ting the l1se of the and parole, or in the
great caution. rrl1e chief re1i::'1nce should be upon personal
nitlon Or identification of all persons claiming authority t
Persons whose sole mea TIS of identification is the ceunl
or concerning whose authority to pass there is a rem
doubt, should not be allowed to pass without the antho
the corporal of the gunrd nfter proper investigation; tl
poral will take to hi.s next superior any perSOll about wI
is not competent to clecide.
214. The countersign is usually the name of a battl
parOle, that of a general or other distinguished person.
215. When they can not be eOllul1uni.:':tited daily" a se
-words for some days in advance may be sent to posts or
ments that arc to use the same parole or
main body.
216. If the countersign be lost. or if a member of the
deserts with it. the commanller on the spot will
other for it and report the case at once to heallQuU)'terS.
217. In addition to the countersign. nse may be made,
concerted slgnrtls, such as strilting the rifte with the h,
FROM GUARDS.
Ig the hands a certain number of times as agreed
Such signall! may be' used only by guards that occupy
d points.
V are used before the conntersign is given and must not be
micat"d to anyone ,not entitled to know the countersIgn.
use is intenclell to prev(lllt.tbQ surprise of a sentinel.
l1C daytime signals sncll as raising a cap or u handl.;:erchief
t'earranged manner may be used by sentinels to communI ..
ith the guarcl ot. with each other.
Section 12. GlCard Patrols.
A. guard lmtrol consists of one OJ:. mGre iuen for
of some special service connected with guard
It the patrol be required to go beyond the chain of sen-
tbe,-Qillcer or J1Oncommissionecl ofIlcer in charge will be
hed witl, the cQnntersign and the outposts and seatlnels
d. ,
If challenged by a sentinel, the patrol is halted by its
lnder, and, the noncommissioned officer accompanying Lt
ces alone and gives the countersign.
Section 13. Watchmen.
Bnlisted men may be detailed as watchmen or as over ..
over prisoners, and as such \'lin receive their orders nod
m their (luties as the commanding ofliccr may direct;
Section 14. Compliments from Guards.
,I
Tbe compliment a guard consi.sts in the guurd turn-
It anel, vresentin.:;:'arms. (See par. GO.) )/0 compliments
e bchveen retreat nnd reveille except as pl'ovideu. in
l'aphs. '361 and. 362, nor \vill any person other than tllOse
( in' paragraph 224 receive the eompliment.
Though a guard does not turn out between retreat aud
,e ns a matter of compliment it may be tUrned out for
tlona,t any time by aperson entitled to inspect it.
retreat, the following persons fire
ld to'the compliment: Tho President; sovereign or chief
trate of a foreigu country and members of a royal family;
President; President and President pro tempore of the
e; American and foreign ambassadors; members of the
Cabinet; . Chief Justice; Speaker of the Honse of Repr.
tives; of Congress officially visiting a militan
governors within their respective States' and Territories
ernors general j Assistant Secretary of ,Var officially visi
military post; aU gellE'ral oflicers of the Army; general
of foreign visiting a post; nav .. 'l-i, marIne, volunteE
militiu officers in t.he- service of lhe LTniteu Stutes nnd holdi
ranI\:. of g(mernl offIcer; Amer.ican or fo;'Ngn envoys or
tel's; accredited to the rnited States;
fuirc8 accn::-dite(l to the Vnited ;;:;t;!tes; consuls geIlr:ral ncer
to the t;llited States; eOllllllunding oinc(>l" of the post 01'
officer of the day.
225. r11he relative rnnk bebveen officers of the ano
is as follo\vs: General 'n,-ith admiral, lieutenant genera
'vice admiral, llIu,ior general with rear admiral, brigadier g
with commodore,1. colonel with captain, lieutenant colonc
commander, major \vith lieutenant commander, captaiIl
lieutenant, first lientenant with lieutenant (junior grade
oml with ensign. (A. It. 12.)
226. SentInels will not be required to memorize parE
224, and, except in the cases of generul otncers of the Arrr
commanding officer and the officer of the day will be advi
each case of the presence in camp or garrison of perso
titled to the compliment.
227. Guards will turn out ::JIlll present when the ll:J
or regimental colors or not cased, are carrle(
by a guard or an armed party. This rule also npplies whl
party carrying the colors is at drill. If the drill is condne
the vicinity of the guardhouse, the gnard \vill be turn(
when tile colors Drst pass, and not thereafter.
228. In case the remains of a deceased 'Vfficer or soldi,
carried past, the guard will turn ont and present arms.
229, In time of war all gU:lrds will turn out under arms
armed parties, except troops at drill and reliefs or detach
of the guard, approach their post. (See par. 53.)
J. The grade of commodore ceased to exiAt as a grade dil > be
Jist of the of the United States OD Mar. 3, 1899. By -se(
of the act of Mar. 3, 1899, the nine junior rear admirals are f
1zed to receive the pay and allowance$ of a brigadier genel'al
Army.
PRISONERS.
The commander of the gnarcl will be -notified of -the
ce in camp or of all persons entitled to the
t except general officers of the Army, the commanding
and the officer of tIle day. Members of the guard will
all persons entitled to the compliment and aU officers in
lital'Y or nav;!} service of foreign powers, officers of the
Navy. :1.wl Corps, officers of volunteers, and ofli-
militia ,,,hen in ulliform.
m:i\!':l{AL RUUGS GUAllD DUTY;
Hi,[lhty-)1jth art-iclc Of tcar.- * * Any person sub-
) military Jaw, except an olticer, who is found drunk on
hall be punishe!l as it court-martial may direct.
All material instructions given to a Juember of the guard
ofTICf:'l' huyjng authorit'y vdll be promptly communicated
commander of the gnard by the officer giving them.
Should the guard be formed. :-loldiers win fall in ranks
arms. At roll cull each man, as his name or number nnd
are cal1ed, will answer "Here," and come to an order
'Vhenever the guard or n relief is dismissed, each mem
t at once required for Cl11ty \'\'i11 place his rifle in the arm
if they be provided, and will not remove it therefrom
11e it in the of some duty.
'Vithont permission frmn the commander .of the guard,
of the main guard! except orderlies, will not leave the
iute vicinity of the guarclhouse. Permission to leave will
granted except in cases of necessity.
of tfle rnaill gnard. except ol'IJerlies, \viU not
their aceoutenllcnts or clothing without permission from
nmander of the guarcl. (Pal'. 613.)
Section 15. Prisoners.
Articles of war 69, 70, 71. 72, and 73 have special ref-
to the confinement of prisoners and should be carefnlly
in mind.
The commander of the guard will place a civilian in con-
nt on an order from higher authority only, unless such
rl is arrested while in the act of committing some crime
MANUAL OF INTERIOR, GUARD DUTY.
within the limits of the. military jurisdiction, in which c.
commancling officer will be immediately notified.
240. Except as provided ill tbe sixty-eighth article 0
or when restraint is necessary, no soldier \vill be confine<"
out the order of an officer, who shall previously inquire ii
offense. (A. R. 930.)
241. An officer ordering a soldier into confinement will
as soon as practicable, a written statement, signed by b
to the commander of the guard, setting forth the nam'
PUllY, and regiment of such soldier, and :1 brief statem
the allegec1 offense. It is a sufficient statement of the ,
to give the number and article of war under which the
is charged.
242. A prisoner, after his first day of confinement, an(
his sentenee has been duly promulgated, is considered as 1
confinement by the commanding officer. After due pro
tioB of his sentence, the prisoner is held in confineml
authority of the OffiCCl' who reviews the pl'oceedings of thE
awarding sentrmce. The commander of the guard will 8j
his report, in the proper place, the name of the officer by
the prisoner was originally confined.
243. Enlisted men against Wh01Il charges have been pre
will be designated as H awaiting trial!!; enlisted men whl
been tried will, prior to tile promulgation of the result, be
nated as H awaiting result of trial"; enlisted men servir
tences ,of confinement not inVolving uishonorable discharg
be designated as U garrison prisoners." Persons sentell'
dis.lnissul or dishonorable discharge a.nd to terms of confir
at military posts or elsewhere will be deSignated as H g
prisoners." (A. R. 928.)
244. The sentences of prisoners wlll be read to them
the order prollluigating the same is received. The officer
guard, or the officer of the day if there be no officer of the
will read them unless the commanding officer shall dIrect
wise.
245. When the date for tile commencement of a term 0
, finelllent imposed by sentence of a conrt-martial is not e:q
fixed by sentence, tile term of confinement begins on the d
the order promulgating it. The sentence is continuous un
term expires, except when the person sentenced is absent
.ont authority. (A. R. 969.)
PRISONERS.
When soldiers awaiting trial or the result of trial, or
gOing sentence commit offenses for which they' are tried, !
cond sentent'e will be executed upon the expiration of the
Prisoners a\vuiting trial by, or undergoing sentence of" a
II court-martial and those confined for serious offenses
kept apart, \vhen pruetlcuble, from those confinefl by sen- I
of an inferior court or for minor offenses. Enlisted men
finement for minor offenses, or trial or the result
11 . for the same, will ordinarily be sent to work nnder
of unarmed overseers instead of armed sentinels and will
uired to atteml drills unless the commanding officer shall
otherwise.
Prisoners, other than general prisoners, will be furnished
ood from their respective companies or from the orgauizn-
o which they may be temporarily attached.
food of prisoners will, when practicable, be sent to their
of confinement, but post commanders may arrange to send
isoners, under proper guard, to theil' messes for meals.
m is no sperial mess for general prisoners, they win
lched for rations to companies.
,sted, men bringing meals for the prisoners will not be
'd to enter the prison room. (See par. 289.)
With the exception of those specially deSignated by the
lnding officer, no prisoners \vill be allowed to leave the
house unless under charge of a sentinel and- passed by an
or noncommissioned of'the guard. The command-
leer may authorize certain garrison prisoners and paroled
II prisoners to leave thegllardllOuse, not under the charge
for the purpose of -working ontside uncler such sur-
Ice and restrictions as he Hiay impose.
Prisoncl's reporting th2mselves skI..: at sick call, or at the
iesignated by the commanding ofTicel', ,vill be sent to the
al under charge of proper guard, with a sick report kept
e purpose. The recommendatjon of the surgeon wBl be
d in the guanl report.
The security of sick prisoners in the hospital devolves
ehe post surgeon, who wU!, if necessary, apply to the post
lllder for a guard.
252. Prisoners will be paraded with the guard only
directed by the commanding officer or the officer of the d ~
253. A prisoner under charge of a sentinel will not saIl
officer.
254. All serviceable clothing which belongs to a prisonel
his. blankets, will accompany him to the post designat
his confinement. and will be fully ltemized on the clothir
sent to that post. The guard in charge of the prisoner (
transfer will be furnished with a duplicate of this list
will be held responsible for the delivery of all articles ite
therein with tile prisoner. At least one serviceable v
blanket will be sent with every such prisoner so transf
(A. R. 939.)
255. Wilen mattresses are not supplied, each prisoner
guardhouse will be allowed a bed sack and 30 pounds of
per month for bedding. So far as practicable ,iron bunk
be furnished to all prisoners in post guardhouses and
rooms. (A. R. 1084.)
256. If the number of prisoners, including general pris
confined at a post .iustifies it, the commanding officer w:
tuil a commissioned officer as "officer in charge of priso
At posts where the average number of prisoners continuo
confinement is less than 12, the detail of an officer in (
of prisoners \vill not be made.
Section 16. Guarding Prisoners.
299. The sentinel at the post of the guard has charge,
prisoners except when they have been turned over to'thE
oner guat'd or overseers. (Pars. 247 and 300 to 304.)
(a) He will allow none to escape.
(b) He wlll allow none to cro his po.t leaving the I
house except when passed by an officer or noncommis
ollieer of the guard.
(c) lie wilI allow no one to communicate with prisoners
ou.t permission from proper authority.
(d) lie will promptly report to the corporal of the guar
suspicio"us noise made by the prisoners.
(e) He will be prepared to tell, whenever asked, how
prisoners are in the guardhouse and how many are out at
or elsewhere.
GUARDING PRISONERS.
245
henever prisoners nl"e brought to his post returning from
, or elsewhere, he will halt them and call the corporal of
notifying him of the number of prisoners returning.
H Corporal of the guard, (so many) p:risoners,u
will not a110\\7 prisoners to pass into the guardhouse until
of the guurd hus responded to the call and ordered
to do so.
practicahle, sDecial guards will be detailed
:he particular duty of guarding \vorking on rties composed
lch prisoners as can not be placed uutler overseers. (Par.
I
l. The prisoner gnard and overseers will be commanded ,by
JOliee officer; if there be no police officer, then hy the officer
1e day.
!. The provost sergeant is 'of the prisoner guard
Dverseers, and as such receives orders from the commanding
and the cOll1mandcr of the prisoner guard only.
I. Details for prisoner' guard are marched to the guard-
e and mounted by being inspected by the commander of
nain guard, who determines ,vllether all of the men are in
er condition to perform their duties and whether their
; aod e(Iuipments are in proper condition, and rejects any
found unfit.
I. When prisoners have been turned over to the prisoner
d or overseers, such guards or overseers nfe responsible
them under their commander, and aU responsibility and
wi of the main guard cease8 until they are retul"ned to the
I guard. (Pal'. 306.)
j, If a priRoner attempts to escape, the sentinel will call
It." If he fails to halt when the sentinel has oDcerepeated
and if there b<:'! no oiher I)Ossible means of preventing
!scape, the sentinel will fire upon him.
le following will mote fully explain the important duties
sentinel in this connection:
cuIar.) ""An. DEPARTMENT,
ADJUTANT GENERAL'S OFFICE,
Washington, November 1, 1887 .
. direction of the Secretary of 'Var, the following is pub-
d for the information of the Army:
lJNITED STATES CIRCUIT EASTERN DISTRICT 011' MICH:tQ.
AUGUST I, 1887.
THlll UNITED STATES V. JAMES CLAR.K.
The circuit court has jurisdiction of tt homicide committed bJ
soldier npon another withIn a military reservation of the United S
It a be committed by a military guard wIthout
in the performullce of his supposed (lnty as a soldier, such boIllk
excusable, unless it was rnnnifcstiv beyond the scope of hiS autt
or was "'nch thut a man of sense and understanding .,
know that it WfiS tllegal.
It Seems that the sergeant of the guard has a rtght to shoot a
buy' convict if there be no other possible means or preventtn,
escape.
T'he common law distinr-tion between felonies and mlsdemea.nor
no application to mll1tary
the fill(Ung of a ('onrt of Inquiry acquitting the prtsoner ,
blame is not a legal bar to a prosecution, it is entitled to weight:
expression of. the of the military court ot the necessity of
a musket to prevent the escape of the deceased.
* *
By order of the Secretary of War:
R. C. Adjutant Gener
The following Is taken from Clrcnlar No.3, of 1883,
Headquarters Department of the Columbia:
V ANCoUVEB BABRAOKB, W. T., April !!lO, 18,
To the ASSISTANT ADJUTANT GENERAL,
Department Of the Oo!umbia.
Sm:
* *
A sentinel is placed as guard over prisoners to prevent
escape, and, for this purpose, he is furnished a musket, witll
munition. To prevent escape Is his first and most impOl
dnty.
* * *
I suppose the law to be this: That a sentinel shall nol
more force or violence to prevent the escape of a prIsoner
is necessary to effect that object. but if the prisoner, :
being ordered to halt, continues his flight the sentinel
maim 01' even kill him, and it Is his duty to do so.
A sentinel who allow. n prisoner to escape without f
upon 'him, and firing to hit him, is, in my jndgment, guill
GUARDING :PRISONERS.
247
;t serious military offense, for which he should and wOUld
,erely punished by a general court-martial.
* *

(Signed) HENRY A. MORI!OW,
Colcmel Twe"tY'/irst Infantry, Commanding Post.
[Tbird indorsement.]
OFFICE JUDGE ADVOCATE,
]\.IILITABY OF THE PACIFIC,
May 11, 1883.
pectfully returned to the assistant ailjutant general, Mili
Division of the Pacific, concnrring fully in the views ex-
,d by Col. )10rrow. I was not aware that such a view
ver been questioned. the period is a time of peace
lot affect the authority and duLy of the sentinel or guard
upon the eReaDing prisoner, if this escape can not other-
be prevented. He should, of course, attempt to stop the
ler before firing by ordering him to halt, and will
{arn him by the vmrds H Halt, or I fife," or words to such
W. WI"THP.O?, ,Judge Advocate.
[Fourth indorsement.]
HEADQUARTERS ThIILITAIW DIVISION OF THE PACIFIC,
klay 11,1883.
pectfully returned to the commanding general, Department
B Colurnbhl, approving the opinion of the commanding
, Twenty-first Infautry, and of the judge advocate of the
JIl, in respect to the duty of and method to be adopted by
e18 in preventing prisoners from escaping.

* * *

command of Maj. Gen. Schofield:
J. C. KELTON,
Assistant Adjutant General.
also Circular No. 53, A, G. 0., December 22, 1900.
On approaching the post of the "entineJ at the guard
a sentinel uf the prisoner guard or an overseer in charge
soners will halt them and call, "No.1, (so many) pris-
t, He will not allow them to the post of the sentinel
,0 directHl by the corporal of the guard.
307. Members of the prisoner guard and overseers place'
pL'isoners for work will receive specific and explicit instru
covering the required work; they will be held strictly r
sible that the prisoners under their charge properly and
factorily perform the deSignated work.
Section 17. Flags.
337. The garrison, post, and storm flags are national
and shall be of bunting. The union of each is as (jeseri
paragraph 216, Army Regulations, and shall be of the j
ing proportions: Width. seven-thirteenths of the hoist '
fia..,:; length, seventy-six one-humlredths of the hoist (,f th
The garrison flag will have 38 feet fly and 20 feet hoi
will be furnishccl only to posts deSignated in orders from t
time from the War Department, and will be hoisted OJ
holidays and important occasions.
'rhe post flag will have 19 feet fly and 10 feet hOist.
be furnished for all garrison posts and will be hoisted in
ant weather.
The storm flag will have 9 feet 6 inches fly and 5 feet
It ''''ill be furnished for all occnpied posts for use in f
nnd windy weather. It will also be furnished to national
tori es. (A. R. 223.)
338. At every military post or station the flag will be 1
nt. the sounding of the first note of the reveille, or of th
note of tlle march, if a march be played before the r,
The flag will be lowered at the sounding of the last note
retrent. and while the fiag is being lowered the band wil
"The Star-Spangled Banner," or. if there be no band p'
the field music ,,"'ill sound H to the color." "'''hen'' to the
is sounded by the field music while the flag is being lower
same respect 'vill be observed as when" The StarSpanglel
nel''' is played by the hand, and in either case officers a
listed men out of ranks will face toward the flag. 81>
attlClntion. and render the prescribed salute at the last r
the musiC. (A. R. 437.)
The lowering of the flag will be so regulated as to be corr
at the last note of "The Star-Spangled Banner" or ..
color."
llEVE1LLE AND RETREAT GUN.
The national flag will he displayed at a seacoast or'lill,o
t the beginning of nnt! during an action in whiCh It fort
e engaged, whether by dilY or by night. (A. n. 437.)
The national flag will always be ilt the time
19.1t salute. (A. R. 397.)
The flag of a military post Win hot be dipped by way
lte or compliment. (A. R. 405.)
On the death of an officer at a military post the flag is
vet! Itt halfstall' and so remains between reveille and
t until the last salvo or volley is firM over the grave;
the remains are not interred at the post until they ilre
therefrom. (A. R. 422.)
During the fllnetal of an enlisted man at a military post
g is displayed at halfstafr. It is hoisted to the top after
Lal volley or gun is fired or atter the remains !lfe taken
he post. The Same honors are paid on the occasion of the
I of a retired enlisted man. (A. R. 423.)
When practicable, a detail consisting of 11 llonconunis-
officer .and two privates of the guard will raise or lower
g. This detail WMrs side arms or if the special equip-
do not Include side .arms then belts only.
noncommissioned oilicer, carrying the flag, forms tlle de-
line. takes his post In the center and matches It to tile
The aag is then seCUrely attached to the halyards >lnd
'hoisted. The halyards Ilre then securely fastened to
,at on the staff alld the detail marChed to the guard
When the flag IJl to be lowered, the halyards are loosened
he sta1f and made perf...,tly free. At retreat the flag is
:l at the I .... t note o.f rell"ellt- 1t Is then neatls fOlded and
lyards mlld0 fast. The deta!! Is then teformed and
>d to the guardhouse, where the flag is turned over to the
nder of the guard.
fiag should ne"er be allowed to touch the ground and
always be hoisted or lowered trom the leeward side ot
fr, the halyards bel1lg hel4 by two JII)I'IIOIlS.
.. &\tid 11. :&enWe otl J.etreAt Gu..
The IMrntr:>.g and ..
gun will be fired by II detacll"
t the iillU'd. CODIIlslln&'. when practicable, of a Corporal
and two privates. The morning gun is firm! at the first n
reveille, or, if marches be played before the reveille, it iE
at the beginning of the first march. The retreat gun is fi'
the last note of retreat.
The corporal marches the deblchment to and from the
which is fired, spongeu out, and secured under his directi
Section 19. Guard Mounting.
347. Guard mounting will be formal or informal as th,
mantling officer may direct. It will be held as prescribed
drill regulations of the arm of the service to which the
belongs. If noue is prescribed, then as for infantry. I
the guard is composed wl10Jly of mounted organizations,
monnting may he held monnted.
348. When infantry a11(l mounted troops dlsmounte
n,nitef] for gnard mounting, all details form as prescrib
infantry.
Section 20. Formal Guard Mounting for Infantry.
349. Formal guard mounting will ordinarily be held 0
posts or c.nmps where n band is present.
350. At the assembly, the men designated for the gua:
in on their company parade grounds as prescribed in
106, 1. D. R. The first sergeant then verifies the detail, II
it, replaces any man unfit to go on guard, turns the leta
to the senior noncommissioned officer, and retires.
takes its place on the parade ground so that the left of it
rank shull be 12 paces to the right of the front rank of the
when the latter is formed.
351. At adjutant's call, the adjutant. dismollnted, aT
sergeant major on his left, marches to the parade gronDc
adjutant halts amI takes post so as to he 12 paces ir
of and facing the center of guard when formed; f
geant major continues on, moves by the left flank and
post facing to the left, 12 paces to the left of the froD
of Uu, band; the hand plays in quick or double time; 1
tails firc marched to the parade ground by the senior n
mlssloned officers; the detail that arrives first Is rn
to the line so that, upon halting, the hreastof the frou
men shall be near to and opposite the left arm of the s(
major; the eOIDlllander of the detail halts his detail, plae.
FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING. 251
tn front of and facing the sergeant major, at a distance
to or a little greater than the front of his detail, and
mnds: 1. Right, 2. DRESS. The detail dres"es up to the
)f the sergeaut major and its commander, the rIght front
man placing his breast against the left arm of the ser
: major; the noncommissioned officers take post two paces
"r of the rear rank of the detail. The detail aligned, the
nder of the detail commands: FRONT, salutes, and then
ts. ,. The detail is' oorrect," or "(So many) sergeants, carR
;, or privates are absent "; the sergeant major returns the
witb the right hand after the report is marie. The COm-
er then passes by the right of the guard and takes post
e line of noncommissioned officers in rear of the right file
, detail.
mid there be more than one detail, it is formed in like
er on the left of the one preceding. The privates, noncom-
med officers, and commander of each detail rlress on those
preceding details in the same rank or line. Each detail
ander closps tbe rear rani, to the right and fills blank
cS far as practicable with the men from his front rank.
,nld the guard from a company not include n noncommis-
i officer, one will be detalled to perform the dnties of" com-
aI' of the detail. In this case the commander of the detail,
reporting to the sergeant major, passes around the right
between tbe gnard and th .. band and retires.
When the last detail has formed, the sergeant major
a side step to the right, draws sword, verifies the detail.
post two paces to the right and two paces to tile front of
uard, facing to the left. canses the guard to countofl'.
etes the left squad, If necessary, as in tile School of thc
my, and if there be more than three squads, divides the
into two platOons, again tn kes post as described above
ommands: 1. Open ranks, 2. MARCH.
:he command march, the rear rank and file closers march
'ard four steps, halt, and dress to the right. 'J'he sergeant
aligns the ranks and file closers and again taking post
lCMbed above, commands: FRONT, moves parallel to the
rank until oppOSite the center, turns to the right, hults
ly"tO the adjutant, salutes and reports: "Sir, the details
r!f'ect," or "Sir, (so many) sergeants. corporals, or privates
,sent"; the adjutant returns the salute, directs the ser-
geant major: Take your post, fl nd then (Jr;l\YS sahel': tbe
geant major faces about, appro;-lches to \vithin hvo paces (]
center of the front rank, to the right, three
beyond the left of tlJe f]'out rnnt:, turns to the left, halts 0
line of the frout rank, faces about, aml brings his sword t
order. 'Vhen the sergeant major has reportetl the (
guard takes post, facing to the front three paces in front (
center of the guard, and draws suber.
The adjutant then cornrn:ll1ds: 1. Officer (or officers) and
commissioned officers .. 2. Front and center, 3. MARCH.
At the eOlllll1unc1 cente!j the ofj-icers carry sabeT'. At the
mand marc!!.. tiw ,-U\Y:lllCCS and pace:'!
the adjutHnt. ri::'IlL'iining at the carry: the
officers ptlSR by the nlong tllp front, and form ill
of rank frotn right to !cH, three paces in rear of t1le c
remaining at l'ight should2r; if there is no officer (
guard the lloncommissione(l otr-kers halt on a line three
from the adjutant; the adjutHnt then assigns the officer
noncommissioned officers according to rank, as follows:
mander of the guard. leader of first platoon, leader of s
platoon, right guide of first platoon. left guide of second pI:
left guide of first platoon, right guide of second platoon
file closers, or, if the guard is not tlivided into platoons:
mander of the guard, right guide, left gnide, uncl file close
The adjntant tlH:,n C'Olllll1allc1s: 1. Officer (or officers) ant
commissioned officers, 2. :3. MARCH.
At the command pos.ts, all, except the officer commandiI
guard, face about. At the command march, they take the
prescribed in the school of the company with open ranks.
adjutant directs: Inspect your guard, sir; ut which the
commanding the gllanl faces about, commands: Prepare f
spection, re-turns saber and inspects the g-uard.
During the inspection the bnwl plays: the adjutant r,
saber, observes the genE'ral condition of the guard, nnd fa'
any mun who is unfit for guarcl duty or does not
creditable appearance. Suhstitutes will report to the
mander of the ;;unrd at the guardhouse.
353. The adjutant, wh,m so <lirecte,l, selects orderlie
color sentinels, as prE'Scribed in paragraphs 110 and 14'
notifies the commander of the guard of his selection.
FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING. 11118
If there be a junior officer of the guard he takes post at
me time as the senior, facing to the front, three paces iIi
)f the center of the first platoon; in going to the front and
he follows and takes position on the left of the senior
assigned as leader of the first platoon; he may be di-
by the commander of the guard to assist in inspeeting the
,
lere be no officer of the guard, the adjutant inspects the
A noncommissioned officer commanuing the gunrd talms
" the right of the right guide when the guard is in line,
kes the post of the officer of the guard \vllen in column
;ing in review.
Tb.e inspection ended, the adjutant faces himself about
paces in front of and facing the center of the guard and
saber; the new officer of the day takes post in front of nnd
the gnard, about thirty paces from the adjutant; the old
of the day takes post three paces to the right of and one
} the rear of the new officer of the day; the officer of the
takes post three paces in front of its center, rlraws saber
1e adjutant, and comes to the order; thereafter he takes
oe relative position as a captain of a company.
adjutant then commands: 1. Parade, 2. REST, 3. SOUNll
nd comes to the order and parade resI.
band, playing, passes in front of the officer of the guard
left of the line and back to its post on the right, when!!
playing.
adjutant then comes to attention, carries saber nnd com-
: 1. Guard, 2. ATTENTION, 3. Close ranks, 4. MARCH.
ranks are opened and closed as in paragraph 715, I. D. R.
adjutant then commands: 1. Present, Z. ARMS, faces to-
:he new officer of the day, salutes, and then reports:
, guard is formed. The new officer of th(- dny, ufter the
It bas reported, returns the salute with the haml and
the adjutant: March the guard in review, sir.
adjutant carries saber, faces about, brings the guard to
lr, and commands: 1. At trail, platoons (or guard) right,
:Cl!, 3., Guard, 4. HALT.
platoons x ~ u t the movement; the band turns to the
nd places Itself 12 paces in front of the first platoon.
,11M MANUAL OF mTERIOR GUARD DUTY.
The adjutant places himself siz paces from the f l ~
,.abreast of the commander of the guard; the sergeant rua
I paces from the left flank of the second platoon.
The adjutaut then cowmands: 1. Pass In review, 2.
WARD, 3. MARCH.
The guard marches in quick time past the officer of tl
according tu the pl'inciples of review, and is brought-1
right at the proper time by the comma llI!cr of the gual
adjutant, commander of the guard, leaders of platoons, st:
major, and drum major salute.
The band, having pussed the officer of tbe day, turns
left of the column, places itself opposite and facing hil
continues to play until the guard leaves the parade ~
. The field music detaches itself from the banel when thE
turns out of the column, an(l, remaining in front of the
commences to play wben the band ceases.
Having passed 12 paces beyond the officer of the d:
adjutant halts; the sergcant major halts abreast of 1
jutant and 1 pace to his left; they then return saber,
and retire; the commander of the guurd then commfll
Platoons, right by 'quads, 2. MARCH, and marches tbe gl
its post.
The officers of the day face toward each other and
the old officer of the day turns over the orders to the ne"
of the day.
,Vliile the band is sounding off, and while the guard is
ing in rcyiew, the officers of the day stand at parade re
arms folded. They take this position when tbe adjutani
to parade rest, resume the attention ,vith him, again t:
parade rest at the first note of the march in review, and
attention as the head of the column approaches.
The new officer of the duy returns the salute of tt
rounder of the guurd and the acljutant, making one salu
the hand.
356, If the guard be not diyided into platoon" the a
comuHlllds: 1. At trail, guard right, 2, M ;\RCH, 3. Gl
JlALT, and it passes in review as -above; the commande]
guarLl is 3 paces in front of its center; the adjutant
himself 6 paces from the left flank and abreast of it
mander of the guard; the sergeant covers tIle adjutant OJ
with the front rank.
RELIEVING THE OLD GUARD,
!.ction 21. Informal guard monnting for Infantry,
Informal guard mounting will be held on the parade
of the organization from which the guard is detailed.
detailed from more than one organization, then at such
s the comrnanding officer may direct.
At assembly, the detail for guard falls in on the company
grountl. The first sergeant verifies the detail, inspects
~ e s s and general appearance, and replaees allY man unfit
:h on guard. He then turns the detail over to thecom-
of the guard and retires.
~ t adjutant's call, the officer of the day talces his place
IS in front of the center of the guard amI commands:
~ r (or officers) and noncommissioned officers) 2. Front
Iter, 3. MARCH; whereupon the officers and noncolllmis-
)fficers take their positions, are assigned and sent to their
, prescribed in fOl'mal guard mounting. (Par. 352.)
,fficer of the day will then inspect tile gnard with espe-
'rence for its fitness for the duty for which it is detailed
I select, as prescribed in paragraphs 140 and 141, the
cy orderlies and color sentinels. The men found unfit
cd will be returned to quarters and will be replaced by
found to be suitable, if available in the company. If
e available in the company tIle fact will be reported to
ltant immediately after guard mounting.
the inspection shall have been completed the officer of
reSumes his position and directs the commander of the
) march the guard to its post.
SecUon 22. Relieving the Old Guard.
~ the new guard approaches the guardhouse, the 'old
\ formed in line, with its field music three paces to its
nd, when the field music at the head of the new guard
oppOSite its left. the commander of the new guard
ds: 1. Eyes, RIGHT; the commander of the old guard
ds: 1. Present, 2. ARMS; commanders of both gnards
The new guard marches in quick time past the old
2116
When the commander of the ne,,, guard is opposite t
music.of the old guard, he commands: the com
o.f the old guard commands: 1. Order. 2. ARMS. as suun
new_guard shall have cleared the ol{l gunrd.
The field music having mnrched three vaees beyonu t
music of the olll guard, chunge8 to the l'ight, n
lowed by the guarci, ehanges direction to the left' when 0
with the oill guard; the chung:es of direction are, "\vitho
mand. The commnntler of the guard halts on tlie line
front rank of the olel allO\ys his guanJ ,to mar
him, and, when its rear approaches, forms it in line to 1
the left guicle till'PG paces to the right of t
music of the 010 guanl, awl on a line \yith tho front ril
then dresses his guard to the left; the riel.-l music of 1
guard is three paces to the right of its front mnk.
361. 'l'he new guard being dl'essecl the t'Ol1lmanc1er
guard. in front of and facing its centel', commands: 1.
2. ARMS, resumes his front, salutes, carries saber, ft.
guard, commands: 1. Order, 2. AR11S.
Should a guar(l be commanded hy a noncol11mlssionBi
he stands on the right or left of the front rank. accordi]
cOIDlnands the old or ue'"\' guard, and exccuh:s the rifle E
362. After the new g-uarrl <ll'l'h"cs at its post and has
the old guard, each gUard is presented by its
officer 0:[ the day; if there be iJut nne ofIkcr of the
or if one officer acts in the capacity of old and new' C
the day; each guard is presented to birn bS' its commnne
363. If other persous entitled to II salute approach, e"
mander of the guard win hring his own guard to attE
not already at aUention. The senior l'oInmander of
guards will then command: "1. Old and new guards, 2.
3. Arms."
The junior ,"vil] salute- at the command H Present
given by the senior. After the salute lias been ackno'
the senior bl'ings both guttrds to thH order.
364. After the salutes ha \'8 been acknowledged by th<
of, the. day, each guard is brought to an order by
mander ; . the commander of the Hew guurd then dir
orderly or orderlies to fall out and report allel causes I
to. be fixed if sO ordered by the commanding officer; I
RELIEVING THE OLD GUAltD.
257'
t then be unfixed during the tour except in l'onte marches
he gllan1 is lictnalJy marching or when specIally
commanding office!'.
c:ommnnclel' of the new guard then fnlls out members of
Lrd for detached pos:.ts, placing them under ehmoge of the
noncommissioncf1 officers, divides the guard into three
fust, second, ancl third, from right to left. and directs
)f the, guard to be m,ule by reliefs. When the guard
; of troops of different arms combined, the men are
d to reJiefs so as to insure a fair division of duty under
by the commanding oillcel".
sentinels and detachments of the 01<1 guard are at
!lieved by members of the new gnard, the l,WO gnarcls
g at e:Jse or at rest 'tyhUe tl)cse c11unges nre belng made.
nmander of the old tl'3llRIl1its to the commander of the
lard all Ills orders, instructions, and con-
the guard anel its duties. The commander of tile new'
hen takes possession of tIle gWlnlhouse ancI verifles the
In charge of the guard.
"f considerable time is required to bring jn that portion
lId guard still on post, the cm:nmancUng officE'l' 111 a y direct
soon as tile orders and property are turned OV81' to tlle
ard the portion of the old guard at the
mal'chcd off and dismissed. In such a case the rcmain-
aollment or detachments of the old guard will be in-
by the commander of the new guard when tJley reach
trdhouse. He will direct the senior noncommissioned
Iresent to march these detachments off and dismiss them
)rescrjbecl manner. ' '.
[n bad ,Yeat1le1'. at night, after long marches, or ,vhen tlle
; very small, the field music may be dispense,] \';ith.

CHAPTER X.
MAP READING AND SKETCHING.
Section 1. Military map reading.
,\Vhen :yon pick UP a map, the- first question is, Whel
north? 'fhis can usually be told by an arrow (se .. fig. 1
which will bc found in one tlIe corners of the map, at
pOints to the true north-the north of the north star.
On some map,:.; no Ul'l'O\V is to be found. The chane
hundred to one U\at the north is at the top of the mllp
on almost all printed llIUpS. But you can only assure
of that f[lct by checking the mvp \Vitll the ground it rej
1"01' instmwe, !f YOU nscGrtain that tlle city of Philnd(
due east of' ihe eity of ColumbUS, then tho Philadelph!:
bus line on the map is a due cast-und-west line, and es1
at once all the other map directions.
Now. the Illap represents the grouud as nearly as 11
represented on a fiat piece of paper. If YOU are stan,
faCing the nortll, your right haull )vill be in the east,
in the west, ane! your back to the south. It is the sam.
lIlap; if you 1001, across it in the direction of the arrow-
toward its north-you!' r.igilt hand wi)] be toward wha"
on the map; your left hand to the west; the south wi
the bottom of the map.
'I'here is another kind of an arrmv that :;.;ometimes ap!
a map. It is like the one in figure 2, page 250. and point
the tnH? north InH to magnetic north. 'vhich is the 1
the Though the nee(lle, and tbere1
arro,v thnt represents it on the mup, does not pOint
Dort1}, t]le deviation is, from a mil itary point of vie\v, sU!
appreciablE' error \vill l':1rely result through the use of t
netic instead' of the true north in the solution of any l
problf'lllS.
258
40'" i,
lIIILITARY MAP READING.
1169
Fig.l.
Fig.2.
Fig.5.
,0 25 0 100 200 INCHES
L I ~ I ~ ~ I ________ t ~ ______
Fig.3.
9ao MAP READING AND SXETCmNG.
Should you be curious to know the exact deviation,
your local surveyor or any civil engineer.
Both arrows may appear on your map. In that cas.
garrl the magnetic arrow unless you are using the 1
connection with a compass.
If n map is being used on the ground, the first thin;
done is to put the Jines of the map parallcl to the real (
of the ground forms. and roads, fences, railroads, etc., t
map shows; for the making of a map 1s no' more than
ing on paper of lines parallel to lind proportional in Ie
real directions and distances on the ground.
For instance, the road. hehveen two places runs due no
south. Then on the map a line representing tha road
parallel to the arrow showing the north and will be
tional in length to the real road. In this way a map ;,
ture, or, better, n hare outline sketch; nnd, as we can ill
n picture. though It be upside down. or crooked on to
so we can use a map that is upside down or not pflralle
real ground forms. But it is easier to out both I
ture and the map if their lines are parallel to what
sent. So in using 3 map on the ground we always pnt tl
parallel to the actna! features they show. This Is eaS)
map has an arrow.
If the map has no arrow, you mnst locate or 1
on the ground, and on tbe map, their representations. r.
the map a line connf-ctlng any two of the features; ph
line parallel to an Imaginary line through the two actl
tures located, and your map will be correctly placed. I
it that you do not reverse on the mllp the positions of I
objects or 'features, or your map will be exactly upeWe (
When the map hfts been turned into the proper posltlo
is to say, "oriented "-the next thing Is to Locnte on t
your position. If you are in the village at Easton an
Is a place on the map labeled Baston, the answer Is at
But If you are out in the country, lIt an unL,b"led poi
looks like anyone of a dozen other similar points, the
more complicated. In this latter casf' you must Iocr
identify, both on the map and on gro1lnd. r
hills, vil1ages, peculiar bends in rivers, forests-any
.0.4
MILITARY MAP READING.
261
s that lutve some easily recognizable peculiarity and that
l Reo frOHl pOSition.
JSC, for instance, you \vere neal' Leavenworth and wanted
"e your exact position, of which yon nre uncertain. You
W 111ap shown' in this manual, and. looking about, you
thlvcst irum where you stand the Unitetl States
v; also, llalfway between the SQutll and the southcust-
outhea:31t a sailor \von1(1 say-the reservoir (rectangle
f "0" in "l\.fissouri"). Having oriented ;your map,
n it a Une from the mup position of the rei::ervoir to\vul'd
lul position on the ground. Similarly draw [l line from
Lp position of penitentiary tmval'tl its actual position.
( the two lines until they intersect. The intersection
lines will Illlll'k the p]:1ee where :iOU JHer-
Il.
method consists merely in drawing on the map lines
!present tile lines of sight to kuO\vn and visible places.
les pass tl1l"ough the position of the places see
e parallel to the actuul lines of sight; therefore they are
,p representations of the lines of sig]'t, and their interscc-
the map position of the eye of the oh8erver.
r this orientation ftnd locution of position, Oile call deduce
he map everything there is to knO\y in l"cgunl
In this respect, study of the grounil itself will show no
han will study of the map.
r U Vlhat direction 1" comes "Dow far?" To answer
ne must understand that the map (listenee between any
,ints shown hears a fixed Rnd definite relation or propor-
the real distance between the two pOints,
instance: We measure on a map and fine! the distance
m two points to be 1 inch. Then "\ve IneaSUl'e the real
ce on the ground and find it to be 10,000 inches; hence
lution between the map distance and the rp;tl 18
0.000, Now, if the map is Dl'Opcl'ly (lnl\Vll, the
relation will bold good for all tli::;tancC3, apd "'e
ny ground distance by multiplying hy' 10,000 th" coree-
,llg map distance.
, relation need not be but may be nnything fromm
n architect might use in making a map or plan of a house
. 4.,",*.$ ..
268
up to onc over a billion and a half, is about the r
tion iJetween map anti real distimces in u pocket-atlas
sentation of the whole world on a 6-inch page. JHap I
call this relation the H scale" of the mno and put it do\v
cornel' in one of three ways.
For the sake of an illustration, say the relation betwee
and ground clistanees is 1 to 100; that is, 1 inch on the
equal to 100 on the ground. The scale may be written:
First. 1 inch equals 100.
Second. m.
As shown by figure 3 (p. 259).
r.rhese expressions mean one and tlip thing. A VUl
of the first methocl on a map of different scale might be:
equals 1 mile. Since a mile contains 63,360 incileR, then tl
distance benveen hvo points shown on the map is
times the map (1istance.
To find the gronnd distance by the third kind of scale, '
on the ellge of a slip of paper, apply the slip llireetly to th
and read off the distance; and So we answer the question,
far? "
After llirection and distance Comes the interpretation
Signs, symbols, find abbreviatlons on the map. Those autl
are given on pages 272 and 273 (a reprint of Appen
Field Service Regulations, 1914) ; but there are a good
other convcr..tional signs in common use. A key to t1wm
lished by the """'ar Department, and is called 4;' Convel
Uniterl States Army," From these you read at or
natural and artitlc!al features of the country shown 01
map. It should be borne in mind that these cODventiona
are not necessarily drawn to scale, us are the distances.
show the position and outline of the features rather t11:
size. This, for the reason that many of the features sh'
drawn to scale, ,vonW be so small that one eould not mak,
out except with a magnifying glass. If the exact dim,
are of any importance, they will be written in figures
map. For instance, bridges.
In addition to the above conventlonal signs, we have c(
to show the elevations, depressions, slope, and shape
. eli.) ;hIW'
MILITARY MAP READING. 268
Abroad, hachuresare much used, but they serve only
atp elevation, aBel. as compared to contours. are of little
Contours rescmble the lines shown in figure 4 (p. 259).
llres are shown In figure 5 (p. 259), and may be found on
ropean map. They simv1y show slopes, awl, when care-
a'Vl1, show steeper s10pes by heavier shading and gentler
'Y the fainter hachul'cs. The crest of the mountain is
:he hachures. (See fig. 5, p. 259.)
,urs.-A certain student, when asked by his instructor to ,'t
space," said: "I have it, sir, in my head, but can not
nto vmnls." r.l'he instructor replied: "I suppose that
:11ose circumstances, :Mr. ---, tlJe definition really
ot help much." And So it is with contours-the definition
t hplp much if you know a contour when you meet it on
For examples of contours, turn to the maD facing
4, und. starting at the United Stutes penitentiary, note
oth, flowing, irregular curved lines markcd 880, 860, 840,
t etc.
nly other lines on the map th"J at all resemble contours
am lines, like "Corra] Creek," but the stream lines are
distinguished from contours by the fact that they cross
tours squarely, while the contours run approximately
to e ~ l l otller. Note the stream line just to the west of
[erritt Hill.
)ntours represent Jines on the ground tllut are horizontal
ose meanderings follow the surface, just as the edgo
)d would follow tile irregularities of tile hills about it.
ines that contonrs stand for are just as level as the
edge of a Irrke, but horizontally they wander back and
just as great a degree.
[ne marked 880, at the penitentiary, passes tllrougll on
ticular piece of ground. e v ~ r y point that is 880 feet above
I. Shoul(] the Missouri River rise in flood to 880 feet. the
iary would be on un island, the edge of vi'hich is marked
180 contour.
urs sllow several things; among them the height of the
they cross. Usually the contour bas labeled on it in
;he height above some starting pOint, called the datum
".il4l,,!e ... ,.!,U
MAP. READING AND SKETCHING.
plane-generally sea level. If, \vith a surveying instrUIDE
put in on n piece of ground a lot of stakes, each one 01
is exactly th(, same height above sea level-that is, run
of levels-then make a map showing the location of the
n Une drawn on the map th,'ough all the stake pasitia
contour and SIl(lWS the position of all points of that Pal
height.
On ally given milp ull contours ure eqlHl11y spaced in a '
direetion. awl the map shows the location of a great nut
points fit cel't[lin fixed levels. If you lmow tlle vertical I
bet,veen bvo ndJacent contours, ;VOU know the verticfI
val fot' all 010 contours {m that luap, for these interva
given map aJ'e nll the same.
,"Vith reference to n point through which no contour
can only r-::ay that the point in question is not higher t1
next up the hill, nor lower than the next one d(
hill. For the purposes of allY problem, It is usual to assu
the gl01.111d blopes evenly betw:een the t\VO adjacent c
anrl that the vertical height of point above the lower
is proIJortionnl to its horizontal distance from the eont
compared to the whole distanee bpt\veen the two
instance, on the map, find the hei;;bt of pOint A. Tl
zontal meas:urements are as sho,\yn on the lIU)p. The
distanee lwt\veell the contours ts 20 feet. A ts about OOe-
of tbe distance between the 800 and the 820 contours.
assume lts lwig-ht to be one-quartRr of 20 feet l5 feet)
than 800 feet. So the height of A Is 805 feet.
The vertical interval is usnally indicated In the cornel
map by the letters- "V. 1." For instanee: V. 1.=20 fee
011 map)"; of very small pieces of ground, the V. I. is
small-perhaps us small as 1 foot; on ITIPpS of large are
small scale it may be very great-even 1.000 feet.
Contours ulSlo show slopes. It has already been explair
from any contour to the next one above it the gruund
fixed number of feet, a('('ordlng to the vertical lnterval
map. Fl'om the srale of distances OD the map the ho
distance between any two ("ontours can be fuund. FOl
ple: On the map the horizontal dt:o;tan('f' D and
yards, or 270 feet. The vertical d!stallce is 20 feet the

MILITARY MAP READING. 165
ap. The slope then is -N\r=ri-:-,-=7!%=4!", in all of
different ways the slope can be expressed.
SlOpe
270
E
a good many contoured maps a figure like this wj!i be ..
in one of the corners:
,hat particular map contours separated by the distance
1
vertical scale show a slope of 1
0
; if separated by the
ce I 2
0
I they show a 2" slope, eic. A slope of 1
se of 1 foot in 57. To use this scale of slopes copy it on
ge of it piece of paper just as you did the scale of dis-
and apply it directly to the map.
will notice that where the contours lie clQsest the slope
'pest; where they are farthest apart the gr6und is most
flat.
as already been set forth how contours sbow height and
in addition to this they show the shape of the grouud. or
[) FORMS. Each sil1g1e contour shows the shape at its par-
, level of the hill or valley it outlines; for instance, the
Iltonr "bout the penitentiary shows that the hill at that
has a shape somewhat like n horse's head. Similqrly,
contour on the map gives us the form of the ground at its
.Ilar level, and knowing these ground forms for many
we can form a fair conception of what the wlwIe surface
( .. dug;;;) ';'0
266 MAP READING AND SKETCHmG.
A round contour like tbe letter 0 outlines a rouml
feature; n long narrow one indicates a long narrow
feature.
Different hills and depressIons have different shapes.
many of t11el11 have one shape at one leyel and another s
unotller level, all of which information \vill be given YOll
contours nn the map.
One i)f the \yuys to see hOlv contours sho"'\v the shupe
gl'OlllHl is to hulf n bucket of water intu n de-r
in the groullu. The water's elIge wi1l be esactly
the depression is approximately round the \yater's edge
he approXiIltately round. The outUne will look SOIDf:-tllj
figure 6.
Dra'v roughly on n piece of paper a figure of the sam I
and you will have a contour showing the shape of the
ground wllPre you 110urerJ your wntet'.
Next, with your heel gouge out on one edge of your IUt
a small rounel bay_ 'l'he 'vater will rush in find the
murk on the soil ,vill 11O\V be shapeu sometbing like figm
Alter your (lrnwing ilccordingly, and the new conto
show tllP IWW ground shave.
Again do Yioleqcc to the face of nature by digging with
a narrow inlet opening out of your miniature ocean, .2
watermark will nmv look like figure 8.
Alter your drawing once more and your contour sho)v:
the new ground form. Drop into your main pond a roUl
and you will have a new like fignrc D, to
your drawing'. This new contonl', of the same level ,y
one sho\ving the limit of the depres.':dol1, 8}}0\1.'3 on the d
the round island.
Drop in a second clod, this time long and narrow, the
mal'k ,vill be like figure 10, and the dr:nving of it, p
placed, will show another island of another shape. Your
ing now ,vin look like figure II.
lt shows u depression approximately ronnd, off ,vhich
round bay and a long narrow buy. There is also n roUlH.'
tion and H. narrow one; fl long, narro,," ridge, jutti
behveen the two bays, and u short, IJroad one across til
of the round bay.

KII.ITARY lrIAP READING.
o
Fig.6.
o
Fig.9.

ng.ID.
"
,
,
,
I
.
Flg.11.
1167

268
Now flood your lnke deeply enough to eover up the f
you have introcluced. The new water line, about as .h,
the dotted line in figure II, shows the oblong Rhape
depression at a higher level; the solid lines show the
farther down; the horizontal distance between the
tOU1'S fit different points S]lO\VS \vhere the bank is ste
l
\vlw.l'f!. tJJP slope
Put to;rethcr tl!('. infot'lll,lnon thut euch of these contour
YOU, [l1H1 ,vou 'wj]l seC! 110W contours show 1"112 shape
grouucl. On the ;you ]l;lve UralYll ;you Jmve intr
all the varieties of ground fOl'lnS there are; therefore :
contour forms.
The contours On nn ordinary map seem much .more (
cate<l, but this is due only to the number of them, their
and Hlllny tnrns bAfOl'e tIle), finally close on themselves. G
may close off the ptper. But trace each one out, and
resolve itself into one of tIle forms ShOlVIl in figure 11.
Just as t11e high.tide line rouwl the continents of Nort
South America runs a long find tortuous but finally
back on it8elf, so will e,ery contour do likewise. And j
truly as berl(l ill that mark turns out uro
Dl'omontory, or in around a bay, will every bend in n c(
stand for n hill or a vulley, pointing to the lowlands if i-
hiU, and to the height jf it marl\: 3 vuHey.
If Ihe map embrflce a whole continent or flU island, a
cont011r8 will be of closed form, as in figure 11, but if j
brace only a p:crt of the coutlnent or Island, some of tll(
tours will be choPVecl off at the edge of the map. and we
the open form of contours, as "\ve \vQuld have if figure l1
j
cut into t'iYO parts.
FI1]}C closed form runy indicate it 11ill or a basin; the
form, a rirlge 01' a T2)]ey; sometimes 8 casual glance doe
indicnte \vhich.
'i.'ake up, first, the contour of the open type. If the mup
II stream running down the inside of the contonr, there
difficulty in saying at OnCe that the ground feature Is a va
for lnstance, y, V, V, and the valley of COl'ral Creek or
Inn}). But if there is no stream 1ine, does tlle contour
stow a ,ullcy a
Uti":':>-'
MILITARY MAP READING.
269
of all. there ts 0. radicaJ difference between the hend of
Jr round the head of a valley and its bend round the nose
1ge.
,are on the map the valleys V Ilnd the ridges R. 'L'he bend
eon tour round th" belld of the va Uey is muel, sharper
bend of the ('ontonr round the nose of the ridge. This
If:'raJ truth. hot only in regard to maps. but also in regard
md forms. Study any piere of Ol)en ground and note
UCll wirler are the ridges than the valleys. Where you
H hog bark" or U uf'vil's backbone," you bnve an
the role, but the are not frequent enough to
over.
,11 whether 3 given point Is on " ridge or in a valley, start
.1e nearest stream shown on tlJe mup and work across the
t the point, keeping in mind thut in n reul
ross the <'ountry you staft from the strellm. go up the hill
top of a ridge. down the other side of the hill to a water-
then up a hill to the toP of a ridge, down again, up
etc. That is all traveling ts-valley, hill. vulley, hill,
etc., though you wunder un tbe rraek 0' doom. And
r mup travels must go-valley, hill. valley, hill-till you
, the llJap or come back to the 'turting point.
map, follow the line, V tndieating v:llley and R
:)T hilL nr8t the rliffHrence in sharpness in the cou-
ends; also h{nv the vallcy ('ontonrs point to the highland
lC ridg-(' contours to the lowlanct.
contonrs go thus:
.,:P';:;")s ..
270 MAP READING AND SKETCHING.
The streams flow down the valleys. and the sharp angle
contour points always up stream. ",ote also how the j1:
of a stream and its tributary usually makes an angle that
down stream.
H'Vhich ,yay does this stream run?"
Watcr flows down hill. If you are in the bed of a s
contours representing higher ground must be to your rig'
to your left. Get the elevations of these contours. Gel
the nearest contour to the bank of the stream will era
stremll and thel'e will be an angle or sharp turn in the c
at this crossing. If the point of the angle or sharp t
to\val'u ;you, you are going downstream; if away from yo
are going upstream.
If the contours are numbered, you have only to look
Humbers to say where the low and where the high place
but to rear! a map with any speed one mnst be quite iod
ent of these numlJers. In ordinary map reading look, f
all, for the stream lines. The streams are the skeleton
which the whole map is hung. Then pick out the hilltol
ridges and you have a body to clothe with all th .. detail
will be revealed by a close and careful study of what th
maker has -recorded.
As to closed contours, they may outline ft depression or
On the m:-1D, "881 " or " 885" might be hills or ponds, as
their shape is concerned. clearly, they nre hills, .1
either side are small streams running awaH from them. I
,vere ponds, the stream lines ,"vould run toward the close
tonI's. The test of .. hill, valley, hill," will ahvays sol'
problem ,vhen are not enough stream lines ShOVi'll to
at once ,vhether a closed con tonI' marks n ponel or
Look in the beginning for the stream lines and valleys, a!
contrast, if for no other reason, the hills uncl ridges a1
loom up.
fro illnstnltc the subject of contours to aid those who
difficulty in re::Hling maps the following is sugg,
1. Secure modeling clay anel build ri mounrl.
2. Use wire and slice this mound horizontally at eqnal \'f
intervals into zones; then insert vertical throug
mound of clay.
SXETCHING. 271
emove the top zone. plape on paper, and draw ontline of
tom edge. rrrim your. paper roughly to the outline drawn.
te ,vhere the holes made by tbe dowels pierce tile paper.
n the uhove \vith Cfl<:h zone of your mound,
lace these papers in proper orcle1' on dowels similarly
to ones in original mound at, sny,' 1 inch vertical inter-
art. A skeleton mound results.
eplace the zones of the day lllounil ancl form the original
lound nlong the side of skeleton mound.
0"" force all the puper clmvn the dowels onto the
1 sheet, and '\ve have a Illap of clay mound 'with contours.
l:.-One-inch Or 2-inch p1anks can be made into any de-
'orm by the use of dowels amI similar follo"\ved.
lie [requently aslt. "What should I see when 1 read a
, and the answer is given, H The ground as it is." 'l'his
true any more than it is true that the \yorcls, H rrhe valley
Meuse," brIng to your mind hi11s, a noble river,
'een fields where cattle graze. cun any picture ever
to your thoug:ht what the Grand Canyon really is. What
d ,vord or painted Dicture can not do, a map will not. A
;ays to you, <. Here stands a hill," "Here is a valley/'
stream runs so," and gives you a good many facts in re-
:0 them. But you do not Iwvc to "sec" anything, any
:hfln you have to vi.sualize Liege in oreler to learll the facts
geography. A map sets forth cold fa('ts in an alphabet all
n, but an easy alphabet, and one that tell,;; with a few
19 lines more thun many tlloHsund 'vorus could tell.
Section 2. Sketching.
romlnissionell offie(ll's and selected pl'lvates should be able
kc simpl(lo rOllte sketches. '1"1118 is particularly useful in
ling, :'IS 1l1ereby fl patrol leader is able to give his
a good idea of the country his patrol has traversed.
les shoulcl be maue on a certain scale, \vhich SllOU]d be
ted on the sketch, such as 3 inches on the sleet,eh equals
on the ground. The north shoUl(l bo indicated on the
L by means of an arrow pointing in that direction. Any
of puper may he used to make the sketch Oll. Tll<> hack
field-messnge blank is ruled and prepared for this pur-
The abbreviations and conventional signs shown on the
ing pages should be used in making ::Iuch simple sketches.
MMi
Field Maps and Sketches.
The following o.bbreviatlons n.nd signs r.re authorir.ed ror usa on field :a
sketches. For more elaborate map work the anthorized convn.tiQnal
gi:ven jn tbemanual of" CQD.ventiona.{ Sign::;, United States Army I
.Abbreviations other thun those given should Dot be used.
A.
Arroyo.
G. S Gl2lnerai mo,s.
Pt.
Point.

Abutment.

Girder.
q.p.
Queenpost r. Arch.
-. M. Gristmill. I
R. RIver.
b.
Brick,
I.
Iron.
R. H. Roundhouse.
B. S. Blacksmith I.
lsland.
R. R. Railroad.
bot. BoHom.
Ie.
Junction.
S. South.
Br,
Brunch.
k.p.
K ing"ped.
.. St..I.
br.
Bridge.
t. lake.
S. II. Schooihouse.
C. Cape.
Lat.
LatHudl3.
S. M. Sal'lmilJ.
cern. Cemetery.
ldg.
landing.
St
Station.
can. Concrete.
L S. S. lif3Sav:ng Station. st. Stone.
cov.
Covered.
l. H. lighthoUSE}
str.
Strea.m.
Cr.
Creek.
tong.
T. G.

d.
Deep.
Mt.
Mount,,-ln.
Tres. j reCl:e.
ctll,
Cllivert.
Mts,
Mountains.
tr. Truss.
D. S. Drug Store.
N.
North.
W.T. Water Tank.
E.
Eac:t. rI. r,
Not fordable.
W,W
Water Wcrk::
E.t. Estllary.
P.
Pier.
W. West,
f.
Fordable.
,Ok.
PJonk.
w.
Wood.
flo fort.
P.O,
Post Office.
wd.
Wid
4 F::J'}' .....
FIELD MAPS AND SKETCHES"
Indicate character. by cbbre'Jiatbr:s

Meaningast:-'eaTn 15 feet wlde.,6 feet decp, aild not -ro:--dabie.
273
Church"
Schoo: house -S.H.

Cultivated LendlCult 1
If Coundary !ines ure fences they am .indicat.ed as s:.Jch,
5,1,. crops or gr'ass, important 9.S coverOj" forate r
..
T \5clated
;,nd fill -

la'
cut 10 feet do,,?

10
fill 10 feet high
..
CHAPTER XI.
MESSAGE BLANKS.
U. S. ARMY FIELD
MESSAGE.
Communicated by
)Juzzcr, Phone. Tele-
graph. 'Wireless. Lan-I
tern, Helio, }'Iag. Cy-
clist, Foot l\-Iessenger.
Mounted l\Iessenger,
Motor Cu.r. Flying Ma-[
chine.
Underscore m!}f!,ns used.

No. I Sent by. I Time. reC'd bY'lTime I(
(These spaces for Signal Operators only.)
[Name of sending detachment.]
From ............................. .
[Location of sending detachment.]
At. .......... .....................
Date .......... Hour ...... No ..
To .................. ............................
" _._. _ .... _. - _ .. _ _ ..... _ ....... , ... _ .......... ___ w ................ ..
Received ................... ................... 0 ...... __ .. _ .... _ .. _ .. _ ...... _
Tho heading uFrom" is filled in \nth the 1},'Zmt 0:[ the detachment send
informntion; as i'Officer"g Patrol, 7th Cav." Messages sent on the same d::;
tho same source to the same pl'lrson am nnmbered consccu1Jvelv. The ad
w.titten briefly, thus: "CommJ.ndmg officer, Outpost, 1st Brigade." In th1
tUfI.'l-the writer's surname only and rank are giycln.
This blank is four and a half by f'ix and three quartcrs-inch.es, indud
margin on the left for binding. The back is ruled in sq-uares, the slde of each
representing 100 yards on a scalo of .3 jnches to one mile. for USE' in makiug
sketches explartatory of The message. It is issued by Uw,signal Corps io bl
forty with duplicating sheets. The regulation envelopo is tbree by fivo al
fourth inches and is pflnted us follows:
UNITED STATES ARMY FIELD MESSAGE.
To .... , ................................. " .. " .... . No .. .
(For signal operatc
When sent ................... ......................... . No .. .
: :: : : ::: : : : :: ::: : :: : : : : :: :: : :: ::: ::: .
When and by whom rec'd ................................... ..
This Envelope wi11 be Returned to Bearer.
274
~ , ' ; ; i >
",".>,
_1_
Scale ZllZQ lMile.
o , '12 !
1000 500' O. 1000 2000Yards.
I! !!
M.D.
f 2! S ! .... ',s-! ". 1t-,e,9",1Oj
1909
'\':1.20fi.
93512-17. (To follow page 273.)
CHAPTER XII.
SIGNALS AND CODES.
tracts from Signal Book, United States Army, 1916.)
General Instructions for Army Sigl1:'Jil1g.
ach sign;]l station \\:i11 its call! of one Qr
ters, as '\VashingtOll, ""\Y !, ; and eacll opel'ator 01' signalhst
so have his signal of one or byo letters, us Jones.
These being once adopted will not be changed without
lthority.
o lessen liability of e!'Tor. numerals which occur In the
,f a message SllOUl<! be $pelletl out.
o receiving a message t.lle mUll nt the tele3cope should call
ch letter as received, and not ,,{uit [or the comp.letion of
1.
record of the date and time of the receipt or 1.1'iUlSrnission
ry messnge must be
he duplicate manllscript of messages recel at, or tIle
11 sent from, a stntion should be carefully filed.
1 receiving' messages nothing should be t:1lwn for granted,
lthing considered as seen until it has bCBn positively nUll
, in view. Do not :lnticipatc what will follo\v froIl1 signals
'Vatch the communicating station until the Jast
; are made, and be very certain that the for the
the messngc has heen g'ivcn.
rerv address must contain at least two words und should
Ident to secure delivery.
11 that tIle 'sender \vl'Hes for trallsmission after the word
is countetl.
{henever than one signature is attached to a IDe.s.-
aunt all initials awl nmnes as a part of the message.
Dictio1l<ll'Y ,vords. initial letters. surnames of persona.
of cities, towns, villages, States, and Territories, or names
Canaclian Provinces will be counteD each ns one word;
iew, ,District of Columbiu, East St. Louis should each

I'
P(IJ.i
278
. AND CODES.
..
be counted as one word. The abbreviation of the no
cities, towns, villages, States, Territoric$, and provinces
counted the snme as if written in full.
11. AbbreViations of weights and meaSures in comm'
figures) decima1 points, bars of division, and in ordinal n
the affixes" st, n "d," " nd," H rd," and " tIll' will each (
as one word. Letters and groups of letters. when such
do not form dictionary words and are not combinations
tlonaTY words, w!lI be counted nt the rate of five let
fraction of five lettRfs to n word, \Vhen such groups
up of combinations of dictionary words, each dictionarl
so used will be counted.
12. The followin.g are e:l:ceptions to pamgraph 55, ,,"
counted as shown:
A. jl! ________________________________ ,, _______ 1 wor(
P. If ________________________________________ 1 word
O. I{_____________________________________ 1 wore
Per cent _____________________________________ lworfj
13. No messa-ge be considered sent until its recei:
been acknowledged by the receiving sta tion.
The International Morse or General Service Code.
1S. The International Morse Code is. the General Serv\c.
"n(l is prescribed for use by the Arm! of the United Stat,
between the Army and the Navy of the United Stutes. I
be used on radio systems, cables "W';ing 1:
recorders, and \vitll the hellogrnph, flash-lantern, and "all
signaling npparatus using the v;rigwag .
A._
ll_ ...
c_ .. _ ..
D_
E.
F ___
G __
IT
1
J .. __ _
K_._
L._ M __

.d.lplwbet.
.,'
N_.
0 __ _
P.--.
Q--.-
R._.
S ...
'1'_
v .. _
v ... _
w. __
x_ _
y-.--
z __
VISUAL SIGNALING II. GENERAL.
877
1. ___ _
2 ... __ _
3 __
4 _
5 .........
Numeral .
Punctuation.
G_ ....
1--.'.
S ___
9 ____
u __ __
)tj:X).. _. __ ...... , ___ __
__ . ___ ... ___ .. _ ........... _ _
.... ___ ... _._-._
..... ___ . ___ ... 0 ___ -:::::::::: :.:-....:.: :-:.:. _
,he .... ___ ............ __ ......... __ ____
n .. ___ .. __ ...................... __ .......... __ ...... _._._
..... . ".- .. " ....... -.--.-- ..... -.. -- .... -........ ---.- ... ---... ..
:uting fr:l{'tiQrJ ..... _ .. ______ .. ______ ... __ ..... __ . __ . _ .... _"
e ::md uHer tho word OJ." ,yol'ds it is to

_ .. __ " __ . ____ ....... _ .. _ .. -_6-
',f brtwccn Indy
tcltl'lJ beloH: :.l irJ.ctioli) ..... __ _
nddrcss 8.nd
ond <lc.d
Visual in General.
Jcthods of visual are diYidcd as follows:
By flag, torch, hand lantel'Il, or tlt'am of searchlight
ut shutter). (General Servke Code.)
By heliograph, finsll lantern, or searchlight (w'ith shut.
(General Se:.'vjce Code.)
By Arrlois. (General Service Co(le).
By hund ilng-s or by shtlonury semaphore. (rl:v .. o-arm
lOre CO{}o.)
By preconcerted ,yUh Coston
Very pistols, muall fll'm:-:, etc.
By flag by lXTm:lnent hoists.
lights, rockets,

follovi'ing conventional Riguuls, with exceptions noted,
used in the first four classes,

{
,

278
SIGNALS AND CODES.
End of word.
End of sentE'nce.
Eud of message.
Signal separating
trom address;
from text; text
nature.
preamble
address
Jrom sig-
lntcrvaJ.
nouhle interval.
Triple interval.
Acknowledgment.
Error.
Negative.
PreparaLory,
AllnuIling.
.Affirwativ(l.
Interrogatory.
Repeat aftr word.
Repeat message.
Send faster.
Send slower.
Cease sending.
Wait it moment.
Exeeute.
Move to your
Move to your left.
lip.
Mov'edown.
Finished (end otwOl'k).
.. a ,
J:C.
L.
l>i
P.
A (word).
Inierrogatory three times.
QHQ
.
QRS
QRT
ix,-li.
"If<
1(L
MU
IdD
Exception
Ardois and sen,up
Douhl(l, in'.:ernd,
prp(wleJ. also L
Jnterl'3.1.
A.
o
Nene.
None.
Visual Signaling: By Flag (WigWag), Torch, Hand Lant
Beam or Searchlight (Without Shutter).
GENERAL SERVICE CODE.
23. For the flag used with the General Set'vice Code tl,e
three motions ana one position., TIle position Is wit
flag held vertieally, the signa!lnml facing db'pctIS tOWUl
sta(loll with which it is d"sl1'e(l to cOTlummlcnte. Th.
motion (the.. (lot) is to the right of t]le sender, and ,vi
brace an arc of 90', starting with the vertiClll anti retl
to it, and will be made in a plane nt rig'ht to til
c.onnecting the two stations. rIlle second l11otjoll (the
is 0. sinlilnf Inotion to the left of the t;:Imler. The thir
ti\>n (front) is downward directly in front of the sende
instantly returned upward to the first position. Front is
to indicate an
.......
.......... lJItt!ll:;;::III. !II .... , 11'1 ,!",",,,-, ..... "'l* .... , ,,-'" ,

SIGNALING WITH HELIOGRAPH. B'l9
The beam of the searchlight, though ordinarily used with
lUtter like the heliograph, may be used for long-distance
iug', \"hen no shutter is suitable or available, in a similar
or to the flag or torch, the first position being a vertical
A movement of the bpam 90 to the right of the sender
tes u dot, a sjmilm' n10vement to tlle left indicates a dash;
is lowered vertically for iront.
tIle torch or hand lanterll, a foot light must be
yed ;, s a poi nt of to the motion. The lantern is
eOHvelllcntly swung out u})\vt11'1l to the ri;;:;ht of the foot-
for " dot, to the left for a dash, and raised vertically
ont
';;.-'1'0 call a station, make the call Jetter until acIoiowl-
,at intervals giving the call or signal of the call1ng station.
call1etLer of a station is nnlmo"\yn. wave flag until acknowl-
In using the. searchligllt ,yithont shut-tel' throw the
in a vertical positian GEd move it through an nrc of 180
0
,
lane at right ang1es to t118 line connecting rhe t"iYO stations
aclalOwlec1gecl. ackno,ylt;(lge n cull. signal "AclnlOwl-
mt" followed by t.he call letter oJ the ucknm;vleclging
1.
ing with Heliograph, Flash Lantern, and Searchlight
(With Shutte,).
fiF.RVWE CODE.
The first position is to turn n steady l1ash on the receiving
]. 'rho signals are 11l<Hln by short nl1cl long flnshes. Use
't flnsh for dot nnd :l long s1:8:1I1y flash for The ele-
of n letter should lJe slightly llwn in sound signals.
To (,}IIJ n station, make its call Jetter until i\elmowledged.
If the call Jetter of u station l)e unknown, signnl A until
Each station 'will then tnrfl on t1. steady flash
,]just. When ac1jnstnlPllt is satisfactory to the called
1, it win (,11t off its flash and tlw calljng station will pro-
dth its Inessage.
If the receiYer sees -thnt the sendcl'ls mirror 01" light needs
:mentl he '''ill turn on tl sl'e(ltly flash until nns\\Terec1 by a
'flush. ""'hen the adjustment is s:ltis
J
e:1ctory the receiver
ut off his flash and the sender \lliU resume his message.
,,",,,
(
,,,:W, 4
'-
THE TWO-ARM aODE.

Ii
A4,
.1:
PREPARATORY
:12
:13

D i 4
ANNULLING

(
Jl:

0
280
___ ........ ... , .. -. T<"
THE TWO-ARM lII1 .

:rIVE
X
.!i

z

?
ACKNOWLEDGE. INT!;RVAL
T wr
*

X
'(
"T
:1

- .11" ..... -" ,
4K
JMtALS\AND CODES.
30. To breal, the gentling station for other pnrposes, ttl
a steady flash. .
SOUND SIGNALS,
56. Sonnd signals made by the \yhistk, fogllOrn. bugle, tn
Dnd drum may well be nsc(1 in ft fog, mist, f,)lling snow,
night. They may be used with the dot and "asl1 cock.
In apDlying the Service Code to
bugle, or trnmpet, one short blast indicates a dot and. on,
blast u dash. lV'lth the drnm, one, tap ind1cates a dot an
taps in rapid succession n Although these signal
be used with a dot and c1aBll code, they sllOUlc1 1m so used iJ
nection 'vitll [l preCOIleertp(! or conventional code.
Signaling by Two-Ann Se1ll::tphol'e.
HAND FLAG S.
43. Signaling by the t \Vo-arm semaphore is the most
methoc1 of sending spelled-out messages. It is, however,
linllle to error if the motions nre slurre-d over or run
in an uttC'mpt to 111[1.1\:2 Both arms should move l'[
and h"llt th8)"(, should be a perceptible pm
the end of l2ac:h lettel' before mnking the movements fo
next letter. Hetpiclity is srcondar
J
T
to accuracy. For alp
see pages
NOTE.----In mul\ing the intcrYa 1 the arc crossed (
ward ill front of the Lwclj' (,iust above tho knees); the d
interval is tIle signnl made t'\\1ce; the
inter'Vul is li cIlOp-C'hop" sig-nal m,lde three times. In call
station it sfluarcly and n::.al;:e its call. If there is no i
diate reply w:n"c the flags DYel' the head to attract attel
muking the (':111 at frt'qnent inien'als. \Vhen the sender [
"end of tlw leceiycl'. if message is underst()o(
tends the \,"aves them until the 81
docs the W11011 bot.h leayc: the]!' sintions. Care mn
taken \yith hand to llOld the staffs so as to form a
longatiol1 of the QnuS.
LETTER
LETTER CODES.
INFANTRY.
lor use with General Service Oo(le or semaphore hand flags.
11 signa1ed from the reM to
the firing line. .. to the rear.

or alphabet.
......... _, Ammunition going f0tlVard.
..............
nnd serna-
>TIly.)
ethods but
and serna-
Charp;o (mandfl.t<rry at all
times).
Ceasn firing.
Douhle time or Hnlsh."
Commen(l(l firing,
Fix ba.yonet::;.
Artillery fire is causing us
lossc'>,
Moye forward.
Halt.
Ne5!;o..ti've.
Left.
\Vhat js the (R. N., etc,)?
Interrogatory.
,Vhat is the N.) etc.)'l'
Interrogatory.
.... Affirmative.
.. _ Rango.
............. _ Right. .
__ ._ .......... Support gomg forward.
, ...... ___ ..... Suspend firing.
> _.1 Target.
CAV_I\.LRY.
Ammunition requIred .
Am about to. charge if no
instructions to the con-
trary.
Cease firing.
Double time or "rush."
Prepo..ring to move forward.
Negati"ve.
Left.
What is the (R .. N., etc.)1
Imctrogtory.
What is the (R. N., etc.)?
Interrogatory.
Affirmative
Range .
Right .
Support needed.
Suspend firing.
Target.
ror usc with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags.
AM-Ammunition going forward (if signaled from the rear to tho
(font).
AnUllUnition required (if signaled from the tront).
eee-Charge (iJ signaled from the rear to the front).
About to cilUJ'ge if no instructions to the contrary (if signaled
from the front).
CF-Ceasefll'L"1g'.
DT-Douhlc time, or hurry.
}1'-Co_nEYl-cnCe 1lrlllg.
FIJ--.'\ 1\,(' is c::tnslng: I()s,o;e.'i.
G-Mo\-e fo"r\\Tlrd :if si;n111edircm the rear to the front).
PrfJr:l-ring to reOYf) fon\'ard (if .signaled from the front)
nnn-Halt.
K-Ne';::1t!nJ.
LT-Left.
M-Bring up the horses (if signaled from front to rcr.r).
Borses going fory-mId (H sj;,nalod from rear to front).
O-Yr'hat is the (R. N., etc.)? lute.rrogaiGry. (Ardois a
only.)
__ -I-'ihllt IS the (R. :;.:r" Interrogatory. (All met
, mclois und semaphore.)

RK-Rnnge.
R'f----night.
ses- Suppurt c:o:nr, fonn_rd (if from the rear to the
Support needed (if signaled frem tna front).
SUF-Sns"\)Cl1d fic-inf!,.
T-Turgct .
FIELD ARTILLEny,
49. For use with Geueral Service Code or semaphore han
-ErTO:-. (A,Ii methods but ardois and [.cmapborc.)
(Ardois 2.ud t>emaphoro only.)

AK'fDr[Lw allllllt11lition from combat train,
A 1,-Dw'.'1 fClllmur.ition frOllL lilnbers.
A),!-AJnmn:lithm p;oing forward.
AMC-At my command.
Al'-Aiming point.
D (Dmuerals)-llattery (so rounds.
DS (nurnerals)-(Such.) Battalion station.
TIL-Battery from the left.
from the right.
Cee-Charge (m:mdatory at ull times). .tUD. about to char
instructed to contrary.
CF---Ccase
cs-- Close station.
target.
j) F-- un.
DT---Do:Jl.>!'.l Rns11. IIurry.
firing:.
FCL cnumeals)-On 1st piece close by (so muchl,
l-'L-Artillery fire is causi:c.g us
LETTER CODES. Q" :.W ... ,' '''''
lUmerals)-OD 1st piece open by (so much).
G-Move forward, Preparing to move forward.
Action suspended.
IX-Exocllte. Go ahead. Transmit.
Report Hring data.
K-Nogativo. No.
KR--Corrector.
L-Preparatory. Attention.
lUmerals)-On 4th piecCl eloS('! by (so much)..
lUIIlerals)-On 4th piece open by (SO much),
LT-Left
Llr-lA1ft {rom ti)o left
Ln.-I,eft frol'll thA right.
lumerals)--;-Less (so much).
down.
ML-Move "to your IAft.
MR-Move to your right.
ltU-Move up.
lumerals)-M(Jvl) (so much).
N-Annu1
1
cancel.
IS the (R. N., etc.)? InterrOgatory. (Ardofs e.nd sema--
pnota only.)
__ .-VTha.t Is the (R. N., Interrogatory. (AU mi!lthods but
ardob and semaphore.)
Yes.
PS-PercussioD. Shrapnel.
QRQ-Send faster.
QRS-Send slower.
QR T-CeaSG sending.
R-Aclrn()wTedgmont. Rece1Ted.
RS-ReglmentaJ sta.tion.
RL-Right from th8lert.
RR-Hight from the right.
RN-Range.
RT-Rigbt.
S-Subtract.
[lumel'&is)-On 211 b"f (so
[lumerals)-On 2d piece open by (so much).
SII-Sbell.
51-Site,
SSS-Support needed.
T-Target.
Q.umeralSj-OD 3d piec(lJ close by {so muchl.
numerals -On 3d open bY' (so much
(-Up,
Y (letter)-Such battery station.
CilAPTEIt XIII.
FIRST AID RULES.
"The bandages and drC8sings ::ontained in the first-ale
have been treated as to destroy any germs thereon.
fore, when dressing a wound, be careful not to touch or
that part of the dressing which is to be applied to the w
A sick or injured person should alway" be made to Ii
on hishaclr, if vractk"ble, as this is tll(, most (:omfoI'la'
tion, nnd all nmscj
be relflxed.

" '\'-
, ,ct.':''''''.
''S
I
P:G . .1.
li'OlJ..ley',-}wt cold. .so don't remove
necessnry to the injury-,
All tight articles (
and equipment
tH1 Ioosened. so as
interfere witb bl'
or the circulation
blood. BeltS, coHo.
the trousers at tho
Lwuld be opened.
Don't let mere on
c['owd about tile I
Tiley prevent him
fresh air a]
",ake hUll nervou
excited.
In clU!e ot Inju:
heart action is gel
weak from shock, a
bod y, therefore,
uny more clothing t
Cut or rip the clothing, but don't puH It. Try to distn
patient as Uttle as possible.
Don't touch H wound with yonr tlngers or a IHludkerch
with anything else but the first-aid dressing. Don't wa,
wound with water, as you may infect It.
286
FIRST AID Rudr. ,,'
't administer stimulants (whisky, brandy, wine, etc.) un- ",
to (10 so by a doctor. 'Vhile in a few cases
Lre of benefit, in a greut many cuses they do positive harm,
lIly \Vllre thel'G has been any bleeding.
heart may be cOLlsi(lel'cd as a pump and the arteries as a
. hose, "\vhkh CUlT:'V the blootl from the heart to every part
bolly. 'rhe veins are the hose which carry the blood buck
FIQ.2.
,heart. Every wound blcccls some, but, unless, a large
, or a lurge vein is cut, nne: bleeding win stop after a
""hile if the patient is l\pt quiet and the firstRaid dress-
bound over the wound so as to make pressure on it.
en a lurgc artery b-:; ('ut the blood gushes out in spurts
tiln tIle. heart beats. In this case it is necessary to stop
)w of blood by pressing upon the hose somewhere batween
.art und the leak.
288
If the Ie:1k is ill the arlll Or hund, apply pressure as
nre 1.
If the leak is in the leg, apply rwessure as in figure 2.
If tl1c leak is in the shoulder 01' uTmpit, apply preSSUrE
figure 3.
The reQson for tllis is tllat at tlw places indicated the a
may be pressed Dgainst a bone more easily than at flUY
places .
... Yi'fiY of nppl,ying pressure (by menns of ft 1
quet) is sl\o\\,l1 in figure 4. Place a pall of tightly roUe'::
or pnpel\ or any suitable
OyC1.' the :1rtery. Tie a br
loosely about the limb an(
insert J'our bayonet, or a
and t\vist up the bandage
the pre"Slue of the pad (
artery stops the leak. Twi
ban!lnge slo,yly and stop a
as the blooel eo" ses to fie
order not to bruise the fl.
muscles unnecessarily.
A tourniquet may caUSE
and s,\velling of the limb,
left en too long may enm
limb to die. Therefore,
every half honl' or so, 10051
bandage vcry carefully. but
bleeding continues pressnre
FIG. 8. 1Je app lied again. In
apply the pressure with the 1
for fiyc or tl:'ll minutes! as this cuts off only the main
and leaves of the smaller arteries <Jnd the" veins f
restore somc of the circulation. ,\Vhcn a tourt1iquet is
fol. it is too Jight and should be carefully looseued a littlE
If the leg or arm is J1l'lll npl'ight. this also helps to J
the bleeding in tIlese parts, because the heart then has to
the blood uphill.
A- broken bon> is caned a fl'nctul'c. danger
case of a fraetare is that the sharp, oitbe
....
FIRST AID RULES. 289
[ek through the flesh Ilnd skin, or tear and bruise the
veins, nnd muscles. If the skin is not broken, :1
not 80 serious, as no call get in. Therefore never
person with a bl'oken bone until the fract-u.re has been
[ that the broken ends of the bone can not move.
FIG. 4-Irnpl'ovised tourniquet.
e leg or arm is broken, straighten the limb gently and it
lry pull npontlte end firmly to get the bones inplaee.
lind the lill'.lIl):i,.l'1l11y to n splint to hold it in place. A
may be stralght, stiff Inaterial-n shingle or
)f board, a 0. tifle, a straight branch of a tree,
Vhutever material yon use must be well padderJ on the
93512-17--J2
.., '"".we
290 FIRST AID RULES.
side next the limb. Be careful never to place the ba
over the fracture, but always above and below. (Fig;
7, 8.)
Many surgeons think that the method of bincUng a bro]
to the weU one, and of binding the arm to the body, is t
plan in the field as being the qnickest and one that ser'
immediate pmpose.
FIG. 5.
'Vith \vounds about the bod5
r
the and
nlust not meddle except to protect them when possible
much handling w'ith the materials of the puc/{et.
SHOCK, HEAT EXHAUSTION.
The symptoms of fainting, shock, and heat c:x:huusti
very similar. The face js pale. the skin cool amI'llloi
pulse is allll generally the patient is unconscious.
the patient quiet. resting on his baek\ "dth his hen
Loosen the clothing, but keep the patient warID, and give
lants (whisky, hot coffee, tea, etc.).
SUl'\STROKE.
In the case of sunstroke the face is flushed, thH skin
and very hot, and the Dulse is full alHl strong. In th
ws.'
FIRST AID RULES.
291
e patient in a cool spot, remove the clothing, and make
lessen the heat in the body by cold applications
FIG. S.
,ad and surface generally. Do not, under any circum.
~ v any stimulants or hot drinks.
FmST AID RULES.
FREEZING AND FROI:)TBI'l'E.
The part frozen, which looks white or lJluish ,,':'ite,
cold, should be very slowly raised in temperatUl"e IlY 01
careful rubbing in a cool place and never near a fire.
lants arc to be given when the patient can s
and fonowed by small amuunts of 1,varIn liquid nouri
The object is to restore the cil'('ulaUon of Ihe blood:
natural warmth graduully and not violently. Cnre and 1
are necessary to do this.
RESUSCITATION OF THE APPARENTLY DROWNEJ
In the instruction of the Army in First Aiel the me
resuscitation of the apparently drowned, as descri
H Schaefer," will be taught instead of the" Sylvester n.
heretofore used. The Sehaefer method of artificial res
is also applicable in cases of electric shock, asphyxiation
and of the failure of respiration following
brain.
Being under water for four of five minutes is general
but an effort to revive the apparently drownecl shonld al
made, unLess it is known that the body has been uncle
for fl very long time. The attempt to revive the patielll
not be dcla:reu for the purpose of removing his clothes
ing him in the arnbula nee. Begin the procedure as soc
is out of the water, on the shore or in the boat. The t
most important thing is to start artificial respiration
delay.
rl'he Schaefer nlPthod is preferred because it can be
out by one person without assistance, and because its pI
is not exhausting to the operator, thus permitting hit]
quit-ed, to continue it for one or t\VO hours. 'Vhen it
tliat a person has been under water for but a few
tinue the artificial respiration for at least one and a
two hours before considerjng the case hopeless. Once
tient has he gun to breathe 'vfitch carefully to see that
not stop again. Should the breathing be very faint, 0]
he stop breathing, assist him again ,vith aI'tificiul reSl
After he starts breathing do not lift him nor permit
stand nntil the breathing has become full and regular,
RESUSCITATION. 293
soon as the patient is removed from the water, turn him
the ground, clasp your hanc1s under his "ivflist, and raise
dy so any water may drain out of the air passages while
ad remains low. (Figure 9.1
SCHAEFEB Io!J!lTl[OD.
The patient Is laid on hi. stomacll. arms extended fro
body beyond his head, face turned to one s1de 80 that the
and nose do not touch the ground. This position cam
tongue to fp 11 forward of its own weight and so preve
21>4
RESUSCITATION-SCHAEFER METHOD. 295
back into the air passages. the head to ODe side
:s the face coming into contnrt with lllud 01" \Yater during
This position nlsD facilitates the rcmoYtll from
mth of foreign lJOiJies, as tobucco, clle\ving gum,
eeth, etc., and favors the expulsion of mucus, blood,
s, serum, or any liquid that may be in the air passages.
operator kneels, stradllies ODe or both of the patient's
and faces his head. Locating the lowest rib, the op
with Ilis thumbs nearly parallel to his fingers, places
lds so that the little finger curls over the twelfth rib.
hands nrc on the pel;-ic bones the object of the work Is
d; hence the bones of the pelyis are first located in order
d them. 'rhe hands must be free from the pelvis and
on the lowest rib. By operating on the bare back it Is
to locate the lower ribs and avoid the pelvis. The
the ends of the ribs the hands are placed without sliding
better. The hands are thus removed from the spine, the
being nearly out of sight.
fingers help some, but the chief pressure is exerted by the
tllenar and hypothenar eminences) of the hands, with the
coming straight from the shoulders. It is a waste of
to bend the arms at the elbows ancl shove in from the
jecause the muscles of the back are stronger than the
:3 of the nrms,
operator's arms are held and his weight is
t from his shoulders by bringing his body and shoulders
d. This \Yeight is gradually increased until at the end
three seconds of vertical pressure upon' the lower ribs
patient the force is felt to be heavy enough to compress
rts; then the weight is suddenly removed. If there is
of not returning the hands to t11e right pOSition again,
Lll remain lightly in place; but it is usually better to reo
:he hands entirely. If the operator is light and the
an overweight adult, he can utilize over 80 per cent of
ght by raising bis knees from the ground and snpporting
, entirely on his toes and the heels of his hands, the latter
y placed on the ends of the floating ribs of the patient.
manner he can \vork as effectively as a heavy man.
,ht feather or n piece of absorbent cotton drawn out
ld heW. near the nose by some one will indicate by its
296 FIItST AID It ULES.
movements whether or not there is a current of air gol
eoming with each forred expiration nIH] spontaneolls inspj
The. natural rate of breathing is 12 to 15 times per I
The rate of operation should not excecr,J this. The lung
be thoroughly emptied by three seconds of pressure, tl
filling takes care of itself. Pre-,s-sure nnd relense of
one complete respiration-occupies about five seconds.
operator is alone, he can be guided in each act by his OWl
l'egular respiration or by eoulltillg or 1)), his waJ-.eh lying
side. If comrades ure present, he cnn be advised by thcI
The duratIOn of the efforts as artificial respiration
ordinarily excec(] lIn hour; indefinite1y longer if tlwre u
evidences of returnifl
c
_' animation, by way of l)1"enthing, SPI
or movements. Then' are liable to he eyidences of life
25 minutes in patients \vho will rccov'er from electric
but where there is doubt the patient sbou1tl be given the
of the doubt. In dl'o\vning, espeCially, recoveries are on
afte.r t1;VO haul'S or more of unconsciousn0ss; lIenee, the S{
method. being easy of operation, lIlore likely to be pel'sb
Aromatic spirit:.; of ammonia may- be poured on a hi]
chi.ef and held continuously within 3 inches of tilt") fal
nose. If other ammonia preparations are used, the." SIH
diluted or farlher away. rrry it on your own nose fi
"Then the operator is a heavy man it is necessary to (
him not to bring for('e too violently upon the as one 0
might be broken.
Do not attempt to give Ilquills of any kind to the I
while unconscIous. Apply warID blankets andhotwater
as soon as they can be obtained.
CHAPTER XIV,
LAWS AND REGULATIONS,
Section 1. General provisions.
Army of tlle United States is governed by certain laws
"The Articles of "\V Hr" anc1 certain regulations called
Regulations.
l
)
follmving list the offenses most often committed
iers, generally through ignorance or carelessness rather
ir.ionsness. Violations of any rule or regulation should
guarded against
l
since they not only subject the
r to punishment, but also bring discredit on his
l1is organization, and on the military profession:
'lling, pa'\vning, or, through neglect. losing or spoiling
)veI'Tllnent property, such as uniforms, blankets, equip-
Lmmunition, etc.
sobGdience of the orders of any officer or noncommis ..
officer.
srespcet to all officer or noncommissioned officer.
)sence ft:.on1 c::unp without leave.
)senee from allY drill, formation, or other duty without
ty.
on duty or off duty, \vhether in camp or when
either with or \vithout leave.
'inging llquor into camp,
)isy or disorderly conduct iu camp or when absent either
. vdthout leave.
ltering on private prove-rty, generally for the of
fruit, etc.
fegligence or carelessness at drill or on other duty, par-
y \vhile on guarcl or as a sentinel over prisoners.
\rearing an unauthorized uniform or ,vearing the unt
1 an improper manner.
[rinating in or around camp.
lai1ing to salute properly.
)isrespect or affront to a sentinel.
"buse or neglect of his horse.
207
298 LAWS AND REGULATIONS.
"The hllSic priIiciPles of the combat tactics of the d
arms are set forth in the Drill Hegulations of those m
units us high llS brigades." (Pre/ace, Fiold Scrv-ice ReguZI
Ii The Drill Regulations are furnished as a guide. Th
vide the principles for training nncI for increasing the pro]
of success in battle. In the interpretation of the regulati
spirit must be sought. Quihbilng oyer the of
indicative of failure to grasp the spiri1." (Paragranh 4, T
D"i/l lle[l1.l1nl'iQns.)
Field Service He;,;ulntions govern all arms of the
United States.
Section 2. The Army of the United States.
The Army of the Unitml States shall consist of the 1
Army, the Volunteer Army, the Otlker,' Reserve Corps,
listed Reserve Corps, the National Guard while in the
of the United States, and such other land forces as a
or may hereafter be authorized by Ian", (Sec. 1, act I
3, 1916.)
Section 3. Rank and precedence of, officers and noncomm:
officers.
The following are the grades of rank of officers ur
commissioned officers:
1. Lieutenant general.
2. Major general.
8. Brigadier general.
4. Colonel.
5. Lieutenant colonel.
6. Major.
7. Captain.
8. First lieuteIlant.
9. Second lieutenant.
10. A viator, Signal Corps.
11. Cadet.
12. (a) Sergeant major, regimental; sergeant major,
grade, Coast Artillery Corps; ( b ) quartermaster st
senior grade, Quartermaster Corps; master hospital
l\ieclical Dellartmcnt; master engineer, .senior grade, a
Engineers; master elet'trician, Coast Artillery Corps;
.,
nA 0]1' OFFICERS, NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS. 899
electrician; band Jeader; (0) hospital sergeant, Medical
;ment; master engineer, junior grade, Corps of Eugineers;
", Coast Artillery Corps.
)rdnance sergeant; quartermaster sergeant, Quartermas.
rps; supply sergeant. regimental.
;ergeant major, squadron and battalion; sergeant major,
grade. Coast Artillery' Corps; supply sergeant, battalion,
of Engineers.
a) First ",,<geant: (11) sergeant, ftrst class, Medical De-
mt; sergeant, first class, Quartermaster Corps; sergeant,
lass. Corps of Engineers; sergeant, first class, Sigual
electrician sergeant, first class, Cmlst Artillery Corps;
,ian sergeant, Artillery Detachment, United' States Mill
cademy; assistant enll'ineer, Ooast Artillery Oorps: (0)
gunner, Ooast Artillery Corps; master gunner, Artillery
Lment, United States Military Academy; band sergeant
;sistant leader, United States Military Academy band;
nt band leader; sergeant bugler; electrician sergeant,
class, Coast Artillery Corps; electrician sergeant, sec ..
ass, Artillery Detachment, United States Military Acad
~ d i o sergeant_
1olor sergeant.
;ergeant; supply sergeant, company; mess sergeant;
sergeant; fireman, Coast Artillery Corps.
Jorporal.
lch grade and subgrade date of commiSSion, appOintment,
rant determines the order of precedence. (Paragraph 9,
Regulations, 1913.)
.on 4. InSignia af offt.cers and noncommissioned ofilcers.
inSignia of rank appearing on the shoulder straps. shoul
IpS, or collar of shirt (when shirt is worn without coat)
ers are as follows:
General: Coat of arms and two stars.
Lieuteljant general: One large star and two smaller ones.
Major general: Two silver star ..
Brigadier general: On .. silver star.
Colonel: One siher spread eall'le.
Ll"ntenant colonel: One IIIlvar leat.
Major: One gold leaf 1

300
LAWS AND REGULATIONS.
Captain: Two silver bars.
!i'irst lieutenant: One silver bar.
The grade of noncommissioned officers is indicated
rons worn on the sleeve.
Section 5. Extracts fram the Articles of War,
(R('latlng to enlh;iteu men.)
CERTAIN ARTICLES TO BE READ AND E"'FLAINED.
ART. 110. Articles 1, 2. and 29, 54 to DB. inclusive. and
109. shull be read and explained to cyery sol(
the time of his enlistment or muster inj or 1vithin Six days
after, and shall be read and explained once every Rix mOl
the soldiers of every garrison, regiment, or company in th
ice of the United States.
DEFINITIONS.
ARTICLE 1, The follmving woros when used in these :J
shall be construed in the sense indicated in this article,
the context shows that a (jjtf81'ent sense is intended, nan
(a) The word " officer II shall be construed to refer to
missioned officer;
(b) '1'he word "soldier" shall be construed as inelu'
noncommissioned Officer, n private, ,or any uther enlisted 1:
(e) The word" company" shall be understood as inelu
troop or battery; and
(d) The word" battalion" shall be understood as Inclu
squadron.
l'ERSONS SUllJECT TO MILITARY LAW.
ART. 2. The following persons arc subject to these articl
shalJ be llnde]'stood as included in the term II. any person
to military la,,,," or "pers;ons subject to military law II wh
used in these articles: l'ro1iided, That nothing contained
act, except as spedfkally in article 21
(c), shall be construed to apply to any person under the'
States naval jurisdiction, unless otherwise specifically pr
by 1a,v:
(a) All officers and soldiers belonging to the Regnlar
. of the United States; all volunteers, from the dates oj
muster or aeeeptanee into the military service of the 1
anil all other p"rsons lawfully called, drafted, or 0

EXTRACTS FROM THE ARTICLES OF WAR. 801
to duty or for traiuing in the said service, from the dates
'8 required by the terms of the call, draft, or order to
le same.
Cadet".
Dtficcrs ana soWiers of the Marine Corps when detached
vice with the armies of the Uniled States by order of the
!nt: Pr01:icled, That' an officer or soldier of the Marine
:vhen so detached may be tl'ied by military court-martinl
offense committ ed agninst the la\vs for the government
naval gervice prior to his detachment, and for an offense
ted against these articles lie may be tried by a naval
mrtiaJ after such cletu.chment ceases.
All retainers to the camp and an persons accompanying
ing with the armies of the United States without the ter-
jurisdiction of the United States, and in time of war all
and persons accompanying or serving with the
of the United States in the field, both within and without
Titol'ia1 jurisdiction of the United States, though not
lse subject to these articles.
All persons under sentence adjudged by courts-martial.
All persons admitted into the Regular Army Soldiers'
at D. O. '
ENLISTMENT WITHOUT DISCHARGE.
29, Any soldier who, without having first received a regu-
;llarge, again enlists in the Army, or in the militia \vhen
service of the United States, or in the Navy or lVlarine
of the United States, or in any forr-1gn army, shall be
I to bave deserted the service of the United States; and,
enlistment is in one of the forces of the United States
above, to have framlulently enliste<1 therein.
FRAUDULENT ENLISTMENT,
54. Any person who slwll procure himself to be enlisted
military service of'the United States by means of willful
['esentation or coneealment as to llis for
lent. and shall receive payor allowances under such enlist-
ihall be puniHhell as u court-martial may direct.
OFFICER MAKING UNLAWFUL ENLISTMENT.
55. Any officer who knO\vingly enlists or musters into the
y service any person whose enlistment or muster in is

30S LAWS AND REGULATIONS.
prohibited by law, regulations, or orders shall be dismiss,
the service or suffer such other punishment as a court-
may direct.
KUSTER ROLLS-FALSE MUSTER.
ART. 56. At every muster of u troop, bat1
company the commanding officer thereof shall give to the
ing officer certificates, signed by himself, stating to
absent officers have been absent uncl the rc::!.sons of their t
And the commanding oilicer of e,"cry troop, battery. or Co
shall give like certificates, stating how long absent non<
sloned officers and private soldiers have been absent,
reasollS of their absence. Such reasons and time of
shall be Inserted in the muster rolls oppOSite the name,
respective absent officers and solUiers, and the certifieD
gether with the muster rolls, shall be transmitted by the
ing officer to the Department of War as speedily as the (
of the place and muster will admit. Any officer who tn,
makes a false muster of mall or animal, or \vho signs or
or allows the signing of any muster roll kno"\ving the
contain false muster or false statement as to the ahs,
pay of an officer or soltlier, or who wrongfully ill<
other consideration on mustering in a regiment, comp
other organization, or on slgning muster rolls, or who kn4
musters as an officer or soldier Q. person who is not suel
or soldier, shall be dismissed from the service and suff,
other punishment as a court-martial may direct.
FALSE RETURliS-oXISBION TO RENDER RETURNS
ART. 57. Every officer commanding a regiment. an inde]
troop, battery, or company, or a garrison shall, in the be
of every month, trausmit, through the proper channels,
War Department an exact return of the same, specify
nnmes of the officers then absent from their posts, w
reasons for and the time of their absence. Every officel
dnty it is to render to the Wllr Department or other s
authority a return of the state of the troops under h
mand, or of the arms, ammunition, clothing, funds. 0:
property thereunto belonging, who knowingly makes fi f:
turn thereof shull be dismissed from the service and Buff
other punishment as a court-martial may direct. AI
who, through neglect or design, omits to render such
I shall be punished as n court-martial may direct.
DESERTION.
, 58. Any person subject to military law who deserts ,or
,ts to dese]t the service of the United States shall, if the
be committed in tilnc of Vral', .suffer death m' sueh other
nnent as u court-martial may direct, und, if the offense be
tted at any other time, any punishment, excepting death,
court-martial may direct.
ADVISING OR AIDING ANOTHER TO DESERT.
59. Any person subject to military Ia \v who advises or
lcles or knowingly asslgts another to desert the service of
aited States shall. if the offense be committed in time of
aItrer death, or such other punishment as a court-martial
irect! and if the offense be committed at any oth{'l' time any
lment, excepting death, that a court-martial may direct.
ENTERTAINING A DESERTER .
. 60. Any officer who, after having discovered that a soldier
command is a deserter from the military or naval service
m the l\Iarine Corps, retains sneh deserter in his command
It informing superior authority or the commau(ler of the
zation to 'ivhich the deserter belongs, shall be punished as
t-martial may direct.
ABSENCE WITHOUT LEAVE.
61. Any person subject to military law who fails to repair
fixed time to the properly appointed place of duty, -or
'rom the same without proper leave, or absents himself
his command, guard, quarters, statioH. or cump without
. leave, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct.
SPECT TOWARD THE PRESIDENT. VICE PRESIDENT, CON.
OS, SECRETARY OF WAR, GOVERNORS, LEGISLATURES.
62. Any officer who uses contemptuous or disrespeetful
against tho PreSident, Vice President, the Congress of
nired States, the Secretary of War, or the governor or
-'
3M
legislature of any State, Territory, 01' other possession
United States in which he is qurtrtel'ec] shall be dismisse(
the service or suffer such other pnnishment as a CQUrt-ll
may direct. Any otl1er person subject to military 1mv '\'
offends shall be punished as a court-martial may direct.
DISRESPECT TOWARD SUPERIOR OFFICERS.
ART. 63. Any person suhject to military law wlw behave
self with disrespect to,\yurd his superior officer shull bE' pu
as a court-martial may direct.
OR WILLFULLY D!SOBEYING SUPERIOR OF]
ART. 64. Any person subject to military Jaw who, on an
tense whatsoever, strikes his superior officer or draws 0
up nny weapon or offers any violence against him, being
eXecution of hls office, or ,villfully disobeys any lawful
Inand of his superior oJl:ieer, sball suffer death or such
punishment as a court-martial 11lUY direct.
INSUBORDINATE CONDUCT TOWARD NONCOMlIUSSIO]
OFFICER.
ART. 65. Any soldier who strikes or assaults, or who att
or threatens to strike or [("s,mlt, or willfully disobeys the)
order of a noncommissioned officer ivhile in the execution
office, or uses threatening or insulting language, or beha'
un insubordinate or disrespectful manner toward a noneo
sioned officer ,,,hile in the execution of his office, shall b(
ished as a court .. rnartial may direct.
MUTINY OR SEDITION.
ART. 66. Any persou subject to military law who attem
create or who begins, excites, causes, or joins in any muti
sedition in any company, party, post, camp, detachment. !
or other command shall. suffer death or such other punis)
- < ~ - ; "i
EXTRACTS FROM THE ARTICLES OF WAR.
FAILURE TO SUPPlIESS MUTINY 011 SEDITION.
67. Any officer or soldier who, being present at any
~ r or sedition, does not llse his utmost endeavor to suppress
LU0, or kno,\ving or having reason to believe that a rplltiny
lition is to take place, does not 'without delay give In
tion thereof to his commanding officer shall suffer death
h other punlshment as a court-martial may direct.
QUARRELS, FRAYS, DISORDERS.
68. All officers and noncommissionecl officers have power
t and quell ull quarrels, frays, and disorders mllong per.;
ubject to military law and to order officers who take paz:t.
same into arrest, and other persons subject to military .
'ho take part in the same in to arrest or confinement, as
lstances may require, until their proper superior officer
uaintE'd therewith. And ,\vhosoever, being so ordered, r e ~
to obey such officer or Iloncommissioned officer or draws 'u
'n upon or othel'Wlse threatpns or does vioienec to him shall
lished as a court-martial may direct.
ARREST OR CON,FINEI\(ENT OF ACCUSED PERSONS.
,69. An officer charged \vith crime or with a se.rious offense
these articles shall be placed in arrest by the command-
licer, and in exceptional eases an officer, so cllarged may
lced in confinement by the same authority. A soldier
3d with crime or ,vitll a serious offense under these articles
be placecl in confipement, find when charged with a minor
e he may b" placed in arrest. Any other person subject
Litary law c.iulrgecl with crime or with a serious offense
these articles slwll bo plaeed in confinement or in arrest,
cumstances may require; and when charged with a minor
e such person may be placed in arrest. Any person placed
,est under the provisions of this article shall thereby be
cted to his barracks, quarters, or tent, unless such limits
be enlarged by proper authority. Any officer who breaks
,rest or who escapes from confinement before he is set at
~ by proper authority shall be dismissed from the service
--..-'
Or suffer such other puni,lunent as a court-martial may I
and nny other person subject to rnilitary luw who escape
confinement or ,yho breaks his arrest before he is set at
h.Y proper authority shall be punishe,l as a
direct.
INVESTIGATION OF AND ACTION Ul'ON CHARGES.
ART. 70. No person put in "rrest sllall be continued i
finement more than eight days, or until such time as a
martial can be assembled. When any person is put in
for the purpose of trial, except at remote mllitary po
stations, the officer by whose order he is arrested shall Se
a COpy of the cbarges on which he is to be tried is servec
him within eight days after his arrest, and that he is bl
to trial within 10 days thereafter, unless the necessities
service prevent such trial; and then he shan be brought t<
within 30 days after the expiration of said 10 days. If'
of the charges be not served, or the arrested person t
brought to trial, as herein required, the arrest shall ceaSe,
persons released from arrest, under the provisions of tlJ
tiele, may be tried, whenever the exigencies of the service
permit, within 12 months after such release from arrest
viaed, That in time of peace no person shall, against his
tion, be brought to trial before a genel'lll court-martial ,
a period of five days subsequent to the service of charges
him.
REFUSAL TO RECEIVE AND KEEl' l'RISONERS.
ART. 71. No provost marshal or commander of a guard
refuse to receive or keep any prisoner committed to his e
by an officer belonging to the forces of the United States
vided the officer committing shall, at the time, deliv(
account in writing, signed by himself, of the crime or 0:
charged against the prisoner. ..liny officer or soldier so J
ing shull be punished as a court-martial may direct.
llEl'ORT OF 1'1USONERS RECEIVED.
AliT. 72. Every commander of a guard to whose ehal
prisoner is committed shall, within 24 hours after such
"."""""""' ...... ", 'W;
EXTRACTS FROM THE ARTICLES OF WAR. ,,30'1
lent, or as soon as he is relieved from bls guard. report in
ng to the commanding officer the name of such prIsoner,
l:tiense charged against him, and the name of the officer
litting him; and if he fails to make such report he shall
mished as a court-martial may direct.
PRISONER WITHOUT PROPER AUTHORITY.
T. 73. Any person subject to military Jaw who
l
without
authority, releases any prisoner duly committed to his
or ,"vho, through neglect or design, suffers any prisoner
)mmitted to escape, shall be punished as a court-martial
direct.
DELIVERY OF OFFENDERS TO CIVIL AUTHORITIES.
T. 74. \Vhen any person subject to military law, except
who is held by the military authorities to' answer, or who
vaiting trial or result of trial, or ,yho is undergoing sen-
! for a crime or offense punishable under these articles, is
sed of a crime or offense committed within the geographical
S of the States of the Union and the District of Colnmbia.
punishable by the laws of the land, the commanding officer
:;J,uired, except in time of war, upon application duly Illude,
:e his utmost endeavor to deliver over such accused person
Le civil authorities, or to aid the officers of in ap-
:mdlng and securing him, in order that he may be brought
'tal. Any commanding officer who upon such apPUcfltion
les or willfully neglects, except in time of war, to deliver
such accused person to the ciyil authorities or to aid the
r8 of justice in apprehending :lnd seturing him shull be
issed from the service or suffer such other punishment as a
:-martial may direct.
1en unller the provlsions of this article delivery is mnde to
authorities of an offender undergoing sentenf'C of a
:-martial, such delivery, if followed by conviction. shall be
to Interrupt the execution of the sentence of the court-mar-
and the offend.er shal1 be returned to military custody, after
19 answered tn, the civil authorities for his offense, for the
.letion of the said court-martial sentence.
MISBEHAVIOR BEFORE :l:RE ENEMY.
ART. 75. Any officer or soldier who misbehaves himself 1
the enemy, runs away, or shamefully abandons or clelive
any fort, post, camp, guard, or other command "\vhich it
duty to defend, or speaks ,vords inducing others to do th
or casts away his arms or ammunit.ion, or quits his pc
colors to plunder or 'pillage, or by any means \vhatsoever
sians false alarms in camp, garrison, or quurters, shrrll I
de'ath or such other punishment as a court-martial may (1
SUBORDmA:l:ES COMPELLING COMMANDER :1:0 SURREl
ART. 76. If any comrnam]er of ~ y garrison, fort, post, (
guard, or other command is compelled by tL-e officers or so'
under his command to give it up to the enemy or to uband
the officers or soldiers so offending shall suffer death or
IMPROPER USE OF COUN:l:ERSIGN.
ART. 77. Any person subject to military la\v \v110 makes 1.::
the parole or eountersign to any person not entitled to rece
according to the rules and discipline of war, or gives a p
or countersign different from that which he received. sIn
the offense be committed in time of waf, suffer death or
FORCING A SAFEGUARD.
ART. 78. Any person Hubject to military law who. in tir
war, forces a safeguard shall suffer rJeath 0[" such other pu
ment as a court-martial may direct.
CAP:l:URED PROPERTY :1:0 BE SECURED FOR PUBLIC SER'
ART .. 79. All public property taken from the euemy i.
property of the United States ancl shall be secured fOI
serviee of the United States, and any person subject to
tary law who neglects to secure such property or is guil!
wrongful appropriation thereof sh!lll be pdnished as a c
martial may direct.
EXTRACTS FROM THE ARTICLES'OF WAlt. 809
EALING IN CAPTURED OR ABANDONED PROPERTY
. 80. Any person subject to military law who buys. sells.
:, or in any way neals in or disposes of captured or
property, whereby he shall receive or expect any profit.
or ;ulvantage to himself or to any other person directly
irectly COllllPctp
l
l with himself, or \vho fails \vhenever such
'ty eomes into llis possessioll or cnstody or within his
) give llotice thereof to the propp-I" authority and to turn
nch property 10 the propel' authority \vithant- delay, shall,
tviction thereof, be punished by ii-ne or impI'isonment, or
2h other pUIlishtntlnt as a court-martial, military commis-
)1' other military tribunal may nclju(lge, or by any or all
d penalties.
,VING, CORRESFONDING WITH. OR AIDING THE ENEMY
. 81. \Vhosoevcr relieves; the enemy with arms, fllllmuni-
money, or other thing, or kno\vingly harbors or
ts or holds correspondence ,vlth or gives intelligence to
lemy, eitller directly or illc1irectly, shall suffer death, or
Jther pUHislllnent as a court-martial or military commis-
lay eli recto
SPIES.
'. 82. Any person who in time of war sha1l be found lurk
acting as u spy ill or about any of the fortifications,
quarters, or encampments of any of the nrmies of the
:l States, or e188\\'here, shall be tried by a general court-
11 or by fl military commls.:-.ion, ane1 shull, on .conviction
.f, suffer death.
PROFERTY-WILLFUL OR NEGLIGENT LOSS.
DAMAGE. OR WRONGFUL DISFOSITION OF.
'. 83. Any person subject to military law who willfully or
gh neglect suffers to be lost, spoi)p(]j damaged, or \vrong
disposed of any military property helonging to the United
shall make good the loss or clnmnge and suffer snch pun-
nt as a court-martinI may direct.
818 :LA 'WS AD ltEG1I'LA.TIOn.
WASTE OR UNLAWFUL DISPOSITION OJ' MILITARY PRO!
ISSUED TO SOLl)lEllS.
ART. 84. Any soldier who sells or disposes
willfully or through neglect injures or loses any horse,
ammunition, accouterments, equipIilents, clothing, or
property issued for use in the military service shall be pm
Dltl1Jn: Oll' DUTY.
ART. 85. Any ot!lcer who Is found drunk on duty shall,
offense be committed In time of war, be dismissed frOJ
service and suffer such other punishment as a court-m
may direct; and if the offense be committed in time of pe,
shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. Any I
subject to military except an officer, who is found dru
duty shall be pun1shea as a court-martial may direct.
mSBERA VIOlt OJ' SENTINEL.
ART. 86. Any sent1nel who Is found drunk or sleeping
hIs post, or who leaves it before he Is rel:U1arly relleved,
if the offense be committed in time of war, suffer death or
other punishment as a court-martial may direct; and i
offense be committed III time of peace he shall sulrer anJ
ishment, except death, that a court-martial may direct.
PERSONAL lNTElIEST IN SALE Oli' nOVISIONS,
ART. 87. Any officer commanding In any garrison, fort, bar
camp, or other place where troops of the United States m
serving who, for his private advantage, lays any duty or
sition upon or Is interested in the sale of any victuals or
necessaries of life brought Into such garrison, fort, barl
camp, or other place for the use of the troops, Shall be dlsn
from the service Bnd sulrer such other punishment BS a ,
martial mar direct.
INTIXIDA.TION OJ' PEltSONI :BXINGING PltOTIBIONII
ART. 88. Any person subject to military law who
timldates, does violence to, or wro".tuliT interferes wlt1
"!!1!1'1
EXTRACTS FROM.THE ARTICLES OF WAR. Ill;!
n bringing provisions, supplies, or other necessari.es:to .. the
, garrison, or quarters of the forces of the United States
sulIer such punishment as a may direct.
ORDER TO BE MAINTAINED AND WRONGS REDRESSED.
r. 89. All persons subject to military law are to behave
3elves orderly in quarters, garrison, camp, and on the
ll; and any person subject to ll1ilitary law who commits
'taste or spoil, or \villfully (lestroys any prol1erty \vhatso-
(unless by ol'ller of. his commanding officer)! 01' commits
dnd of depredation or riot, shall be punish'ed as a court-
al may direct. Any otlicer who, UDon com-
t made to him, refuses or omits to see reparation Illude to
arty injured, in so far as the olfender's pay shall gO toward
reparation, as provided for in article 105, shall be dis-
from the service or otherwise punished as a court-
.a! may direct.
I'ROVOKING SI'EEOHES OR GESTURES.
r. 90. No person subject to military law shall usc any re-
or provoking speeches or gestures to another; and any
II subject to military law who offends against the 1)1'0-
IS of this article shall be punished as a court-martial may
t.
DUELING.
r. 91. Any person subject to military law who fights or
otes or is concerned in or connives at fighting a duel, or
huving knowledge of n challenge sent or about to be sent
to report the fact promptly to the proper authority, shall,
officer, be dismissed from the service or suffer such other
Ihment as a court-martial may direct; and if any other
III subject to military law shall suffer such punishment as
rt-martlal may direct.
:MURDER-RAI'E.
T .. 92. Any person subject to military law who commits
leI' or rape shalf suffer death or imprisonment for life, as
819
a court-martial may direct; but no person shall be tri
for murder or rape committed within th.
graphical limits of the States of the Union and the D
of Oolumbia in time of peace.
VARIOUS CRIMES.
ART. 93. Any person subject to military law who co'
1l13IlSlaughter, mayhem, arson, burglary, robbery,
bezzlement, perjury, assault with intent to commit any f
or assault with intent to do boclily harm, shall be punishe4
court-martial lllay direct.
FRAUDS AGAINST THE GOVERNMENT.
ART. 94. Any person suhject to military Imv who mal
causes to be made any claim against the United States 0
officer thereof, knowing such claim to be false or fraudulel
Who presents or causes to bctlpresented to any petsoh
civil or military service thereof, for approval or paymen'
claim against the United States or any officer thereof, kn
such claim to be false or fraudulent; or
"\\-rho enters into any agreement or conspiracy to defrat
United States by obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the
ance or payment of any false or fraudulent claim; or
'VJlO, for Hie purpose of obtaining, or others to 0
the approval, ullo\vance, or payment of any claim again!
"Cnitecl States or against any officer thereof, mal;:es or 11S
procnres! or advises the making or use of, any YHiting or
puper, kno""ing the same to contain any false or frau{
Htatements; or
vVha, for thc purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to 0
the approval, ullm\rance, or payment of any claim agalm
United States or any officer thereof, makes, or procurl
advises the making of, any oath to any fact or to any writ
other paper, knmving such oath to he f,iIse; or
\Vho, for the purpose of obtaining, or niding others to 0
the &approval, allO\'\':tIlce, or payment of any claim agaim
United States or any officer thereof, forges or counterfei
EXTRACTS FROM THE ARTICLES OF WAR.
,es, or advises the forging or counterfeiting of any signa- i
Ipon any \vriting or other paper, or uses, or protures, or '
'S the use of any such si::o;nature, knowing the same to be
I or counterfeited; or
), haying charge, possession, eustocly, or control of any
, or other property of the t;nited States, furnished or
eel for the military sel'\7icc thereof, }rDonringly oelivers, or
; to be delivered, to any per:$oll having authority to-receive
nue, any arnount thereof less than that for which he
es 11 eertificate or receipt; or
), being authorized to maIm or deliver any paper
the receipt of llny property of the United Stutes furnished
for the militarJ
r
service thereof, makes or delivers
r person suell writing, without having full knowledge of
uth of the statements therein contained and willi intent
raud the Unitetl Slates; or
) steals, embe7.z1es, knowingly and "\villfully
lpplies to hls own use or benefit, or wrongfully or know ..
sells or disposes of ilny ordnance, anus, equipmcnts, am-
ion, cloth inK, subsistence store2i, money, or other property,
United States furnished or intended for the military
, thereof: or
) Jcnmvingly purchases or receives in pledge ,for any
,n or indebtcdnegs from HH:t( soldier. officer, or other per-
]0 is a purt of or cmp]oye(l in said forces or service, any
Ice, eqUipment, ammunition, elothing, subsistence
or other property of the "Cnite{l Stutes, such soldier,
or other person not having lawful right to sell or piedge
l11e;
lI, on conviction thereof, be punished by fino or impris-
t, or by such other punishment us a court-martial may
or by any or all of sairl penalties. And if any person,
guilty of llny of tlle offenses aforesaW while in the 1ll1Ji-
of the United StateR
l
receives his discharge or is
sed from the service, lw shall continne to be liable to be
ld and held for trial and s,mtence by a court-murtiai in
me m,ln!:-Br and to the sallle extent as if he had not re-
such discharge nor been dismissed_
CONDUOT UNBEOOMING AN OFFICER AND
ART. 95. Any officer or cadet who is convicted of co
unbecoming an officer and a gentlenlan shall be dismissed
the service.
GENERAL ARTICLE.
A:a;r. 96. Though not mentioned in these articles, all disc
and negJeets to the prejddice of good order and militar
('Ipline, all condnct of a nature to bring discredit upo
military service, and all crimes or offenses not capital of .
persons subject to military law may be guilty shall be
cognizance of by a general or special or summary eourt-ml
acrording to the nature and degree of the offense, and pur
at the discretion of such court.
DISCIPLINARY FOWERS OF OOMMANDING OFFICERS,
ART. 104. Under such regulations as the President rna:
scribe, and which he m(lY from time to time revoke, alt
add to, the commanding officer of any detachment, con
or higher command may. for minor- offenses not denied t
nccl1sed, 1mpose disciplinary punishments upon persons 1
command without the intervention of u court-martial, unle
accused (1t:'1l1unds trial by court-mm'tiaL
The discilllin<ll"Y punishments authorized by thisartich
include admonition, reprimand, withholding of privileges!
fatigue, eml restrictioll to certain specified limits, but
not induc]e forfeiture of pay 01' confinement under guar
person pnnishe{l undrr of this article who deen
punishment unjust Qr (HsproporUonate to tlle offense
through the proper channel, appeal to the llext superic
tllority. but may in the meantime be required to underg
punishment u(1judged. The commanding office.r who impos'
punishment, his successor in and superior aut]
shall have power to or relnit any unexecuted p4
of the punishment. The imposition anLl eniorcemebt 0
dplinury punishment under authority of thIS article.for.ar
or <Jmii:;sion shall not be a bur to trial by
crime or offense grovdng out of the same act 01' omission
ct that a disciplinary pon1slunent has been enforced may
,wn by the accused apon trial. and when so shown shall be
ered In determining the measure of punishment to be
ged in the event of a finding ot guilty.
:REDRESS OF INJURIES !l:'0 l'ERSON O:R l'ROl'E:R!I:'Y
. 105. Whenever complaint is made to any commanding
that damage ha . beeD dODe to the property of any persoD
t his property has been wrongfully takeD by persons sub-
) military law, such complaiut shall be Investigated by "
consisting of any number of officers from one to three,
board shall be convened by the commanding officer and
Ita ve, for the purpose of such Investigation, power to
Jll witnesses and examine thc-m upon oath or affirmation,
eive depOSitions or other documentary evidence, and to
the damages sustained against the responsible parties.
,sessment of damages made by such board shall be subject
approval of the commanding officer, and in the amount
,ed by him shall be stopped against the pay of the offend-
"'nd the order of such commanding officer directing stop-
herein authorized shall be conclusive on any disburSing
for the paym .... t bT him to the Injured parties of the
.ges so ordered..
!l'<l the offenders caD not be ascertaIned but the organlza-
r detachment to whIch they belong is known, stoppages
amount of damages inflicted may be made and assessed In
oroportion as may be deemed just upon the Individual
thereof who are shown to have been present with such
zation or detachment at the time the damages complalnec1
'e as determined by the approved findings of the
ABllES'r OF DESEB'rERS :BY CIVIL OFFIOIALS.
106. It Shall be lawful for any Civil officer having au-
r nnder the law. of the United States, or of any State.
ory, District, or possession of the United States, to arrest
ers, summarily to arrest a deserter from the mllitary serv-
the United States and deliver him Into the custody of the
ry authOrities of the United States.
3111
SOLDIERS TO XAKE GOOD TIME LOST.
AnT. 107. Every soldier wlIo in an existing or subsequE
listment deserts the service of the Uniterl States or y\
proper a.uthority absents himself from his organization, S
or duty for more than one day. or '\vilo is con:t1necl for 11101'
one (lay uncleI' sentence, or \vhile u\vaiting trial and
of his case, if the trial results in conviction, or through 1
temperate use of drugs or alcoholic liquor, or through (
or injury the result of his o\vn misconduct, renders himS4
able for more than one day to perform duty, shall be Ii,
serve, after his reLHi'n to u full-duty statns, for such l)er
shall, with the time 118 may have sel'vecl prior to such des
unauthol'iztl absencE', coniinc:ment, or inaiJility to perfOI'll
amount to the full terlH of that part of his f!n1i8tment
he is required to serve with his organization befor
furloughed to the Army Reserve.
SOLDIERS-SEl'AltATION FROM: THE SERVICE.
ART. 108. No enlisted man, lawfully inducted into the m
service of the United States, shall be discharged from sai,
ice without a certificate of discharge, signed by a field off
the regiment or other organization to which the
belongs or by the commanding officer when no such field oft
present; and no enlisteu man shull be discharged fron
service before his te1'111 of service has expired, except by
of the President, the Secretary of 'Val'. the commanding
of a department, or by sentence of a general court-martiai
OATH OF ENLISl:M:ENT.
ART. 109. At the time of his enlistment every soldier sha;
the fonowing outh or affirmation: "I, ---, do solemnly
(or affirm) that I will bear true faith and allegiance
United States of America; that I will serve them honestl
faithfully against ull their enemies whomsoever; and that
obey the ortlers of the President of the United States aJ
orders of the officers appOinted over me, according to the
and Articles of 'Var." This oath or affirmation may be
before any officer,
CHAPTER XV.
ENGLISHFRENCH VOCABULARY.
COMMON "YORDS.
lOon (ihis) .................. Cet
(an) ................ _ .. _ .. anne-e.
1ge . Un bandage .
....................... Un bain.
let ..................... U nc balonnette .
................. "Cn lit.
et. ......... 0" _. _ __ __ __ Une couvcrturs.
___ .... ___ ........ _ .. _.Un
G Une balle.
Un pruneau (soldier slang) .
..................... Un camp.
Un campemcnt.
dge ................... Une cartouche .
.... _ ..... _ ...... _ ..... _ .lTn enfant.
Une enfant .
.. __ .. __ .. _'" _., _. _ ... _. Un cui13inier.
Un cuistot (slang).
Une cuisiniere (fern.).
, ........................ Un baL
Une danse (one dance) .
...................... Obscur .
....................... Un
....................... Mort.
tor._ ........ __ ....... _ ... __ Un deserteur.
:::::::::::::::::::::::::::
:ms ........ __ ........... Des armes It feu.
gun ...... __ ... " Une piece de campagne .
............ __ ....... Un drapeau.
Un etendard (standard).
317
318 VOCABULARY,
Forest .... , ....... Une foret.
Ln bois (woods).
Un boqur,teau (clump of treE
Friend ............. '" ... Un ami.
Une arnie.
GirL. ...................... Une jcune lille.
Guide ......................... Un guide.
GUn ........ _., _ ............... Un lusil.
Halt! ___ ....................... Halte
l
Hand .. _____ _____ 0 __ 0" ow. Ulle main.
Hat ............................ Un chapeau.
Ln kepi (cap).
Un casque (helmet).
Un ieutre (campaign hot).
Head .......................... La tete.
Headquarters. __ .. _____ ., _____ . _ I.e quartier-gelleral.
Horse .... ___ . 0" _ Un cheval.
Interpreter ..................... Un intcrprete.
Knife ... _ ... _. __ ..... _. _ .... _. Un COllteau.
Lake ............................ Un lac.
Man ............................ Un homme.
........................... De]a viande.
Na,me._ ....... ____ 0 ____ .0_ . __ Un nOill.
Night. ________ o. _0 __ 0_ _______ nuit.
Noon ....................... Midi.
Machi.ne gUll __ 0 __ __ __ _ Une mitrailleuse.
Me;:,::! eall. - - __ . ___ .,. ___ .. _. ___ . La soupe.
Password .. ____ ow __ __ __ oLe mot de passe.
Pay ....... ,. ..................... Lc (enlisted men).
La solde (officers).
... _ .. __ .... _ ... ___ ... _. un prisonnier.
Rccn'.it ..... ____ . __ __ ...... _ .. Dne recru..
Un blcu (slang).
Ln Llenet (shng).
o lTn blanc-bee (sla.ng).
Resto::mnt. ..................... Un restaurant.
Un cafe.
Roatl .................... " ....... T;n chemin.
Une route.
Retreat .. _ _ ................. La rctraite.
NUMERALS.
e ......................... Le reveil.
La diane ..
, .................................. U-n sabre .
........................ _ Une selle .
319
.......................... Des chauSllures (shoes in general).
'. . Des souliers (low shoes).
Des bottines (high shoes).
Des Lrodequins (marching shoes).
u ......................... Un fusil de chasse .
............. ...... ... . Malade .
.... _ ........................................... VIle soupe.
Un potage .
. ......... ' ............................... Un espion.
:-::::::::::::::::::::
.......................... Une tente.
tent .................... Une tente-.bri.
NUMERALS,
......................................... Un, une .
......................... Deux .
................... ...... ...... .. ...... ...... .. .. Trois .
.......................... Quatre .
................ ......... G'inq (pronounce sank) .
.. ..................... .. Six (pronounce cease) .
.... ...................................... Sept (pronounce set) .
....................... .. iluit (pronounce weet) .
......................... Neuf .
......................... . Dix (pronounce deess)
.. .......................................... On!'9 .
......... .................................. DOllze.
D ' ...................... 'l'reizc.-
........................................ _ Quatorze .
............ Quinze.
I _ ..................... _ ....... Seize.

.. _ ...................................... Dix-neuf.
, ......................... V;!ngt (pronounce vant.)
'-one ............. V lllgt-et-un.
320 ENGLISH'FRENCH VOCABULARY.
Thirty ......................... Trente.
Thirtyone ..................... Trcntc-ct-un.
Thirty-two ........ _ ... _ .......... _. ,[rente-deux.
Forty ....................... __ Quarante.
Fifty_ .. _ .... _ ...................................... Cinqnante.
Sixty .......................... _ ....... _0_. _ .Soixante.
Seventy ........... _ ................... Soixante-dU.
Seventy-one .. _ ...................... SoixanLe-et-onze.
Seventytwo ............ Soixante-douze.
Eighty .... _ .......................... Quatre-vin:1ts.
Eighty-o.ne ......................... _ Quatre-ving-t-un.
Ninety. __ ............................. Quatre-ving-t-clix.
Ninety-one .................... _ ..... Quatre-villgt-onze.
One hundred _ .... __ ............ _ .Cent.
One hundred and one .............. Cent Ull.
Two hundred ................... Deux cents.
(fWD hundred and one ......... _0_ .Denx cent UTI
. One thousand .................. Millo.
Two thousand ........... __ .. _ .Deux mUle.
One thousand one hundred ... Mille cent; Ollze cents.
Thousands of soldiera ............ Des milliers de soldats.
A million ............ _ ........ Un million.
Two million men .............. Deux millions d'-hammes.
A score ....................... Uue viIL-taine.
About forty men .......... '.0 Vne quurantaine d'hammes
Hundreds of mcn ............. Des centaines d'hommes.
CURRENCY, MEASURES, AND WEIGHTS.
lcent. ......................... Unsou; cinqcentimcs.
10 cents .................... Dix SOliS; dnquante centim
20 centa (about) ................ Un francs.
1 dollar ................ _ ........ Cinq francs.
(The French have gold pieces of 10 francs and 20 francs; banI
of 50 francs, 100 francs, aud higher. The gold pieces are ~
replaced by bank notes now.)
1 meter (1.0936 yards) ........... Un metre.
1liilometer (0.62138 mile) ........ Un kilometre.
NOTE.-For all ordinnry purposes, the H kilomHre "=6 of a mi
" <:eotimMl'e "=.fa of an inch.
- DAYS; MONTHS, AND SEASONS.m
Ie (2.48552 miles) __________ une lieue_
ne (2.4711 acres) __________ un hectare,
(15.43239 grainR Troy). ___ Lll gramme.
ram (2,204621 poundsayoir-
__ ..... __ ....... __ .Un kilogrammc.
pounds avoirdupois ________ Un quintal; 100 kilos,
; pounds avoirdupois .. _ ... Une tonne; 1,000 kilos,
I is sold by the tonne; grain and hay by the quintal. Dix
ux de hIe, de foin=JO quintals of grain, of hay_)
quart (li'1uid) _____________ Un litre.
gallons ______ .. __ ........ un hectolitre_
quart (dry) ____ . _ .. ______ Un litrc_
bushels ...... ____ ____ ..... Un heetolitre.
) litre, which is the principal unit of both fluid and dry meas-
3 the contents of 1 cubic dtcimCtre metre);)
DAYS
J
MONTHS. AND SEASONS.
:_:_:.:.:::::::::::::::::
,sday_ ... _ ...... _ .... , ___ Mel'{:edL
lay __ ............. _ ... ___ Jeudl.
___ ..................... _Yendl'edi.
:::::::::
Lry ..... ......................... _ .Fevrier .
..... _ .................... Mars,
........................ _Avril.
......................... _Mai.
......................... _ .. . Juin .
..... _._Juillet.
; __ ....... , ....... Ao(\t (pronounce 00).
lber_ ......... _ .... _. _Septernbre_
'r ............... _ ....... Octohre.
Iber _ ........ _ .. _Kovembre.
,be1'_._._ .............. __ . _Decembre.
'lsons . ...... _ ............... , _ .. . Les saisons.
' ........... _ ............. L'lliver.
,3512"-17--13
ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY.
Spring ................. Le printemps.
Summer ..... __ . _ ............... L'ete.
FalL ................. __ . __ ..... I/automne.
Year .......... _. _ .. _ ... _ .. __ .... Un an; une annee.
Month .......................... Un mois.
Week. ___ . _____ . _ ... _. __ .. ____ .. 1Jlle semaine.
Day ........................... (;n jour.
Hour. __ . ___ .' _. _ .. __ ..... _ .. __ . VllE' l1enre.
Minute ... _ .. _. _ ...... _ ... _. _ .. Une minute.
Second. ______ . _____ . _. _. _. ____ lIne seconde.
CO:1BION rIIRASES.
Good morning, sir, madam, miss. I Bonjour, monsieur, roada
Good afternooll. _______ . __ . , ... ____ J mademoiselle.
Good evening, 811' _ . _ . __ . __ . ___ . BOIlSoil', 1l1011Sieur.
Good night, sir .. __ . _____ ..... _ ... Bonne nuit, monsieur.
Pal"don m(L ___ .. _. ____ _ ___ Pardon; je VDUS demande
Don't mention it .......... ..... Je vaus en pric.
How do you do? ............... Comment allezvolls?
Comlnent <;a va?
Comment vous
Very well, thank you ............ Tres bien, moreL
J e vais bien, mereL
Ca va bien, moreL
.T e lIle porte bien
l
merci.
Do not trouble yourself ......... .. N 0 VOUB genez pas.
N e vous derange7. pas.
I am very glad to see you ......... Je suis bien aise de vous vo
J e suis content (heureux) d
voir.
What time i8 it? ............... Quelle heure est-il'!
It is 10 a'dock .................... n cst <lix hew-es.
Take care; look out ............. Prencz garde.
Do not hother me ................ Ne me derangez pas.
Stop here ............... _ ..... _. _Arretez-yous ici.
Does Mr. -live here? .......... 'tl. - demeure-toil ici?
Come in .. "_'_' __ ... __ .... _ ... _ . Entrez.
You nrc very kind ............... Vous etes hes aimable.
COMMON PHRASES. 828
t time does the first train A quelle heure part Ie premier
) train?
I the name of this station? .. Coment s'appelle eette station'
(gare)?
......................... Je desire .. Je veux (stronger).
t want it ___ ._ . ____ ". ____ .. Je n'en veux pas.
know what lowe you .... Ditesmoi ce que ie vous dais.
1 not mistaken? ......... N e faitesvous pas errcur?
N e vous trompez-vous pas?
give mc_ ....... ___________ Veuillez me donner.
n ___ ._ .. _____ ... , __ .... __ .. Avancez.
Circulez. (Policeman.)
something to eat> ........ Je desire quelque chose II manger.
is it? .................... OU estec?
look for it ................ Allez Ie chercher.
lis letter to the post office .. Portez cette lettre II la poste.
uch is it? .. __ ........ .... Combicn?
Cornbien cela coutetil?
ar ....................... Cest cher.
you ...................... Merei.
J e yallS en remercie.
nention it ................. Il n'y a pas de quai.
De rIen.
ne to present my friend-. Permettezmoi de vous presenter
monami-.
glad to make your ae Je suis enchante de faire votre
ltancc. connaissance.
r is it? .................... A que lie distance estce?
an I do for you? .......... Que puisje faire pour vous?
speak English? .......... Parlezvous anglais?
t speak French very well.J e ne parle pas tres bien Ie fran9ais.
do you come from? _ ...... D'o-u VelleZ-YOUs?
d you come? .............. Comment etes-vous venu?
, in a cOl'riage, in an auto, A pied, en voiture, en auto, en
;1, by boat. on a bicycle, chemin de fer en bateau, it
lrseback, in an aeroplane. bicyclette, a cheval, en aero
plane.
ENGLISH-'FRENCH VOCABULARY.
MILITARY TITLES, nANKS, AND GRADES.
General officers. ______________ .. _Les officers generaux.
General staff ..... _ .......... L'etat-major
Field officers ..... _ ......... _ ...... Les su EGriCurs.
Company officers ................. Les officlerR su Jalternes.
Enlisted ruell. _ ..... _ .............. Les homInes de troupe.
Noncommissioned officers ....... 3.e:'l, sous-offieiers.
Private soldiers ........ _ .. _ ....... Lea simples so]dat."l.
ColoneL. _ .... __ . ____ . __ .. _ .. _. _Le colonel (addtessed* il.'3
coloael)) ).
Major ... __ .0 ........... _ ..... __ .. Le commandant ("11on corr
ant"). /'
Captain .. __ ................ Le ("1'I{on capitai
Le piston (slang).
First lientenaut __________ ........ Le lieutenant (en premier)
lieutenant')).
Second lieutenant ......... Le sous-lieutenant ("Mon
tenant ").
A doctor __ .. __ .... _ ..... _. __ ... _ Un (medecinl major.
A sergeanL ...................... Un sergent (addressed as
gE'nt1l).
Un mal'echal des logis (mc
service).
A corporaL ____ .......... _. _. ____ Cll c"poml ("Caporal").
Un brIgadier (mounted serv
A private .. ___ .............. _ ... _ Un simple soldat.
A body of troops _____ ._ ........ _. Une troupe.
French troops .. _ ................... Des troupes
A wagoner ........... _._ ...... _ Vn conducteur.
Un iourgonuiel',
A norseshocL_ ... _ ............ __ Un marechal-ferrant.
A saddler ___ . ___ ....... _ .... _ .... tJ n sellier_
A signaler .................................. V n si.,naleur.
A deserter .... _ .. 00 ...... _ 0._ .Un
A soldier of Infantrv .... _________ Un fantassln_
Ca,,-alrY .. _ ............... Un cavalier.
Artillery_. _ ...... _ ... Un artlileur.
Engineers ........ _ ..... "Cn sapeur-mineur.
QUaJ'termnstcr COlPS. Un humme de I'intenda:nce.
--,-----
* Sec llote p. 334.
MILITARY TERMS.
ass
Signal Corps .......... Un homme du corps des signaux.
Hospital Corps. ______ U II infirmier.
Line of CommunicaU n garde des voies et communica
tions. tiona, G. V. C.
y . ........................ L'infanterie.
' ......................... La cavalerie.
y . ...................... L'art}lI.erie.
,,1'8. _ .................................. Le genIC.
;OrpB._ ..................... Le corps des signaux.
I Corps ................... Le corps de sante,
Le service de sante.
II Corps __ .............. _ .. Le corps d'aviation.
MILITARY TERMS.
tdquarters ...... Le quarticr general.
in .......... ' ............. Le train des equipages.
l service ........ ___ .. _ .... Le sen-ice des chemins de fer.
ph service .............. Le service des
uards ...................... La gendarmerie.
Des gendarmes.
laster .......................... _ Un tresorier .
. aiu .... _ .. _ .................. Un aum6nier.
y ........................ Une armee.
Soandso's army .... L'armee--(l'armee Foch).
Y' corps ................. Un corps
... ___ ................ Une division.
:Ie ...................... Une brigade.
,ent .................... Un regiment.
lion ..................... Un bataillon.
any .................... Une compagnie.
m ...................... Un peloton.
In ....... ................................ . Uno section.
I ....................... Une esconade.
hment ................... Un detachement.
B ....................................... Une caseme .
......................... Un camp (more or less permanent).
Un campement (temporary).
326 ENGLISH-FRENCH VO'CAlIULARY.
A ___ .............. ___ Un cantonnement.
Line .................. "."' .. (Une) ligne.
Column ......................... (Une) colonne.
As skirmishers. _____ . __ . __ ..... En tirailleul's.
Follow mel as skirmishers ... __ .. A moi, .en tirailleurs.
Scout':!. __ ." ___ . __ ........ De::; edaireLITs.
A patl'OL . ___ ... __ . _. __ . __ .. ___ Uno patrouille.
The advance guard ... _ ...... _ ... __ TJ'aV!lllt-g'"1l'(le.
The rear guard ...... _ ... _. __ . _ .. L:arriel'-gal'de.
Flankers ........... _ . __ . _____ . "Des ftanc-gard e8.
The main body ................. Le gros (de]a colonne).
Combat train ... _." ___ . __ . __ . _ .. _ T,e train de combat.
Field train .. _. ______ ....... _ .. Le tl'J.illl'egimellt'olire.
Outposts. _ eO _0_ e_ _. __ 0 _. _. _ Des avant-pastes.
Cossack posts ...... _ .. ........ Des 8.yantpostes a la cosa4
A sentineL .. _ ...... _ ......... Une sentinelle.
D 11 factionnaire,
On post ..... ............. En la,ct.ion.
Dc ftLction.
Guard mounting ............. La gnrde montante (ale
guard).
The sentinel challenges: "Halt! 1La seutinelle crie: "Halt'
Who'sthere?" ................ f vive?"
The answer is: /. France" ... _. _ .. La rcponsc est: :. France."
Advance with the countersign ... Avance au ndliement.
(The person chnJlenged gives the mot d'otdre. which is the r:
some general, and the sentinel replies with the mot de rall
which is the name of a battle or a city).
Go away; you pass .. __ .... (Passe) au large.
Halt, or I fire .................. Hl1lte, ou je fais feu.
Put down your arms. ___ ....... Deposez vos armes.
Hands np!. .................. ,Lovez les bras.
Face about .................... (Faites) demi-tour.
Come here __ __ . _ . _. _. __ . _ ... _ Vcncz ici.
A spy .. _ ..................... Un eapion.
A flag of trnce ................... Un drape"u blanc.
Un drapeau pllXlementaire.
UNIFORM, ARMS, CLOTHING, AND EQUIPMENT. 887
"GNIFOI{:M) ARMS, CLOTliING, AND EQUIPMEN'r.
ng ..... ___ . _ .. _____ . _____ Lea vetements) l'habillement.
e your clothes ............. Changez de vetements.
oat (worn by French ill
"y) ........................ Une capote.
'ra ................... Un panmlon.
H';S ...................... __ Une culotte:
. ___ ..... ___ ............. Une chemise.
... __ ._. __ . _ ... _. ____ Un dolman, une varenBe
................... Un kepi.
dgn hat (United States) ... Un (chapeau de) lentre.
,t.. ....................... Un casque (de tranchea).
ithont visor worn by French
luty ....................... Un bonnet de police.
'shanter worn by Alpine
Iseurs .................. Un beret.
in generaL ___ ...... _ . ___ .Des chaussures.
e BhoeB ................... Des brodequins.
18. _. ____ 0 0 _.0. ____ Dcs guetres.
puttie, ................... Des baneles molletieres.
er putties ................. Des houscanx (or honsseanx).
ress uniform ... _. _A, _ La grande tenue.
uniform ................... La petite tenue.
uniform __ .. __ ..... _. __ La tenue de campa.gne.
oat (mounted men) ......... Un manteau.
oat (oilkera) ................ Un manteau.
Un manteaucapote.
'e coat .................... Le bonrgeron.
,e trousers (overalls) ....... Un pRnta.lon de tremi!! .
e uniform ................ La tenue de corvee.
ine rille ................... Un lusil ..
arreL ... __ .. __ . _ .......... Le canon.
ott __ .'. _. _ ............. I.e verrou .
mrod ...................... La baguette.
utt ............ ___ ... La crosse.
m sling ................... La bretelle.
igger .. __ . __ .. __ .. __ . _ .. _ .La detente.
...................... La hansse.
BIght ...................... Le guidon.
all8
UGLISH-FlI.ENCH VOCABULARY.
A M.yonet. _ .. __ _ ..... Une balonnette.
Rosalie (slang).
Ball cartridge .... _ .............. U ne cartouche a b&l13.
Blank cartrtdge ........ __ ....... Une carto)lche a blanc.
Dummy cartridge ........ _____ .1Jnc fausse cartouche.
Belt ....................... _ .... 1]n ceinturon.
Cartridge box. _. __ .... _ ... __ Une cartouehicre.
First-aid packet .......... ' ........ 1:"n paquet de pansement.
The pack ................... _ ... Le soc.
A haversack ______ ..... __ eo ______ lin etni-musctte.
Canteen .. _. _. _. _ .. ______ ... __ .. Un hiclon.
Tin cup ......................... U" quart.
l\1ess can ___ ... ___ ......... __ . __ .. l:1l8 gamolle.
Equipment .. ____ .... __ . _. _ ... __ .1,' Cqllipmnent.
Compass. _. ____ ......... __ .. ___ Une boussolc.
Field glasses ............... _ ..... Des jUIIH,lles (de campagne)
-Vhistle ........ _ ............... Un simat.
RQvolv!r ..... _. __ . __ .0 ___ 0 _ .Un revolver.
QUESTIONS A HCl,'T THE ROADS, ETC.
Pardon me, sir, do you speak En-{PardOn
1
monsieur, pa.rlez-vc
glish? ............ _ . . . . . . . . . . glais?
(Gel'mitn, French, Ita,lian, Rus-
sian) .. _ ...... _ ....... _ ........
All right. thon show mo, Pleasc,{Tr<.,s b.i:3ll., alors
the ["(Jcul to-- .. _ .... __ .. _ .. _ v"()us pne, 10 chemln de -
Is it far rrom here? ....... __ .... Est-ce loin d'ici?
How long does it take to go there? Combieu faut-il de temps I
aller?
How many kilometres ........... Combien de kilometres?
Is there a short cut? (rood) ....... Y atil un chemin de travel
Is there a short cuL? (trail). _ .... Y a-t-ilun sen tier plus eour
"There does this road go? ....... 011 mene cotte route?
Arc we on the right road to go{SOlnmeS-nous sur 10 bon c
to --? ...................... pour aller "---?
Does this road go through Com-jCette route pMSet-elle par
.................... l picgne?
. des villag
QUESTIONS ABOUT ROADS, ETC. 3ft
:.t.il chelninB pou)..aller
I road in good condition? .Catto route est-elle en bon etatf
erehills? ................. Ya-t-i1 des cotes (des coteaux)?
ey steep'! ................ Sontelles raides?
he I'oad go open Or{La route. traverse-.t-elle un pays'
ded "ountIJ ....... , _ ... _ Maomert au bolSl,?
re get through with artil- '
? ___ ..... _ ............ _ .Peuton pa.9Ser avea de l'artillerie.?
e <Yet throu<Yh with heaVilV{peut:.on passer avec de grosses
ed wagons (auto trucks)'" chargees (avec des
., camlOus-automoblles)!
praticable pour
fantry march on the sides of{L
l
infa
1
.ncrie peut-elle marchel' sur
roads? __________ ... _." .. _ les COMR de la route?
ground practicable? ..... . Le terrain esti1 praticable?
ground marshy?. _. __ . __ .. Le terrain est-il marecageux?
is the nature of the ground? . Quellc est la nature du sol?
he telcgr.aph line follow thiS{Est-ce que la Iigne teiegraphiq ue
as far as X? . . .. .. . .... . .. (Ie SUlt cette route
Jusqu a
does your railroad come
l? ......................... D'ou vient votre chemin de fer?
i docs it go to? .. __ .Oll vart-il? ,
single tracked or dOubl{Est-il a une voie ou a deux voies
ked the whole way? _. _... sur tout Ie parcours?'" ,
ds the station? Is it far? .OU est lagare? Est-elle loin d'ici?
the river be crossed? __ Comment peut-on passer lan viere?
re a bridge? a ferry? __ .. _. _ Y a-til un pont? un bac? .
lere fords? . _"""""'" Y a-toil des a gUB (dee
gues)? .
c get boats? . _ . ___ ...... ___ Peut-on trOll ver des bateaux?
wood are there clCo.Iings,{DanS co y a-toil d.cs clairieres,
les brooks marsh s pools? des raVlns, des rUlsseaux, des
, , e 1 . mares?
.ere a.nypla.cesnear herefOr{Y a-t-il des endroit. pres d'ici pour
lring hors .. ? ....... __ . __ abreuver les chevaux?
water good? , ..... L'eau eat-elle bonne?
I water drinkable? Eet-ee de l'eo.u potable?
830' ENGLISH-l1RENCX VOCABULARY.
Are there watering trough.? .... Y atil des abreuvoirs?
Where is tbere good grass for the{Ou y ati1 de bonne herbe p'
animals? . __ . __ . ___ . __ . _ _ _ _ _ animnux?
Can we buy provisions? ........ Peut-on aeheter des Vivrf'll'?
Is there a field where we ean{Ya.t-il un champ ounQus po
., camper (Installer notre c
camp,....................... ment)?
(;an you give me anyillIormatioD{POUvez-vous me donncrdesl
t.he enemy} _______ .... _ gneOlents sur l'ennemi? .
me trouver un gUl<
the country? ................ , connaisse Ie pays.
We are going to follow this trail
(tracks) ..................... Nous allons suivre cette pis1
Crossroads ....................... Un carrefour.

Where isthe tele.{OU e;st Ie des pos
graph office. ................ tflegraphes.
h
{
Le dirocteur des postes et
T e postmaster.. ....... . .. . . . . . b
grap
The maiL ..... _ .. __ .. _0_ .0 ...... Le courder.
When w"'" the last mail diS'{A quelle heure aton fait I:
tributed? . ................. niere distribution?
General delivery ............... Poste restante,
Are there any letters for --? ." Y atil deB lettres pour --
I should like'to send a telegram .. Je voudrais expedier un
gramme.
Have you received a telegram{Avez.voUB re
9
',' un teJegr
for --? ............... "'.. (une pour --?
A telegraph instrument .......... un appareil (tclegraphique)
Can you tell me where the mayorfs{PoUrriez-VOllS me dire au Be 1
office is? _ ..... _ "", ____ . _ . _ _ la mairie?
I couldn't tell you; I am a stran-{Je ne saurais VOllS renseigner
ger here ___ ........... __ . _. _. _ '. connais pas la ville.
Good morning, sir, are you the{Ronjour. Monsieur,
mayor? . _ .. - - __ ...... _ ... - ___ l maire?
No, sir, I am his assistant. ______ Non, Monsieur, je sms son ad
I should like ,to speak to the{Je voudrais parler au mair
mayor hlmselJ............. ... mSme.
RAILROADS. 381.
sir. A detachment will{ECoutez, monsieur. Un detache
-0 hero to-morrow morning ment arrivera iCl demain matiri
)'clock. __ .. __ . ___ . _..... a cinq heures.
)II .. trange to 200o{POUvez.vous prendre des dispo.
f t d ? '-', SltlOns pour loger 2,000 hommes
or wo ays. _ ...... -.,. - pendant deux joms?
emau ......... _ ... _ ..... Un sergent de ville, un agent de
la pa.ix.
RAILROAI)S.
,tion agent. .......... Le chef de gare.
nductor .................. Le conducteur ..
gineer. _ .... _., __ ... ___ . _ Le mecanicien.
eman .................... Le chauffeur.
a,keman. ___ . __ . __ . _._ ... oLe serre-frcins .
. egraph operator ______ ._. _. Le telegraphiste.
inc .. __ -. - .... __ . _. __ . ___ Uno locomotive.
cars ... __ . __ .. __ ....... Des wagons (do voyageurs).
rs .. _ .... _ .. 0_.' .00 _0_' _ .Des truc:ks.
rs. _ . ____ .. __ .... _ ... __ .. _ Des 'wagons de marchandises.
__ ....... _ ...... _. _" _ .Des \vagons a be.stiaux.
Iress train .. _ . _ . _ .. _ . _ .... 17 n train e:xpress.
19h train._ .. _ .. _._ . _.rn train direct.
train ____ ......... _. _ ... Un train omnibus.
mger train _' ___ ... _. ____ .. Un train de voyageurs.
ht train ___ .............. ___ . Un traiIl de marchandises.
cain the troops ........... Embarqucr les troupes.
'ain the troops. __ . _' _ ... _. Debarquer les troupes.
011 a train ... __ . _ ....... J:V{ontcr dans un train.
off a train. _ .' __ ._. _ ..... Descendre d'un train.
Jroad track .............. La voie (lerr"e):
track ...... ___ A _ __ A __ .Une voie dc.garage.
,t .... ____ ............... U II billet.
d trip ticket ............. Un billet d'aller et retour.
'Y only .... ..... . Aller seulement.
:ketwindow ............. Le guichei.
heurepart Ie train pour
ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY.
It ls late (15 minuteslate) ....... Il est en retard (de qui.!
nutes).
Do we have to change cars? ... _ .Fautil changer de train?
The train stops .................. Le train .'arrcte.
All aboard! ..................... En voiture!
The train starts ................. Le train s' ebranle.
;
RA.T[ONS AND FOOD.
Provisions (in general) ........... Les vivres.
The ration. ____ ................. La ration.
Fresh beef. __ ....... __ .......... De la viande fralche,
Bacon .......... __ __ ........... Du lard.
Flour .......................... De la farine.
Soft bread ...................... Du pain lrai .
Hard bread (crackers) .. __ ........ Du biscuit.
Field bread .................... Du pain de guerre.
Corn meal ........ __ ............. De' la farine de maYs.
Coffee ........................... Du cafe.
Sugar __ ...... _ .. _. _. _ .. _ .. _ .. __ .Du sucre.
Eggs ........................... Des reufs.
Chickens ........................ Des poulets.
Potatoes __ ...................... Des pommes de terre.
Peas ............................ Des pois.
String beans .................... Des haricots verts.
Vegetables (in generall ____ . ____ "Des legumes.
An apple ....................... Une pomme.
A pear ..... __ ................... Une poire.
A cherry __ . ____ ................. Une cerise.
A peach ..... ____ ................ Une p ~ c h e
Cheese ......................... Du Jromage.
Wine .......................... Du Yin.
Beer ........................... De la bier8.
A glass of beer ..... __ ............ Un bock.
I am hungry .................... J'ai faim.
Bring me something to eat, please.Appol'tezmoi quelque eh
ma.nger, s'il vaus platt.
I am thirsty .................... J'ai Boif.
Please give me a glas8 of water ... Veuillez me donner un vette j
Waiter, I'll take a beefsteak ..... GllJ'ron, je desire un biitecJ,.
HOSPI'rALS,. POINTS OF 'rHECOllll:PASS.
black coffee ............... Du cale noir.
, with milk ............ Du cai6 au jait.
.......... """"' .... , .. D"s petits pains.
:n.t roUs ___ .......... ' .. _. _ .Des croissantB.
HOSPITALS.
i hospitaL ........ , ....... Une ambulance.
pita! (in general) ........... l[n hOpital (plural: des
sEnng statlon ...... _. _ .. un postc de Sel:OllI'S.
;-aid dressing .............. Un pansement somroaire.
;l'Oss .... ____ .. La Croix Rouge.
tor ................. ____ .Un
Un docteur.
.... ,0" __ _ _ _ 1:n chirurglen.
itary surgeon ....... ____ ... _ Gn (m6dccin) major.
ant surgeon ..... __ .. __ ..... Un aide-major.
e nurse, hosp..iJal corps man. Un infirtriie1',
ale nurse ... _. __ .. _ ...... " Une lnfinllicrc.
lbulancc ... ___ .. _ .. __ .. _ .. Dlle amblilance.
tcher (Iitter) .............. Un brancard.
:')r bearer" ___ .... _. p". pUn braneardiel.'_
of bandages .... __ . _ .... _ Un rouleau de bandage_
__ ... ..... _Un paquet de pansement.
111ded man_ .... _ . __ r:-n blessB.
;ick. ___ .. _ .... _ ....... _ __ J e suis malada.
3 a feveL. _ ......... .. ' Ia levre.
:; chills and .. .. _J'ai des irissoIls de nevre.
_. _ ........... e RlllS constipe.
2 diarrhea ................. _J'ai 10. diarrhec.
POINTS OF THE COMPASS
..................... ..... . Le nord .
............. ._ .. 1..18 sud .
.. ......................... . L'est .
.. -.. :' ...... :. ......... .L'ouest.
.. _ ............... ...... Le nord-esL
east ....................... Le sudest.
west ............. Le nordouest.
west ...................... Le sudouest.
384 ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY.
TRENCH WARFARE.
Trench warfare._ ...... ________ ... La guerre des tranchees.
La guerre de position.
La guerre de taupe (moles).
Trench ....... " """"" _ ...... Une tranchee.
Communication trench ..... _ ... _ Un boyan (de
The parapet ............ _ ... _" .Le parapet.
A loophole ..... _ . _ . _ . ' . '. Un creneau.
U ne meurtriere.
A grenade._ ...... _ .. __ . _ .... Une grenade.
A grenadier, bomber ........ Un grenadier.
Barbed wire .............. ' __ '" .Du fil de fer barbeJe.
Barbed wire entanglement ....... Un reseau de fils de fer barb
Trench mortar ............... Un mortier.
Un crapouillaud.
},[inenwe1jer (German).
Bomb ............... """" .Une bombe.
Howitzer ___ ..... __ ... _. _. __ .. _ .Un obusier.
Machine gun ................ Une mitrailleuse.
p' Id . U " d
Ie ... _ ... " _..... ........ ne e ca?lpagne. . ,
7i? IDllhmeter field gun ... Uue de 8?.'xante-qum.
SIege gun ............. _____ '" .Une p,ece de 81ege.
120 long ..... _ .... Cent vingt long.
120 short .... __ __ . __ . __ _. Cent vingt court.
77 (German)._. __ . __ . ______ " .. 8oixante-dix-sept(allcmanc
Shell .. __ ...... __ _ ..... __ _'" Un obus.
Une marmite (slang).
Un colis it domicile (slang).
Shrapnel. .......... '" , . ,.,., .Un shrapnel!.
Un rageur (slang).
Periscope ...................... Un periscope.
Trench knife ................... Un couteau de tranchee.
Dugout .. __ ....... 00. __ __ __ ___ Un abri dans les trancheea.
Un cagibi (slang).
U ne cagna (slang).
Un gourbi (slang).
Une guitoune (slang).
XOTE.-In addrcssi,l1g an, officer of g-ra(le superior to his 0-
oftlct"r must use the possessive adjective; a senior addressing a
use:'; the of the grade only. Thus: A major to a colon,
.. M.-.n ('olnnp.l:' but the eolr,ncl to the tnajor would say" Com mal
APPENDIX.
FORM FOR LAST WILL AND TESTAMENT.
Last Will and Testament
:e, p'IJ,bUsh; and declcre this -;ny la;;;t will and testament.
'OJ devise, and bequeath to 1 _ '. __ _ ......
.......... --- ......................................... ---,-
do g1:re, c!en'Ec. and re'lvcat;i, all the i e ~ t and Tcsi(hw of my estate,
;al cmd pasond, trL. ____ .... _ ...... _ .... ___ ,, _____ .. _ .0 __ ._
'nd assl:gnsjm'ct'cJ'J
2
__ _______ ...... _ ... __ .. _ .. ___ ._. __
..... _-- .. - .... _ .................... -........ ---_ .. -_.--.-
re insert specific legacies and devises.
he residue of lhe c'JLaic i3 given to severt,l persons, and . here the manner iu
it is to be divided, as "in equal shares as tenants in c0IIlillon."
335
836 FORM FOR LAST WILL AND TESTAMENT.
I hereby appoint .. ....................... ' ............
......... __ . __ ..... _ .. _.' _ ". _. __ ................. _ .. _ .. . el
of this my last will and testament, and I desire that. ........... .
shall not be requited to give bond for tlu; performance of the du;
that office .
Witness my hand this' .................................... .
day of .................... , 191
Signed, published, and declared by . ......................
the above-nanu;d testatoT, as and for his last will and testament,
presence of'U,8j who, at his request and -in his presenc.e, and in the JYI'
of each other, have subscribed our names as witnesses thereto.-I
Residence: ......... __ .. __ .......... _ .... .
Residence: __ ................ __ .......... .
Residence: ....... __ ............ _ ........ .
a If the will is made in Neyada, or if the testator has real estate in that St
should affix his seal.
~ If the will is made in Louisiana, unless it ~ wholly in the bandwritlng
testator, there should be seven witnesses and a notary at the II sealing np." If
in his handwriting no formalitic-s are required.
INDEX.
Page.
viations on maps ..... __ .. __ ................. __ ..... 272
lccgllards. _ ......... _ ... _ .. _ ..... __ .. _ .. _ ......... _ 166
Ice party of advance guard ........................ 167,168
e to riflemen. . . . .............................. 197
g rifle. .............................................. 191
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :: : : :: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :: : : : : .
.gnal... ............................................ 59
:8 Field kit).... .................................. 29
>sofWar: .,'
<tracts from ............................. """ 300-316
3ading.............................................. 300
bling equipment .. __ ....................... 30
: ____ .:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: '4S:
et:
____ .::::: ____ '-.:::::::::::: ::::: ::::::::: :::
x .......................................... ' " .... ' 73
lfix................................................ 73
et, manual of:
:tacks ................................... """"' .. , 127
mbat ................. ""'" ................. "". 136,147
Imbined movements .. __ ........................ __ .... ]35
.......... __ ...... _ ..... _ ... _ .. ____ .... _. _ .... _ 131
:ncing exercises ............................... "". 137-147
lot movements ....... _ .... __ .. __ ..... _ .. __ .. __ .. _ . . . . 125
meral rules ....................................... 12:\-125
strllction 'without bayonet ............. _. _ ........... _ 134
struction 'with rifle ....... ______ .. _ ...... _............ 126
struction without rifle....... ......... . ............... 125
ggestions fur fencing at will ..... _._ ............ ____ . _ _ 145
337
338.
INDEX.
Blank cartridges .. _. ___________ . _ ... _______ . ___ .. ___ ... __ .
Blanket rol1.. _______ . ____ . _. _ ...... _. _ ... _ ............ _. ,
Bla.nks, meS3age .... 4 .. __ . 0_. __ . _ ... _ ... ___ ___ ...
Blisters ______ . ___ .. _ .. __ . __ . __ .. __ . _____ . _. _. _ .. __ .. __ . __ _
Bugle I'ignals ..... _. _ ... _. __ . __ ..... ____________ . __ .. _____ _
Calling the shot. ___ .. ___________________________________ _
Oamp:
1\laking camp .... _ ... _ ... __ . __ . __ . ___ . __ . ______ . __ ... _
SerV1cQ and duties. ___ .... __ ....... 0_. _ ..............
Cate of leet. ... ____________ . ___ . ______ . ____________ . _____ _
Care 01 rifle .... __ .... __ . __ ............................... .
Cartridges:
BalL ________ .. ___ . __________ . __ . _ ....... _. _. _. _____ _
Blink. . ________________ .. __________________________ _
D"umm:;,T ___ ............ _ ... _ ......... _________ . __
Guard. ____________ . _ . ______________________ . __ .. _ ... _
Cleaning vistoL . ___ . ________________ . _. _ .. __ .. ____ . __ . __ _
Cleaning l'igc. __ ....... _ ....................... _ .. _ .. ___ ."_
Close order, company ___ .. __ .. __ . _ .. _____ ... _ ...... .
Clothing. (See Uniforms.)
... __ ...
Gene1';;tl .'3e1'vlce code (IntcrnntiocalMoyse code) .... _. __
'l'wo-ann eode ____ . _______________ ... __ 62,21
,\"ig-,;-ag .. __ ............ _. _. _ .. ' _. _. ___ . _. _ .. _.

Cayalry ___ ..... _. _ ..... _ ... _. __ ._._ .. __ ... __ .... _.
Fidd ArtilleTy ________ __ __________________ .. ___ _
Infantry _ .... __ .. _. ___ ... ____ .. _. ___ ..... __ . _. __ _
Com baL .. ____________________________ . _ . __ . _ l'
.... __________ . __ ... _ . _____ . _ .. ______ . _ . ___ _
Commander 01 lho guard ______ . , _______ . ___ ........ _ .... .
Infantry Drill ___________ .. __ . _ ... _
Compnny ins1)ection ................ _ ....... _ ...... 1:
Company, Hchoolof:.
Close ordor driU-
..... _ . __ .. _ . __ . __ . _ .... _ ... _ .. _ . __ .
At case and route step_ . _ . __ ...........
Facing or rnarching to the rear ....... __ ...... .... __ '.
Front into line ______ . _ . _ .. ___ . __ .. ____ .. _ ... __ _
INDEX.
,any. School of-Continued.
Ilose order drill-Continued.
Movements on fixed pivot ........................
Movements on the moving pivot .........
On right (left) into line ....................
Rules ....................................
To dimi,?-ish the front of a column of squads ....
To dlsrnlss company ... A _ __ __ _
To form the company ..........
)ivision of company _ .. __ ................... _ ..... 0_0 _.
Dxtended order drill-
Deployments ......... _ .
Rules for deployment. ......
The ad vance .............
The assembly ......................
The company acting alone ..............
'rhe company in support ........................ .
The fire attack .................................
i'ire-
Classes of firing .................................
Fire controL ................................
::: :::: ::::::::::::::::: :::::::::
339
Page.
94
95
96
91
98
93
92
89
100
99
102
101
106
105
104
108
109
109
110
Ranges ................................
The target ..........................
106
107
108
nstructiou ____ . _. _ .. ___ .. ______ ._. _ .. _ ... __ ......... _
Joosition of officers, noncommissioned officers, guides, etc.
of platoons and squads ......................
)liments from guards ..... _ ... _ .' .............. __ ._. __ . __
)UIS ... _ .. _ ..... - - ____ . __ _ ........... _ . _ . _ - - . - .
on maps. _._ .. " ..... _ .......... _ .. __ ... _
::::::: ::::::::::
,ck post ...............................
3e s!llall-arrns ................ __ .................... .
teSles In conversatlon .................................. .
tesy. military ..................................
r, useof ................................. _ ..... __ ... _.
88
89-91
89-91
239
263
272
36-40
196
222
171
199
18
81
27
340 INDEX.
Datum plane on maps ...................... , .............
Definition, Infantry Drill Regulations. _____ .. __ .. __ . __ .. _ .. _
DetailR and rosters, interior guards 00 ____ 00. __ _ _. __ _
__ __ __ :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: :
Distances on maps ....... 0 __ __ _ 0 _____ ._.
Drill (see Infantry Drill Regulations):
Close order. . ... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 49,
Extended Ol"der .................................. 49, \
General rules .. ____ 0 ______ 0 ____ " ___ __ __ " __ _________
Drill Ecgulations
,
all arms. __________ .. ____________ -. __ "- ....
Dummy cartridgos. __ .... _. __________ . _____ . ______ . _.' ___ .
Engirleer companies ............ _.,. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ ......... _ .. _
EnglishFrench vocabularies .............................. 3]
Enlistment oath .......... ___ ... 0_" _ 00 ____ _. _ 00 _.
Equipment:
.... _ ....... _ .. __ .. _ . _ .. _ . _____ ..... _ . _ . _ . __
Part of.. .............................................. .
Extended order drilL ................................. 49, \
ll'acings ________ ........................ 0 0.0
Feet, care of _____ . _______ .. _ .. ___ .... _ . _. _ ..... _ .........
Field exercises. ______ .'. _ ..... _ ... _ . _ .. _ .. _ . _ ... __ . __ ..
Field kit. ............................................... .
Field mesRago blanks __ ..... _ ......... _ .. _ ....... _ ...
Field service;
Advallce guard ___ . ___ ...... ___ .. _ __ ... __
Ad vallce party ...................................
Patrols ..................................... It
Poiut ________ ._. __ . ___ ...... _ .. _ .... __ .. __ .,. __ .
Reserve_ ............................. __ ......... _ ..
Support ______ ... _. 0 __ 0 _ ___ _
Combat. .........................................
}i'lan 1.;:: __ . ___ .......... _ ..... _ ..... _ . _ . _ . __ .. __ .
Outposts-
..... :.::::::::::::::::::::::
Line of observation ...............
INDEX. 841
l
)utposts-Continued. Page.
Line of resistance........................ ...... ... 170
March outpost..................................... 174
Outguards ...................... ' .... 170-172
Patrols .................................. 173.174
Pickets ............................... ,........ '170
Reserves. ' ...................... , . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . 170
Sentinels ....................................... 172,173
Sentry squads ................................ ,.. 171
Supports........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Patrolling ....................................... 156-166
Principles of Infantry training........... .......... 148
Rear guards................. ..................... 168
Rifle trenches ................................... 175-178
Service Regulations.................................. 298
:ontroL. .......................................... 109,153
m
tanges................................................ 107
tapid firing. . . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 198
'argets... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
g positions ....................... __ .. __ ... ___ .... __ . _ ... _ . . . 194
g with rests... . . ...... .. .. .. . . .. . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
aid rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
';gnals ........................................... 61,276-285
( guards ......... ______ . __ .. __ .. _ .. _ .. __ . __ .. _ ... _. _.' _ 169
ations
l
general rules_ .. _ .. ____ . _. _ ... _0_ 0 0 _ 51
:e ration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
for last will and testament ....................... :.... 335
,h.EngliBh vocabulary ............................... 317-33,j
ral service code. . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
,ration.............................................. 41
Jd forms on maps ................................. _." 265
1 cartridges............ ... . ......... .................. 19
I dllty (extracts from Manllal of Interior):
llassification of interior guards __ . ________ .. __ . _ .... _. _ 211
lolar sentinels ...................... _ ....... _. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 227
of the guard __ _____ . ____ . _ .. _. __ .. __ '. _ 21-1-219
mDEX.
Guard duty-Continued.
Compliments from guards ........................
Corporal of the guard ................................. 22,
.... _ .. _______ .. .o __ .. '""" woO ............... 0_ .......... ..
Details ... ., ..... , ........ , .... .
:Flags .......... ., ..............
Guard mounting ......................................................................... ..
FormaL .............
InformaL . __ ., ., ..........
Guard patrols ..........
Guarding prisoners .... -........... ...... ........ .............. ............ ..........
Introduction ..............
Musician of the guard ............
Orderlies ............................
Orders for sentinels .... o. _ ........................ __ ..... w ._0._.
Paroles ......................................
Prison en;. .... ___ ....... woO ...... ___ _ .. _0_ .. _0_ ..... __ ........ 24]
Privates of the guard ................................. .
Rellevlng the old guard ... _ 0_ ....... _ ................................ .
Retreat gun ............................
Reveille gun ..... __ . __ ................................ _ .......... _ ............ .
Rosters ....................... 0 ....... WoO ............................... .
Sergeant of the guard .................. ., ......... 2H
,\llatchlnen ........... a ....... 4 ............ _ ............................. .
::::::::::::
Informal.. ............... , .....
Gun Elling, usc of ........ ____ ............................................... .
I-Ias}lUI"f'):l 011 IuapR .. _ ............. _. _ ............. _ .......... ..
Hygiene, personal ................ _ ... ____ . 0 _. _ _ ...... .
Inrlividllal C'ooldng _ .............. _. __ . _ ............................. .
Recipes .. _ ....... 0 _ 4"" 0 0 ............................. .
Infantry Drill Regulations] extracts from:
Company ..................... _. 0 _ ............. 11]
Dofinitions. __ ... ,_., __ . _ ....... " ................. __ ... _ ...... .
Genoral rules for drills and formations .... _ ................... .
Introduction .......... __ . __ .. _ ................ 00 .. _0 __ ... _.0 ... _oO'
Manual of the hayonet ...... , .........
Manual of tent pitching ........ H,
'""
INDEX.
try Drill Regulations, extracts
Irdern, commands., and signals ...................... __ _
chool of the company ................................. .
chool of the soldIer. ......................... _ ..... ..
chool of the squad ...................... _ ............ .
try eq,;,iJ?ment, as;Scmbling ...................... "."
try tralffing pnnclples .............................. ..
lia:
348
Page.
56
88
63
74
30-34
148
oncommissioned officers.............................. 300
ffieers...... ..................... ................... 299
ction:
ompany ........................................... 111,120.
or guard duty, Manual of. (See Guard duty.)
latlOnal Morse code................................... 276
lching tools .......................................... 29,30
(See Field kit; Service kit; Surplus kit.)
governing Army ..... _. _., _. __ . ___ . __ .' . __ . _ ......... 297-316
,f observation........... ................. ............ 171
,f resistance ......... _ ............... '" . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
egs and firings....................................... 83
ty.................................................. 10
gmaps............................................. 271
,I of anns.. .. .... . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. . . 68
tl of the Bayonet. (See Bayonet. Manual of.)
II of Interior Guard Duty. (8ee Guard duty.)
,I of Tent Pitching. (See Tent Pitching, Manual 01.)
bbreviations. ....................................... 272
mtours. ............................................ 263
....... :::.:: ::::::: :::::::::::::::::::::::::
istances.... ............................ ............ 261
:ound fonns... ....................................... 265
ashures.. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 263
"king (sketching) .................................. 131,271
ienting .. __ ......... _ .. _ ... __ . _ ... __ . __ . __ ...... __ . 260
'ading ............................................ 161,258
__ '- ... -:::::: ::: :::::::::: ::::::::::::::::::
'I
/
844 INDEX.

SlgnS . __ 0_ o. __ ______ 0 __ .0. o. 0_' _. ____ ___________ _
:::: :::::: :::::::::: :::: ::: :::::: ::::
Valley .................................. 2(
Vertical intervals ____ ..... _. __ _. ___ .. _., __ . __ . ____ ._. _ ...
Ow ..
Markmanship, preliminary training .... _ ... _ ..... _ ..... _ ......
Message bJa.nks .. ___ ... _________ _ ____ . __ . _ ... _. _0 __ 0.0
Metal fouling-solution for cleaning rine ... _ ...... _ .. _ .. __ . _._
Military courtesy ___ .. __ " _ . ___ .. _ .. ___ . ___ .. _ .... __ .. 0"' _. _ .' __ _._
".MOl'sc, international code. (See General code.)
National anthem .................................. 17,186,2:
Noncommissioned officers:
... ::
Prcced-ence ... _ .... _ ................... _.' ...... .
Rank ................................................. .
Sergeant 'of guard .............. ." ........ _. __ ........ _
Oath of enlistment .................. _. _ .. , .. _ . _ .........
.... _ ......... _ ................. ' . _. _ .. _ .......... .
Observation, line of. (See Line or
Ollieer.:
Insi
b
l1lia ..... '0" __ ...... _ _ _ ........... .
Precedence ........................................... .
Ii-auk ........ _ .... _"' .. __ ........... _ . _. _ .
Orders'
IIo\\" ohpyed __ ... " _ .' ........... _ . __ ...... _ .
. Intantry Drill Regulations ..........................
Orlentlng rnaps' .. " _ .. , __ " _____ .,. _ .... _ .. " __ . _. __ .......
Out.gllards .... _ .... __ .... _' .. '.". __ ." __ .0 0. _0 1
:::::.1
Closc ........................................ 1
Open .................. , ............................ 1
Patrolling ............................................... 1
Patrols:
Advance guard ....................................... 1
Outpost ................... _ ........................ 1
INDEX.
__ ::::::::::::::::: ::::::::::::::::: ::::::
t ........ __ ........................................ .
of advance guard .... ______ ._ ...... 0.0 _ 0. ___
Page.
192
42-46
170
167
leaning ..... __ . __ . _. ___ ........ _ _ ... __ ........ _ _ _ 26
rachee ............................................. 202-209
urn on fixed _ .. _ . ___ __ ................. _.. .. .. .. .. ... 79, 9
f
t) D5
urn on moving ... _ . _ . __ . __ .. ____ ... __ .. _ .. ... . .. . .. 79, 95, 96
::::n of the rvldier _ . _ .. _ ...... _ .......... _ ..... _.. .. . 63
lence:
ollcommiasioncd officers .. _ .......... _ ........ __ ........... 298
meers.................. ..................... ....... 298
pIes of Infa.ntry training _ .. ___ ................................ _ . 14S
.ers ................................................ 211-244
'es o.f the guard.... ....... ... ................ ........ 228
estImators .... _ ........... _0 _ ... _ .. _ ............. _." _ ...... 107
oncommissioned officers ___ ......... _ . _ ..... _.. . .. .. .. .. . .. . . .. .. 298
IIicers. ........... .................................... 298
firing...... ....... .......... ....... ................ J98

:::::::::::::::: 29.
____ ................... _ _ ....... __ ....... __ ,10
)rage_ . __ ....... _ .. ... * .... _ ... _ ........... ___ __ ....... _.. 40
:::::: :::: :::::::::: ::::::: ::::: ::::::
Ig maps ........................................... 161,258
uards................................................ 168
LtiOns, Army......................................... 297
Ltions, Drill, all arms................................ 298
Llions, Field Service................................ 298
Ltions Governing Army .............. '" ........... 297,298
ing the old guard .................. ___ __ ......... 255
'e:
'advance guard ............ _ __ ___ _____ '" 167
'outpost .................................... " ... __ ._ 170
INDEX.
347
;''"1: Page.
............................ , ....... ,...... 189
3attle sight ................................... 48,189,192
)pen sight.. ........................................ 191
>ccp sil(ht. ...................... ,.... ........ 192
of sight cOfl'ections..................... .......... 191
L"ljng, general instructions................................ 275
,1 flags ................................................ 61,62
Js:
... _ .... _._ ........ _ ..... _ ... _ .. _ ... _._............. 59
luglc..... ............................... ............. 58
111 sight ....... __ .......... 0_"""" _. _ _. _............. 166
('iring line and reser-v'c ........................ _ ................................. 62,
i'lJg ............ _ .. ____ o. 0_ .......... 0" .0. ___ .......... _ 278,282
1ther signals .............................. ,. .......... lUG
;ollnd ...... -. .. .. .. .. ............ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 282
co\"er.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16G
arm ..................................................... 62) 280) 281) 2S2
I'histle .............................................. ,. 58
Vig-\vag .................... _ ... __ ..... _ .. __ ..... _ ................. _ _ 2iS
'hing ___ .00 _ _ .0_ 0. __ 0 _ __ 0 _0 -161
J
271
8 on rnaps ...... __ ... o _ ._00 __ '. _ _.' _ " _. 26-1
.-arms firing course. _ 0 .0_ 0 _. ___ __ .0 _ _. _" Em
' .......... , __ .' ........ .............................. 47
soluHan for cleaning rifle............................. 24
',e. school of:
)uties of instructor. _ .. 0'. _. _ __ _. _. __ 0 0
.. _- ______ ::::::::::::::::::::::::::
nstruction without arms. _ ..... _ ... _.'.'" _ .......... _
[anl1al of arms. __ . _ .... 0 0 ____ _ 0 0 _ _
'osition of the soldier on attentioll ....... __ . __ .. _ .. _"_
salllte. ____ ._ ...... __ .0. 0_.0 ___ 0_._'0 _0 _ __ ._
alnte with the hand ................................. .
alute with saber ... __ ................................ .
tep_s and marchings ..... ____ . ___ ._ .. ".0 _ ... _ _. _ ... .
Back step ....................................... .
::: :::::::::: ::::::::::::::
""
00
68--72
03
73
65
14
65
67
G2
66
84S INDEX.
Soldier, school of-Continued.
Steps and maTchings-Continued.
Side step ....................................... ..
The h,,1[ step .................................... .
Tohalt ....................................... ... .
To march by the flank ........................... ..
To march to the rear .. _ ...... _ ...... _ ............. _0"".0 ........ ..
rro mark time. "._ ..................... eO ...... _ ......... _. _,0' .0. 00
::: ::::::: ::::::::::::
The rests ............................................ .
To dismiss the squad ................................. .
Solutions for cleaning rifle._ .. _ ... ___ . eo .. _ .... _ ............ 0 .. _ .. _. __
Squad, school of:
.l1.1ignmcnts ____ .. ___ . _ ... eO .... _ ...... _ ....... _ ... _ ......... .
Instruction. ____ ...... __ . _.0" _ .... _.0.0 .... _0 .. 00. ___ _____ ..
Kneeling and lying down ....... _ .. _ ... __ 0 _0 ....... " ... _.0 ..... _
Loadings.and firings. __ ...... _ .. 0 .... _ 0 0 ........... 00 __ .0
01)servailoll .. __ .. ____ ...... __ .. " _" ... 000 0 _. _ ___ __
'1'110 assembly ......... _ .................................... .
The oblique march ................................... .
1
l
he lIse of cover .............. _ .... _ .. _ ........... _ . __ .
rro cease firing ........... __ ............ _ .........
1'0 deploy as ............. _ ... _ . _ ... _ ......
To fire at wilL ...................................... .
1'0 fire by elip ........................................ .
firo by' 'volley .. 0 ........................ 0 ......... 0'" _.
To follO"\v the corporaL .. :: _ 0", 0 _ __ _ _ ............. _.
rro form squad._ .. 0.0 ............... _ ....... _ _ .......... ..
To increase or diminish intervals ............. 0
'j1o 18ad .. o. 0" 0 .................. 0 ............................... .
To Rei Right ......... __ ...................
To st:J.ck and take arms ....................................... .
To suspend firIng .......... _ 0 o 0 _0_
To ta.ke intervals and distance ............. __ ................ .
:l:o turn on _____ .0_. 0
10 nun on movIng PIVOt. .. _ .. _ ............. _ ..... _ ........ .
'1'0 unload ___ ... __ a. _ ................................... .
StarSpangled. BallIlCL _ ...... _ 17
t
186, 23"
INDEX.
: and marchings ......................................
ms lines on maps _ . __ ._ ........ _ ... _ ... _ ..... _. _ .... _.
stenee. (See Rations.)
ort:
ldvance guard ........... _. _ ................. _ ..... __
)11tPOSl .. __ __ .. __ . ___ _ _ _ -
lIS kit .... ______ . ____ ......... ' . __ . _., _ .. _., ..... __ _
bing so] ntion for cleaning rifle. _ .......... _.' . _ .. __ ._
t practice:
ldvice to riflemen _ ... _. _ ....... _ ...... __ . _____ .. _."
rifle ____ ....... __ .. ____ .. _. __ . _ ...... __ .... ' .
!attlo Sig.11t. ___ .. _. __ . __ ... __ . __ __ .' __ . _. _. _. _ ... .
fhe shot ..... _ .. __ . _'" _. _ ... _ ........ _ .. ' __ ..
'oordination. ___ . _. _ ....... __ .. , __ . _ .. , _ ............ .
'iring positions .. __ .... ___ .......................... ..
'relilillnaJ'Y training in marksnw.nship _ ...... _ . _ ...... _
19ht adjustment .... ___ ... _ .... _. _ ................ ' .
'able of sight corrections _ . _ . _ .. ' .... __ ........... _ .. .
'argets ___ . __ .. _ ....... _ ........................... .
'ho COUTEe in HIllaJl-8.l'Ins fl..:.'il1g . __ __ .. _ . _ ..
'rigger squeeze ............ ___ ........... _ ........ _."
ts ....... _.... _ ................... __ .. _. _ ....... .
Pitching. of:
oni('.a1 ",vall tent.. ....... 0 _. _ ", _ _ _ 0
oldingtcnts ..... __ ... _ .... __ .' ....... _ . _ . _ ....... _.
itch an type Army tents ((-:xcept shelter and conieal
349
Page.
65
263
167
170
29
24
197
191
192
19(1
106
194
189
189
IUJ
199
199
117
US
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :.: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : . i 14, m
leeping .. _ .. ' _ .. _ ....... _ ...... _ ... _ ...... _. __ . lHi
Ll'ikingtents_ ................................. _ .. ll(i,llB
, articles .. _ .............. 0 _ _ _ _ 2U
heR, rifle .... 0. _.'. _ _ _ 00 __ _. 175-178
.. _ ... _ ...... _ .... _ .... __ . __ . _ ... 0.. . .
.rm semaphore code ............................. ' .... _ 280
rmg....... .......................................... 20
are of 2'7,28
::::::: ::::::::::::::::::::::: 2G
ress................................................. 26
350 INDEX.
Unifol"ms-Continued.
Full dress ...........................................
How __ . _ ... _ ... _ ..... __ . __ ...... _ .0 ...... _ 2
. Service. _____ ............. __ ..... __ . __ ................. .
Use of cover._ ....................... __ ...................... .
Valleys on maps ................................. 268
Vertical intervals on maps. __ ... _ ............................... _ .. ..
Visual signaling (see Signals):
: : : : : : : ::: : ::: : :: :::: ::: ::: : : -
Vocabulary-English-French _._ .................. _ ........... _ 317
. .-.-.... ::::::::::::::::::: :::::::::::::
Will, form 10r last will and testament ..... _
\\'indage corrections ............................... _ ................ ..
Wind g.uge ......... ' ' .
o

WWI Army Individual Pay Record Book Owned by Fred Scott

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

WWI Army Individual Pay Record Book Owned by Fred Scott

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

rhe follo

Anda mungkin juga menyukai